Page 1

Panel Components 2015 – 2016


Panel Components The Panel business area offers a wide range of electrical products for use in and on control panels. We are therefore able to offer our customers a single source for many of their control panel components.

Anthony Wrighton (left) – Business Area Manager

The Panel team in training


Introduction Beacons and sounders

2 8

Cable trunking

16

Cam switches

24

Climate control & lighting for enclosures

34

Control relays

52

Counters

58

Current transformers

66

Data recorders

82

Enclosures

88

Flexible busbars

108

GSM, SMS module

116

Logic controllers

122

Nano PLC

136

Panel meters

142

Power network & synchronisation meters

154

Power supplies

160

Pushbuttons & pilot lights

182

Relays

202

RS-485 network modules

218

Signal towers

224

Solid state interface relays

230

Solid state relays

240

Switch disconnectors

252

Temperature controllers

262

Terminals

284

Time switches

354

Timers

362

Transducers

374


Excellence in OEM Automatic UK markets and sells components for industrial automation, currently representing approximately 50 leading suppliers and acting as their local sales organisation in the UK. Customers come from all sectors of industrial automation and include machine builders, control panel builders, system integrators and selected strategic distributors. Value added link OEM offers a unique and extensive range of products from leading manufacturers

Supplier Together with an efficient logistics process and added value workshop, we help customers reduce the number of their suppliers. In order to support our sales process we have a local team of product specialists and sales/ marketing staff. This means we offer a high level of service to our customers. To become a competent and effective partner to our customers we have divided our product range into specialised business areas. In this way we combine the

Customer advantage of being specialised in small areas with the benefits of being part of a large organisation. Being a partner with OEM Automatic means you have access to our unique broad product range but in a specialised organisation. With our ability to see the whole value chain and total costs we aim to improve your competitive advantage and profitability. Our ambition is to make it easier for you to find the best and most cost-efficient solutions.

Specialised organisation 4 business areas – 1 partner

Panel

Machine & Safety

Electrical components for inside and outside control panels

Sensors, encoders, cable systems and machine safety components

2 | INTRODUCTION

Pressure & Flow

Motors

To measure and control pressure, AC/DC motors, geared motors, flow and level of liquids and gases electronic drives and linear solutions


Automation A strategic partnership OEM Automatic UK is a part of the OEM International group whose headquarters are in Tranas, Sweden. The companies within this group are leading suppliers of components and systems for industrial automation in the Nordic region, UK and Eastern Europe. FACTS: OEM Automatic UK • • • •

Founded in 1989 Turnover 2014 approx £10M More than 2000 customers More than 50 suppliers

Turku

Drammen

Parnu

Tranas Riga

Panevezys

Allerød

Leicester Warsaw

Prague Trnava

Budapest

Richard Armstrong – Managing Director INTRODUCTION

|3


Always close to Our head office and stock is located in Whetstone just south of Leicester so we are in an ideal central location to be as close as possible to our customers. Each of our sales engineers works with a limited range of products and this enables them to become experts in their field. They are available to visit customers at short notice to discuss and advise on technical or commercial issues. Competent sales and product staff

Customer support

Because of our specialised business areas all of our sales staff are experts in their particular field. This enables them to really understand the products and applications and assist customers on site with selecting the right product. A program of training with our suppliers runs throughout the year so they are always updated with the latest innovations and product knowledge. Our product specialists and product managers have the deepest knowledge of the products and are responsible for product range development and day to day contact with our suppliers. They also provide technical support for sales and customer support staff.

Our customer support team are there to offer a fast and efficient service to our customers when placing orders, checking delivery times/order status etc. They are in close contact with our product specialists who can answer technical queries and application specific questions. Product returns are handled in the customer support team and we aim to respond with actions within 3 days.

Efficient logistics Our warehouse in Whetstone aims to despatch all orders the same day if received before 16.30. Our warehouse personnel are responsible for despatching more than 25,000 orders per year and we are proud of our ability to get products to our customers safely and on time. We currently hold more than 8000 articles in stock so our customers can get standard products delivered the next day.

We are available from 08.30 until 17.00 Phone: 0116 2849900 Email: orders@uk.oem.se Fax: 0116 2841721 Web: www.oem.co.uk

Product information At www.oem.co.uk you will find full and detailed product information in our on-line catalogue. From this you have all the technical information and ordering codes and you can download PDF files if you wish. To support the information on the website each business area produces its own printed catalogue which is available on request. Three times per year we publish our customer magazine ‘Inside Automation’ which we mail to more than 15,000 contacts. This contains new product information, special offers and company news.

All orders received before 16.30 will be despatched same day

4 | INTRODUCTION


the customer issue 2 2014

Linear guides from stock pages 6 & 7

issue 3 2013

New fuse terminals from Contaclip page 5

High Omni-fin; power low stud flow terminals covered! page 8 9

Ă˜40mm signal tower

Product catalogues and brochures Each business area has its own dedicated product catalogue and brochures containing full technical information - an effective tool for our sales team and a helpful guide for you. Pages can be downloaded from our website: www.oem.co.uk

page 11

The NEW XC-Series worm geared motors page 11

High speed barcode reading page 7

Customer magazine Issued three times a year Inside Automation features the latest products and is focused on technical articles and applications.

Clear marketing communication Our trade magazine adverts and advertorials make product selection easy and is an effective aid to sales. The information alerts you to our new and current range.

INTRODUCTION

|5


Added value Often we can provide our customers with a little bit extra in addition to our standard off the shelf product. We call this service ‘Added Value’ and below are just a few examples: • Custom engraved legend plates • Cam switch assembly • DIN rail terminal assemblies • ‘Kits’ of parts bagged or boxed and labelled with customers own reference number • Pre-drilled enclosures • Custom printed terminal markers; cable markers; device and installation markers

6 | INTRODUCTION


Our suppliers Complete range of visual and audible signalling equipment from signal towers to EX telephones

Control & signalling devices including pushbuttons, cam switches and switch disconnectors

Innovative connection technology from DIN rail terminals to cable management products plus a full range of electronic devices

• Est. 1910 • Located in Vienna, Austria

• Est. 1924 • Located in Strasbourg, France • 10 year guarantee on all products

Automation control products including timers, control relays, counters & logic controllers and nano PLC’s

Market leading manufacturer of a complete range of solid state relays in all forms

• Est. 1921 • Located in Valance, France

• 40 yrs experience • Worldwide distributors • Manufacture in Mexico

• 30 yrs experience • Located Nummela, Finland

Complete range of high performance enclosing solutions in plastic, GRP, steel & stainless steel

Specialist manufacturer of counting devices and process control technology

A global manufacturer of industrial and power protection devices

• Est. 1958 • Located in Porvoo, Finland

• Est 1958 • Located in Schwenningen, Germany

Manufacturer of electrical measuring and control devices including transducers, meters, controllers and recorders

Leading manufacturer of DIN rail mount power supplies that are at the forefront of technology

Fully featured range of industrial plug in relays, sockets and accessories

• Est. 1953 • Located in Zielona Gora, Poland

• Est. 1980 • Located in Munich, Germany

• Est. 1962 • Manufacture in Madrid, Spain

Manufacturer of flexible copper busbars & earth braids

Market leading manufacturer of thermal management products for enclosures and control cabinets

Complete range of advanced temperature and process controllers across 3 different brands

• Located in Germany

• 30 years experience • Located in Germany

• 90 years experience • Located in Brighton, UK • Part of the Danaher Corporation

• Est. 1977 • Located in Hovelhof, Germany

Solid state interface relays with unique features that offer exceptional performance in tough industrial applications

• Est. 1904 • Located in Limoges, France • Worldwide distributors

INTRODUCTION

|7


BEACONS AND SOUNDERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


I series panel mount beacons

10

Q series surface mount beacons

11

G series surface mount beacons

12

E series visual/audible signalling

13

A series visual/audible signalling

14

CS1 visual/audible signalling

14

A series audible signalling

15

HPT/HTG audible signalling

16

E series panel mount buzzers

17


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

I series panel mount beacons • • • • •

IBL-IBM-IBS LED steady / flashing beacons ITL-ITM-ITS LED dual colour beacons Versatile panel mount beacon series Ø65, Ø45 & Ø30mm diameter Maintenance free – long lifetime

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

IBL

IBM

IBS

Type

ITL

ITM

ITS

Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Housing grey

Housing black

12 V AC/DC

80 mA

802 10C 404

802 50C 404

24 V AC/DC

60 mA

802 10C 405

802 50C 405

110/120 V AC

30 mA

802 10C 310

802 50C 310

230/240 V AC

31 mA

802 10C 313

802 50C 313

12 V AC/DC

62 mA

801 10C 404

801 50C 404

24 V AC/DC

37 mA

801 10C 405

801 50C 405

110/120 V AC

30 mA

801 10C 310

801 50C 310

230/240 V AC

30 mA

801 10C 313

801 50C 313

12 V AC/DC

45 mA

800 10C 404

800 50C 404

24 V AC/DC

26 mA

800 10C 405

800 50C 405

110/120 V AC

18 mA

800 10C 310

800 50C 310

230/240 V AC

19 mA

800 10C 313

800 50C 313

Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Housing grey

Housing black

24 V AC/DC

44 mA

802 3CC 405

802 7CC 405

110/120 V AC

41 mA

802 3CC 310

802 7CC 310

230/240 V AC

41 mA

802 3CC 313

802 7CC 313

24 V AC/DC

39 mA

801 3CC 405w

801 7CC 405

110/120 V AC

35 mA

801 3CC 310

801 7CC 310

230/240 V AC

34 mA

801 3CC 313

801 7CC 313

24 V AC/DC

30 mA

800 3CC 405

800 7CC 405

Accessories

Order number

Adapter M30.5mm

812 500 900

Fastening tool for 30 mm M22 panel mount products

812 400 900

C = colour code, 1=amber, 2=red, 4=transparent, 5=blue, 6=green, 7=yellow NOTE: when beacon is correctly mounted (rear orientation notch is on top position), the first colour code C defines the colour in the upper beacon half and the second colour C defines the colour in the lower beacon half.

10 | BEACONS

AND SOUNDERS

www.oem.co.uk


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

Q series surface mount beacons • LED steady / flashing beacon • Long lifetime, low current consumption & vibration proof • Suitable for process control, fire/gas alarm and marine applications • Versatile installation and mounting options

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

Description

LED steady/flashing beacon

QDS

Size 1 = Ø94mm

Light source

Nominal voltage

Voltage range

Nominal current

Order number

24 V AC/DC

+/- 10%

0.110

874 16C 405

48 V AC/DC

+/- 10%

0.065

874 16C 408

110/120 V AC

+/- 10%

0.060

874 16C 310

+/- 10%

0.060

874 16C 313

Max. 0.3

874 26C 408

Max. 0.7

874 26C 413

Max. 0.780

874 76C 408

Max. 0.210

874 76C 413

Max. 0.780

874 36C 408

Max. 0.210

874 36C 413

Max. 1.800

874 46C 408

Max. 0.350

874 46C 413

Max. 1.700

874 86C 408

Max. 0.400

874 86C 413

LED 10 Cd

230/240 V AC LED steady/flashing beacon

QDM

Size 2 = Ø132mm

LED multi strobe beacon

QBL

Size 3 = Ø184mm

LED steady/flashing beacon

QDL

Size 3 = Ø184mm

LED steady/flashing beacon

QDX

Size 3 = Ø184mm

LED multi strobe beacon

QBX

Size 4

= Ø228mm

24/48 V AC/DC

LED 10 Cd

110/240 V AC 24/48 V AC/DC

LED 250 Cd

110/240 V AC/DC 24/48 V AC/DC

LED 170 Cd

110/240 V AC/DC 24/48 V AC/DC

LED 300 Cd

110/240 V AC/DC 24/48 V AC/DC

LED 400 Cd

110/240 V AC/DC

16-60 V DC 16-53 V AC 80-265 V AC/DC 18-60 V DC 18-53 V AC 80-265 V AC/DC 18-60 V DC 18-53 V AC 80-265 V AC/DC 18-60 V DC 18-53 V AC 80-265 V AC/DC 18-60 V DC 18-53 V AC 80-265 V AC/DC

C =colour code, 1=amber, 2=red, 4=transparent, 5=blue, 6=green, 7=yellow

Accessories Type

Description

AMK

Mounting kit for combinations of multi tonee alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 010 900

AKV

Cable gland M20 x 1.5 For multi tone alarm sounders for A and/or Q

698 800 026

AG1

Flat gasket for size 1 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 021 900

AG2

Flat gasket for size 2 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 022 900

AG3

Flat gasket for size 3 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 023 900

AG4

Flat gasket for size 4 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 024 900

AB1

Metal bracket kit for size 1 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 031 900

AB2

Metal bracket kit for size 2 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 032 900

AB3

Metal bracket kit for size 3 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 033 900

AB4

Metal bracket kit for size 4 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 034 900

0116 284 9900

Order number

BEACONS AND SOUNDERS

| 11


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

G series surface mount beacons • • • • •

LED steady / flashing beacon Ø120 mm lens diameter Wide voltage range Shock and vibration proof Maintenance free For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

WLG

BKG

Denomination

Steady beacon

Flashing beacon

Light source

25 W bulb

25 W bulb

Nominal voltage V

Voltage range V

Nominal voltage A

Housing black

822 10C 900

822 50C 900

12 V AC/DC

832 10C 404

832 50C 404

24 V AC/DC

832 10C 405

832 50C 405

110/120 V AC

832 10C 310

832 50C 310

up to 250 V AC/DC

+/-10%

230/240 V AC

FLG

DLG

BLG

12 | BEACONS

Strobe beacon Xenon strobe

LED steady beacon

LED flashing beacon

AND SOUNDERS

5 J xenon tube

48 LEDs

48 LEDs

Order number Housing grey

832 10C 313

832 50C 313

12 V AC/DC

0.7

842 14C 404

842 54C 404

24 V AC/DC

0.32

842 14C 405

842 54C 405

110/120 V AC

0.2

842 13C 310

842 53C 310

230/240 V AC

0.1

842 13C 313

842 53C 313

24 V AC/DC

17-32 V DC

0.11

827 10C 405

827 50C 405

48 V AC/DC

34-62 V DC

0.085

827 10C 408

827 50C 408

110/120 V AC

0.06

827 10C 310

827 50C 350

230/240 V AC

0.06

827 10C 313

827 50C 313

24 V AC/DC

14-28 V DC

0.11

807 10C 405

807 50C 405

48 V AC/DC

30-52 V DC

0.085

807 10C 408

807 50C 408

110/120 V AC

0.06

807 10C 310

807 50C 310

230/240 V AC

0.06

807 10C 313

807 50C 313

www.oem.co.uk


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

E series visual/audible signalling • • • •

Universal panel mount buzzer with LED control light Ø65 mm – Ø45 mm diameter High brightness, maintenance free For mounting in 22.5 mm and 30.5 mm bore holes (with adapter) For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

Description

Nominal voltage

Nominal current (mA)

Grey housing

Black housing

12 V AC/DC

73

814 11C 404

814 51C 404

24V AC/DC

47

814 11C 405

814 51C 405

110/120 V AC

60

814 11C 310

814 51C 310

230/240 V AC

63

814 11C 313

814 51C 313

12 V AC/DC

35

813 11C 404

813 51C 404

24V AC/DC

58

813 11C 405

813 51C 405

110/120 V AC

42

813 11C 310

813 51C 310

230/240 V AC

40

813 11C 313

813 51C 313

12 V AC/DC

62

814 12C 404

814 51C 404

24V AC/DC

95

814 12C 405

814 51C 405

110/120 V AC

52

814 12C 310

814 51C 310

Panel mount buzzer LED control light EDG - EDM

230/240 V AC

52

814 12C 313

814 51C 313

tone and light separately switchable

12 V AC/DC

48

813 12C 404

813 51C 404

ELG

Panel mount buzzer LED control light ELG - ELM tone and light synchronised

ELM

EDG

EDM

24V AC/DC

73

813 12C 405

813 51C 405

110/120 V AC

51

813 12C 310

813 51C 310

230/240 V AC

51

813 12C 313

813 51C 313

Accessories

Order number

Adapter M30.5

812 500 900

Voltage range: nominal voltage +/- 10% C =colour code, 1=amber, 2=red, 4=transparent, 5=blue, 6=green, 7=yellow

0116 284 9900

BEACONS AND SOUNDERS

| 13


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

A series visual/audible signalling • Tone and light separately switchable • Optional customized tones / tone tables upon request For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

Description Multi-tone alarm sounder Ø94mm

ADS-P

ADS-T

with LED steady indicator 8 tones

Multi-tone alarm sounder Ø94mm with LED steady/flashing indicator 32 tones

Max sound pressure (dB A)

103

108

Nominal voltage

Voltage range

Nominal current (mA)

Order number

24 V DC

+/- 10%

0.12

875 06C 405

110/120 V AC

+/- 10%

0.065

875 06C 310

230/240 V AC

+/- 10%

0.0665

875 06C 313

24 V DC

+/- 10%

0.160

875 16C 405

110/120 V AC

+/- 10%

0.005

875 16C 310

230/240 V AC

+/- 10%

0.025

875 16C 313

C =colour code, 1=amber, 2=red, 4=transparent, 5=blue, 6=green, 7=yellow

Accessories Type

Description

AMK

Mounting kit for combinations of multi tonee alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

Order number 874 010 900

AKV

Cable gland M20 x 1.5 For multi tone alarm sounders for A and/or Q

698 800 026

AG1

Flat gasket for size 1 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 021 900

AB1

Metal bracket kit for size 1 multi-tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 031 900

CS1 – visual/audible signalling

• • • • • •

Cost effective LED flashing beacon with multitone siren 32 tones Tone type and volume selectable Low nominal current (11-37 mA) Quick fit installation by bayonet fixing Lateral cable entry possible For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type CS1

Nominal voltage 24 V DC

Nominal current (mA) 11 - 37

Voltage range (V) 18 - 35

Order number Housing red

Housing white

C111 62C 005

C11122C 005

C =colour code, 1=amber, 2=red, 4=clear, 5=blue

14 | BEACONS

AND SOUNDERS

www.oem.co.uk


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

A series – audible signalling • • • •

Comprehensive range of standard to high output alarm Versatile installation and mounting options Optional/customised tones/tone tables upon request Fit for plc applications (leakage, inrush current)

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

ASS-P

ASS-T

ASM

ASL

ASX

Description

Multi tone alarm sounder size 1, 8 tones

Multi tone alarm sounder size 1, 32 tones

Multi tone alarm sounder size 2, 32 tones

Multi tone alarm sounder size 3, 63 tones

Multi tone alarm sounder size 4, 63 tones

Max. sound pressure (dB A)

103

108

113

120

127

Nominal voltage

Voltage range

Nominal current (mA)

Order no. Housing red

24 V AC/DC

+/-10%

0.100

874 060 405

48 V AC/DC

+/-10%

0.075

874 060 408

110/120 V AC

+/-10%

0.040

874 060 310

230/240 V AC

+/-10%

0.040

874 060 313

24 V AC/DC

+/-10%

0.120

874 160 405

48 V AC/DC

+/-10%

0.090

874 160 408

110/120 V AC

+/-10%

0.042

874 160 310

230/240 V AC

+/-10%

0.022

874 160 313

24 V AC/DC

+/-10%

0.120

874 260 405

48 V AC/DC

+/-10%

0.090

874 260 408

110/120 V AC

+/-10%

0.042

874 260 310

230/240 V AC

+/-10%

0.022

874 260 313

24 V AC/DC

+/-10%

1.050

874 360 408

110/120 V AC

+/-10%

0.170

874 360 310

230/240 V AC

+/-10%

0.085

874 360 313

24-48 V AC/DC

+/-10%

2.000

874 460 408

110/120 V AC

+/-10%

0.350

874 460 310

230/240 V AC

+/-10%

0.170

874 460 313

Accessories Type

Denomination

Order number

AMK

Mounting kit for combinations of multi tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 010 900

AG4

Flat gasket for size 4 multi tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 024 900

AB4

Metal bracket kit for size 4 multi tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

874 034 900

AKV

Cable gland M20 x 1.5 for multi tone alarm sounders A and/or beacons Q

698 800 026

0116 284 9900

BEACONS AND SOUNDERS

| 15


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

HPT/HTG – audible signalling • Loud, well designed and robust electro-mechanical signal horns • Aluminium die-cast or impact resistant synthetic housing • Special models with telephone call current relay (HPT-R, HTG-R) • Large options voltages • HTG-L: special model with RILSAN-coating against galvanic corrosion version for vessels, seawater resistant etc.) For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

Nominal voltage

Nominal current (A)

Order number

Nominal current (A)

Order number

6 V AC

4.5

712 100 103

6 V AC

4.5

713 100 103

12 V AC

2.00

712 100 104

12 V AC

2.00

713 100 104

24 V AC

1.20

712 100 105

24 V AC

1.20

713 100 105

42 V DC

0.60

712 100 107

42 V DC

0.60

713 100 107

0.50

712 100 108

48 V AC

0.50

713 100 108

48 V AC

HPT

Hz

50

Nominal voltage

Hz

50

60 V AC

0.40

712 100 109

60 V AC

0.40

713 100 109

110 V AC

0.20

712 100 110

110 V AC

0.20

713 100 110

230 V AC

0.10

712 100 113

230 V AC

0.10

713 100 113

0.20

712 100 211

0.20

713 100 211

240 V AC

0.11

712 100 213

240 V AC

0.11

713 100 213

12 V DC

1.00

712 100 004

12 V DC

1.00

713 100 004

24 V DC

0.60

712 100 005

24 V DC

0.60

713 100 005

48 V DC

0.50

712 100 008

48 V DC

0.50

713 100 008

60 V DC

0.25

712 100 009

60 V DC

0.25

713 100 009

110 V DC

0.20

712 100 010

110 V DC

0.20

713 100 010

220 V DC

0.10

712 100 113

220 V DC

0.10

713 100 113

120 V AC

60

Models with telephone call current relay HPT-R

Type

HTG

120 V AC

60

Models with telephone call current relay

230 V AC

50

0.10

712 102 113

240 V AC

60

0.11

712 102 213

HTG-R

230 V AC

50

0.10

713 102 113

220 V DC

60

0.08

713 102 213

Models with RIL SAN-coating: Membrane galvanised and epoxy powder coated, screws A4 with solation and rubber washers for mounting avoiding galvanic corrosion, additional membrane sealing 110 V AC

HTG-L

16 | BEACONS

AND SOUNDERS

50

0.20

713 150 110

120 V AC

0.20

713 150 111

230 V AC

0.10

713 150 113

0.20

713 150 211

240 V AC

120 V AC

60

0.11

713 150 214

24 V AC

0.60

713 150 005

www.oem.co.uk


Beacons and sounders S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

E series – panel mount buzzers • • • •

High volume universal panel mount buzzers Ø65, Ø45, Ø30 mm diameter 3 well distinguishable tones selectable via terminal (ESG) Volume infinitely adjustable also in panel mount condition (ESG, ESM) • Wide voltage range • For mounting in 22.5 mm or 30.5 mm diameter holes (with adapter)

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m.c o.uk

Type

ESG

ESM

ESK

ESV

Description

Ø65

Ø45

Ø30

Ø30

Nominal voltage

Voltage range

Nominal current (mA)

Grey housing

Black housing

12-24 V AC/DC

8-24 V AC/DC

57

814 100 405

814 500 405

110/120 V AC

75-140 V AC

42

814 100 310

814 500 310

230/240 V AC

150-260 V AC

44

814 100 313

814 500 313

12-24 V AC/DC

8-24 V AC/DC

19

813 100 405

813 500 405

110/120 V AC

75-140 V AC

42

813 100 310

813 500 310 813 500 313

230/240 V AC

150-260 V AC

40

813 100 313

12-24 V AC/DC

10-24 V AC/DC

46

812 100 405

812 500 405

110/120 V AC

75-140 V AC

17

812 100 310

812 500 310

230/240 V AC

150-260 V AC

20

812 100 313

812 500 313

12-24 V AC/DC

10-24 V AC/DC

46

812 110 405

812 510 405

110/120 V AC

75-140 V AC

17

812 110 310

812 510 310

230/240 V AC

150-260 V AC

20

812 110 313

812 510 313

Accessories

Order number

Adapter M30.5mm

812 500 900

Fastening tool for 30 mm M22 panel mount products

812 400 900

0116 284 9900

BEACONS AND SOUNDERS

| 17


CABLE TRUNKING

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Advantages

20

Cable trunking VK

21

Halogen-free cable trunking VK-HF

21

Accessories

22

Cable trunking cutter

23

Dimensional drawings

23


Cable trunking

Advantages CONTA-CLIP offers a wide range of cable trunking for a variety of different installation applications. The trunking has excellent dimensional stability. They also feature tight fitting covers which are easy to snap on and off. The pegs have pre-determined breakage points so that the cable trunking can easily be modified for your cabling. They are available in various sizes and in a halogen-free version. • Material: Rigid lead-free PVC, flame retardant, in accordance with UL 94 V-0, • Self-extinguishing • Thermal stability: -20° C to +60° C. • Colour: grey (RAL 7030) • Delivered length: 2m, with cover • Customized lengths: on request • 90° cover contour • Colour: grey (RAL 7030)

Halogen-free cable trunking Halogen-free cable trunking is often installed in sensitive areas and public buildings such as in airports, railway stations, office buildings, high-rise buildings and hospitals. The halogen-free plastic used by CONTA CLIP is compliant with VDE 0472 part 815 and generates no toxic gases when burned. Thus it meets the special requirements for these applications. The pegs and the base have pre-determined breakage points so that the cable trunking can easily be modified for your cabling. Material: Halogen-free plastic in accordance with VDE 0472, part 815. No toxic gases in event of fire. Fulfils the requirements in F2 and I3 of the NF F 16-101 Railway Standards. (RAL 7035)

Optimally fitted cover is easy to put on and take off

Stamped out with no burrs so the installer cannot be injured and the cable cannot be damaged

Pre-determined breakage points on the pegs 20 | CABLE TRUNKING

www.oem.co.uk


Cable trunking

Cable trunking VK

Cable trunking VK • Material: Rigid lead-free PVC, flame retardant, in accordance with UL 94 V-0, • Self-extinguishing • Thermal stability: -20° C to +60° C. • 90° cover contour • Colour: grey (RAL 7030)

VK Order number

Pack Qty (m)

Nom. size (W x H mm)

Internal size (W x H mm)

17800.6

64

30 x 30

27 x 27

17801.6

68

25 x 40

22 x 37

17802.6

52

40 x 40

37 x 37

17803.6

40

60 x 40

56 x 37

17804.6

52

30 x 60

26 x 56

17805.6

48

40 x 60

36 x 56

17806.6

36

60 x 60

56 x 56

17807.6

30

80 x 60

76 x 56

17808.6

22

100 x 60

96 x 56

17809.6

20

120 x 60

115 x 56

17810.6

44

30 x 80

26 x 76

17811.6

40

40 x 80

36 x 76

17812.6

30

60 x 80

56 x 76

17813.6

24

80 x 80

76 x 76

VK Cover Order number

Pack Qty (m)

Nom. size (W x H mm)

Internal size (W x H mm)

Covers only

17814.6

22

100 x 80

96 x 76

17830.6

10

25

22

17815.6

16

120 x 80

115 x 76

17831.6

10

30

27

17816.6

32

25 x 100

22 x 96

17832.6

10

40

36

17817.6

24

40 x 100

36 x 96

17833.6

10

60

56

17818.6

28

60 x 100

56 x 96

17834.6

10

80

76

17819.6

20

80 x 100

76 x 96

17835.6

10

100

96

17820.6

16

100 x 100

96 x 96

17836.6

10

120

115

17821.6

8

150 x 100

145 x 96

17837.6

10

150

154

Halogen-free cable trunking VK-HF Cable trunking VK-HF • Material: Halogen-free plastic in accordance with VDE 0472, part 815 • No toxic gases in event of fire • Thermal stability: -25° C to +70° C. • 90° cover contour • Wire retaining lugs, starting with 60 mm height • Colour: grey (RAL 7035)

VK-HF Order number

Pack Qty (m)

Nom. size (W x H mm)

Internal size (W x H mm)

17840.6

64

30 x 30

27 x 27

17841.6

68

25 x 40

22 x 37

17843.6

40

60 x 40

56 x 37

17844.6

60

25 x 60

22 x 56

17845.6

48

40 x 60

36 x 56

17846.6

36

60 x 60

56 x 56

17847.6

32

80 x 60

76 x 56

17850.6

56

25 x 80

22 x 76

17851.6

40

40 x 80

36 x 76

VK-HF Cover Order number

Pack Qty (m)

Nom. size (W x H mm)

Internal size (W x H mm)

17852.6

36

60 x 80

56 x 76

17870.6

10

25

22

17853.6

24

80 x 80

76 x 76

17871.6

10

30

27

17854.6

24

100 x 80

96 x 76

17872.6

10

40

36

17857.6

24

40 x 100

36 x 96

17873.6

10

60

56

17858.6

32

60 x 100

56 x 96

17874.6

10

80

76

17860.6

10

100 x 100

96 x 100

17875.6

10

100

96

0116 284 9900

Covers only

CABLE TRUNKING

| 21


Cable trunking

Accessories Order guide

Versatile halogen-free cable trunking VK-FLEX-HF

Material: PP, halogen-free, flame retardant, in accordance with UL 94 V-0 Temperature range: -20°C to +70°C, self-adhesive Spiral tubing VK-SS

Order number

Pack Qty

Length (m)

Diameter (mm)

17880.6

100

0.5

10

17881.6

60

0.5

20

17882.6

36

0.5

30

17883.6

24

0.5

40

17885.0

30

30

4

17886.0

30

30

9

17887.0

30

30

16

Order number

Pack Qty

Accessories for

17889.0

400

VK, VK-HF

Order number

Pack Qty

Accessories for

17891.6

100

VK, VK-HF

Order number

Pack Qty

Accessories for

17892.6

50

VK-HF

Order number

Pack Qty

Diameter (mm)

Hole Ø req’d (mm)

17896.4

4000

3.5

3.5

17897.4

4000

5

5.2

17898.4

4000

6

6.2

17899.4

2000

6.5

6.5

Qty

Length (mm)

Weight (g)

1

255

153

Qty

Length (mm)

Weight (g)

1

2455

258

Material: PE, RoHS compliant. Temperature range: -50°C to +85°C Standard wire holder

Material: PS, RoHS compliant. Temperature range: -20°C to +60°C Retaining tab VK-HZ

Material: PS, RoHS compliant. Temperature range: -20°C to +60°C Wire and partitioning peg holder

Material: PS, RoHS compliant. Temperature range: -20°C to +60°C Expanding rivets SN-PA

Material: PA, RoHS compliant. Temperature range: -20°C to +60°C Setting tool SN-SW

Order number 17895.0

Notching pliers VK-AKZ

Order number 17894.0

22 | CABLE TRUNKING

www.oem.co.uk


Cable trunking

Cable trunking cutter The VKS cable trunking cutter is a tool that can cut trunking of up to 125 mm in width. The tool can be attached to a work bench or mounted at a workstation.

Features: • 90° precise-angle cutting • Quick, quiet and burr-free cutting • Minimal force needed for the cut • Maintenance-free

Cable trunking cutter VK-S Order number

Lever length (mm)

Length limit

Weight (kg)

Wall thickness (mm)

Channel width (mm)

500

1000 mm

9.1

2.5

125

3897.0

Accessories/replacements VK-S/EM Order number 3899.0

Replacement blade

Base holes (DIN)

Dimensional drawings VK Height | side profile

25 mm | 30 mm

40 mm

60 mm

80 mm

100 mm

Dimensional drawings VK-HF

from 80 mm

up to 60 mm

Base holes (DIN)

Height | side profile

25 mm | 30 mm

0116 284 9900

40 mm

60 mm

80 mm

100 mm

from 80 mm

up to 60 mm

CABLE TRUNKING

| 23


CAM SWITCHES

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


General information

26

Miniature cam switch 10 A

27

PR12, 20 A

29

Technical information

32

Accessories

33


Cam switches

General information

Functional and attractive design Our most common cam switch series PR12 is for currents up to 20 A and is a compact switch with a number of technical and practical benefits. More detailed information is provided below.

Dust-tight contacts Dust-tight contacts that do not separate if the cams are changed. Protective flashing with lifts and ± screw. Open terminals upon delivery.

Options for front Three different screw mounting options with 48 x 48 mm legend plate and short handle in standard execution. Also available in 64 x 64 or 72 x 72 mm legend and large handle or pistol grip.

Dual springs Distinct positions thanks to dual position springs.

Hole pattern alternatives, screw assembly Screw assembly
PR12 always supplied with Alt. 1 as standard with options to have Alt. 2 & Alt. 3 if required

One-hole mount (Ø22.5 mm) with 48 x 48 mm legend and short handle as standard. Also available with selector switch handle or key switch head.

Alt. 1

Alt. 2

Alt. 3

Our technical department can build and deliver customer-unique cam switches within 24 hours. 26 | CAM SWITCHES

www.oem.co.uk


Cam switches

Miniature cam switch 10 A

TECHNICAL DATA

Rated isolation voltage (Ith)

• Compact size • Breaks up to 10 A • Easy to install, one-hole mount, Ø22.5 mm or Ø16 mm • IP65 The miniature cam switch is a small compact circuit-breaker designed to fit in small spaces, with requirements for high breaking capacity. The miniature cam switch can break up to 10 A. Installation is simple due to one-hole mounting - fits

1pole 2 pole 3pole

1-2 3-4 7-8 5-6 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 19-20

0116 284 9900

1 X

2

3

X

Connection & links

Legend

10 A

Thermal rated current (AC15)

2.5 A

Rated power AC3 (kW)

3 x 230 V

1.8 kW

3 x 380 V

2.2 kW

Max. cable area

both Ø16 mm or Ø22 mm. The terminal screws are mounted at a 45° angle, which facilitates connection of cables after the circuit-breaker is installed. Delivered complete with handle & legend.

Function (x indicates contact closed)

500 V

Thermal rated current (AC21)

2x1.5 mm²

Enclosure class on front

IP65

Operating temperature

-20 °C to +50 °C

Approval

EN 60947-1, EN 60947-3, EN 60947-5-1, UL508

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order no.

Description

223501

Miniature cam switch 1-pole 0-1 A4

223502

Miniature cam switch 2-pole 0-1 A4

223503

Miniature cam switch 3-pole 0-1 A4

223504

Miniature cam switch 4-pole 0-1 A4

223505

Miniature cam switch 1-pole 1-0-2 C8

223506

Miniature cam switch 2-pole 1-0-2 C8

223507

Miniature cam switch 3-pole 1-0-2 C8

223508

Miniature cam switch 4-pole 1-0-2 C8

223511

Miniature cam switch 1-pole 1-2 D4

223512

Miniature cam switch 2-pole 1-2 D4

223513

Miniature cam switch 3-pole 1-2 D4

223514

Miniature cam switch 4-pole 1-2 D4

223515

Miniature cam switch1-pole 1-2-3 A4

223516

Miniature cam switch 2-pole 1-2-3 A4

223517

Miniature cam switch 3-pole 1-2-3 A4

X X X X X X X

CAM SWITCHES

| 27


Cam switches

Miniature cam switch 10 A

1pole 2 pole 3pole

Function (x indicates contact closed)

0

2

1 X

1-2 3-4

3

X

Connection & links

Legend

Order no.

Description

223521

Miniature cam switch 1-pole 0-1-2-3 A4

223522

Miniature cam switch 2-pole 0-1-2-3 A4

223523

Miniature cam switch 3-pole 0-1-2-3 A4

223525

Miniature cam switch 1-pole 1-2-3-4 A4

223526

Miniature cam switch 2-pole 1-2-3-4 A4

223527

Miniature cam switch, Voltmeter switch

223528

Miniature cam switch, Voltmeter switch for neutral conductors

223529

Miniature cam switch, Ammeter switch

223520

Application tool for miniature cam switch

X X

7-8 5-6 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

X X X X

19-20

1pole 2 pole

X

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

28 | CAM SWITCHES

1 X

2

3

4

X X X X X X X

www.oem.co.uk


Cam switches

PR12, 20 A

TECHNICAL DATA

Rated isolation voltage Thermal rated current

• Backward facing screw terminals delivered open • Easy to change switch function • Steel shaft as standard

690 V Ith

20 A

Rated breaking current

AC21

16 A

Rated power AC3

3x 380 V

4 kW

Max. cable area

2 x 4 mm²

Enclosure class on front

IP40 (IP65 as option)

Lifetime (without load)

1.25 x 106 operations

Operating temperature

-20 °C to +70 °C

CE-marked per

CEE24, and EN60947-1/A11

Approval

UL file E57817 For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oem . c o . u k

Connection & links

Switch

Impulse switch Spring return to 0

Switch

Type

0116 284 9900

Function * (X indicates contact closed)

Order number incl. legend & handle Legend*

Execution

Screw assembly (A)

One-hole mount (B)

1-pole

PR121101A8

PR12X1101A8

2-pole

PR121102A8

PR12X1102A8

3-pole

PR121103A8

PR12X1103A8

4-pole

PR121104A8

PR12X1104A8

1-pole

PR121101AR10

PR12X1101AR10

2-pole

PR121102AR10

PR12X1102AR10

1-pole

PR122201CR12

PR12X2201CR12

2-pole

PR122202CR12

PR12X2202CR12

1-pole

PR122201C8

PR12X2201C8

2-pole

PR122202C8

PR12X2202C8

3-pole

PR122203C8

PR12X2203C8

4-pole

PR122204C8

1-pole

PR122201C8

PR12X2201C8

2-pole

PR122202C8

PR12X2202C8

3-pole

PR122203C8

4-pole

PR122204C8

PR12X2204C8

1-pole

PR122251D4

PR12X2251D4

2-pole

PR122252D4

PR12X2252D4

3-pole

PR122253D4

PR12X2253D4

4-pole

PR122254D4

PR12X2254D4

1-pole

PR122251D4

PR12X2251D4

2-pole

PR122252D4

PR12X2252D4

3-pole

PR122253D4

PR12X2253D4

4-pole

PR122254D4

PR12X2254D4

1-pole

PR122301A8

PR12X2301A8

CAM SWITCHES

| 29


Cam switches

PR12, 20 A Connection & links

Function* (X indicates contact closed)

Legend*

Execution

Order number incl. legend & handle Screw assembly (A)

One-hole mount (B)

1-pole

PR122351A8

PR12X2351A8

1-pole

PR122401A8

PR12X2401A8

1-pole

PR122451A8

PR12X2451A8

1-pole

PR125201A8

PR12X5201A8

1-pole

PR125301A8

PR12X5301A8

1-pole

PR126503A1

PR12X6503A1

1-pole

PR126507A1

PR12X6507A1

Switch

Type

30 | CAM SWITCHES

www.oem.co.uk


Cam switches

PR12, 20 A

Type

Connection & links

Legend

Order number incl. legend & handle Screw assembly (A)

One hole mount (B)

Ammeter switch for measurement with three current transformers that have common connection points

PR128351A4

PR12X8151A4

Voltmeter switch for measurement in 3-phase systems between phases or between phase and neutral

PR128357C8

PR12X8357C8

Voltmeter switch for measurement in 3-phase systems between phases

PR128351A4

PR12X8351A4

Forward/reverse switch for 3-phase motor

PR129151C8

PR12X9151C8

Forward/reverse switch for 1-phase motor

PR129051C8

PR12X9051C8

PR129551A8

PR12X9551A8

PR129552A8

PR12X9552A8

Y/D-switch

Dahlander-switch

Many other standard switching schemes are available. Please enquire for further details.

0116 284 9900

CAM SWITCHES

| 31


Cam switches

Technical information Cam switch and miniature cam switch The choice of switch depends on the load to be controlled. Cam switches are normally designed for AC voltage. When using DC voltage, consideration must be taken to the calculation table below. Connection and disconnection without load AC20 per IEC 60 947-3 Cam switch

Mini cam

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

PR160

10

20

25

32

40

63

80

200

250

Approved current (A)

Connection of resistive load includes certain overload AC21 per IEC 60 947-3 Cam switch

Mini cam

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

PR160

10

16

20

25

32

50

80

160

200

Mini cam

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

PR160

2.5

6

8

10

12

-

-

-

-

PR160

Approved current (A)

Connection of electromagnetic load AC15 per IEC 60 947-5-1 vid 230 V AC Cam switch Approved current (A)

Motors and other high inductive loads AC23 per IEC 60 947-3 Cam switch

Approved current (kW)

Mini cam

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

3x230 V

1.8

4.0

5.5

7.5

11.0

15.0

18.5

-

-

3x400 V

3.0

7.5

11.0

11.0

11.0

22.0

25.0

-

-

3x500 V

-

5.5

11.0

11.0

11.0

25.0

25.0

-

-

3x690 V

-

4.0

10.0

10.0

11.0

18.5

22.0

-

-

Short-circuited motors. Connection and disconnection of starting current Reversing and counter-current braking AC3 per IEC 60 947-3 Cam switch

Approved current P (kW)

Approved current P (Hp)

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

3x230 V

3.0

4.0

4.0

5.5

11.0

15.0

-

PR160 -

3x400 V

4.0

7.5

7.5

11.0

18.5

22.0

-

-

3x500 V

5.5

7.5

7.5

11.0

18.5

22.0

-

-

3x690 V

3.0

7.5

7.5

11.0

18.5

22.0

-

-

3x230 V

4.0

5.5

5.5

7.5

15.0

20.0

-

3x400 V

5.5

10.0

10.0

15.0

25.0

30.0

-

3x500 V

7.5

10.0

10.0

15.0

25.0

30.0

-

-

3x690 V

4.0

10.0

10.0

15.0

25.0

30.0

-

-

Rated isolation voltage (V) AC23 per IEC 60 947-3 Mini cam

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

UTE-VDE-CEI (V)

Cam switch

500

660

690

690

660

660

660

660

PR160 660

CSA (Canada) (V)

-

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

UL (USA) (V)

-

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

CEE 24 (V)

-

400

400

400

400

400

400

-

-

Max. over-current (A) for 1 second Cam switch

Mini cam

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

PR160

Current (A)

300

300

400

420

800

1200

1500

2400

3000

PR125

PR160

Max. cable area (mm²) Cam switch

Mini cam

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

Single conductor

1.5

4.0

6(4)*

6(4)*

6

16

16

Ø8 mm connection for cable lug

Multi conductor cable

1.5

2.5

4

4

6

16

16

Ø8 mm connection for cable lug

* When using cable sleeve

32 | CAM SWITCHES

www.oem.co.uk


Cam switches

Resistive or low inductive loads

K 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3

Load breaking with 2 connections

Load breaking with 1 connection

0.2 0.1 24

48

60

95

120

220

440

Volt

For DC voltage, this table is used to calculate breaking capacity (A). DC1 Amps at 24 V DC Cam switch

MK

PR12

PR17

PR21

PR26

PR40

PR63

PR125

PR160

Amps (A)*

10

16

20

25

32

50

80

-

-

Accessories PR12

Order number PN50

Description Handle, small, grey/black, for 5 mm shaft

PN51

Handle, small, red/red, for 5 mm shaft

PN53

Handle, small, black/black, for 5 mm shaft

MN50

Handle, medium, grey/black, for 5 mm shaft

MN51

Handle, medium, red/red, for 5 mm shaft

MN53

Handle, medium, black/black, for 5 mm shaft

PC50

Handle, piston grip, small, grey/black, for 5 mm shaft

Order number

Description

CQ48

Legend plate holder 48x48 mm for PR12, fits WE40

Q040

Holder for IF9 legend

IF9

Function label non-engraved

WE40

Legend plate 48 x 48 mm, non-engraved

WE60

Legend plate 64 x 64 mm, non-engraved

We can engrave legend plates & function labels to your exact requirement. Please enquire for further details.

0116 284 9900

CAM SWITCHES

| 33


CLIMATE CONTROL AND LIGHTING FOR ENCLOSURES

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Convection heaters

36

Fan heaters

39

Thermostats

41

Humidistats

44

Fans & filters

46

Ceiling filter fans

47

Ventilation caps

48

Accessories

49

Lighting & sockets

50


Climate control & lighting

Heating element 5-13 W RCE016/RC016

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage

110-250 V* AC/DC or 12-36 V AC/DC

Heat source

PTC-element

Heating element

Aluminium

Connection

• Compact • UL approved • Self regulating (PTC)

2x0,25 mm² silicone cable

Enclosure class

IP54

Safety class

II (double insulated)

Approvals *With voltages under 140V AC heating output reduced by about 10% For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Max. starting current

Dimensions

110-250 V AC

2A

45 x 10 Ø

12-36 V AC/DC

4.5 A

45 x 10 Ø

110-250 V AC

2.5 A

45 x 10 Ø

12-36 V AC/DC

6A

45 x 10 Ø

160 °C

110-250 V AC

2A

30 x 25 x 12.5

Description

Heating output

Max surface temp (at +20 °C amb. temp)

01622.0-00

Heating element PTC RCE 016

5W

142 °C

01624.0-00

Heating element PTC RCE 016

5W

142 °C

01623.0-00

Heating element PTC RCE 016

10 W

180 °C

01625.0-00

Heating element PTC RCE 016

10 W

180 °C

09008.0-01

Mounting clips for heater RCE (2 st./frp.)

Order number

Voltage

RCE016

NOTE: For Heater RCE automatically follows no mounting clips. These must be ordered separately on Part 09008.0-01. See above RC016 01602.0-00

Heating element PTC RC 016

8W

01602.0-03

Heating element PTC RC 016

8W

160 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

4A

30 x 25 x 12.5

01609.0-00

Heating element PTC RC 016

10 W

150 °C

110-250 V AC

2.5 A

50 x 25 x 12.5

01610.0-00

Heating element PTC RC 016

13 W

170 °C

110-250 V AC

4A

60 x 25 x 12.5

01610.0-01

Heating element PTC RC 016

13 W

170 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

11 A

60 x 25 x 12.5

Heating element 10-30 W HGK047

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage

Enclosure

• • • •

110-250 V AC/DC (max. 265 V)

Heat source

 ynamic heating (PTC-element) D Compact Energy saving DIN rail clip

PTC-element Anodized aluminum profile

Connection

30 cm silicone cable 3x0.75 mm

Installation

Quick fastner for 35 mm DIN-rail

Enclosure class

IP44

Safety class

I (Earthed)

Approvals *Heating output at 20 °C (room temperature). during operation under 140 V heating output is reduced by about 10 %. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Heating output*

Max surface temp (at +20 °C amb. temp)

Voltage

Max. starting current

Dimensions

04700.0-00

Heating element PTC HGK 047

10 W

70 °C

110-250 V

1A

52 x 50 x 25

04701.0-00

Heating element PTC HGK 047

20 W

110 °C

110-250 V

2.5 A

60 x 50 x 25 70 x 50 x 25

04702.0-00

Heating element PTC HGK 047

30 W

120 °C

110-250 V

3A

04700.9-00

Heating element PTC HGK 047

10 W

70 °C

110-120 V

1A

52 x 50 x 25

04701.9-00

Heating element PTC HGK 047

20 W

110 °C

110-120 V

1.5 A

70 x 50 x 25

04702.9-00

Heating element PTC HGK 047

30 W

120 °C

110-120 V

1.5 A

100 x 50 x 25

*Other voltage and cable lengths on request.

36 | CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING

www.oem.co.uk


Climate control & lighting

Heater 10-20 W CSK060

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage

120-240 V AC/DC* **

Heat source

PTC-element (temperature limiting semiconductors)

Surface temperature at side

• Dual isolated (does not require earthing) • Innovative design and small size • Low element surface temperature • DIN rail clip

<85 °C (185 °F), however, heats area above the heater

Connection

2-pole terminal For 2.5 mm² cable (Recommended torque 0.8 Nm)

Installation

Bracket for 35 mm DIN rail vertical mounting

Enclosure

Plastic per UL94 V-0, black colour

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

II (double insulated)

Approvals * During operation under 140 V AC/DC, heating output reduced by about 10 %.** Other voltages upon request For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Description

Output

Max. starting current

Weight

Dimensions

06040.0-00

Order number

Heater CSK060

10 W

1.0 A

0.2 kg

98 x 38 x 75 mm

06030.0-00

Heater CSK060

20 W

2.5 A

0.3 kg

98 x 38 x 75 mm

Heating element 15-150 W HG140

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage*

12-36 V AC/DC 110-250 V AC/DC (max. 265 V)

Heat source

• • • •

PTC-element

Enclosure

Dynamic heating (PTC-element) Compact Energy saving Quick connection/installation

Anodized aluminum profile

Connection

3 quick clamps for 0.5-2.5 mm² cable

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

I (Earthed)

Approvals *Heating output at 20°C (room temperature).During operation under 140V, heating output reduced by about 10%.

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Description

Output

Max. temp. (at +20 °C amb. temp.)

Voltage

Max. starting current

Weight (gram)

Dimensions

14000.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

15 W

70 °C

110-250 V AC/DC

1.5 A

300

65 x 70 x 60

14001.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

30 W

80 °C

110-250 V AC/DC

3A

300

65 x 70 x 60

14003.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

45 W

110 °C

110-250 V AC/DC

3.5 A

300

65 x 70 x 60

14005.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

60 W

90 °C

110-250 V AC/DC

2.5 A

400

140 x 70 x 60

14006.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

75 W

105 °C

110-250 V AC/DC

4A

500

140 x 70 x 60

14007.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

100 W

130 °C

110-250 V AC/DC

4.5 A

500

140 x 70 x 60

14008.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

150 W

130 °C

110-250 V AC/DC

9A

700

220 x 70 x 60

Order number

110-250 V AC/DC

12-36 V AC/DC 14010.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

15 W

70 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

9A

300

65 x 70 x 60

14011.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

30 W

80 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

14 A

300

65 x 70 x 60

14012.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

45 W

110 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

8A

300

65 x 70 x 60

14013.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

60 W

90 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

10 A

400

140 x 70 x 60

14014.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

75 W

105 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

14 A

500

140 x 70 x 60

14015.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

100 W

130 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

16 A

500

140 x 70 x 60

14016.0-00

Heating element PTC HG 140

150 W

130 °C

12-36 V AC/DC

23 A

700

220 x 70 x 60

0116 284 9900

CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING |

37


Climate control & lighting

Heater 50-150 W CS060

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage

120-250 V AC/DC* **

Heat source

PTC-element (temperature limiting semiconductors)

Surface temp. at side

• Dual isolated (does not require earthing) • Small size • Low element surface temperature • DIN rail clip

<80 °C (175 °F), however, heats area above the heater)

Installation

4-pole terminal For 2.5 mm² cable. (Recommended torque 0.8 Nm)

Installation

Bracket for 35 mm DIN-rail. Vertical mounting.

Enclosure

Plastic per UL94 V-0, black

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

II (double insulated)

Approvals *For operation under 140 V AC/DC,heating output is reduced by about 10 %.** Other voltages upon request For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Output

Max. starting current

Temperature 50 mm above heater

Weight

Dimensions

06000.0-00

Heater CS060

50 W

2.5 A

86 °C (186,8 °F)

0.29 kg

110 x 60 x 90 mm

06010.0-00

Heater CS060

100 W

4.5 A

120 °C (248 °F)

0.30 kg

110 x 60 x 90 mm

06020.0-00

Heater CS060

150 W

8A

145 °C (293 °F)

0.44 kg

150 x 60 x 90 mm

Heater 50-150 W CSF060

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage

120-250 V AC/DC* **

Heat source

PTC-element (temperature limiting semiconductor)

Surface temp. at side

• Dual isolated (does not require earthing) • Thermostat attached with specified values • Low element surface temperature • DIN rail clip

<80 °C (175 °F), (however, heats area above the heater)

Connection

4-pole terminal For 2.5 mm² cable. (Recommended torque 0.8 Nm)

Installation

Bracket For 35 mm DIN-rail. Vertical mounting.

Enclosure

Plastic per UL94 V-0, black

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

II (double insulated)

Approvalsw *For operation under 140 V AC/DC,heating output is reduced by about 10 %.** Other voltages upon request For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Temperature for closing

Max. starting current

Temperature 50 mm above heater

Dimensions

15 °C (59 °F)

5 °C (41 °F)

2.5 A

86 °C (186,8 °F)

110 x 60 x 90 mm

25 °C (77 °F)

15 °C (59 °F)

2.5 A

86 °C (186,8 °F)

110 x 60 x 90 mm

100 W

15 °C (59 °F)

5 °C (41 °F)

4.5 A

120 °C (248 °F)

110 x 60 x 90 mm

Heater CSF060

100 W

25 °C (77 °F)

15 °C (59 °F)

4.5 A

120 °C (248 °F)

110 x 60 x 90 mm

Heater CSF060

150 W

15 °C (59 °F)

5 °C (41 °F)

8A

145 °C (293 °F)

150 x 60 x 90 mm

Heater CSF060

150 W

25 °C (77 °F)

15 °C (59 °F)

8A

145 °C (293 °F)

150 x 60 x 90 mm

Description

Output

Temperature for opening

06001.0-00

Heater CSF060

50 W

06002.0-00

Heater CSF060

50 W

06011.0-00

Heater CSF060

06012.0-00 06021.0-00 06022.0-00

Order number

38 | CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING

www.oem.co.uk


Climate control & lighting

Heating fan 150 W CS028/CSL028 • • • •

TECHNICAL DATA Heat source

PTC-element

Enclosure

Very compact design Quiet operation Dynamic heating DIN rail clip

Plastic, UL94 V0, black

Connection

2-pole terminal For 2.5 mm² cable (Recommended torque 0.8 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail or screw bracket

Surface temperature

Enclosure: max. 30 ˚C, Upper grill: 110 °C

Air capacity

13.8 m³/h / 45 m³/h (CSL028)

Axial fan

Mounted in ball bearings, 50,000 h at +40 °C

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

II (double insulated)

Approvals For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Description

Heating output (at 20 °C)

Max. starting current

Voltage*

Dimensions

02800.0-00

Heating fan CS028, For DIN-rail

150 W

12

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

75 x 65 x 90

02800.0-01

Heating fan CS028, For screw mount

150 W

12

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

75 x 65 x 90

02811.0-00

Heating fan CSL028, For DIN-rail

250 W

9

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

90 x 85 x 111

02811.0-01

Heating fan CSL028, For screw mount

250 W

9

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

90 x 85 x 111

02810.0-00

Heating fan CSL028, For DIN-rail

400 W

15

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

90 x 85 x 111

02810.0-01

Heating fan CSL028, For screw mount

400 W

15

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

90 x 85 x 111

Order number

*Other voltages available on request.

Heating fan 100-400 W HVL031

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage*

220-230 V AC, 50-60 Hz, 24 V DC

Heating element

High output immersion heater

Heating element enclosure

• • • •

DIN rail clip Compact UL-approved High fan capacity

Aluminium die casting Heater: 3-pole terminal block for 2.5 mm² cable (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm) Fan: 2-pole terminal block for 2.5 mm² cable (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Connection

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail

Axial fan

Mounted in ball bearings. 50,000 h lifetime at +25 °C

Air capacity

100/150 W: 35 m³/h free blowing 200/300/400 W: 108 m³/h free blowing

Thermostat

Upon fan stop

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

I (Earthed)

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Heating output

Operating voltage

Weight

Dimensions

03102.0-00

Heating fan HVL 031

100 W

220-230 V AC

530 g

80 x 112 x 47

03103.0-00

Heating fan HVL 031

150 W

220-230 V AC

570 g

80 x 112 x 47

03113.0-00

Heating fan HVL 031

200 W

220-230 V AC

860 g

119 x 151 x 47

03114.0-00

Heating fan HVL 031

300 W

220-230 V AC

860 g

119 x 151 x 47

03115.0-00

Heating fan HVL 031

400 W

220-230 V AC

860 g

119 x 151 x 47

03102.0-01

Heating fan HVL 031

100 W

24 V DC

550 g

80 x 112 x 47

*Other voltages available on request.

0116 284 9900

CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING |

39


Climate control & lighting

Heating fan 250-400 W HGL046 • • • •

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage* Heat source

220-240 V AC, 50-60 Hz or 24 V DC Resistor element with integrated safety thermostat

Max. surface temp.

Compact High heating output Long lifetime Maintenance-free

Approx. 75 °C

Air volume

AC: 45 m³/h (50 Hz), DC: 54 m³/h

Enclosure

Anodized aluminum profile

Connection

3-pole terminal block for 2.5 mm² cable (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

I (Earthed)

Approvals * At operating below 140 V AC / DC Heating output is reduced by about 10%. Other ** voltage on request For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Voltage*

Heating output

Weight (kg)

Dimensions

Heating fan HGL 046

230 V AC, 50-60 Hz

250 W

1.1

182 x 85 x 100

04641.0-00

Heating fan HGL 046

230V AC, 50-60 Hz

400 W

1.4

222 x 85 x 100

04640.1-00

Heating fan HGL 046

24 V DC

250 W

1.0

182 x 85 x 100

04640.0-00

*Other voltages upon request

Heating fan 350-550 W CR027

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage

• Integrated thermostat • Indication light on front • Modern design

220-230 V AC, 50-60 Hz, 100-120 V AC 50-60 Hz

Heat source

PTC-element

Enclossure

Plastic UL 94 VO

Connection

2-pole terminal block for 2.5 mm² cable (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastner For 35 mm DIN-rail

Temp. regulation

Setting range 0 °C to +60 °C

Thermostat Axial fan

Upon fan stop Mounted in ball bearings. 50,000 h lifetime at +25 °C

Air capacity

475 W: 35 m³/h 550 W: 45 m³/h

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

II (Double insulated)

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Voltage

Heating output (at 20 °C)

Starting current

Weight

Dimensions

02700.0-00

Heating fan CR 027

220-230 V

475 W

11 A

900 g

165 x 100 x 128

02701.0-00

Heating fan CR 027

220-230 V

550 W

13 A

1.1 kg

165 x 100 x 128

02700.9-00

Heating fan CR 027

100-120 V AC

400 W

14 A

900 g

165 x 100 x 128

02701.9-00

Heating fan CR 027

100-120 V AC

510 W

15 A

1.1 kg

165 x 100 x 128

40 | CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING

www.oem.co.uk


Climate control & lighting

Heating fan 700-950 W CR030/CR130

TECHNICAL DATA Heat source

Aluminium

Enclosure

• Compact design • Dual enclosure • Integrated thermostat or hygrostat

Plastic, UL94 V0, svart

Connection

3-pole terminal For 2.5 mm² cable

Installation

Screw bracket

Thermostat

Upon fan stop

Storage temperature

-45 °C to +70 °C

Air capacity

160 m³/h

Axial fan

Mounted in ball bearings, 50,000 h at +25 °C

Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

II (double insulated)

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oem . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Voltage

Heating output

Setting range

Dimensions

03051.0-00

With thermostat

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

950 W

0 °C to 60 °C

168 x 145 x 100

03051.0-02

With hygrostat

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

950 W

65 % RH

168 x 145 x 100

03059.9-00

With thermostat

120 V AC, 50/60 Hz

700 W

0 °C to 60 °C

168 x 145 x 100

TYPE CR030 for base of enclosures

TYPE CR130 for wall fixing 13051.0-00

With thermostat

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

950 W

0 °C to 60 °C

182 x 160 x 67

13051.0-02

With hygrostat

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

950 W

65 % RH

182 x 160 x 67

13059.9-00

With thermostat

120 V AC, 50/60 Hz

700 W

0 °C to 60 °C

182 x 160 x 67

Thermostat FTO011/FTS011

TECHNICAL DATA Hysteresis

± 5°C to ± 7°C

Sensing

Bi-metal

Contact type

• • • • •

Small size Preset values Simple installation Innovative design Tamper proof

Instantaneous contact NO or NC

Breaking capacity

240 V AC 5(1.6) ADC 30 W

Closing capacity

16 A starting current

Enclosure

UL94 VO, light grey

Connection

2-pole terminal block 2.5 mm² (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.8 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail. Can also be easily fitted on the exit cover grill

Enclosure class

IP20

Electrical lifetime

>100,000 cycles

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Description

Contact

Temperature for opening

Temperature for closing

Dimensions

01160.0-00

Order number

Thermostat FTO011

Opening (NC)

15 °C/59 °F (±5K)

5 °C/41 °F (±5K)

47 x 33 x 33 mm

01160.0-01

Thermostat FTO011

Opening (NC)

25 °C/77 °F (±5K)

15 °C/59 °F (±5K)

47 x 33 x 33 mm

Order number

Description

Contact

Temperature for opening

Temperature for opening

Dimensions

01161.0-00

Thermostat FTS011

Closing (NO)

50 °C/122 °F (±6K)

40 °C/104 °F (±7K)

47 x 33 x 33 mm

01161.0-01

Thermostat FTS011

Closing (NO)

60 °C/140 °F (±6K)

50 °C/122 °F (±7K)

47 x 33 x 33 mm

01161.0-02

Thermostat FTS011

Closing (NO)

35 °C/95 °F (±6K)

25 °C/77 °F (±7K)

47 x 33 x 33 mm

0116 284 9900

CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING |

41


Climate control & lighting

Duel thermostat FTD011

TECHNICAL DATA Hysteresis

± 5°C to ± 7°C

Bi-metal

Sensing Contact type

• Two thermostats in one housing • Small format • Preset values • Simple installation • Tamper proof

Instantaneous contact NC/NO or NO/NO

Breaking capacity

240 V AC 5 (1.6) A DC 30 W

Closing capacity

16 A starting current

Enclosure

Plastic UL94 VO, light grey

Connection

2-pole terminal block 2.5 mm² (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.8 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail. Can also be easily fitted on the exit cover grill

Enclosure class

IP20

Electrical lifetime

>100.000 cycles

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Temperature, opening(NC)

Temperature,closing (NC)

Temperature,closing (NO)

Temperature,opening (NO)

Dimensions

01163.0-00

Thermostat FTD011

15 °C/59 °F (±5K)

5 °C/41 °F (±5K)

50 °C/122 °F (±6K)

40 °C/104 °F (±7K)

47 x 67 x 33

01163.0-01

Thermostat FTD011

25 °C/77 °F (±5K)

15 °C/59 °F (±5K)

60 °C/140 °F (±6K)

50 °C/122 °F (±7K)

47 x 67 x 33

Description

Temperature, closing (NO)

Temperature, opening (NO)

Temperature, closing (NO)

Temperature, opening (NO)

Dimensions

Thermostat FTD011

50 °C/122 °F (±6K)

40 °C/104 °F (±7K)

60 °C/140 °F (±6K)

50 °C/122 °F (±7K)

47 x 67 x 33

Order number 01164.0-00

TECHNICAL DATA

Thermostat KTO 011/KTS 011

Hysteresis

7 °C ±4 °C

Sensing

Bi-metal

Contact type

• Simple installation • Wide regulation range 0 °C to +60 °C • UL-approved

Instantaneous contact NC or NO

Breaking capacity

250 V AC: 10 A resistive load, 2 A inductive load (cosϕ=0.6) DC: 30 W

Closing capacity

16 A starting current

Enclosure

Plastic UL94 VO

Connection

2-pole terminal block 2.5 mm² (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail. Can also be easily snapped in place on the exit cover grill

Regulating range*

0 °C to +60 °C

Enclosure class

IP20

Electrical lifetime

>100,000 cycles

Approvals * Other regulating ranges, such as -10 °C to +50 °C, +20 °C to +80 °C upon request. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Dimensions

01140.0-00

Thermostat KTO 011, 0 °C to +60 °C, 1 NC-contact

60 x 33 x 43

01141.0-00

Thermostat KTS 011, 0 °C to +60 °C , 1 NO-contact

60 x 33 x 43

01146.9-00

Thermostat KTO 011, 0 °C to +60 °C, 1 NC-contact

60 x 33 x 43

01147.9-00

Thermostat KTS 011, 0 °C to +60 °C , 1 NO-contact

60 x 33 x 43

42 | CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING

www.oem.co.uk


Climate control & lighting

Dual thermostat ZR011

TECHNICAL DATA Hysteresis

• Compact • Separately adjustable max. and min. temp • High breaking capacity

7 °C ±4 °C

Sensing

Bi-metal

Contact

Instantaneous contacts NO+NC

Breaking capacity

6 A 250 V AC, DC: 30 W

Closing capacity

16 A starting current

Enclosure

Plastic UL94 VO

Connection

4-pole screw terminal block (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail

Regulating range*

0 °C to +60 °C

Operating/storage temps.

-45 °C to +80 °C

Enclosure class

IP20

Contact resistance

<10 mΩ

Electrical lifetime

>100,000 cycles

Approvals * Other regulating ranges, such as -10 °C to +50 °C, +20 °C to +80 °C upon request. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order number 01172.0-00

Description

Dimensions

Thermostat ZR011, 0-60 °C, 1 NC & 1 NO, separate contacts

67 x 50 x 46

Thermostat FZK011

TECHNICAL DATA Hysteresis

• • • •

Low hysteresis Simple installation Change-over contact High breaking capacity

4 °C±1.5 °C*

Breaking capacity

NC: 10 A (4) 250 V AC DC 30 WNO: 5 A (2) 250 V AC. DC 30 W

Closing capacity

16 A starting current

Enclosure

Plastic UL94 V-O

Connection

4-pole terminal block 2.5 mm² (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail

Regulating range

0 °C to +60 °C

Enclosure class

IP20

Electrical lifetime

>100,000 cycles

Approvals * If the output resister RF is connected to 230 V AC per the figure below, hysteresis is reduced to 0.5 °±1.5 °.

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Description

Voltage

Dimensions

01170.0-00

Order no.

Thermostat FZK 011 0-60 °C. 1 change-over contact

230 V AC

67 x 50 x 38

01170.9-01

Thermostat FZK 011 0-60 °C. 1 change-over contact

120 V AC

67 x 50 x 38

01170.0-02

Thermostat FZK 011 -20 to +35 °C. 1 change-over contact

230 V AC

67 x 50 x 38

0116 284 9900

CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING |

43


Climate control & lighting

Thermostat ET011

TECHNICAL DATA Hysteresis

±3 °C

Operating voltage

24 V DC (±4 V)

Temperature range*

0 °C to +60 °C

Sensor element

• Fully electronic • Low hysteresis • Floating contact

PTC

Contact type

Floating, change-over contact

Lifetime

>100 000 cycles

Max. breaking capacity

16 A, 24 V DC. (resistive load)

Connection

Screw terminal block, max. 2.5 mm². (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Installation

Clips For 35 mm DIN-rail

Enclosure

Plastic UL94 V-0

Safety class

IP20

Approvals *Other temperature ranges upon request. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number 01190.0-00

Description

Dimensions

Electronic thermostat ET011 0 °C to +60 °C. Floating change-over contact

67 x 50 x 46

Electronic hygrotherm ETF012 • • • •

TECHNICAL DATA

Temperature & humidity regulation LED indication of active values High breaking capacity DIN rail clip

Hysteresis (temperature)

2 °C (±1 °C)

Hysteresis (humidity)

4 % (±1 %) rF

Reaction time, moisture

Approx. 160 sec.

Contact type

Change-over relay

Contact resistance

<10 mΩ

Electrical lifetime

>100,000 cycles

Breaking capacity

240 V AC, 10 A (resistive load)120 V AC, 10 A (resistive load) 240 V AC, 3 A (inductive load, cosϕ=0.6) 120 V AC, 3 A (inductive load, cosϕ=0.6) 24 V DC, 4 A

Closing capacity

30 A AC

Connection

5-pole terminal block for 2.5 mm² cable

Installation

Snap bracket for 35 mm DIN rail

Storage temperature

-20 °C to +80 °C

Enclosure

Plastic, UL94 V0

Enclosure class

IP20

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order no.

Description

Voltage

Temperature

Humidity (rF)

Dimensions

01230.0-00

Electronic hygrotherm ETF012

230 V AC

0-60 °C

50-90 %

77 x 60 x 43

01230.9-00

Electronic hygrotherm ETF012

120 V AC

32-140 °F

50-90 %

77 x 60 x 43

01230.9-01

Electronic hygrotherm ETF012

120 V AC

0-60 °C

50-90 %

77 x 60 x 43

44 | CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING

www.oem.co.uk


Climate control & lighting

Mechanical hygrostat MFR012

TECHNICAL DATA

• Simple installation • Change-over contact • High breaking capacity

Setting range

35 – 95 % RH

Hysteresis at 50 % RH

4 % RH (+/-3 %)

Contact type

Change-over relay Resistive load 5 A, 230 V AC Inductive load cosj = 0.8 0.2 A 230 V AC Inductive load L/R 0.3 ms 1 A up to 50 V DC

Breaking capacity Minimum switching capacity

100 mA 20 V AC/DC

Electrical lifetime

> 50,000 cycles

Permissable air velocity

15 m/sec

Enclosure

Plastic

Enclosure class

IP20

Connection

3-pole terminal block 2.5 mm² (recommended tightening torque for terminal screws: 0.5 Nm)

Installation

Quick fastner For 35 mm DIN-rail

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order number 01220.0-00

Description

Humidity (RH)

Dimensions

Hygrostat MFR012 1 change-over contact

35-95 %

67 x 50 x 38

Electronic hygrostat EFR012 • • • •

TECHNICAL DATA

Adjustable or pre-set RH Compact High breaking capacity Simple mounting, quick installation

Hysteresis at 50% RH

5% RH (± 3% RH)

Contact type

Change-over relay

Electrical lifetime

> 50 000 cycles

Breaking capacity max.

230 V AC 8 A (resistive load) 230 V AC 0.2 A (inductive load cosϕ=0.8) DC 100 W at 24 V DC

Optical indicator

LED

Connection

5-pole terminal for 2.5 mm cable

Installation

Snap bracket for 35 mm DIN-rail

Enclosure

Plastic, UL94 V0

Enclosure class

IP20

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Voltage

Humidity (RH)

Dimensions

01245.0-00

Hygrostat EFR 012 CO-contacts

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

40-90% RH

65 x 42 x 38

01246.0-00

Hygrostat EFR 012 CO-contacts

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

65% RH pre-set

65 x 42 x 38

01246.0-01

Hygrostat EFR 012 CO-contacts

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

50% RH pre-set

65 x 42 x 38

01245.9-00

Hygrostat EFR 012 CO-contacts

120 V AC, 50/60 Hz

40-90% RH

65 x 42 x 38

01246.9-00

Hygrostat EFR 012 CO-contacts

120 V AC, 50/60 Hz

65% RH pre-set

65 x 42 x 38

0116 284 9900

CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING |

45


Climate control & lighting

Filter fans FF018

TECHNICAL DATA

• • • •

Quick installation Minimal installation depth Low noise level IP55 as standard

Type

01800

01801

01802

01804

01803

01805

Air volume Free blowing

21 m³/h

55 m³/h

102 m³/h

200 m³/h

300 m³/h

550 m³/h

With exit filter

16 m³/h

42 m³/h

68 m³/h

125 m³/h

230 m³/h

315 m³/h

Power consumption

80 mA

100 mA

100 mA

320 mA

400 mA

300 mA

Outputconsumption

13 W

15 W

15 W

45 W

60 W

64 W

Cut-outs (mm)

97 x 97 +0.4

125 x 125 +0.4

176 x 176 +0.4

176 x 176 +0.4

250 x 250 +0.4

250 x 250 +0.4

-30 °C to +70 °C

-30 °C to +70 °C

-30 °C to +70 °C

-30 °C to +70 °C

-30 °C to +70 °C

-30 °C to +70 °C

220-230 V AC, 50 Hz

220-230 V AC, 50 Hz

220-230 V AC, 50 Hz

220-230 V AC, 50 Hz

220-230 V AC, 50 Hz

220-230 V AC, 50 Hz

Operating temperature Operating voltage** Lifetime

50000 h at +25 °C

Safety class

I (Earthed)

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Air volume (with exit filter)

01800.0-00

Filter fan 230 V AC

21 m³/h

01800.1-00

Filter fan 230 V AC. EMC-version

21 m³/h

01801.0-00

Filter fan 230 V AC

55 m³/h

01801.1-00

Filter fan 230 V AC. EMC-version

55 m³/h

01802.0-00

Filter fan 230 V AC

102 m³/h

01802.1-00

Filter fan 230 V AC. EMC-version

102 m³/h

01803.1-00

Filter fan 230 V AC. EMC-version (4 pcs. fans)

300 m³/h

01804.0-00

Filter fan 230 V AC

200 m³/h

01804.1-00

Filter fan 115 V AC

200 m³/h

01803.0-00

Filter fan 230 V AC (4 pcs. fans)

300 m³/h

01805.0-00

Filter fan 230 V AC

550 m³/h

11800.0-00

Exhaust hood 97X97 mm

11800.1-00

Exhaust hood 97X97 mm, EMC-version

11801.0-00

Exhaust hood 125x125 mm, standard to 01801.0-00

11801.1-00

Exhaust hood 125x125 mm, EMC-version

11802.0-00

Exhaust hood 176x176 mm

11802.1-00

Exhaust hood 176x176 mm, EMC-version

11803.0-00

Exhaust hood 250x250 mm

11803.1-00

Exhaust hood 250x250 mm, EMC-version

Filter fan for outdoor use

TECHNICAL DATA

FF018

Operating voltage Air volume (free blowing) Current/power consumption

• Lockable cover • Filter replaceable from outside • Protected against the elements

Noise level (1 m distance)

230 V AC, 50 Hz 20 m³/h 100 mA/15 W 40 dB (A) per DIN EN ISO 9614-2

Hole pattern

125 x 125 mm +0.4 mm

Filter mat

F5 (filtering degree 98 %)

Enclosure class Safety class

IP55 I (Earthed|)

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

01821.0-00

Filter fan 230 V AC 20 m³/h. For outdoor use

01821.0-02

Filter fan 120 V AC 23 m³/h. For outdoor use

11821.0-00

Exit filter 125 x 125 mm. For outdoor use

46 | CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING

www.oem.co.uk


Climate control & lighting

Roof filter fan RFP018

TECHNICAL DATA Connection

3-pole terminal block for 2.5 mm², tightening torque 0.8 Nm max.

Enclosure

Plastic, UL94 V-0, light grey, UV durability per UL746C (f1) Axial, mounted in ball bearings 50,000 hours lifetime at +25 °C, 65 % RH

Fan

• Very low noise level • Minimal construction depth • Operationally reliable with long lifetime • Simple installation

G3 per DIN EN 779, filtering degree 85 %, temperature resistant to 100 °C, self-extinguishing class F1

Filter mat Temperature range Operation/storage

-45 to +70 °C (-49 to +158 °F)

Enclosure class

IP32 with filter mat G3 per DIN EN779. Filtering 85 %

Safety class

I (Earthed)

Approvals

RoHS

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oem . c o . u k

Roof filter fan Order no.RFP018

Operating voltage

Air volume freeblowing with G3 filter

Air volume freeblowing without filter

Power consumption

Noise level dB (A)

Construction depth in the enclosure (mm)

Weight (kg) 3.3

01860.0-00

230 V AC, 50 Hz

300 m³/h

400 m³/h

68 W

55

52

01861.0-00

230 V AC, 50 Hz

500 m³/h

650 m³/h

64 W

67

107

2.6

01860.0-02

120 V AC, 60 Hz

345 m³/h

460 m³/h

60 W

55

52

3.3

01861.0-02

120 V AC, 60 Hz

575 m³/h

748 m³/h

85 W

67

107

2.6

Roof exit filter REP118 Order no.

11860.0-00

11

1.0

Filter mat Order no. FM086 01860.0-00

Roof filter RFF018

Description

Size (mm)

Filter G3, 3 pcs. per carton

282x282

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage*

230 V AC, 50 Hz 350 m³/h (with filter G3) freeblowing 500 m³/h without filter mat

Air volume

• Very low noise level • Minimum mounting depth • Ease of Installation

Fan

Ball bearing. 50,000 hours Lifetime at +25 ° C, 65% RH

Noise level (1 m distance)

45 dB(A)

Enclosure class

IP54 with filter mat G3 (IP33 without filter mat)

Approvals

* Other voltages on request. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oem . c o . u k

Order number 01850.0-00

Description Ceiling exhaust hood with filters

11850.0-00

Ceiling exhaust hood with filters

08613.0-00

Filter mat 282 x 282 mm. 3 pcs. in carton

0116 284 9900

CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING |

47


Climate control & lighting

Drainage device DD 084

• • • •

TECHNICAL DATA Mounting

High degree of protection Good drainage performance Easy to install Robust, weather and UV light protected housing

M50 x 1.5 nut (wrench size 60mm, housing 50mm)

Torque

6Nm max

Material

Plastic UL94 V-0, umbra grey

Water entry height

0mm (at 0.5mm wall thickness)

Sealing

Sealing gasket NBR

Water flow through

approx 200 ml/h at a water column of 5mm

Fitting position

Vertical, lowest point

Operating temperature

-45° to +70°C

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number 08410.0-00

Description

Dimensions

Drainage device

Ø 60 x 49.5 mm

TECHNICAL DATA

Ventilation housing DA284 DA284

Type

Plastic housing UL

Plastic housing UL

Plastic housing

Stainless steel cover

M40x1.5 thread with nut

M12x1.5 thread with nut

M40x1.5 thread with nut

M40x1.5 thread with nut

Polyamid 6, light grey

Stainless steel V2A (DIN 1.4404 7 AISI 316 L)

Installation

• High enclosure class - IP66 • Double-acting membrane • Stainless steel housing for the food industry

Material

Plastic UL94 V-0, light grey

Filter

Waterproof membrane 1200 l/h at pressure >70 mbar

Air capacity Operating temp

120 l/h at pressure >70 mbar

1200 l/h at pressure >70 mbar

-45 °C to +70 °C

Enclosure class

1200 l/h at pressure >70 mbar

-40 °C to +80 °C IP66

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

28400.0-00

Ventilation housing DA284, polyamide (2 pcs)

28401.0-00

Ventilation housing DA284, stainless steel (1 pc)

28400.0-01

Ventilation housing DA284, polyamide (1 pc)

Pressure compensation device DA 084 • High degree of protection • Easy to install

TECHNICAL DATA Mounting

PG 29 thread with union nut

Torque

5Nm (max 10Nm)

Material

Plastic UL94 V-0, light grey, weather proof and UV light resistant to UL746C (f1)

Sealing

Sealing gasket NBR

Air interface

Approx 1.5cm2

Fitting position Operating temperature

Vertical* -45° to +70°C

*Protection type is restricted to IP54 if fitting position of DA 084 is not vertical

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number 08400.0-03

48 | CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING

Description

Dimensions

Pressure compensation device

Ø 65.5 x 30.5 mm

www.oem.co.uk


Climate control & lighting

Door contact DS013

TECHNICAL DATA Material/Enclosure

Plastic UL94 V-0, grey/black

Max. switching capacity

• • • •

Adjustable positioning without tools High switching capacity (10A) Double strain relief Suitable for LED025

250VAC, 10 A 4-pole spring clamp with strain relief clamping torque max. 0.5 Nm

Connection Lifetime

VDE:> 10,000 cycles UL> 6000 cycles

Mounting

Screw mounting (M5)

Operating temperature

-20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)

Storage temperature

-20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)

Work / storage humidity

max. 90% RH (non-condensing)

Enclosure class

IP20

Approvals Approvals pending

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oem . c o . u k Order no.

Suitable wire size

Contact

Dimensions

02540.0-00

Round wire, stranded (with ferrule) 0.75 mm² to 1.0 mm²

Change-over (NC/NO)

87 x 64 x 30

02540.0-01

Round wire, stranded (with ferrule) 0.75 mm² to 1.5 mm²

Normally closed (NC)

87 x 64 x 30

02540.1-00

Round wire, stranded (with ferrule) 0.75 mm² to 1.5 mm²

Normally open (NO)

87 x 64 x 30

Outlet with quick connection SD035 • Din rail clips • Push clamps • With or without fuse holder

Order no.

TECHNICAL DATA Rated voltage

250 V AC max.

Rated current

16 A max. without fuse holder 6.3 A with fuse folder

Connection

3 push clamps for cable ≤2.5 mm²

Installation

Quick fastener for 35 mm DIN rail

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Description

Dimensions

With fuse holder

03500.0-00

Electrical outlets for DIN rail, Germany/Nordic countries/Russia standard

92 x 62 x 48

03501.0-00

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, France/Poland standard

92 x 62 x 48

03502.0-00

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, Switzerland standard r

92 x 62 x 48

03503.0-00

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, UK standard

92 x 62 x 48

03504.0-00

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, USA/Canada standard

92 x 62 x 48

03505.0-00

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, Italy standard

92 x 62 x 48

Without fuse holder

03500.0-01

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, Germany/Nordic countries/Russia standard

92 x 62 x 48

03501.0-01

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, France/Poland standard

92 x 62 x 48

03502.0-01

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, Switzerland standard

92 x 62 x 48

03503.0-01

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, UK standard (4)

92 x 62 x 48

03504.0-01

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, USA/Canada standard

92 x 62 x 48

03505.0-01

Electrical outlet for DIN rail, Italy standard

92 x 62 x 48

0116 284 9900

CLIMATE CONTROL & LIGHTING |

49


Lighting Cabinet LED lighting LED025

TECHNICAL DATA

Material/Enclosure

Plastic, transparent

Operating voltage

24-48 V DC (min. 20 V DC max. 60 V DC) or100-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz (min. 90 V AC max. 265 V AC)

Power consumption

• • • • •

LED lighting Very long lifetime Wide voltage range Quick connection PIR sensor option

Max. 5 W (=75 W light bulb)

Luminance

900 lm

Lifetime, lamp

60,000 hrs at 20 °C (68 °F)

Light type

LED, angle of light 120°, Colour tone: daylight, Colour temperature: 6500 K (Kelvin)

Mounting

Magnetic, screw or clip 2-pole quick-connectorAC: max. 2.5 A/240 V AC, connection: whiteDC: max. 2.5 A/60 V DC, connection: blue

Connection Enclosure class

IP20

Safety class

II (double insulated)

Approvalss

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order no.

Description

Magnetic fixing

Screw fixing

Clip fixing

02540.0-00

02540.0-01

02540.0-03

02540.1-00

02540.1-01

02540.2-00

02540.2-01

02541.0-00 02541.1-00

Dimensions Magnetic fixing

Screw fixing

Clip fixing

Cabinet lighting LED025 100-230 V AC, on/off switch

351 x 34 x 32

351 x 36 x 52

351 x 42 x 40

02540.1-03

Cabinet lighting LED025 24-48 V DC, on/off switch

351 x 34 x 32

351 x 36 x 52

351 x 42 x 40

02540.2-03

Cabinet lighting LED025 12 V DC, on/off switch

351 x 34 x 32

351 x 36 x 52

351 x 42 x 40

02541.0-01

02541.0-03

Cabinet lighting LED025 100-230 V AC, PIR sensor

351 x 39 x 32

351 x 41 x 52

351 x 47.3 x 40

02541.1-01

02541.1-03

Cabinet lighting LED025 24-48 V DC, PIR sensor

351 x 39 x 32

351 x 41 x 52

351 x 47.3 x 40

Cabinet lighting SL025

TECHNICAL DATA Operating voltage Power consumption

• Quick installation • Low energy fluorescent lamp • Integrated outlet

230 V AC, 120 V AC (other voltage upon request, such as 48 V DC and 24 V DC) 11 W (=75 W light bulb) at 230 V AC13 W (=90 W light bulb) at 120 V

Luminance

900 lm

Lifetime, lamp

5000 h

Lamp

Low energy lamp, 2G7 socket

Connection

3-pole screw terminal block for 2.5 mm² cable

Operating/storage temperature

-30 °C to +60 °C

Enclosure class

IP20

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order no.

Description

Dimensions

02523.0-00

Cabinet lighting SL025, 230 V AC, UK outlet

345 x 91 x 40

02523.0-03

Cabinet lighting SL025, 230 V AC, IR sensor, UK outlet

345 x 91 x 40

02527.0-00

Cabinet lighting SL025, 230 V AC, no outlet

345 x 91 x 40

02523.1-05

Cabinet lighting SL025, 230 V AC, with magnetic bracket, UK outlet

345 x 91 x 40

02523.1-04

Cabinet lighting SL025, 230 V AC, IR sensor with magnetic bracket, UK outlet

345 x 91 x 40

02527.1-15

Cabinet lighting SL025, 230 V AC, IR sensor with magnetic bracket, no outlet

345 x 91 x 40

Other models, e.g., without outlet, upon request.

50 | LIGHTING

www.oem.co.uk


Lighting

Cabinet lighting KL025

TECHNICAL DATA Light source

Compact fluorescent lamp 230 V

Output

11 W (=75 W light bulb)

Supply voltage

• • • •

Industrially designed Strong magnet – easy installation Low energy fluorescent lamp Integrated outlet

230 V

Outlet

Protective earth. Max. 16 A

Connection

3-pole screw terminal block 2.5 mm² with strain relief

Installation

Magnetic bracket. Holding force approx. 20 kp on painted steel plate

Enclosure

Plastic

Enclosure class

IP20

Connection

3-pole terminal block 2.5 mm²

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order no.

Description

Dimensions

02510.0-00

Cabinet lighting KL025 230 V/50 Hz, with magnetic bracket and UK outlet

355 x 65 x 70

02500.0-07

Cabinet lighting KL025 230 V/50 Hz, with magnetic bracket, no outlet

355 x 65 x 70

02505.9-01

Cabinet lighting KL025 120 V/60 Hz, with magnetic bracket, no outlet

355 x 65 x 70

09520.0-00

Lamp lens in transparent plastic

Please note all lamps are supplied without the lens

Please note lamps require lamp lens

Hand lamp DL026

TECHNICAL DATA Light source

Energy conserving lamp, socket E27

Output

20 W (=100 W light bulb)

Supply voltage

• Industrially designed • Flexible • High luminance

230 V

Connection

2 m cable with plug

Installation

Self-adhesive mounting bases

Enclosure class

IP20

Approvals

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order no.

Description

Dimensions

02610.0-00

Hand lamp with wall bracket and hanging hook 230 V AC

337 x 84 x 68

02614.0-00

Hand lamp with wall bracket and hanging hook 24 V DC

337 x 84 x 68

0116 284 9900

LIGHTING |

51


CONTROL RELAYS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Phase control

54

Level control

55

Current control

56

Voltage control

57


Control relays

Phase control

Phase failure (presence) Phase sequence Phase balance & level of asymmetry Adjustment of voltage thresholds (over & under-voltage) • Adjustable time delay • • • •

Type

Regeneration

Sequence/ asymmetry

Over-voltage/under-voltage

Timing

Changeover output relay

Housing width (mm)

Meas. range (self-powered) 50/60 Hz

84 873 021

MWS2

No

Yes/no

No/no

No

2x5A

17.5

183 to 484 VAC

84 873 022

MWG

70%

Yes/no

No/no

No

1x5A

17.5

183 to 528 VAC

84 873 023

MWU

70%

Yes/no

No/-20 to -2%

0.1 s to 10 s

1x5A

17.5

183 to 528 VAC

84 873 024

MWA

70%

Yes/5 to 15%

No/no

0.1 s to 10 s

1x5A

17.5

183 to 528 VAC

84 873 025

MWUA

70%

Yes/5 to 15%

±2 to ±20%

0.1 s to 10 s

1x5A

17.5

183 to 528 VAC

87 873 026

HWUA

No

Yes/5 to 15%

+2 to +20%/-20 to -2%

0.3 s to 30 s

2x5A

35

194 to 528 VAC

84 873 029

MWS

No

Yes/no

No/no

No

1x8A

17.5

183 to 528 VAC

84 873 034

EWS2

No

Yes/no

No/no

No

2x8A

22.5

194 to 484 VAC

84 873 220

H3US

No

No/no

+2 to +20%/-20 to -2%

0.3 s to 30 s

2x5A

35

194 to 528 VAC

84 873 222

M3US

No

No/no

+2 to +20%/-20 to -2%

0.3 s to 30 s

1x5A

17.5

183 to 528 VAC

84 903 020 (A)

EMWS

No

Yes/no

No/no

No

1x5A

17.5

183 to 528 VAC

No

No/no

+2 to +20%/-20 to -2%

0.3 s to 30 s

2x5A

35

96 to 332 VAC

Part number Phase failure

Loss of phase and neutral 84 873 221

H3USN

54 | CONTROL RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Control relays

Level control

Part number

• Automation of filling & emptying cycles • High or low level control • Check for presence of a conductive or non-conductive liquid by resistive probe or discrete sensor • Adjustable time delay

Timing

Changeover output relay

Housing width (mm)

Supply

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

22.5

24 to 240 VAC/VDC

1 or 2/250 Ω to 1 MΩ

0.1 s to 5 s

1x8A

22.5

24 to 240 VAC/VDC

1 or 2/250 Ω to 1 MΩ

0.1 s to 5 s

2x5A

35

24 to 240 VAC/VDC

Yes/yes

1 or 2/none

0.1 s to 5 s

1x5A

35

24 to 240 VAC/VDC

Digital

No/yes

1/none

0.1 s to 5 s

1x5A

17.5

24 to 240 VAC/VDC

24 VAC

Type

Probe

Emptying/filling

84 870 200

ENR

Resistive

Yes/yes

84 870 210

ENRM

Resistive

Yes/yes

84 870 700

HNM

Resistive

Yes/yes

84 870 710

HNE

Digital or PNP/NPN

84 870 720

MNS

Level/measurement range

Modular housing

Industrial housing 84 870 501

FN

Resistive

Yes/yes + alarm

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

2x8A

45

84 870 502

FN

Resistive

Yes/yes + alarm

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

2x8A

45

48 VAC

84 870 503

FN

Resistive

Yes/yes + alarm

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

2x8A

45

120 VAC

84 870 504

FN

Resistive

Yes/yes + alarm

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

2x8A

45

230 VAC

84 870 803

FN LS

Resistive

Yes/yes + alarm

2/250 Ω to 5 KΩ

No

2x8A

45

230 VAC

84 870 301

LN

Resistive

No/yes

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 8-pin base

24 VAC

84 870 303

LN

Resistive

No/yes

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 8-pin base

120 VAC

84 870 304

LN

Resistive

No/yes

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 8-pin base

230 VAC

84 870 306

LN

Resistive

No/yes

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 11-pin base

24 VAC

84 870 308

LN

Resistive

No/yes

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 11-pin base

120 VAC

84 870 309

LN

Resistive

No/yes

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 11-pin base

230 VAC

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 11-pin base

24 VAC

Plug-in housing

84 870 401

L2N

Resistive

Combined with monitoring of wells

84 870 403

L2N

Resistive

Combined with monitoring of wells

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 11-pin base

120 VAC

84 870 404

L2N

Resistive

Combined with monitoring of wells

2/5 KΩ to 100 KΩ

No

1x8A

39 Plug-in 11-pin base

230 VAC

0116 284 9900

CONTROL RELAYS

| 55


Control relays

Current control

• AC current treshold adjustable from 1 to 20 A AC (30 Hz to 400 Hz) via button on front • Relay output 5 A - 250 V AC - 1 N/O contact Multivoltage power supply : 100 to 230 V AC 50-60 Hz • 24 V AC / DC • 17.5 mm casing clips on symmetrical DIN rail

Part number

Type

Measurement range

Supply voltage

84 871 020

EIL

2 – 500 mA

24 V DC

84 871 021

EIL

2 – 500 mA

24 V AC

84 871 022

EIL

2 – 500 mA

48 V AC

84 871 023

EIL

2 – 500 mA

120 V AC

84 871 024

EIL

2 – 500 mA

230 V AC

84 871 030

EIH

0.1 - 10 A

24 V DC

84 871 031

EIH

0.1 - 10 A

24 V AC

84 871 032

EIH

0.1 - 10 A

48 V AC

84 871 033

EIH

0.1 - 10 A

120 V AC

84 871 034

EIH

0.1 - 10 A

230 V AC

84 871 040

EIT

10 - 100 A with current transformer

24 V DC

84 871 041

EIT

10 - 100 A with current transformer

24 V AC

84 871 042

EIT

10 - 100 A with current transformer

48 V AC

84 871 043

EIT

10 - 100 A with current transformer

120 V AC

84 871 044

EIT

10 - 100 A with current transformer

230 V AC

56 | CONTROL RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Control relays

Voltage control

• Voltage monitoring • 2 relays to cover 6 ranges of measurement: 0.2V to 600V • Automatic recognition AC/DC Frequency up to 500 Hz

Part number

Type

Measurement range

Supply voltage

84 872 020

EUL

0.2 – 60 V

24 V DC

84 872 021

EUL

0.2 – 60 V

24 V AC

84 872 023

EUL

0.2 – 60 V

120 V AC

84 872 024

EUL

0.2 – 60 V

230 V AC

84 872 030

EUH

15 - 600 V

24 V AC

84 872 031

EUH

15 - 600 V

24 V AC

84 872 033

EUH

15 - 600 V

120 V AC

84 872 034

EUH

15 - 600 V

230 V AC

0116 284 9900

CONTROL RELAYS

| 57


COUNTERS AND PROCESS DEVICES

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Pulse counters

60

Hour meters

62

Multifunction devices

64

Application specific devices

65

Accessories

65


Counters and process devices

Pulse Counters – Electronic

• • • • • •

Range

LCD/LED display 6.7 or 8 digit Battery or AC/DC control Adding / subtracting and difference counting Adding of fast or slow pulses 0-99999999 service counter version available

Part no.

Function

Input A

Input B

Input switch level

Power supply

Dimensions

6.130.012.850

Adding or subtracting

0-0.7VDC NPN

0-0.7 V DC NPN

-

Battery

48 x 24

6.130.012.852

Adding or subtracting

4-30VDC PNP

0-0.7 V DC NPN

-

Battery

48 x 24

6.130.012.853

Adding or subtracting

10-260VAC/DC

10-260 V AC/DC

-

Battery

48 x 24

6.131.012.850

Count direction or difference counter

0-0.7VDC NPN

0-0.7 V DC NPN

-

Battery

48 x 24

6.131.012.851

Count direction or difference counter

4-30VDC PNP

0-0.7 V DC NPN

-

Battery

48 x 24

6.131.012.853

Difference counter

10-260VAC/DC

10-260 V AC/DC

-

Battery

48 x 24

LCD counters

Codix130

Codix 131

LED counters Codix 140

6.140.012.300

Adding Counter 0-9999999

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30VDC PNP

-

-

10-30VDC

48 x 24

Codix 142

6.142.011.300.005k.00

Service Counter 0-9999999

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30VDC PNP

-

-

10-30VDC

48 x 24

6.520.012.300

Adding

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30VDC PNP

-

Standard (HTL)

10-30VDC

48 x 24

6.520.012.3A0

Adding

"

-

4-30VDC

10-30VDC

48 x 24

Codix 520

Codix 540

6.540.012.000

Adding

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30VDC PNP

-

Standard (HTL)

90-260VAC

96 x 48

6.540.012.0A0

Adding

"

-

4-30VDC

90-260VAC

96 x 48

6.540.012.300

Adding

"

-

Standard (HTL)

10-30VDC

96 x 48

6.540.012.3A0

Adding

"

-

4-30VDC

10-30VDC

96 x 48

60 | COUNTERS AND PROCESS DEVICES

www.oem.co.uk


Counters and process devices

Pulse Counters – Electromechanical

• • • • •

Range

4-7 digit displays AC or DC control Panel or PCB mount options High shock resistance versions Long service life

Part no.

Mounting

Number of digits

Power supply

Dimensions

1.710.200.012

Panel mount

7

12 V DC

30 x 20

1.710.200.013

Panel mount

7

24 V DC

30 x 20

1.100.200.032

Panel mount

4

12 V DC

26 x 15

1.100.200.033

Panel mount

4

24 V DC

26 x 15

1.100.200.051

Panel mount

4

24 V AC

26 x 15

1.100.200.054

Panel mount

4

115 V AC

26 x 15

1.100.200.056

Panel mount

4

230 V AC

26 x 15

1.130.900.032

PCB mount

7

12 V DC

-

1.130.900.033

PCB mount

7

24 V DC

-

1.130.900.051

PCB mount

7

24 V AC

-

1.130.900.054

PCB mount

7

115 V AC

-

1.130.900.056

PCB mount

7

230 V AC

-

1.150.510.012.550

Panel mount

5

12 V DC

34 x 23

1.150.510.013.550

Panel mount

5

24 V DC

34 x 23

1.150.510.051.550

Panel mount

5

24 V AC

34 x 23

1.150.510.054.550

Panel mount

5

115 V AC

34 x 23

1.150.510.056.550

Panel mount

5

230 V AC

34 x 23

1.740.500.012.550

Panel mount

7

12 V DC

34 x 23

1.740.500.013.550

Panel mount

7

24 V DC

34 x 23

1.740.500.051.550

Panel mount

7

24 V AC

34 x 23

1.740.500.054.550

Panel mount

7

115 V AC

34 x 23

1.740.500.056.550

Panel mount

7

230 V AC

34 x 23

1.180.110.012

Panel mount

4

12 V DC

37 x 28

1.180.110.013

Panel mount

4

24 V DC

37 x 28

1.180.110.061

Panel mount

4

24 V AC

37 x 28

1.180.110.064

Panel mount

4

115 V AC

37 x 28

1.180.110.066

Panel mount

4

230 V AC

37 x 28

1.340.110.012

Panel mount

6

12 V DC

37 x 26

1.340.110.013

Panel mount

6

24 V DC

37 x 26

1.340.110.061

Panel mount

6

24 V AC

37 x 26

1.340.110.064

Panel mount

6

115 V AC

37 x 26

1.340.110.066

Panel mount

6

230 V AC

37 x 26

Micro counters K47.20

K04.20

AK07

Mini counters

W15.51

W17.50

Standard counters BK14.11

MK16.11

0116 284 9900

COUNTERS AND PROCESS DEVICES

| 61


Counters and process devices

Hour meters – Electronic

• • • •

Range

Part no.

LCD display 7 or 8 Digit Battery or 10-30 V DC dontrol Service timer options

Time/range function

Input

Input switch level

Power supply

Dimensions

LCD hour meters

Codix 135

6.135.012.850

9999 h 59 min 59 sec or 9999999.9 sec

4-30 V DC NPN

-

Battery

48 x 24

6.135.012.851

9999 h 59 min 59 sec or 9999999.9 sec

4-30 V DC PNP

-

Battery

48 x 24

6.135.012.853

9999 h 59 min 59 sec or 9999999.9 sec

10-260 V AC/DC

-

Battery

48 x 24

LED hour meters Codix 141

6.141.012.300

99999.99 h

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30 V DC PNP

10-30 V DC

48 x 24

Codix 143

6.143.011.300.005k.00

99999.99 h / service counter

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30 V DC PNP

10-30 V DC

48 x 24

6.523.011.300

h, min, sec or hh.mm.ss

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30 V DC PNP

Standard (HTL)

10-30 V DC

48 x 24

6.523.011.3A0

h, min, sec or hh.mm.ss

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30 V DC PNP

4-30 V DC

10-30 V DC

48 x 24

6.523.012.300

h, min, sec or hh.mm.ss

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30 VDC PNP

Standard (HTL)

10-30 V DC

48 x 24

6.523.012.3A0

h, min, sec or hh.mm.ss

4-30VDC NPN / 40-30 V DC PNP

4-30 V DC

10-30 V DC

48 x 24

Codix 523

62 | COUNTERS AND PROCESS DEVICES

www.oem.co.uk


Counters and process devices

Hour meters – Electromechanical

• • • • •

Range

Rolling drum display 6, 7 or 8 digit display AC / DC control High shock versions available Run indicator options available

Part no.

Mounting

Time range

Power supply

Dimensions

HK47.20

3.060.200.383

Panel mount

99999.99 h

4.5-35 V DC

30 x 20

HK47.80

3.060.800.383

PCB mount

99999.99 h

4.5-35 V DC

30 x 20

H57

HR47

HR76.2

0116 284 9900

3.220.401.351

Panel mount

99999.99 h

10-30 V DC

48 x 48

3.220.401.074

"

"

100-130 V AC ( 50HZ )

48 x 48

3.220.401.084

"

"

100-130 V AC ( 60HZ )

48 x 48

3.220.401.381

"

"

100-130 V DC

48 x 48

3.220.401.075

"

"

187-264 V AC ( 50HZ )

48 x 48

3.220.401.085

"

"

187-264 V AC ( 60HZ )

48 x 48

3.474.901.084

Panel mount

AC- 99999.99 h DC- 999999.9 h

187-264 V AC (50HZ) W/ run indicator

Ø 50.5

3.474.901.075

"

"

100-130 V AC (60HZ) W/ run indicator

Ø 50.5

3.474.901.373

"

"

10-80 V DCW/O run indicator

Ø 50.5

3.474.911.373

"

"

10-80 V DC W/ run indicator

Ø 50.5

0.135.200.301

Panel mount

99999.9 h

115 V AC

Ø 50.5

0.135.200.302

"

"

230 V AC

Ø 50.5

0.135.200.373

"

"

10-80 V DC

Ø 50.5

COUNTERS AND PROCESS DEVICES

| 63


Counters and process devices

Multifunction devices

• • • •

Range

6 digit LCD or LED display AC or DC control RS232/422/485 interfaces options Analogue output units available

Part no.

Functions

Output

Input switch level

Power supply

Codix 544

See key A below

Pulse counter, position display, tachometer and timer.

No output/Optocoupler

Standard (HTL) or 4-30 V DC

90-260 V AC or 10-30 V DC

Codix 907/908

See key B below

Pulse counter, preset counter, timer, position display, tachometer

Relay

4-30 V DC

115/230 V AC or 10-30 V DC

Codix 923/924

See key C below

Pulse counter, preset counter, position display and batch counter

Relay / Optocoupler

Standard (HTL) or 4-30 V DC

24/100-230 V AC or 10-30 V DC

Codix 716/717

See key D below

Pulse counter, preset counter, tachometer and timer with RS232/422/485 Interface option

Relay / Optocoupler

-

100-230 V AC/10-30 V DC

2 optocoupler outputs

-

17-260 V AC/DC

Analogue output (0-10 V, +10- -10 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA)

-

17-260 V AC/DC

0.571.011.E00

Pulse counter, preset counter, tachometer, short time meter, sop watch, frequency display with RS232/485 interface option"

Codix 571 0.571.012.E90

A: Order code

6.544

.

01

X

.

a a) Output 1 = optocoupler 2 =no output1

B: Order code

6.90

a) Number of presets 7 = 1 preset 8 = 2 presets

X

.

01

b

c

X

b

c

b) O  utputs 0 = relays

6.92

X

.

X

0

.

0

a a) Number of presets 6 = 1 preset 7 = 2presets1

.

X

A

d

e

0

c) LCD version 0 = no back lighting 1) = green back lighting 4) = 2 colour negative red/green backlighting

1

a) Number of presets b) O  utputs 3= 1 preset 0 = relays 4 = 2, 4, 6 presets, 1 = optocouplers (only a = 4)

6.71

0

c) Input switiching level 0 = Standard (HTL) A = 4 … 30 V DC output

0

a

D: Order code

X

b) Power supply 0 = 90…260 V AC 3 = 10 … 30 V DC output

a

C: Order code

X

b) O  utputs 0 = relays 1 = optocouplers

64 | COUNTERS AND PROCESS DEVICES

X

X

b

c

.

X

X

X

d

e

f

d) P  ower supply 0 = 230 V AC 1 = 115 V AC 3 = 10…30 V DC

c) LCD options 0 = no back lighting 1) = green back lighting 2) = LED look, negative red backlighting 3 = multicolour, negative red/green backlighting

1

X b

.

X

XX

C

d

.

e) Input trigger level A = 4…40 V DC

d) P  ower supply 0 = 100…240 V AC +/- 10% 1 = 24 V AC +/- 10% 3 = 10…30 V DC

e) Input trigger level f) Version 0 = Standard level (HTL) 0 = Standard 923/924 A = 4…30 V DC level B=6  optocoupler outputs 924-6 (only b = 1) C = 4 relay outputs 924-4 (only b = 0)

Ex e

c) Power supply 0 = 100…240 V AC +/- 10% 3 = 10…30 V DC1 5 V input level: order code: 7.XXX.01X.XXX.9382

d) Interface 00 = none 05 = RS232 06 = RS422 07 = RS485

e) Optional (only for a = 7, b = 0, d = 00) Ex-proof housing acc. to explosion proof class EEx D IIC T6 with encapsulated cable 2 x 3 m, various mounting parts, PTB approval certificate

www.oem.co.uk


Counters and process devices

Application specific devices

• • • • • Range

LED display AC / DC control SSI position display Set point adjuster Strain gauge display

Part no.

Description

Specifications

Power supply

Dimensions

6.533.012.300

0-12v or 0-24mA analogue signal generator

-

10-30 V DC

48 x2 4

0.570.011.E00

Display for use with SSI absolute encoders with RS232/485 interface option

2 optocoupler outputs

17-260 V AC/DC

96 x 48

0.570.012.E90

Display for use with SSI absolute encoders with RS232/485 interface option

Analogue outputs

17-260 V AC/DC

96 x 48

0.570.012.E05

Display for use with SSI absolute encoders with RS232/485 interface option

Serial interface, RS232/485

17-260 V AC/DC

96 x 48

0.570.010.305

Display for use with SSI absolute encoders with RS232/485 interface option

2 relay outputs and RS232/485

17-260 V AC/DC

96 x 48

Codix 566

See key below

Display for use with all common strain gauge inputs

-

10-30 V DC or 90-260 V AC

96 x 48

A: Order code

6.56

0

Codix 533

Codix 570

6

.

a a) Input type 6 = strain-guage inputs1

b) O  utputs 0 = Relays

1

0 b

.

X c

c) P  ower supply 0 = 90 …260 V AC 3 = 10…30 V DC

0

X d d) F  urther outputs (optional) 0 = none 9 = analogue output (only for DC version)

Accessories A full range of accessories are available for the Kubler counter and process meter range, please contact for further details

Adapters: bezel adapter, slip on bezel, front bezel

Sealing covers and transparent covers

Socket boxes

Blind housings and terminal covers

0116 284 9900

COUNTERS AND PROCESS DEVICES

| 65


CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


General information

68

Wound primary series LCTM

69

Round conductor series LCTR

70

LCTB 45

71

LCTB 50

72

LCTB 62

73

LCTB 74

74

LCTB 86

75

LCTB 100

76

LCTB 104

77

LCTB 140

78

LCTB 225

79

Split core series LCTS

80

Accessories

81


Current transformers

Low voltage current transformers Current transformers are used for the measurement of electric alternating currents. When current in a circuit (primary current) is too high to directly apply to measuring instruments, a current transformer produces a reduced current (secondary current) accurately proportional to the current in the circuit, which can be conveniently connected to measuring and recording instruments. A current transformer also isolates the measuring instruments from what may be very high voltage in the monitored circuit. Relationship between primary and secondary currents is called rated transformation ratio.

Features • Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Wide range of supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters. • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, the conductor, a current bar. • Shields designed to seal connections. General specification • Applicable standard: IEC/EN 60044 -1, BS 3938, IS 2705 -1 • Case: 10% glass filled polycarbonate, flame retardant grades classified • UL 94V-0 • Connection: Two connection on each side. M4 screws with self lifting clamp strap. • Insulation class E (120°C max) • Maximum system voltage: 0,72 kV • Operating frequency: 50 Hz • Rated primary rating: 1 A…7500 A • Rated secondary output: 5 Aw or 1 A • Rated burden: 1, 1.25, 1.5, 2.5, 3.75, 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 20, 30, 45, 60, 100 VA • Accuracy class: 0.2, 0.2S – for laboratory and power measurement • Accuracy class: 0.5 – for accurate measuring • Accuracy class: 1 – for general measurement, for analog meters • Ambient temperature: -20°C …+45°C • Storage temperature: -50°C…+80°C • Thermal short circuit current (Ith): 40 x In for wound type • 60 x In for bus bar type • Dynamic short circuit current (Idyn): 2.5xIth • Instrument security factor (FS): 2.5, 5, 10

68 | CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

www.oem.co.uk


Current transformers

Wound primary series LCTM

TECHNICAL DATA

LCTM 62/W (40)

LCTM 74/W (45)

Width

62mm

74mm

Depth

40mm

45mm

1 A...25 A

1 A...60 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2; 0.5; 1

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTM 62/W (40)

0116 284 9900

Dimensions LCTM 74/W (45)

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

| 69


Current transformers

Round conductor series LCTR TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter

LCTR 45/14 (40)

LCTR 50/14 (30)

LCTR 50/14 (50)

LCTR 62/R (40)

Ø 14mm

Ø 14mm

Ø 14mm

Ø 22mm

Width

40mm

31mm

51mm

40mm

Depth

45mm

50mm

50mm

62mm

30 A...300 A

40 A...300 A

30 A...300 A

50 A...600 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.5; 1

0.5; 1

0.5; 1

0.2; 0.5; 1

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTR 45/14 (40)

Dimensions LCTR 50/14 (30)

Dimensions LCTR 50/14 (50)

Dimensions LCTR 62/R

70 | CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

www.oem.co.uk


Current transformers

LCTB 45 Busbar series

LCTB 45/21 (40)

TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter

Ø 20mm

Busbar

20 x 10

Width

40 mm

Depth

45 mm

Primary winding

50 A...400A

Secondary winding

1 A, 5 A

Accuracy class

0.5; 1

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m . c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 45

0116 284 9900

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

| 71


Current transformers

LCTB 50 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter

LCTB 50/21 (30)

LCTB 50/30 (30)

LCTB 50/21 (50)

LCTB 50/30 (50)

Ø 21mm

Ø 26mm

Ø 21mm

Ø 26mm

20 x 10

30 x 10

20 x 10

30 x 10

20 x15

Busbar

20 x 15

20 x 20

20 x 20

2 x 20 x 10

2 x 20 x 10

Width

31mm

31mm

51mm

51mm

Depth

50mm

50mm

50mm

50mm

40 A...400 A

75 A...600 A

50 A...400 A

50 A...600 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.5; 1

0.5; 1

0.5; 1

0.5; 1

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www. o e m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 50/21 (30)

Dimensions LCTB 50/21 (50)

72 | CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Dimensions LCTB 50/30 (30)

Dimensions LCTB 50/30 (50)

www.oem.co.uk


Current transformers

LCTB 62 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter Busbar

LCTB 62/20 (40)

LCTB 62/30 (40)

LCTB 62/30 (50)

LCTB 62/40 (40)

-

Ø 30mm

Ø 28mm

Ø 31mm

20 x 12

30 x 10

30 x 10

40 x 10 2 x 30 x 10

2 x 15 x 6

2 x 25 x 6

-

Width

40mm

40mm

50mm

40mm

Depth

62mm

62mm

62mm

62mm

50 A...400 A

50 A...800 A

40 A...800 A

100 A...800 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

0116 284 9900

Dimensions LCTB 62/20 (40)

Dimensions LCTB 62/30 (40)

Dimensions LCTB 62/30 (50)

Dimensions LCTB 62/40 (40)

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

| 73


Current transformers

LCTB 74 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter Busbar

LCTB 74/20 (45)

LCTB 74/30 (45)

LCTB 74/40 (45)

LCTB 74/50 (45)

Ø 20mm

Ø 26mm

Ø 35mm

Ø 41mm

20 x 10

30 x 15

40 x 12

50 x 12 2 x 40 x 10

-

2 x 20 x 10

2 x 30 x 15

Width

45mm

45mm

45mm

45mm

Depth

74mm

74mm

74mm

74mm

30 A...400 A

30 A...800 A

40 A...1000 A

100 A...1000 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www. o e m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 74/20 (45)

Dimensions LCTB 74/30 (45)

Dimensions LCTB 74/40 (45)

Dimensions LCTB 74/50 (45)

74 | CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

www.oem.co.uk


Current transformers

LCTB 86 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter Busbar

LCTB 86/40 (45)

LCTB 86/50 (45)

LCTB 86/60 (45)

Ø 36mm

Ø 46mm

Ø 51mm

40 x 10

50 x 12

60 x 12

2 x 30 x 15

2 x 40 x 15

2 x 50 x 15

Width

45mm

45mm

45mm

Depth

86mm

86mm

86mm

50 A...1000 A

100 A...1250 A

50 A...600 A

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 86/40 (45)

Dimensions LCTB 86/50 (45)

Dimensions LCTB 86/60 (45)

0116 284 9900

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

| 75


Current transformers

LCTB 100 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA

LCTB 100/100 V (45)

LCTB 100/130 V (45)

Busbar

41 x 103

38 x 128

Width

45mm

45mm

Depth

100mm

100mm

400 A...2500 A

400 A...3200 A

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2; 0.5; 1

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www. o e m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 100/100 (45)

76 | CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Dimensions LCTB 100/130 (45)

www.oem.co.uk


Current transformers

LCTB 104 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter

Busbar

LCTB 104/60 (45)

LCTB 104/80 (45)

Ø 54mm

Ø 65mm

60 x 12

80 x 12

2 x 50 x 15

2 x 60 x 15

2 x 40 x 20

2 x 50 x 25

Width

45mm

45mm

Depth

104mm

104mm

100 A...1600 A

200 A...2000 A

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 104/60 (45)

0116 284 9900

Dimensions LCTB 104/80 (45)

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

| 77


Current transformers

LCTB 140 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA Hole diameter Busbar

LCTB 140/80 (45)

LCTB 140/100H (45)

LCTB 140/100V (45)

Ø 72mm

Ø 86mm

Ø 86mm

LCTB 140/130V (45) -

80 x 30

100 x 30

100 x 30

70 x 130

2 x 60 x 25

2 x 80 x 25

2 x 80 x 25

2 x 70 x 30

2 x 70 x 30

Width

45mm

45mm

45mm

45mm

Depth

140mm

140mm

140mm

140mm 400 A...5000 A

Primary winding

200 A...2000 A

200 A...4000 A

200 A...3000 A

Secondary zzz

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

Accuracy class

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m . c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 140/80 (45)

Dimensions LCTB 140/100H (45)

Dimensions LCTB 140/100V (45)

Dimensions LCTB 140/130V (45)

78 | CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

www.oem.co.uk


Current transformers

LCTB 225 Busbar series

TECHNICAL DATA

LCTB 225/125 (50)

LCTB 225/167 (50)

Busbar

124 x 93

166 x 65

Width

50mm

50mm

Depth

225mm

225mm

600 A...6000 A

1000 A...7500 A

Primary winding Secondary winding Accuracy class

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

0.2S; 0.2; 0.5; 1

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTB 225/125 (50)

0116 284 9900

Dimensions LCTB 225/167 (50)

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

| 79


Current transformers

Split core series LCTS TECHNICAL DATA Window dims

LCTS 93/30SC (40)

LCTS 125/50SC (40)

LCTS 155/80SC (40)

LCTS 195/80SC (64) 82 x 162mm

23 x 33mm

85 x 54mm

85 x 122mm

Width

40mm

40mm

40mm

64mm

Depth

93mm

125mm

155mm

195mm

Primary winding

100 A...400 A

250 A...2000 A

250 A...3000 A

500 A...5000 A

Secondary winding

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

1 A, 5 A

Accuracy class

0.5; 1; 3

0.5; 1

0.5; 1

0.5; 1

F or m or e in f or m a tion , visit ou r we bsite , www.oe m. c o . u k

• Wide range of accuracy classes: 0.2S, 0.2, 0.5, 1 • Supported primary currents, the dimensions of rails, the length of casing and hole diameters • Multiple mounting methods, including wall mounting, 35mm DIN rail, conductor, current bar • Shields to seal connections

Dimensions LCTS 93/30SC (40)

Dimensions LCTS 125/50SC, 155/80SC, 195/80SC

Side view

80 | CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Front view

www.oem.co.uk


Current transformers

Accessories

Terminal cap Terminal

• Thread cutting screw 8 x 35mm • Thread cutting screw 8 x 45mm • Thread cutting screw 8 x 75mm • Wall mounting clamp • Swivel

Thread cutting screw

• Shoe for self tapping M4 screw Swivel

Core

Order code

Transformer type

0904-130-123

LCTR 50 (30), LCTB 50 (30)

0904-130-002

LCTR 45, LCTB 45

Shoe for self tapping screw DIN rail plate

LCTM 62W LCTM 74W

Case

LCTR 62 0904-130-124

LCTB 62

Wall mounting clamp

LCTB 74 LCTB 86 LCTB 100 LCTB 104

Kit order code 0904-130-140

0904-130-141

0904-130-142

0904-130-143

0904-130-144

0904-130-145

0904-130-146

0904-130-147

0116 284 9900

Description

No. of pcs.

Transformer type LCTR 45, LCTB 45, LCTM 62W, LCTM 74W

Wall mounting clamp

2

Thread cutting screw 8 x 35mm

2

Wall mounting clamp

2

Swivel

2

Shoe for self tapping M4 screw

2

Thread cutting screw 8 x 45mm

2

Wall mounting clamp

2

Swivel

2

Shoe for self tapping M4 screw

2

Thread cutting screw 8 x 45mm

4

Wall mounting clamp

2

Swivel

4

Shoe for self tapping M4 screw

4

Thread cutting screw 8 x 75mm

4

Wall mounting clamp

2

Swivel

4

Shoe for self tapping M4 screw

4

Thread cutting screw 8 x 75mm

1

Thread cutting screw 8 x 45mm

5

Wall mounting clamp

2

Shoe for self tapping M4 screw

6

Thread cutting screw 8 x 75mm

6

Wall mounting clamp

2

Shoe for self tapping M4 screw

6

Thread cutting screw 8 x 35mm

6

Wall mounting clamp

2

Shoe for self tapping M4 screw

4

LCTR 50, LCTB 50

LCTR 62, LCTB 62, LCTB 74, LCTB 86

LCTB 104

LCTB 140

LCTB 140/130 V

LCTB 225

LCTB 100/100 V, LCT 100/130 V

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

| 81


DATA RECORDERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


KD7 screen recorder

84

KD8 screen recorder

86

N30B panel recorder

87

SM61 data logger with www server

87


Data recorders

KD7 screen recorder

• • • •

LCD TFT 5.7’’ screen with IP65 touch panel ETHERNET communication with www and FTP server Up to 24 measuring channels RS-232, RS-485 and USB serial interfaces

The KD7 recorder is applied as a data acquisition station in measuring systems. It suits applications to measure, visualize and supervise technical process parameters in various industrial branches, e.g. in pharmacy, food, chemical. It can be also used as an autonomous measuring and recording device.

KD7 recorder complies with the regulation 21 CFR Part 11, regulation for electronic records and signatures issued by Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

KD7 recorder has the following features:

• Easy and intuitive servicing based on the graphical Windows and touch panel • Communication interfaces: RS-232, RS-485 MODBUS Master and Slave, MODBUS Slave TCP/IP (NEW), ETHERNET 10 Base-T, USB 1.1 Device • Exchange configuration data between the recorder and PC through the USB interface or the CompactFlash card

• HTTP server (www) enables to carry out through the www browser, the preview of the recorder current state and the sampling • Mathematical functions • Archiving and visualisation of measuring data transmitted to KD7 from external devices via RS-485 MODBUS or Ethernet

MEASURING INPUTS and OUTPUTS Depending on the model, KD7 has:

SECURITY To ensure the recorder is secure in the network, each customer can individually login, password protect and configure the access rights to the recorder archive memory.

• 6 or 12 galvanically isolated analog measuring channels • 16 measuring channels for data transmitted through communication interfaces • 16 or 32 alarms and 8 or 16 digital inputs • 4 or 8 analog outputs DATA PRESENTATION To illustrate the process run, the customer can choose many forms of data presentation:

• • • •

linear, bar trends, and circular digital and analog indicators statistics Each channel has the possibility to assign settings as: colour, name, range and presentation view

PC SOFTWARE KD7 SETUP, KD ARCHIVING, KD CHECK and KD CONNECT programs are destined for KD7 recorder servicing: The KD7 SETUP program is used to configure the KD7 recorder. KD ARCHIVING is the program used for visualization, printout and exporting data. Data can be recorded in CSV or binary format with digital signature. KD CHECK is used for verification of the signature in the archive KD CONNECT provides the communication between PC and the KD7 recorder through the USB link. It enables the acquisition of archived data from the recorder, writing and erasing data on the CF card.

DATA ARCHIVING For data archiving KD7 recorder has:

• exchangeable external memory (CompactFlash card), from 16 MB up to 4 GB • 6 MB internal memory with data support

84 | DATA RECORDERS

www.oem.co.uk


Data recorders

KD7 screen recorder Part no. key

Screen recorder KD7 - X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

0

Measuring inputs (Slot 1): without measuring inputs

0

6 programmable measuring inputs

1

6 standard measuring inputs: 0..10 V

2

6 standard measuring inputs: 0..20 mA

3

6 standard measuring inputs: 4..20 mA 6 standard measuring inputs: 3 x 0..10 V + 3 x 0..20 mA 6 standard measuring inputs: 3 x 0..10 V + 3 x 4..20 mA

4

3 programmable measuring inputs

7

5 6

Measuring inputs (Slot 2): See Table 1 Table 1

Interface measuring input: with RS-485 interface measuring input

Measuring inputs (Slot 2):

1

without measuring inputs

0

0

6 programmable measuring inputs

1

8 alarms (NO relays) + 8 alarms (OptoMos)

1

6 standard measuring inputs: 0..10 V

2

8 alarms (NC relays) + 8 alarms (OptoMos)

2

6 standard measuring inputs: 0..20 mA

3

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..5 mA

3

4

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..20 mA

4

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 4..20 mA

5

6 standard measuring inputs: 4..20 mA 6 standard measuring inputs: 3 x 0..10 V + 3 x 0..20 mA 6 standard measuring inputs: 3 x 0..10 V + 3 x 4..20 mA

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..5 V

6

3 programmable measuring inputs

7

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..10 V

7

Digital signals/analog outputs (Slot 3): without digital signals and analog outputs

5 6

Digital signals/analog outputs (Slot 4): See Table 2 Interfaces:

Table 2

USB

1

Digital signals/analog outputs (Slot 4):

USB + Ethernet + RS-485 (2)

2

without digital signals and analog outputs

0

USB + Ethernet + RS-232

3

8 alarms (NO relays) + 8 alarms (OptoMos)

1

8 alarms (NC relays) + 8 alarms (OptoMos)

2

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..5 mA

3

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..20 mA

4

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 4..20 mA

5

Memory for measuring data: with a 4 GB CF card 1

6

Supply: 90..253 V a.c.

1

Recorder firmware: without mathematical functions 2

0

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..5 V

6

with mathematical functions

1

8 digital inputs + 4 analog outputs: 0..10 V

7

Softwares servicing the recorder from PC: KD Connect, KD Check

1

KD Connect, KD Check, KD Archive, KD7 Setup

2

Example of order: The code: KD7-1-1-1-0-0-1-6-1-1-1-8 means: KD7 recorder, (Slot 1) with 6 programmable measuring inputs, (Slot 2) with 6 programmable measuring inputs, with RS-485 interface measuring input, (Slot 3) without digital and analog outputs, (Slot 4) without digital signals and analog outputs, with USB interface, with a 4GB CF memory card, supply: 90..253V a.c., with mathematical functions, with KD connect and KD Check softwares, without extra quality inspection requirements.

0116 284 9900

1. CF card with the lowest capacity from currently accessible cards on the market 2. A key for the activation of mathematical functions can be ordered separately

DATA RECORDERS

| 85


Data recorders

KD8 screen recorder

• Intuitive servicing - LCD TFT 5.7’’ screen, with touch panel • IP65 protection grade on the front panel • 3 or 6 analog programmable measuring inputs • RS-485 and USB serial interfaces

The KD8 recorder is applied as a data acquisition station in measuring systems. It suits applications to measure, visualize and supervise technical process parameters in various industrial branches, e.g. in pharmacy, food, chemical. It can be also used as an autonomous measuring and recording device KD8 recorder complies with the regulation 21 CFR Part 11, regulation for electronic records and signatures issued by Food and Drug Administration (FDA) MEASURING INPUTS and OUTPUTS

SECURITY To ensure the recorder is secure in the network, each customer can individually login, password protect and configure the access rights to the recorder archive memory. PC SOFTWARE KD8 SETUP, KD ARCHIVING, KD CHECK and KD CONNECT programs are destined for KD8 recorder servicing:

Depending on the model, KD8 has:

• 3 or 6 galvanically isolated analog measuring channels • 6 or 12 alarm outputs (2 for each channel) • 4 or 8 digital inputs DATA PRESENTATION To illustrate the process run, the customer can choose many forms

• the KD8 SETUP program is used to configure the KD8 recorder • the KD ARCHIVING program is designed for visualization, printout and export to CSV format, data recorded in the binary format with digital signature, obtained from the recorder • the KD CONNECT program provides the communication between PC and the KD8 recorder through the USB link. It enables the acquisition of archived data from the recorder, writing and erasing data on the CF card • the KD CHECK program is used for verification of the digital signature in archive

of data presentation:

• linear, bar trends, and circular • digital and analog indicators • statistics • each channel has the possibility to assign settings as: colour, name, range and presentation view DATA ARCHIVING For data archiving KD8 recorder has:

• exchangeable external memory (CompactFlash card) • 6 MB internal memory with data support

Screen recorder KD8 - X

X

X

X

00

0

Measuring inputs: 3 programmable measuring inputs

1

6 programmable measuring inputs

2

Alarms and binary inputs: without alarms and binary inputs

0

alarms (NO relays) + binary inputs 1

1

Supply: 90..253 V a.c.

1

Softwares servicing the recorder from PC: KD Connect, KD Check

1

KD Connect, KD Check, KD Archive, KD8 Setup

2

1. For each 3 measuring inputs, 6 alarms and 4 logic inputs are installed 86 | DATA RECORDERS

www.oem.co.uk


Data recorders

N30B panel recorder

• Data display with RS485 recorder • Modbus master/slave • 5 digit (14mm) 3 colour programmable display with highlighted unit • Data archiving on SD card/PC in MySQL database • 21 point scaling

Technical data Input: RS-485: Memory capacity: Internal: Memory card: Outputs: Relay: Analog: OC output: Digital interface: RS-485: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

Modbus RTU x2 up to 100 channels, 10 groups, 10 registers in each 308000 records Up to 4GB (512 mb 34 560 000 records) 2 x relays, NO contacts, 250 V ac/0.5 A ac 2 x relays, CO contacts, 250 V ac/0.5 A ac – optional Current programmable 0/4…20 mA – optional Voltage programmable 0…10 V – optional OC type, passive, npm, 30 V dc/30 mA – optional MODBUS RTU Master/Slave 96 x 48 x 93mm IP65 front 85…253 V ac; 90…320 V dc, 20…40 V ac, 20…60 V dc

Part number key Digital panel meter Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac, 90…320 V dc 20…40 V ac, 20…60 V dc Additional outputs: none OC output, RS-485 (port 2), analog outputs

N30B

X

X

XX

00

E

0

1 2 0 1

OC output, RS-485 (port 2), analog outputs switched-over relay outputs

2

Unit: unit code acc. to the table 1 on page 150

XX

SM61 data logger with www server • Visualisation of current and archived data according to customer configuration (synoptic maps, charts, tables) by any web browser • Readout up to 2500 values from slave devices (up to 100 devices, each 25 registers) • User-friendly application for data configuration • Built-in FTP and web servers • Alarms or binary inputs for control of archiving

Technical data Interface: Port 1: RS-485, RS-232 Communication for PC, HMI and Modbus Master devices: Port 2: RS-485 Slave device input Ethernet 10/100 Base-T: TCP/IP, HTTP, ICMP, DHCP, ARP, Modbus TCP, FTP Inputs: RS-485 Modbus Digital 2 x binary – optional Outputs: Relay: 2 x relays, NO contacts, 250 V ac/0.5 A ac optional Dimensions: 45 x 120 x 100 mm Protection level: IP40 front Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac; 90…300 V dc, 20…40 V ac, 20…60 V dc 0…16 V ac, 10…20 V dc

0116 284 9900

Part number key Data logger with server Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac, 90…300 V dc 20…40 V ac, 20…60 V dc 10…16 V ac, 10…20 V dc Additional inputs/outputs: 2 relay outputs 2 binary inputs

SM61

X

X

00

E

0

1 2 3 1 2

DATA RECORDERS

| 87


ENCLOSURES

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Choosing an enclosure

90

Customised enclosure solutions

91

Cubo D – Small thermoplastic enclosures

92

Cubo S – Small thermoplastic enclosures

94

Cubo O – Medium thermoplastic enclosures

97

Cubo W – Wall cabinets

101

Cubo E – Steel cabinets

102

Cubo F – Steel terminal enclosures

103

Cubo N – GRP enclosures

105

Cubo X – EX rated steel enclosures

107


Enclosures

Choosing an enclosure Material Ensto enclosures are available in a variety of materials for all applications, selecting the right material for your application is essential.

3) Polyester-painted mild steel – This material has high impact resistance and a high degree of protection.

1) Polycarbonate – This material is suitable for outdoor use and demanding conditions. It is light with good resistance to chemicals and high impact resistance.

4) Stainless steel (AISI 304) – High impact, corrosion and UV radiation resistance. Suitable for industrial environments including the food industry.

2) ABS – This material is cost-effective, light with good chemical resistance and easy to machine.

5) Acid-proof steel (AISI 316) – Extremely high resistance to corrosion, perfect for use in harsh environments including offshore applications.

Remember… Enclosures should be selected with their proposed contents and location in mind. It is important to consider whether further components are likely to be added at a later stage and if so whether or not the dimensions

are adequate. The enclosure dimensions quoted by Ensto are always external dimensions, so it is important to remember that the internal mounting space available is always smaller than the actual enclosure.

Safety classification IP classes, EN 60529

IK classes, EN 62262

1st NUMERAL IP

2nd NUMERAL IP

Protection against intrusion

Protection against liquids

0: No protection

1: Protection against objects max. 50 mm

0: No protection

1: Protection against vertically falling water drops

2: Protection against objects max. 12 mm

3: Protection against objects max. 2.5 mm

2: Protection against rain drops falling in max. 15° angle

3: Protection against rain drops falling in max. 60° angle

4: Protection against solid objects max. 1 mm

5: Protection against dust, limited intrusion acceptable all directions

4: Protection against water drops falling from all directions

5: Protection against low pressure sprue water from all directions*

6: Protection against jet water under pressure *

7: Protection against water intrusion under submersion at 15 cm to 1 m depth

8: Protection against water intrusion under long term submersion under pressure

* Minor intrusion acceptable

6: Total protection against dust

90 | ENCLOSURES

Blow energy/J

IK code

< 1 2 5 10

IK 01 - 05 IK 06 IK 07 IK 08 IK 09

20

IK 10

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Customised enclosures Ensto is an international group and family owned company specialising in the development, manufacture and marketing of electrical systems and supplies. Headquartered in Finland, Ensto employs 1,300 people in Europe and Asia.

the CuboLink tool, design work is now easier and faster. CuboLink offers a fast, flexible design process using existing, proven design templates and complete parts list, allowing us to create customer-specific designs easily.

We can now offer you or your customer customised enclosures better and faster than ever before. Using Enstoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Cubostics concept and in particular

Ensto offers the broadest range of enclosures on the market. Now with the Cubostics concept and the CuboLink tool, we can also offer the easiest and most effective way to design and order customised enclosures.

Stage 1

Stage 2

Using the Ensto CuboLink tool along with our Sales Engineers, design your own customised enclosure.

Once your enclosure design is complete, you can review your CAD drawings and 3D model.

Stage 3

Stage 4

Your drawings are then passed to the factory in Finland and your customised enclosure is manufactured.

Finally your fully customised enclosure is delivered direct to your door.

0116 284 9900

ENCLOSURES

| 91


Enclosures

Cubo D enclosures

• • • • •

53 x 55 x 36mm to 230 x 300 x 111mm

IP66/67 rated Standard colour RAL7035 Grey or transparent lid Polycarbonate for outdoor use (UL approved) ABS for indoor use

Introduction The Ensto Cubo D range is designed for demanding OEM use and is manufactured in high quality Polycarbonate or ABS.

The standard colour is grey RAL 7035 with the lid available in either grey or transparent.

General specification Material Degree of protection EN 60529 Impact resistance EN 50102 (+35ºC/-25ºC) Operating temperature Flammability UL 94 Standard colour Transparent cover

Polycarbonate

ABS

IP 66/67

IP 66/67

IK 08/IK 08

IK 07/IK 06

-50ºC to +100ºC

-40ºC to +60ºC

V-2

HB

Grey RAL 7035

Grey RAL 7035

Polycarbonate

Polycarbonate

Cover gasket

PUR (polyurethane)

PUR (polyurethane)

Cover screws

Stainless steel, DIN X6CR17

Stainless steel, DIN X6CR17

FI, GL, UL, cUL, GOST

FI, GL, GOST

Certificates

Order guide Dimensions (W x H x D)

ABS grey lid

ABS transparent lid

Polycarbonate grey lid

Polycarbonate transparent lid

Size 53 x 55 x 36 mm

DABP050504G

DABP050504T

DPCP050504G

DPCP050504T

Size 53 x 63 x 36 mm

DABP050704G

DABP050704T

DPCP050704G

DPCP050704T

Size 80 x 82 x 56 mm

DABP080806G

DABP080806T

DPCP080806G

DPCP080806T

Size 80 x 82 x 86 mm

DABP080809G

DABP080809T

DPCP080809G

DPCP080809T

Size 80 x 120 x 56 mm

DABP081206G

DABP081206T

DPCP081206G

DPCP081206T

Size 80 x 120 x 86 mm

DABP081209G

DABP081209T

DPCP081209G

DPCP081209T

Size 80 x 160 x 56 mm

DABP081606G

DABP081606T

DPCP081606G

DPCP081606T

Size 80 x 160 x 86 mm

DABP081609G

DABP081609T

DPCP081609G

DPCP081609T

Size 120 x 122 x 56 mm

DABP121206G

DABP121206T

DPCP121206G

DPCP121206T

Size 120 x 122 x 86 mm

DABP121209G

DABP121209T

DPCP121209G

DPCP121209T

Size 120 x 160 x 91 mm

DABP121609G

DABP121609T

DPCP121609G

DPCP121609T

Size 120 x 200 x 86 mm

DABP122009G

DABP122009T

DPCP122009G

DPCP122009T

Size 150 x 200 x 76 mm

DABP152008G

DABP152008T

DPCP152008G

DPCP152008T

Size 160 x 240 x 91 mm

DABP162409G

DABP162409T

DPCP162409G

DPCP162409T

Size 160 x 240 x 121 mm

DABP162412G

DABP162412T

DPCP162412G

DPCP162412T

Size 230 x 300 x 86 mm

DABP233009G

DABP233009T

DPCP233009G

DPCP233009T

Size 230 x 300 x 111 mm

DABP233011G

DABP233011T

DPCP233011G

DPCP233011T

92 | ENCLOSURES

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo D – accessories

• Mounting plates • DIN rail • Hinges • Screw sets

Order guide Galvanized steel mounting plates

Part number 55 x 65 x 1.5 mm

DMP0808

65 x 93 x 1.5 mm

DMP0812

65 x 133 x 1.5 mm

DMP0816

95 x 105 x 1.5 mm

DMP1212

105 x 132 x 1.5 mm

DMP1216

105 x 172 x 1.5 mm

DMP1220

133 x 172 x 1.5 mm

DMP1520

145 x 213 x 1.5 mm

DMP1624

210 x 285 x 1.5 mm

Galvanized steel DIN rail

Hinges & screws

DR15016.4

Length 48 mm, width 15 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR15038.4

Length 68 mm, width 15 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR15058.4

Length 106 mm, width 15 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR15096.4

Length 146 mm, width 15 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR15136.4

Length 68 mm, width 35 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR35058.4

Length 106 mm, width 35 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR35096.4

Length 146 mm, width 35 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR35136.4

Length 170 mm, width 35 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR35160.4

Length 186 mm, width 35 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR35176.4

Length 225 mm, width 35 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR35215.4

Length 285 mm, width 35 mm, DIN 46277/3

DR35275.4

Hinge pair, size 28 x 28 mm

DSHI1

Fastening lug, set of 4

DFL1

Cover plug

DCP1

Cover screw, short, 3 x 18/10 mm

DLS1

Screw set, 2 short cover screws and 2 mounting screws

DLSA1.02

Screw set, 4 short cover screws and 4 mounting screws

DLSA1.04

Screw set, 6 short cover screws and 4 mounting screws

DLSA1.06

Screw set, 6 long cover screws and 4 mounting screws

DLSA2.06

Cover screws, long, for 162412 and 233011

0116 284 9900

DMP2330

Length 26 mm, width 15 mm, DIN 46277/3

DLS2

Cover screws, TORX TX20, 3x18/10 mm

DLS3

Mounting screws, 3 x 7 mm

DMS1

ENCLOSURES

| 93


Enclosures

Cubo S enclosures

• • • • • •

75 x 125 x 75mm to 175 x 250 x 150mm

IP66/67 rated Standard colour RAL 7035 Grey or transparent lid Polycarbonate for outdoor use (UL approved) ABS for indoor use Available with pre-pressed PG or metric knock-outs

Introduction The Ensto Cubo S range is a series of small to medium size enclosures manufactured in high quality Polycarbonate or ABS. The standard colour

is RAL 7035 with the lid available in grey or transparent. Cubo S is also available with pre-pressed knock-outs.

General specification Material Degree of protection EN 60529 Impact resistance EN 50102 (+35ºC/-25ºC) Operating temperature Flammability UL 94 Standard colour Transparent cover Cover gasket Cover screws Certificates

Polycarbonate

ABS

IP 66/67 IK 08/IK 08 -50ºC to +100ºC V-2…5VA Grey RAL 7035 Polycarbonate PUR (polyurethane) Polyamide FI, GL, UL, cUL, GOST

IP 66/67 IK 07/IK 06 -40ºC to +60ºC HB Grey RAL 7035 Polycarbonate PUR (polyurethane) Polyamide FI, GL, GOST

Order guide Dimensions (W x H x D)

ABS grey lid

Polycarbonate grey lid

ABS transparent lid

Polycarbonate transparent lid

75 x 125 x 35 mm

SABP081304LG

SPCP081304LG

SABP081304LT

SPCP081304LT

75 x 125 x 50 mm

SABP081305LG

SPCP081305LG

SABP081305LT

SPCP081305LT

75 x 125 x 60 mm

SABP081306G

SPCP081306G

SABP081306T

SPCP081306T

75 x 125 x 75 mm

SABP081308G

SPCP081308LG

SABP081308T

SPCP081308LT

75 x 125 x 75 mm

SABP081308LG

SPCP081308G

SABP081308LT

SPCP081308T

75 x 125 x 100 mm

SABP081310G

SPCP081310LG

SABP081310T

SPCP081310LT

75 x 125 x 100 mm

SABP081310LG

SPCP081310G

SABP081310LT

SPCP081310T

75 x 125 x 125 mm

SABP081313G

SPCP081313G

SABP081313T

SPCP081313T

100 x 100 x 35 mm

SABP101004LG

SPCP101004LG

SABP101004LT

SPCP101004LT

100 x 100 x 60 mm

SABP101006G

SPCP101006G

SABP101006T

SPCP101006T

125 x 125 x 35 mm

SABP131304LG

SPCP131304LG

SABP131304LT

SPCP131304LT

125 x 125 x 50 mm

SABP131305LG

SPCP131305LG

SABP131305LT

SPCP131305LT

125 x 125 x 60 mm

SABP131306G

SPCP131306G

SABP131306T

SPCP131306T

125 x 125 x 75 mm

SABP131308G

SPCP131308G

SABP131308T

SPCP131308T

125 x 125 x 75 mm

SABP131308LG

SPCP131308LG

SABP131308LT

SPCP131308LT

125 x 125 x 100 mm

SABP131310G

SPCP131310G

SABP131310T

SPCP131310T

125 x 125 x 100 mm

SABP131310LG

SPCP131310LG

SABP131310LT

SPCP131310LT

125 x 125 x 125 mm

SABP131313G

SPCP131313G

SABP131313T

SPCP131313T

125 x 175 x 35 mm

SABP131804LG

SPCP131804LG

SABP131804LT

SPCP131804LT

125 x 175 x 50 mm

SABP131805LG

SPCP131805LG

SABP131805LT

SPCP131805LT

125 x 175 x 60 mm

SABP131806G

SPCP131806G

SABP131806T

SPCP131806T

125 x 175 x 75 mm

SABP131808LG

SPCP131808LG

SABP131808LT

SPCP131808LT

125 x 175 x 75 mm

SABP131808G

SPCP131808G

SABP131808T

SPCP131808T

125 x 175 x 100 mm

SABP131810LG

SPCP131810LG

SABP131810LT

SPCP131810LT

125 x 175 x 100 mm

SABP131810G

SPCP131810G

SABP131810T

SPCP131810T

125 x 175 x 125 mm

SABP131813LG

SPCP131813G

SABP131813LT

SPCP131813LT

125 x 175 x 125 mm

SABP131813G

SPCP131813LG

SABP131813T

SPCP131813T

125 x 175 x 150 mm

SABP131815G

SPCP131815G

SABP131815T

SPCP131815T

125 x 250 x 125 mm

SABP132513G

SPCP132513G

SABP132513T

SPCP132513T

175 x 175 x 75 mm

SABP181808G

SPCP181808G

SABP181808T

SPCP181813T

175 x 175 x 100 mm

SABP181810G

SPCP181810G

SABP181810T

SPCP181808T

175 x 175 x 125 mm

SABP181813G

SPCP181813G

SABP181813T

SPCP181810T

175 x 175 x 150 mm

SABP181815G

SPCP181815G

SABP181815T

SPCP181815T

175 x 250 x 75 mm

SABP182508G

SPCP182508G

SABP182508T

SPCP182508T

175 x 250 x 100 mm

SABP182510G

SPCP182510G

SABP182510T

SPCP182510T

175 x 250 x 150 mm

SABP182515G

SPCP182515G

SABP182515T

SPCP182515T

94 | ENCLOSURES

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo S enclosures with knockouts

75 x 125 x 60mm to 175 x 250 x 150mm

• IP66/67 rated • Standard colour RAL 7035 • Grey or transparent lid • Polycarbonate

Order guide Dimensions (W x H x D)

Metric knockouts grey lid

Metric knockouts transparent lid

PG knockouts grey lid

PG knockouts transparent lid

75 x 125 x 60 mm 75 x 125 x 75 mm 75 x 125 x 100 mm 75 x 125 x 125 mm 100 x 100 x 60 mm 125 x 125 x 60 mm 125 x 125 x 75 mm 125 x 125 x 100 mm 125 x 125 x 125 mm 125 x 175 x 60 mm 125 x 175 x 75 mm 125 x 175 x 100 mm 125 x 175 x 125 mm 125 x 175 x 150 mm 125 x 250 x 125 mm 175 x 175 x 75 mm 175 x 175 x 100 mm 175 x 175 x 125 mm 175 x 175 x 150 mm 175 x 250 x 75 mm 175 x 250 x 100 mm 175 x 250 x 150 mm

SPCM081306G

SPCM081306T

SPCK081306G

SPCK081306T

SPCM081308G

SPCM081308T

SPCK081308G

SPCK081308T

SPCM081310G

SPCM081310T

SPCK081310G

SPCK081310T

SPCM081313G

SPCM081313T

SPCK081313G

SPCK081313T

SPCM101006G

SPCM101006T

SPCM131306G

SPCM131306T

SPCK131306G

SPCK131306T

SPCM131308G

SPCM131308T

SPCK131308G

SPCK131308T

SPCM131310G

SPCM131310T

SPCK131310G

SPCK131310T

SPCM131313G

SPCM131313T

SPCK131313G

SPCK131313T

SPCM131806G

SPCM131806T

SPCK131806G

SPCK131806T

SPCM131808G

SPCM131808T

SPCK131808G

SPCK131808T

SPCM131810G

SPCM131810T

SPCK131810G

SPCK131810T

SPCM131813G

SPCM131813T

SPCK131813G

SPCK131813T

SPCM131815G

SPCM131815T

SPCK131815G

SPCK131815T

SPCM132513G

SPCM132513T

SPCM181808G

SPCM181808T

SPCK181808G

SPCK181808T

SPCM181810G

SPCM181810T

SPCK181810G

SPCK181810T

SPCM181813G

SPCM181813T

SPCK181813G

SPCK181813T

SPCM181815G

SPCM181815T

SPCK181815G

SPCK181815T

SPCM182508G

SPCM182508T

SPCK182508G

SPCK182508T

SPCM182510G

SPCM182510T

SPCK182510G

SPCK182510T

SPCM182515G

SPCM182515T

SPCK182515G

SPCK182515T

0116 284 9900

ENCLOSURES

| 95


Enclosures

Cubo S – accessories

• • • •

Mounting plates DIN rail Lugs & inserts Screw sets

Order guide Galvanized steel mounting plates

Part number 48 x 98 x 1.5 mm

SMP0813

78 x 78 x 1.5 mm

SMP1010

98 x 98 x 1.5 mm

SMP1313

98 x 148 x 1.5 mm

SMP1318

98 x 223 x 1.5 mm

SMP1325

148 x 148 x 1.5 mm

SMP1818

148 x 223 x 1.5 mm

Galvanized steel DIN rail

Lugs & inserts

DR35040.4

length 100 mm, width 35 mm

DR35090.4

length 150 mm, width 35 mm

DR35140.4

Fastening lug, set of 4 pcs

SBI1

Insert M2, set of 4 pcs, M2

SBIA1.04 SBS40

Mounting screws, for plates and rails

SMS1

Cover plug, short, for 25 mm cover, PE

SCP08

Cover plug, long, for 50 mm cover, PE Cover plug, short, for 75/100 mm covers Screw set, 4 short cover screws for 10 mm cover and 4 mounting screws Cover screw, short, 11 x 35 mm Cover screw, long, for 50 mm covers

SCP10 SCP1315 SLSA23.04 SLS35 SLS60

Screw set, 4 short cover screws and 4 mounting screws

SLSA35.04

Screw set, 4 long cover screws and 4 mounting screws

SLSA60.04

Cover screw’s wing head part, 11 x 17 mm

96 | ENCLOSURES

SFL1

Insert for pods, brass, M2 Spacer, incl. M3 x 5 screw, 40 mm

Screw sets

SMP1825

length 50 mm, width 35 mm

SLW1

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo O enclosures

• • • • • •

200 x 200 x 132mm to 400 x 600 x 187mm

IP66/67 rated Standard colour RAL 7035 Grey or transparent lid Polycarbonate for outdoor use (UL approved) ABS for indoor use Available with pre-pressed metric knock-outs

Introduction The Ensto Cubo O range is a series of medium to large size enclosures manufactured in high quality Polycarbonate or ABS. The standard colour

is RAL 7035 with the lid available in grey or transparent. Cubo O is also available with pre-pressed metric knock-outs.

General specification Material: Degree of protection EN 60529: Impact resistance EN 50102 (+35ºC/-25ºC): Operating temperature: Flammability UL 94: Standard colour: Transparent cover: Cover gasket: Cover screws: Certificates:

Polycarbonate

ABS

IP 66/67 IK 08/IK 08 -50ºC to +100ºC V-2…5VA Grey RAL 7035 Polycarbonate PUR (polyurethane) Polyamide

IP 66/67 IK 07/IK 06 -40ºC to +60ºC HB Grey RAL 7035 Polycarbonate PUR (polyurethane) Polyamide

FI, GL, UL, cUL, GOST

FI, GL, GOST

Order guide Dimensions (W x H x D)

ABS grey lid

ABS transparent lid

Polycarbonate grey lid

Polycarbonate transparent lid

200 x 200 x 132 mm

OABP202013G

OABP202013T

OPCP202013G

OPCP202013T

200 x 300 x 132 mm

OABP203013G

OABP203013T

OPCP203013G

OPCP203013T

200 x 400 x 132 mm

OABP204013G

OABP204013T

OPCP204013G

OPCP204013T

300 x 300 x 132 mm

OABP303013G

OABP303013T

OPCP303013G

OPCP303013T

300 x 400 x 132 mm

OABP304013G

OABP304013T

OPCP304013G

OPCP304013T

300 x 600 x 132 mm

OABP306013G

OABP306013T

OPCP306013G

OPCP306013T

400 x 400 x 132 mm

OABP404013G

OABP404013T

OPCP404013G

OPCP404013T

400 x 600 x 132 mm

OABP406013G

OABP406013T

OPCP406013G

OPCP406013T

200 x 200 x 185 mm

OABP202018G

OABP202018T

OPCP202018G

OPCP202018T

200 x 300 x 185 mm

OABP203018G

OABP203018T

OPCP203018G

OPCP203018T

200 x 400 x 185 mm

OABP204018G

OABP204018T

OPCP204018G

OPCP204018T

300 x 300 x 185 mm

OABP303018G

OABP303018T

OPCP303018G

OPCP303018T

300 x 400 x 185 mm

OABP304018G

OABP304018T

OPCP304018G

OPCP304018T

300 x 600 x 185 mm

OABP306018G

OABP306018T

OPCP306018G

OPCP306018T

400 x 400 x 187 mm

OABP404018G

OABP404018T

OPCP404018G

OPCP404018T

400 x 600 x 185 mm

OABP406018G

OABP406018T

OPCP406018G

OPCP406018T

0116 284 9900

ENCLOSURES

| 97


Enclosures

Cubo O enclosures with knockouts

• IP66/67 rated • Standard colour RAL 7035 • Grey or transparent lid • Polycarbonate

200 x 200 x 132mm to 400 x 600 x 185mm

Order guide Dimensions (W x H x D)

Metric knockouts grey lid

Metric knockouts transparent lid

300 x 300 x 132 mm

OPCM303013G

OPCM303013T

300 x 400 x 132 mm

OPCM304013G

OPCM304013T

300 x 600 x 132 mm

OPCM306013G

OPCM306013T

300 x 300 x 185 mm

OPCM303018G

OPCM303018T

300 x 400 x 185 mm

OPCM304018G

OPCM304018T

300 x 600 x 185 mm

OPCM306018G

OPCM306018T

Flange knockout grey lid

Flange knockout transparent lid

200 x 200 x 132 mm

CPCF202013G

CPCF202013T

200 x 300 x 132 mm

CPCF203013G

CPCF203013T

200 x 400 x 132 mm

CPCF204013G

CPCF204013T

300 x 300 x 132 mm

CPCF303013G

CPCF303013T

300 x 400 x 132 mm

CPCF304013G

CPCF304013T

300 x 600 x 132 mm

CPCF306013G

CPCF306013T

400 x 400 x 132 mm

CPCF404013G

CPCF404013T

400 x 600 x 132 mm

CPCF406013G

CPCF406013T

200 x 200 x 185 mm

CPCF202018G

CPCF202018T

200 x 300 x 185 mm

CPCF203018G

CPCF203018T

200 x 400 x 185 mm

CPCF204018G

CPCF204018T

300 x 300 x 185 mm

CPCF303018G

CPCF303018T

300 x 400 x 185 mm

CPCF304018G

CPCF304018T

300 x 600 x 185 mm

CPCF306018G

CPCF306018T

400 x 400 x 187 mm

CPCF404018G

CPCF404018T

400 x 600 x 185 mm

CPCF406018G

CPCF406018T

98 | ENCLOSURES

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo O – accessories

• Mounting plates • Din rail • Screw sets

Order guide Galvanized steel mounting plates

Part number 160 x 160 x 1.5 mm

OMP2020

160 x 260 x 1.5 mm

OMP2030

160 x 360 x 1.5 mm

OMP2040

300 x 300 x 1.5 mm

OMP3030

300 x 400 x 1.5 mm For kWh meter 300 x 400 x 1.5 mm 300 x 600 x 1.5 mm For kWh meter 300 x 600 x 1.5 mm 400 x 400 x 1.5 mm For kWh meter 400 x 400 x 1.5 mm 400 x 600 x 1.5 mm

Galvanized steel DIN rail

Screw sets

OMP3060 KWHP3060 OMP4040 KWHP4040 OMP4060

For kWh meter 400 x 600 x 1.5 mm

KWHP4060

For 200 mm side, width 35 mm

DR35150.5

For 600 mm side/middle with front panel, width 35 mm

DR35240.5

For 300 mm side, width 35 mm

DR35250.5

For 600 mm side/middle with front panel, width 35 mm

DR35340.5

For 400 mm side, width 35 mm

DR35350.5

For 600 mm side, width 35 mm

DR35550.5

Slotted/cross head, sealable Screw set, 4 slotted/cross head cover screws

OLS42 OLSA42.4

Screw set, 6 slotted/cross head cover screws

OLSA42.6

Screw set, 4 slotted/cross head cover screws and 4 mounting scr ews

OLSA42.04

Screw set, 6 slotted/cross head cover screws and 8 mounting screws

OLSA42.06

Slotted/cross head, dark grey Noryl Slotted/cross head for 600 mm modular cover

OLS42N OLS32

Springloaded, cross head

PLS63

Hinged cover screw, slotted/cross head, blue, polyamide

OLSH1

Hinged cover screw, wing head, blue, polyamide

OLWH1

Wing head Screw set, 4 wing head cover screws

OLW55 OLWA55.4

Screw set, 6 wing head cover screws

OLWA55.6

Screw set, 4 wing head cover screws and 4 mounting screws

OLWA55.04

Screw set, 6 wing head cover screws and 8 mounting screws

OLWA55.06

DIN 3 head Screw set, 4 DIN 3 head cover screws

OLT42 OLTA42.4

Screw set, 6 DIN 3 head cover screws

OLTA42.6

Screw set, 4 DIN 3 head cover screws and 4 mounting screws

OLTA42.04

Screw set, 6 DIN 3 head cover screws and 8 mounting screws

OLTA42.06

Screw set, 4 DIN 3 head cover screws and 4 mounting screws + key

OLTA42.041

Key for DIN head screw OLT42

0116 284 9900

OMP3040 KWHP3040

OLT42KEY

ENCLOSURES

| 99


Enclosures

Cubo O – accessories continued

• Grey & transparent covers • Extension frames • Miscellaneous accessories

Order guide Covers & extension frames Dimensions

ABS grey

Polycarbonate grey

Polycarbonate transparent

Polycarbonate grey extension frames

200 x 200 x 30 mm

OABG202003L

OPCG202003L

OPCT202003L

OPCP202006E

200 x 300 x 30 mm

OABG203003L

OPCG203003L

OPCT203003L

OPCP203006E

200 x 400 x 30 mm

OABG204003L

OPCG204003L

OPCT204003L

OPCP204006E

300 x 300 x 30 mm

OABG303003L

OPCG303003L

OPCT303003L

OPCP303006E

300 x 400 x 30 mm

OABG304003L

OPCG304003L

OPCT304003L

OPCP304006E

300 x 600 x 30 mm

OABG306003L

OPCG306003L

OPCT306003L

OPCP306006E

400 x 400 x 30 mm

OABG404003L

OPCG404003L

OPCT404003L

OPCP404006E

400 x 600 x 30 mm

OABG406003L

OPCG406003L

OPCT406003L

OPCP406006E

Miscellaneous accessories Description

Part number

Description

Part number

Cover plate for flange openings, F1 size excl. gasket, PC/ABS

F1151

30 mm spacer, set of 4 pcs

OBS30.04

Cover plate for flange openings, F2 size incl. PUR gasket, PC

F2251

Fastening lugs, set of 4 pcs, stainless steel

TPV21176 OCS22.46 

Threaded bushing, 4xOTS1 + 4xOLS42

OTSA1.04

Customizing template, clear PET, 300 x 400 x 6 mm

Mounting screw, for rails and plates

OMS1

Extension frame screw, ø 17 x 67

OES1

Brass insert, for mounting pod, M3

OBI1

Extension frame screws, a set of 4 pcs

OESA1.04 OESA1.06

Brass insert, M3, set of 4 OBI1

OBIA1.04

Extension frame screws, a set of 6 pcs

Cover plug, PE, 11 x ø 15/17 mm

OCP1

Hinge pair, incl. mounting instruction

OHI1

15 mm spacer, incl. M5 screw, steel

OBS15

Hinge pair, incl. 2 cover plugs

OHICP1

15 mm spacer, set of 4 pcs 20 mm spacer, incl. M5 screw, steel 20 mm spacer, set of 4 pcs 30 mm spacer, incl. M5 screw, steel

100 | ENCLOSURES

OBS15.04

Fastening lug, set of 4 pcs

OFL1

OBS20

Corner elevator, incl. M5 bolt, 19/19 x 14 mm

OEL1

OBS20.04

Corner elevator, set of 4 OEL1

OELA1.04

OBS30

Threaded bushing, for cover screw when cover mounted on the back

OTS1

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo W Cabinets

• • • • •

200 x 200 x 132mm to 400 x 600 x 187mm

IP 66/67 rated Standard colour RAL 7035 Grey or transparent lid Polycarbonate for outdoor use (UL approved) Pre-assembled with hinges and latches

Introduction The Ensto Cubo W range is a series of wall mounted cabinets manufactured in high quality Polycarbonate. The standard colour is RAL 7035 with the lid available in grey or transparent.

Cubo W comes pre-assembled with hinges and quick release latches which are padlockable.

General specification Material: Degree of protection EN 60529: Impact resistance EN 50102 (+35ºC/-25ºC): Operating temperature: Flammability UL 94: Standard colour: Transparent cover: Cover gasket: Certificates:

Polycarbonate IP 66/67 IK 08/IK 08 -50ºC to +100ºC V-2…5VA Grey RAL 7035 Polycarbonate PUR (polyurethane) FI, GL, UL, cUL, GOST

Order guide Polycarbonate grey lid

Polycarbonate transparent lid

200 x 200 x 132 mm

Dimensions (W x H x D)

WPCP202013G

WPCP202013T

200 x 300 x 132 mm

WPCP203013G

WPCP203013T

200 x 400 x 132 mm

WPCP204013G

WPCP204013T

300 x 300 x 132 mm

WPCP303013G

WPCP303013T

300 x 400 x 132 mm

WPCP304013G

WPCP304013T

300 x 600 x 132 mm

WPCP306013G

WPCP306013T

400 x 400 x 132 mm

WPCP404013G

WPCP404013T

400 x 600 x 132 mm

WPCP406013G

WPCP406013T

200 x 200 x 185 mm

WPCP202018G

WPCP202018T

200 x 300 x 185 mm

WPCP203018G

WPCP203018T

200 x 400 x 185 mm

WPCP204018G

WPCP204018T

300 x 300 x 185 mm

WPCP303018G

WPCP303018T

300 x 400 x 185 mm

WPCP304018G

WPCP304018T

300 x 600 x 185 mm

WPCP306018G

WPCP306018T

400 x 400 x 187 mm

WPCP404018G

WPCP404018T

400 x 600 x 185 mm

WPCP406018G

WPCP406018T

0116 284 9900

ENCLOSURES

| 101


Enclosures

Cubo E Cabinets

• IP 66 rated • Polyester painted steel RAL 7035 • Stainless steel AISI 304 (AISI 316 available on request) • Pre-assembled with hinges and 3mm DIN lock • Mounting plate included

200 x 200 x 150mm to 1000 x 1200 x 300mm

Introduction The Ensto Cubo E range is a series of wall mounted cabinets manufactured in polyester painted (RAL 7035) mild steel or unpainted (AISI 304) stainless steel. On request the enclosures can be

manufactured in AISI 316 acid-proof steel. All doors include a 3mm DIN lock and the polyester painted cabinets come with a gland plate with the stainless steel cabinets having plain sides.

General specification Material: Degree of protection EN 60529: Impact resistance EN 50102 (+35ºC/-25ºC): Standard colour: Cover gasket: Certificates:

Polyester painted steel

Unpainted stainless steel

IP 66 IK 09 Grey RAL 7035 PUR (polyurethane) FI, GL, GOST

IP 66 IK 08/IK 08 AISI 304. Unpainted PUR (polyurethane) FI, GL, GOST

Order guide Polyester painted steel

Unpainted stainless steel

200 x 300 x 150mm

EFEF203015

ESSP203015

300 x 200 x 150mm

EFEF302015

ESSP302015

300 x 300 x 150mm

EFEF303015

ESSP303015

300 x 300 x 200mm

EFEF303020

ESSP303020

300 x 400 x 200mm

EFEF304020

ESSP304020

400 x 300 x 150mm

EFEF403015

ESSP403015

400 x 300 x 200mm

EFEF403020

ESSP403020

400 x 400 x 200mm

EFEF404020

ESSP404020

400 x 400 x 300mm

EFEF404030

ESSP404030

400 x 500 x 200mm

EFEF405020

ESSP405020

400 x 600 x 200mm

EFEF406020

ESSP406020

400 x 600 x 300mm

EFEF406030

ESSP406030

500 x 500 x 200mm

EFEF505020

ESSP505020

500 x 500 x 300mm

EFEF505030

ESSP505030

500 x 600 x 300mm

EFEF506030

ESSP506030

600 x 400 x 200mm

EFEF604020

ESSP604020

600 x 400 x 300mm

EFEF604030

ESSP604030

600 x 600 x 200mm

EFEF606020

ESSP606020

600 x 600 x 300mm

EFEF606030

ESSP606030

600 x 800 x 200mm

EFEF608020

ESSP608020

600 x 800 x 300mm

EFEF608030

ESSP608030

600 x 1000 x 300mm

EFEF6010030

ESSP6010030

600 x 1200 x 300mm

EFEF6012030

ESSP6012030

800 x 600 x 300mm

EFEF806030

ESSP806030

800 x 800 x 200mm

EFEF808020

ESSP808020

800 x 800 x 300mm

EFEF808030

ESSP808030

800 x 1000 x 300mm

EFEF8010030

ESSP8010030

800 x 1200 x 300mm

EFEF8012030

ESSP8012030

1000 x 800 x 300mm

EFEF1008030

ESSP1008030

1000 x 1000 x 300mm

EFEF10010030

ESSP10010030

1000 x 1000 x 300mm

EFEF10012030

ESSP10012030

102 | ENCLOSURES

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo F terminal enclosures 150 x 150 x 80mm to 800 x 400 x 120mm

• IP 66 rated • Polyester painted steel RAL 7035 • Stainless steel AISI 304 (AISI 316 available on request) • Includes supports for DIN-rails/mounting plates as standard

Introduction The Ensto Cubo F terminal enclosures are available in polyester painted steel, colour grey RAL 7035 or unpainted stainless steel AISI 304. AISI 316 acid-proof steel is available on special request. All enclosures

include supports for DIN-rails/mounting plates and come with plain sides as standard.

General specification Material: Degree of protection EN 60529: Impact resistance EN 50102 (+35ºC/-25ºC): Standard colour: Cover screws: Cover gasket: Certificates:

Polyester painted steel

Unpainted stainless steel

IP 66 IK 09 Grey RAL 7035 Stainless steel AISI 304 PUR (polyurethane) FI, GL, GOST

IP 66 IK 09 AISI 304. Unpainted Stainless steel AISI 304 PUR (polyurethane) FI, GL, GOST

Order guide Polyester painted steel

Unpainted stainless steel

Mounting plate

150 x 150 x 80mm

Dimensions (W x H x D)

FFUP151508

FSUP151508

FMP1515

150 x 150 x 120mm

FFUP151512

FSUP151512

FMP1515

200 x 200 x 80mm

FFUP202008

FSUP202008

FMP2020

200 x 200 x 120mm

FFUP202012

FSUP202012

FMP2020

300 x 150 x 80mm

FFUP301508

FSUP301508

FMP3015

300 x 150 x 120mm

FFUP301512

FSUP301512

FMP3015

300 x 200 x 80mm

FFUP302008

FSUP302008

FMP3020

300 x 200 x 120mm

FFUP302012

FSUP302012

FMP3020

300 x 300 x 80mm

FFUP303008

FSUP303008

FMP3030

300 x 300 x 120mm

FFUP303012

FSUP303012

FMP3030

400 x 200 x 80mm

FFUP402008

FSUP402008

FMP4020

400 x 200 x 120mm

FFUP402012

FSUP402012

FMP4020

400 x 300 x 80mm

FFUP403008

FSUP403008

FMP4030

400 x 300 x 120mm

FFUP403012

FSUP403012

FMP4030

400 x 400 x 80mm

FFUP404008

FSUP404008

FMP4040

400 x 400 x 120mm

FFUP404012

FSUP404012

FMP4040

500 x 200 x 80mm

FFUP502008

FSUP502008

FMP5020

500 x 200 x 120mm

FFUP502012

FSUP502012

FMP5020

500 x 300 x 80mm

FFUP503008

FSUP503008

FMP5030

500 x 300 x 120mm

FFUP503012

FSUP503012

FMP5030

600 x 200 x 80mm

FFUP602008

FSUP602008

FMP6020

600 x 200 x 120mm

FFUP602012

FSUP602012

FMP6020

600 x 300 x 80mm

FFUP603008

FSUP603008

FMP6030

600 x 300 x 120mm

FFUP603012

FSUP603012

FMP6030

600 x 400 x 80mm

FFUP604008

FSUP604008

FMP6040

600 x 400 x 120mm

FFUP604012

FSUP604012

FMP6040

800 x 200 x 80mm

FFUP802008

FSUP802008

FMP8020

800 x 200 x 120mm

FFUP802012

FSUP802012

FMP8020

800 x 400 x 80mm

FFUP804008

FSUP804008

FMP8040

800 x 400 x 120mm

FFUP804012

FSUP804012

FMP8040

0116 284 9900

ENCLOSURES

| 103


Enclosures

Cubo E & F – accessories

• Rain shelters • DIN rails • Miscellaneous accessories

Order guide Rain shelters - painted

Rain shelters - stainless steel

For enclosure

Part number

For enclosure

Part number

EFEF203015

ERS2015A

ESSP203015

ERS2015B

EFEF30xx15

ERS3015A

ESSP30xx15

ERS3015B

EFEF403015

ERS4015A

ESSP403015

ERS4015B

EFEF30xx20

ERS3020A

ESSP30xx20

ERS3021B

EFEF40xx20

ERS4020A

ESSP40xx20

ERS4021B

EFEF505020

ERS5020A

ESSP505020

ERS5021B

EFEF60xx20

ERS6020A

ESSP60xx20

ERS6021B

EFEF808020

ERS8020A

ESSP808020

ERS8021B

EFEF40xx30

ERS4030A

ESSP40xx30

ERS4031B

EFEF50xx30

ERS5030A

ESSP50xx30

ERS5031B

EFEF60xx30

ERS6030A

ESSP60xx30

ERS6031B

EFEF80xx30

ERS8030A

ESSP80xx30

ERS8031B

EFEF100xx30

ERS10030A

ESSP100xx30

ERS10031B

Galvanized steel DIN rails

Miscellaneous accessories

For base, 200 mm side, pair

DR3520B

For base, 300 mm side, pair

DR3530B

For base, 400 mm side, pair

DR3540B

For base, 500 mm side, pair

DR3550B

For base, 600 mm side, pair

DR3560B

For base, 800 mm side, pair

DR3580B

For base, 1000 mm side, pair

DR35100B

For door, 200 mm side, pair

DR3520D

For door, 300 mm side, pair

DR3530D

For door, 400 mm side, pair

DR3540D

For door, 500 mm side, pair

DR3550D

For door, 600 mm side, pair

DR3560D

For door, 800 mm side, pair

DR3580D

For door, 1000 mm side, pair

DR35100D

Triangular lock with 11 mm key Lock with wing handle, width 50 mm Lock incl. 2 keys Black swing handle for three point locking Door stopper, set (galvanized steel) Door grounding, M6>M6, 2.5 mm²

EKL1 EH1 EDS2 EG200

Fastening lugs, 20 mm high, set of 4 pcs

EFFL2.20

Fastening lugs, 50 mm high, set of 4 pcs

EFFL2.50

Counter part for fastening lugs, set of 4 pcs

104 | ENCLOSURES

ED10 ED10M6

EFLM4

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo N – GRP enclosures 250 x 300 x 140mm to 600 x 800 x 300mm

• • • •

IP66 rated Fibreglass reinforced polyester High temperature resistance Available with plain sides or with polycarbonate window

General specification Conformity Technical information: Degree of protection: Impact resistance: Flammability rating: Material Base/cover: Lock: Gasket:

IP66 IK10, models with window IK07 UL 746C 5V Fibreglass reinforced polyester Double bit DIN 3.0mm PUR (polyurethane) Knockout alternatives Plain sides/customer specific knockouts

Standard colour Base: Cover:

Grey RAL 7035 Grey RAL 7035

Order guide Dimensions (W x H x D)

Plain sides

Plain sides & 3 point closing handle

Plain sides with polycarbonate window

250 x 300 x 140

NGRP253014

300 x 400 x 200

NGRP304020

NGRP304020P3SH

NGRW304020

400 x 400 x 200

NGRP404020

NGRP404020P3SH

NGRW404020

400 x 500 x 200

NGRP405020

NGRP405020P3SH

NGRW405020

400 x 600 x 230

NGRP406023

NGRP405023P3SH

NGRW406023

500 x 600 x 230

NGRP506023

NGRP506023P3SH

NGRW506023

600 x 800 x 300

NGRP608030

NGRP608030P3SH

NGRW608030

0116 284 9900

NGRW253014

ENCLOSURES

| 105


Enclosures

Cubo N – GRP – accessories

• • • •

Mounting plates Modular device chassis Internal door kits Wall mounting kits

Order guide Mounting plates GRP

Part number

Galvanized steel

Part number

213 x 268 x 4

NGRMP2530

207 x 268 x 4

NMP2530

260 x 358 x 4

NGRMP3040

254 x 358 x 2

NMP3040

360 x 358 x 4

NGRMP4040

354 x 358 x 2

NMP4040

360 x 458 x 4

NGRMP4050

354 x 458 x 2

NMP4050

360558 x 4

NGRMP4060

354 x 558 x 2

NMP4060

460 x 558 x 4

NGRMP5060

454 x 558 x 2

NMP5060

556 x 754 x 4

NGRMP6080

558 x 754 x 2

NMP6080

Chassis for modular devices - IP20 Description

Part number

300 x 400 mm wall cabinets, 2 DIN openings for 12 modules

NMC3040.24

400 x 400 mm wall cabinets, 2 DIN openings for 18 modules

NMC4040.36

400 x 500 mm wall cabinets, 3 DIN openings for 18 modules

NMC4050.54

400 x 600 mm wall cabinets, 3 DIN openings for 18 modules

NMC4060.54

500 x 600 mm wall cabinets, 3 DIN openings for 23 modules

NMC5060.69

600 x 800 mm wall cabinets, 4 DIN openings for 29 modules

NMC6080.116

Internal door kit - GRP For wall cabinet

Dimensions

300 x 400

258 x 366

NID3040

400 x 400

358 x 366

NID4040

400 x 500

358 x 466

NID4050

400 x 600

358 x 566

NID4060

500 x 600

458 x 566

NID5060

600 x 800

558 x 766

NID6080

Wall mounting lugs & locks

Set of 4 plastic locks

NFL1

Key lock with a wrench

NKL1

Padlocking accessory, AISI 304

106 | ENCLOSURES

Part number

NPD3041

www.oem.co.uk


Enclosures

Cubo X EX rated enclosures

• • • •

50 x 150 x 90mm to 500 x 800 x 200mm

IP66/67 rated AISI 316L & 304 Stainless steel RAL7035 painted mild steel Customised units available

General specification Material alternatives Polyester painted mild steel: Stainless steel AISI 304: Stainless steel AISI 316L: Product alternatives: Empty enclosures/cabinets: Standard: Customised: Junction boxes: Universal combo box:

For dry environments For demanding environments For extremely demanding environments (e.g. offshore/marine) Gas and dust area components Use a code key to create your own enclosure or use the ones already created for easy ordering Choose different features beyond the code key Gas and dust area products. The amount of used terminals calculated with maximum power dissipation method Used together with any Ex D enclosure as for example a junction box

Variations Cover fastening:

Material: Surface treatment: Sizing:

Earthing: Mounting: Technical information Degree of protection: Ambient temperature: Conformity: Approvals/certificate:

Version 1: cover screws Version 2: tight hinges and cover screws on the opposite side Version 3: tight hinges and locks Version 4: cover screws and hinges that enables free movement of the cover Stainless steel AISI 316L (1.5mm) Stainless steel AISI 304 (1.5mm) Mild steel coated RAL7035 (1.5mm) Natural Brushed Polyester painted (custom colour available) Width: 150-1000mm Height: 150-2000mm Depth: 90-400mm Internal earth bolt as standard External earth bolts (M6) Welded fastening lugs, horizontal/vertical IP66/IP67 (IP66 with flanges installed) -55°C to 160°C/100°C/85°C DNV 11 ATEX 98909U IECEx DNV 11,0005U POCC FLI605.B03815 Rostechnadzor (RTN) Permit CNEx12. 1219U EN/IEC 60079-0, -7, -31

Standards: Marking gas: Marking dust:

Ex II 2 G Ex e IIC Gb Ex II 2 D Ex tb IIIC Db IP66/67 or IP66

Order guide Standard sizes with plain sides Dimensions

Stainless steel

Painted mild steel

150 x 150 x 90

X1ANP151509

X1FEP151509

150 x 200 x 100

X1ANP152010

X1FEP152010

200 x 200 x 100

X1ANP202010

X1FEP202010

200 x 300 x 120

X1ANP203012

X1FEP203012

200 x 400 x 150

X1ANP204015

X1FEP204015

300 x 300 x 150

X1ANP303015

X1FEP303015

400 x 300 x 150

X1ANP403015

X1FEP403015

400 x 400 x 200

X1ANP404020

X1FEP404020

400 x 600 x 200

X1ANP406020

X1FEP406020

500 x 800 x 200

X1ANP508020

X1FEP508020

With flange openings

Flange on bottom

Flange on bottom

Flange on bottom & both sides

Flange on bottom & both sides

Stainless Steel

Painted Mild Steel

Stainless steel

Painted mild steel

400 x 300 x 150

X2ANP403015G1

X2FEP403015G1

X2ANP403015G2

X2FEP403015G2

400 x 400 x 200

X2ANP404020G1

X2FEP404020G1

X2ANP404020G2

X2FEP404020G2

Dimension

400 x 600 x 200

X2ANP406020G1

X2FEP406020G1

X2ANP406020G2

X2FEP406020G2

500 x 800 x 200

X2ANP508020G1

X2FEP508020G1

X2ANP508020G2

X2FEP508020G2

0116 284 9900

ENCLOSURES

| 107


FLEXIBLE BUSBARS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Ultraflexx ultra flexible busbar

110

Isoflexx laminated busbar

112

MBS Earth braids

114


Flexible busbars

Ultraflexx ultra flexible busbar

• CSA: 25mm² to 240mm² • Rated current: up to 1200A with two parallel conductors • Insulation: UL94 VO chlorine and fluorine free • Voltage: 1000V AC, 1500V DC • Dielectric strength: 20kV/mm

Introduction ULTRAFLEXX busbar has a very high flexibility; this is due to the braided construction. The conductor ends are press welded and pre-drilled, therefore no crimps or clamps are required and contact resistance is at a minimum.

This busbar is available in lengths of 100mm to 1000m as standard. Custom lengths & hole sizes available on request. UL/CSA approved. The ultimate flexible solution!

Ordering guide 160 amp Part number 62150323 62150523 62151023 62151523 62151923 62152323 62152823 62153323 62153523 62153823 62154023 62154523 62155023 62155523 62156023 62156523 62156823 62157523 62158023

Type

Cross section mm²

Width mm

Length mm

Hole centres mm

Hole size

UFLX 25-100-8/10 ULFX 25-150-8/10 ULFX 25-200-8/10 ULFX 25-250-8/10 ULFX 25-300-8/10 ULFX 25-350-8/10 ULFX 25-400-8/10 ULFX 25-450-8/10 ULFX 25-500-8/10 ULFX 25-550-8/10 ULFX 25-600-8/10 ULFX 25-650-8/10 UFLX 25-700-8/10 UFLX 25-750-8/10 UFLX 25-800-8/10 UFLX 25-850-8/10 UFLX 25-900-8/10 UFLX 25-950-8/10 UFLX 25-1000-8/10

25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

113 163 223 272 322 372 422 472 522 572 622 672 722 772 822 872 922 972 1022

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000

M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10

Hole centres mm

Hole size

* Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

250 amp Part number 62250323 62250523 62251023 62251523 6 2251923 6 2252323 6 2252823 6 2253323 62253523 6 2253823 6 2254023 6 2254523 6 2255023 6 2255523 6 2256023 6 2256523 6 2256823 62257523 6 2258023

Type

Cross section mm²

UFLX 50-100-8/10 50 UFLX 50-150-8/10 50 UFLX 50-200-8/10 50 UFLX 50-250-8/10 50 UFLX 50-300-8/10 50 UFLX 50-350-8/10 50 UFLX 50-400-8/10 50 UFLX 50-450-8/10 50 UFLX 50-500-8/10 50 UFLX 50-550-8/10 50 UFLX 50-600-8/10 50 UFLX 50-650-8/10 50 UFLX 50-700-8/10 50 UFLX 50-750-8/10 50 UFLX 50-800-8/10 50 UFLX 50-850-8/10 50 UFLX 50-900-8/10 50 UFLX 50-950-8/10 50 UFLX 50-1000-8/10 50 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

110 | FLEXIBLE BUSBARS

Width mm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

Length mm 115 175 225 275 325 375 425 475 522 575 625 675 725 775 825 875 925 975 1025

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000

M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10 M8/10

www.oem.co.uk


Flexible busbars

Ordering guide 390 amp Part number 62550333 62550533 62551033 62551533 62551933 62552333 62552833 62553333 62553533 62553833 62554033 62554533 62555033 62555533 62556033 62556533 62556833 62557533 62558033

Type

Cross section mm²

UFLX 100-100-10 100 UFLX 100-150-10 100 UFLX 100-200-10 100 UFLX 100-250-10 100 UFLX 100-300-10 100 UFLX 100-350-10 100 UFLX 100-400-10 100 UFLX 100-450-10 100 UFLX 100-500-10 100 UFLX 100-550-10 100 UFLX 100-600-10 100 UFLX 100-650-10 100 UFLX 100-700-10 100 UFLX 100-750-10 100 UFLX 100-800-10 100 UFLX 100-850-10 100 UFLX 100-900-10 100 UFLX 100-950-10 100 UFLX 100-1000-10 100 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

Width mm

Length mm

Hole centres mm

Hole size

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

125 175 225 275 325 375 425 475 525 575 625 675 725 775 825 875 925 975 1025

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000

M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

Width mm

Length mm

Hole centres mm

Hole size

32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32

130 180 230 280 330 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 830 880 930 980 1030

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000

M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

Width mm

Length mm

Hole centres mm

Hole size

32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32

130 180 230 280 330 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 830 880 930 980 1030

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000

M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

450 amp Part number 62650333 62650533 62651033 62651533 62651933 62652333 62652833 62653333 62653533 62653833 62654033 62654533 62655033 62655533 62656033 62656533 62656833 62657533 62658033

Type

Cross section mm²

UFLX 120-100-10 120 UFLX 120-150-10 120 UFLX 120-200-10 120 UFLX 120-250-10 120 UFLX 120-300-10 120 UFLX 120-350-10 120 UFLX 120-400-10 120 UFLX 120-450-10 120 UFLX 120-500-10 120 UFLX 120-550-10 120 UFLX 120-600-10 120 UFLX 120-650-10 120 UFLX 120-700-10 120 UFLX 120-750-10 120 UFLX 120-800-10 120 UFLX 120-850-10 120 UFLX 120-900-10 120 UFLX 120-950-10 120 UFLX 120-1000-10 120 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

700 amp Part number 62850333 62850533 62851033 62851533 62851933 62852333 62852833 62853333 62853533 62853833 62854033 62854533 62855033 62855533 62856033 62856533 62856833 62857533 62858033

Type

Cross section mm²

UFLX 240-100-10 240 UFLX 240-150-10 240 UFLX 240-200-10 240 UFLX 240-250-10 240 UFLX 240-300-10 240 UFLX 240-350-10 240 UFLX 240-400-10 240 UFLX 240-450-10 240 UFLX 240-500-10 240 UFLX 240-550-10 240 UFLX 240-600-10 240 UFLX 240-650-10 240 UFLX 240-700-10 240 UFLX 240-750-10 240 UFLX 240-800-10 240 UFLX 240-850-10 240 UFLX 240-900-10 240 UFLX 240-950-10 240 UFLX 240-1000-10 240 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

0116 284 9900

FLEXIBLE BUSBARS

| 111


Flexible busbars

Isoflexx laminated busbar

• • • • •

CSA: 22mm² to 1200mm² Rated current: 130A to 3725A Laminate thickness: 0.5mm to 1mm Material: CU 99.99999 pure Operating temperature: -50°C to 180°C

Introduction ISOFLEXX busbar can be bent into acute angles and has a small bending radius; this saves space in the enclosures. Without the need for extra fixings, ISOFLEXX can be easily bolted to main busbars. Available in lengths of 250mm to 2000mm as standard.

ISOFLEXX busbar can also be customised, including cutting, bending and drilled/punched as required. Insulation: high quality PVC or halogen free silicon UL/CSA approved.

Ordering guide 32 - 100mm wide

9 - 24mm wide Part number 11311000 11311020 11311420 11311030 11311040 11311060 11311070 11311080 11311550 11311560 11311570 11311580 11311590 11311600 11311530 11311440 11311450 11311460 11311470 11311480 11311490

112 | FLEXIBLE BUSBARS

Dimensions

Cross section mm²

Current A

3x9x0.8 6x9x0.8 9x9x0.8 3x13x0.5 6x13x0.5 4x15.5x0.8 6x15.5x0.8 10x15.5x0.8 2x20x1 3x20x1 4x20x1 5x20x1 6x20x1 10x20x1 2x24x1 3x24x1 4x24x1 5x24x1 6x24x1 8x24x1 10x24x1

21.6 43.2 64.8 19.5 39 49.6 74.4 124 40 60 80 100 120 200 48 72 96 120 144 192 240

130 196 238 144 215 267 335 439 250 315 370 424 472 661 267 367 428 369 541 642 743

Part number 11311360 11311370 11311500 11311430 11311510 11311520 11311390 11311130 11311690 11311140 11311150 11311160 11311680 11311170 11311180 11311190 11311610 11311200 11311210 11311650 11311220 11311660 11311230 11311240 11311250 11311700 11311260 11311270 11311280

Dimensions

Cross section mm²

Current A

2x32x1 3x32x1 4x32x1 5x32x1 6x32x1 8x32x1 10x32x1 5x40x1 6x40x1 8x40x1 10x40x1 5x50x1 6x50x1 8x50x1 10x50x1 5x63x1 6x63x1 8x63x1 10x63x1 4x80x1 5x80x1 6x80x1 8x80x1 10x80x1 5x100x1 6x100x1 8x100x1 10x100x1 12x100x1

64 96 128 160 192 256 320 200 240 320 400 250 300 400 500 315 378 504 630 320 400 480 640 800 500 600 800 1000 1200

384 477 556 634 700 829 959 762 TBA 983 1131 927 TBA TBA 1357 1099 1253 1361 1569 1269 1423 1537 1766 1995 1729 TBA 2136 2407 2625

www.oem.co.uk


Flexible busbars

Accessories High current clamps

Part number 90010600 90010610 90010620

Twisting tool

Bending tool

Drilling jig

Pressure plates

Flat clamps

Type HSSK 80 HSSK 100 HSSK 120

Din rail fixings for 32mm Isoflexx

Part number 90080400 90080110

80 100 120

Part number 90090110

Type

Description

KSH50 KSH51

Complete clamp Lower clamp only

Type

Width (mm)

Approx. weight (Kg)

VD

480 x 80 x 40

1.6

Part number 90090100

Type

Width (mm)

Approx. weight (Kg)

BV100

780 x 280 x 290

24

Part number 90080100 90080110 90080120 90080130

Type

Width (mm)

Drill hole (mm)

BL16 BL20 BL24 BL32

16 20 24 32

6/8 8/10/12 8/10/12 10/12

Part number 90080300 90080310 90080320 90080330 90080340

Type

Clamp size W X H (mm)

DP32/1 DP40/1 DP40/2 DP50/1 DP50/2

3 x 30 40 x 40 40 x 80 50 x 50 50 x 80

Part number 90010200 90010310 90010210 90010320 90010220 90010330 90010230 90010340 90010240 90010350 90010360 90010250 90010370 90010380 90010260 90010280 90010300

0116 284 9900

Clamp siz W x H (mm)

No. holes 1 1 2 1 2

Type

Inner dims A x B (mm x mm)

Outer dims C x D (mm x mm)

FAK 16 x 16 FAK 16 x 32 FAK 20 x 20 FAK 20 x 40 FAK 25 x 25 FAK 25 x 50 FAK 32 x 32 FAK 32 x 63 FAK 40 x 40 FAK 40 x 53 FAK 40 x 80 FAK 50 x 50 FAK 50 x 80 FAK 50 x 100 FAK 60 x 63 FAK 80 x 80 FAK 100 x 100

16 x 16 16 x 32 20 x 20 20 x 40 25 x 25 25 x 50 32 x 32 32 x 63 40 x 40 40 x 53 40 x 80 50 x 50 50 x 80 50 x 100 60 x 63 80 x 80 100 x 100

35 x 35 35 x 52 40 x 40 40 x 60 45 x 45 45 x 70 52 x 50 52 x 82 60 x 60 60 x 82 70 x 110 70 x 70 80 x 110 80 x 130 80 x 82 120 x 120 140 x 140

Screw length 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 32 35 20 35 35 32 35 35

FLEXIBLE BUSBARS

| 113


Flexible busbars

MBS Earth braids

• • • • •

CSA: 6mm2 - 50mm2 Available tinned or copper bare Press welded ends, no additional ferrules required Custom lengths and hole sizes available on request Quick and easy to install, no preparation required

Introduction Earth braids from SPS, type MBS, are unique on the market as the ends of the braids are press welded under water in a special procedure. This procedure has several advantages: • no use of tin-lead solder • no use of cable shoes • minimal transition resistance, therefore low heating • soft thermal transition • no annealing through heating • no mechanical slot • low difference of strength in transition area • homogeneous structure in connecting area

The earth braids are produced of highly flexible E-Cu braids with a single wire dimension of 0.15mm, Cu bare or tinned. The braids can be used as earth braids as well as highly flexible transmission elements, if connections with low transfer and connection resistance are needed. Earth braids can be supplied with insulation. Other dimensions and cross sections up to 95mm² on request.

Ordering guide 6mm²

Cross section 6mm² Tinned Part number 330 100 11 330 150 11 330 200 11 330 250 11 330 300 11 330 500 11

Type

Hole diameter

MBS 6-100-6 M6 MBS 6-150-6 M6 MBS 6-200-6 M6 MBS 6-250-6 M6 MBS 6-300-6 M6 MBS 6-500-6 M6 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

Length mm

Width mm

Current A

100 150 200 250 300 500

13 13 13 13 13 13

50 50 50 50 50 50

Length mm

Width mm

Current A

100 150 200 250 300 500

13 13 13 13 13 13

80 80 80 80 80 80

10mm² Tinned Part number 331 100 11 331 150 11 331 200 11 331 250 11 331 300 11 331 500 11

Type

Hole diameter

MBS 10-100-6 M6 MBS 10-150-6 M6 MBS 10-200-6 M6 MBS 10-250-6 M6 MBS 10-300-6 M6 MBS 10-500-6 M6 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

114 | FLEXIBLE BUSBARS

www.oem.co.uk


Flexible busbars

Ordering guide 16mm²

Cross section 16mm² Tinned Part number 332 100 11 332 150 11 332 200 11 332 250 11 332 300 11 332 500 11

Type

Hole diameter

Length mm

Width mm

Current A

MBS 16-100-6 MBS 16-150-6 MBS 16-200-6 MBS 16-250-6 MBS 16-300-6 MBS 16-500-6

M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6

100 150 200 250 300 500

15 15 15 15 15 15

120 120 120 120 120 120

100 150 200 250 300 500

15 15 15 15 15 15

120 120 120 120 120 120

Length mm

Width mm

Current A

100 150 200 250 300 500

23 23 23 23 23 23

150 150 150 150 150 150

Length mm

Width mm

Current A

100 150 200 250 300 500

23 23 23 23 23 23

180 180 180 180 180 180

Length mm

Width mm

Current A

100 150 200 250 300 500

23 23 23 23 23 23

195 195 195 195 195 195

Length mm

Width mm

Current A

100 150 200 250 300 500

28 28 28 28 28 28

250 250 250 250 250 250

332 100 22 332 150 22 332 200 22 332 250 22 332 300 22 332 500 22

MBS 16-100-8 M8 MBS 16-150-8 M8 MBS 16-200-8 M8 MBS 16-250-8 M8 MBS 16-300-8 M8 MBS 16-500-8 M8 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

25mm²

Cross section 25mm² Tinned Part number 333 100 33 333 150 33 333 200 33 333 250 33 333 300 33 333 500 33

Type

Hole diameter

MBS 25-100-10 M10 MBS 25-150-10 M10 MBS 25-200-10 M10 MBS 25-250-10 M10 MBS 25-300-10 M10 MBS 25-500-10 M10 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

30mm²

Cross section 30mm² Tinned Part number 334 100 33 334 150 33 334 200 33 334 250 33 334 300 33 334 500 33

Type

Hole diameter

MBS 30-100-10 M10 MBS 30-150-10 M10 MBS 30-200-10 M10 MBS 30-250-10 M10 MBS 30-300-10 M10 MBS 30-500-10 M10 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

35mm²

Cross section 35mm² Tinned Part number 335 100 33 335 150 33 335 200 33 335 250 33 335 300 33 335 500 33

Type

Hole diameter

MBS 35-100-10 M10 MBS 35-150-10 M10 MBS 35-200-10 M10 MBS 35-250-10 M10 MBS 35-300-10 M10 MBS 35-500-10 M10 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

50mm²

Cross section 50mm² Tinned Part number 336 100 44 336 150 44 336 200 44 336 250 44 336 300 44 336 500 44

Type

Hole diameter

MBS 50-100-12 M12 MBS 50-150-12 M12 MBS 50-200-12 M12 MBS 50-250-12 M12 MBS 50-300-12 M12 MBS 50-500-12 M12 * Custom lengths & holes sizes available on request and may carry a MOQ

0116 284 9900

FLEXIBLE BUSBARS

| 115


GSM, SMS REPORTING MODULE

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


General information

118

Inputs/outputs

119

Log function

119

OTA (Over the air) configuration

120

Smartphone app

120

GSM portal

212


GSM-PRO

GSM-PRO communication module • • • •

SMS and E-mail support TS35 or direct mounting Analog input as standard Status LED’s

TypeCat. no. Size (L x W x H) with TS 35 x 7.5 without antenna

GSM-PRO 88 x 95 x 77 mm

Input specifications

CONTA-CLIP's GSM-PRO module offers a remote control and maintenance solution which allows you to monitor and control decentralized facilities. The GSM-PRO module informs you when the process reaches a userdefined status or limit value. Digital and analogue inputs values can also be transmitted via e-mail or SMS (text message). The digital relay outputs can be switched using an SMS sent from the decentralized control room or from the service technician. Thus the process can be monitored and controlled remotely. Monitoring and controlling the GSM-PRO module is even easier when you use our iPhone or Android App. If you are using multiple modules and you need a complete overview of all modules in the field at a glance, then CONTA-CLIP's portal software provides another helpful solution. All of the module inputs, output and associated functions can be easily configured using the module software included in the delivery.

8 multi-function analog/digital inputs Resolution / accuracy (0..10 V)

0..10 V / 24 V DC (10..30 V DC) 20 mV / ±(20 mV+0,3%*)

Output specifications

4 relay outputs

4 x CO Contact, 250 V ~

Rated current

5A

GSM data

Frequency

850/900/1800/1900 MHz

Transmit power Antenna

Class 4 (2 W@850/900 MHz), Class 1 (1 W@1800/1900 MHz) 50 Ohm impedance, SMA connector

General data

Module power supply

10..30 V DC

Module current (max)

275 mA DC @ 24V DC

Backup power

Internal maintenance free supercap capacitor

The wide-range input makes it possible to operate the GSM-PRO with supply voltages from 10 to 30 V DC. So the I/O module can also be used in mobile applications, such as those for the transportation sector. Order number

Eight multi-function inputs

Decription

Quantity

GSM-PRO

GSM-PRO module

1

GSM-ANT

Stubby antenna

1

GSM-SMA-3M

External antenna 3m cable

1

GSM-SMA-5M

External antenna 5m cable

1

GSM-SMA-10M

External antenna 10m cable

1

GSM-SMA-ECO

Economy external antenna 3m cable

1

USB cable

1

Portal software key**

1

GSM-USB GSM-PORTAL-KEY **

** The portal software can be downloaded at www.conta-clip.de. The software is free for up to two GSM-PRO modules. If you are monitoring more modules, you can order a software key using this order number.

• • • • •

Stay up-to-date with just one SMS or E-mail message OTA (over-the-air) capabilities Log functionality: Free smart phone apps Portal software

Four digital outputs

118 | GSM-PRO

www.oem.co.uk


GSM-PRO

Inputs

Outputs

The GSM-PRO module features eight multi-function inputs. The input module may be selected as either digital (24 V DC) or analogue (0 to 10V), so that many different signal levels can be connected.

The GSM-PRO module features four change-over relay outputs rated at 250V/5A. The versatility of the outputs enables machine and facility functions to be controlled even when you are not on-site.

A designated person or group from the built-in address book will then be notified with an SMS or e-mail message if a specified status changes on the input side. The software allows you to easily specify the notification status, the person or group to be notified, and the content of the SMS. You can also query the current status of the process or machine simply by sending a query SMS message. The query message can specify specific inputs or all inputs.

The status of one or more outputs can be queried with a single SMS text message. When a process requires a control pulse, the outputs can also be controlled with an SMS. An output can also be activated simply by calling it up when using the call-in function. If an output only needs to be controlled for a specific duration (to issue a reset pulse, for example), then the output can be activated for a period between 1 and 36,000 seconds using an SMS or phone call to activate the impulse-ON contact function.

Analogue inputs

It is also possible to link an output internally to a digital input. So as soon as the input switches to “one”, an SMS or e-mail is sent out and the corresponding output is switched.

The required measurement units can be custom defined on the analogue inputs (kg, bar, etc.). You can then monitor an analogue process and have an SMS message sent out depending on various circumstances: • When an input exceeds a defined maximum limit, • When an input is below a defined maximum limit, • When an input returns to a normal state within the specified limits.

E-mail E-mails are sent directly from the GSM-PRO module via an SMTP server to the recipient. The software also allows you to set up your own server. Just a single SMS or phone call is sufficient for controlling your facility or machine when you are not on site.

Log function The extensive log functionality of the GSM-PRO module allows you to log events that have taken place at a facility or a machine over a defined period of time.

Event log This log function of the module keeps track of a variety of activities and events. The following events are logged:#

• The threshold limit on an analogue input (AI) has been reached • Rising and falling edges of the digital inputs (DI) • Incoming messages • Outgoing messages • Data transfers • OTA updates

Logs for the analogue inputs When analogue signals are being used in a process, the GSM-PRO features an AI Log function which allows you to log any process values from the analogue input which have a specified frequency. In this way you can compile a history of the process that can help you later to optimize the process. The logging frequency can be configured in steps from 5 to 60 minutes. Both log files can be transferred to the PC using a USB cable. Or, using the OTA functions, you can have the log files automatically sent to your e-mail address.

Run-time counter How many hours has the motor been running? Is the unit due for servicing or maintenance? The run-time counter for the GSM-PRO module‘s I/Os simplify control. As soon as an input or output is activated, the time is registered and added to a pre-set time interval. The counter value of an input or output can be queried at any time with an SMS. Or the current counter readings can be added to the module‘s periodic status messages.

0116 284 9900

GSM-PRO

| 119


GSM-PRO

OTA (Over the Air configuration) In many systems or machines, some parameters or user entries may need to be changed after the installation is completed. In such cases you may also need to change parameters on the GSM-PRO module. The GSM-PRO module features OTA (over-the-air) functions for just such instances. This functionality allows you to change parameters without having to be on site. The initial configuration process must always take place via a direct USB connection between the GSM-PRO module and the PC. When the APN settings are specified during this initial configuration, it is still possible to access the module later via OTA and change the configuration. Whether youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re adding a new phone number of a user, a new I/O setting, a change in the module name or any other change: the settings on all GSM-PRO modules can easily be changed from remote locations.

OTA firmware updates The GSM-PRO module can also update its firmware using OTA, so modules with different versions can always be kept up to date. The newest software can be installed remotely. You can also add new functions and configure them without being on site. OTA firmware update can be triggered with an SMS that is sent to the GSM-PRO module containing a specific code. This setting allows the user to have complete control of whether or when an update will be installed.

Smartphone app CONTA-CLIPâ&#x20AC;&#x2DC;s new iPhone and Android smartphone apps for the GSMPRO modules provide a simple and fast solution so that you can get an overview of each distributed system and application. These apps can show you the status of all inputs and outputs from one or more GSM-PRO modules.

120 | GSM-PRO

They also allow you some control over the process. Module outputs can be controlled easily and directly using this app. The app buttons provide an intuitive control interface (for controlling the heating, a motor, water pump, etc.).

www.oem.co.uk


GSM-PRO

GSM portal It is often quite helpful to have one overall view of the status of all modules used in the field. The new GSM-PRO portal software from CONTA-CLIP offers you precisely this possibility.

This software is very easy to install and configure. All modules in the field can now be easily monitored and run from a single local site or control panel.

The GSM-PRO portal can be installed on any Windows PC (XP, Vista, or W7). The field modules use port forwarding to communicate with the portal software so that they can be monitored and controlled. Specific IP addresses and ports must first be configured on the GSM-PRO modules in the field and in the portal software in order to enable this functionality. Pre-installed modules can also be integrated later into the portal by using OTA configuration.

Once the portal software is started on the PC, all modules are quickly registered. They are then listed in alphabetical order on the portal. The portal displays an overview of registered GSM-PRO modules, which already shows the status of all detected inputs and outputs. Any state changes to the inputs or outputs are marked yellow in the overview. So even when many modules are registered with the portal, changes to any one module are easily visible. In addition to this monitoring function, the outputs of all field modules can be controlled directly. By clicking the mouse on the corresponding button in the portal software, a broadcast signal is sent out and the selected outputs are activated.

When a module is selected, a window opens showing detailed information about that particular module. The specific names of the I/Os are displayed along with the standardized abbreviations of the GSM-PRO module. All module outputs can be controlled by simply clicking on the corresponding portal buttons. The â&#x20AC;&#x153;Events Logâ&#x20AC;? lists all actions and I/Os for the module. This log can also be easily exported. The GSM-PRO portal provides a clear, versatile monitoring and control system for GSM-PRO modules. It can be easily implemented without any prior programming knowledge.

0116 284 9900

GSM-PRO

| 121


LOGIC CONTROLLERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Introduction

124

Smart range

125

Essential range

125

Digital extension modules

130

Analogue extension and communication modules

131

Power supplies

132

Remote display and HMI

133

Accessories

134

Technical specification

135


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 introduction What is a Logic Controller? A logic controller is a programmable module which is used to control small automation systems or small installations. The logic controller is a plural solution in a control system since it contains solutions that can replace a number of products; timers, counters, control relays,

temperature controllers, impulse relays etc. The logic controller operates as the brains of an application. It is capable of retrieving information and triggering actions; it can be adapted to suit the needs of customer applications.

Temperature Controllers

Control Relays

Counters

Millenium 3 features

Timers

User friendly and ergonomic • Panel, DIN-rail or consumer unit mountable for simple installation • Wide accessory range; touch screens, sensors and power supplies • Blue screen display (Smart version) for improved legibility • Wide operating temperature range; -20°c to +70°c Low-cost • Wiring time reduced by programming with M3 software • Several automation functions contained in a single product Communication and expansion • Communication products to enable remote supervision or send alarms, data etc • Expandable versions to maintain future project development Simple to use • Simple function block based programming (ladder programming also available)

124 | LOGIC CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Logic controllers

The Smart Range

• • • • • • • •

Compact and expandable versions Backlit blue LCD display Operating temperature up to 70°c Supply voltage; 12VDC to 230VAC Memory; 700 Blocks Up to 50 I/O Can be linked together to create a network Modbus communication available

• • • • •

Compact and expandable versions Backlit green LCD display Operating temperature up to 55°c Supply voltage; 12 and 24VDC Memory; 350 block for compact version, 700 blocks for expandable version

Exclusive Smart Range function blocks Of a library of 120 function blocks, 19 are exclusive to Millenium 3 Smart and are dedicated to industry-specific applications, communication and complex calculations.

The Essential Range

0116 284 9900

LOGIC CONTROLLERS

| 125


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – smart range with display

• • • • • • •

Highly visible blue LCD display Allows full use of extensive function block library Expandable and non expandable models User definable front panel Application specific functions Digital, analogue and potentiometer inputs Relay, solid state or PWM outputs

Dimensions CD20/CB20/XD26 CD12/CB12/XD10

Ordering guide Compact range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

Power supply

88974041

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 Relay 8A

24VDC

88974042

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5A (including 1 PWM)

24VDC

88974043

CD12

8 digital

4 Relay 8A

100-240VAC

88974044

CD12

8 digital

4 Relay 8A

24VAC

88974045

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 Relay 8A

12VDC

88974046

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5A (including 1 PWM)

12VDC

88974051

CD20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 Relay 8A

24VDC

88974052

CD20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 solid state 0.5A (including 4 PWM)

24VDC

88974053

CD20

12 digital

8 Relay 8A

100-240VAC

88974054

CD20

12 digital

8 Relay 8A

24VAC

88974055

CD20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 Relay 8A

12VDC

Expandable range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

Power supply

88974141

XD10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 Relay 8A

24VDC

88974142

XD10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5A (including 1 PWM)

24VDC

88974143

XD10

6 digital

4 Relay 8A

100-240VAC

88974144

XD10

6 digital

4 Relay 8A

24VAC

88974161

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

24VDC

88974162

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

24VDC

88974163

XD26

16 digital

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

100-240VAC

88974164

XD26

16 digital

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

24VAC

88974165

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

12VDC

88974166

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

12VDC

126 | LOGIC CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – smart range without display

• • • • •

Allows full use of extensive function block library Expandable and non expandable models Application specific functions Digital, analogue and potentiometer inputs Relay, solid state or PWM outputs

Dimensions CD20/CB20/XD26 CD12/CB12/XD10

Ordering guide Compact range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

88974021

CB12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 relays 8 A

Power supply 24VDC

88974023

CB12

8 digital

4 relays 8 A

100-240VAC

88974024

CB12

8 digital

4 relays 8 A

24VAC

88974026

CB12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5 A (including 1 PWM)

12VDC

88974031

CB20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 relays 8 A

24VDC

88974033

CB20

12 digital

8 relays 8 A

100-240VAC

88974034

CB20

12 digital

8 relays 8 A

24VAC

Power supply

Expandable range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

88974131

XB10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 relays 8 A

24VDC

88974132

XB10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5 A (including 1 PWM)

24VDC

88974133

XB10

6 digital

4 relays 8 A

100-240VAC

88974134

XB10

6 digital

4 relays 8 A

24VAC

88974151

XB26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

24VDC

88974152

XB26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

24VDC

88974153

XB26

16 digital

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

100-240VAC

88974154

XB26

16 digital

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

24VAC

88974155

XB26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

12VDC

0116 284 9900

LOGIC CONTROLLERS

| 127


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – essential range with display

• • • • • •

Cost effective solution Green LCD Display Expandable and non expandable models User definable front panel Digital, analogue and potentiometer inputs Relay, solid state or PWM outputs

Dimensions CD20/CB20/XD26 CD12/CB12/XD10

Ordering guide Compact range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

88970041

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 relays 8 A

Power supply 24VDC

88970042

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5 A (including 1 PWM)

24VDC

88970045

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 relays 8 A

12VDC

88970865

CD12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5 A (including 1 PWM)

12VDC

88970051

CD20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 relays 8 A

24VDC

88970052

CD20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

24VDC

88970055

CD20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 relays 8 A

12VDC

Power supply

Expandable range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

88970141

XD10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 relays 8 A

24VDC

88970142

XD10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5 A (including 1 PWM)

24VDC

88970161

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

24VDC

88970162

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

24VDC

88970165

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

12VDC

88970814

XD26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

12VDC

128 | LOGIC CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – essential range without display

• • • •

Cost effective solution Expandable and non expandable models Digital, analogue and potentiometer inputs Relay, solid state or PWM outputs

Dimensions CD20/CB20/XD26 CD12/CB12/XD10

Ordering guide Compact range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

88970021

CB12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 relays 8 A

Power supply 24VDC

88970840

CB12

8 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5 A (including 1 PWM)

12VDC

88970031

CB20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 relays 8 A

24VDC

88970806

CB20

12 digital (including 6 analogue)

8 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

24VDC

Power supply

Expandable range Part number

Type

Inputs

Outputs

88970131

XB10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 relays 8 A

24VDC

88970132

XB10

6 digital (including 4 analogue)

4 solid state 0.5 A (including 1 PWM)

24VDC

88970151

XB26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

24VDC

88970152

XB26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 solid state 0.5 A (including 4 PWM)

24VDC

88970155

XB26

16 digital (including 6 analogue)

10 relays (8 x 8 A relay and 2 x 5 A relay)

12VDC

0116 284 9900

LOGIC CONTROLLERS

| 129


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – digital extension modules

• • • •

For XD10 and XD26 expandable Milleniums only One XR digital extension per Millenium Can be used with XE10 expandable extension Power supplied via the controller at the same voltage as the inputs

Dimensions XR06 XR10/XR14/XE10

Ordering guide Type

Input

Output

Ordering code

XR06

4 inputs 24vdc

2 relay outputs

88 970 211

4 inputs 100-240vac

2 relay outputs

88 970 213

4 inputs 24vac

2 relay outputs

88 970 214

4 inputs 12vdc

2 relay outputs

88 970 215

XR10

XR14

6 inputs 24vdc

4 relay outputs

88 970 221

6 inputs 100-240vac

4 relay outputs

88 970 223

6 inputs 24vac

4 relay outputs

88 970 224

6 inputs 12vdc

4 relay outputs

88 970 225

8 inputs 24vdc

6 relay outputs

88 970 231

8 inputs 100-240vac

6 relay outputs

88 970 233

8 inputs 24vac

6 relay outputs

88 970 234

8 inputs 12vdc

6 relay outputs

88 970 235

• XE expandable extension for use with above extensions • Offers a further 10 I/O XE10

130 | LOGIC CONTROLLERS

6 inputs 24vac

4 relay outputs

88 970 324

6 inputs 100-240vac

4 relay outputs

88 970 323

6 inputs 24vdc

4 relay outputs

88 970 321

www.oem.co.uk


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – analogue & communication modules Analogue extension module

• 10-bit analogue extension • 2 inputs/2 outputs Type

Input

Output

Voltage

Ordering code

XA04

2 analogue

2 analogue

24Vdc

88 970 241

Communication modules

• Field bus with Modbus RS-485 protocol (XN03) • TCP Modbus on Ethernet (XN05) • For 24vdc controller only Type

Designation

Voltage

Ordering code

XN03

Modbus (slave)

24Vdc

88 970 250

XN05

Ethernet (slave)

24Vdc

88 970 270

XN07

Master

24Vdc

88 974 250

• Interface module for use with STN and GSM modem’s • 12-24 vdc Type

Designation

Voltage

Ordering code

COM

Modem interface

12-24Vdc

88 970 117

• Modem via a line network (STN) • Remotely download, modify and interrogate all controller functions Type

Designation

Voltage

Ordering code

MOD

STN modem

12-24Vdc

88 970 118

• Modem via a wireless network (GSM) • For isolated installations • Remotely download, modify and interrogate all controller functions

0116 284 9900

Type

Designation

Voltage

Ordering code

MOD

GSM modem

12-24Vdc

88 970 119 LOGIC CONTROLLERS

| 131


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – power supplies

• • • • • •

12 & 24 Vdc versions Automatic surge & short circuit protection Switch mode technology LED indication DIN rail housing Same profile as the programmable controller units

General specification Input voltage: 100 to 240Vac single phase (+20%/-15%) Supply frequency range: 50/60 Hz (+4%/-6%) Output voltage (V): Adjustable from 100 to 120% Primary switch mode electronic Technology: power supply Short circuit protection: Yes Overload protection: Yes

Reset after overload Automatic Status indication LED at the output Mounting DIN rail EN 50022 IEC EN 60950-1 Conformity to standards IEC EN 61000-6-2 IEC EN 61000-6-1 IEC EN 61000-6-3 Certifications CE, UL-CSA, TüV

Dimensions

Ordering guide Type PS5 -20W PS12 - 25W PS24 - 7.5W PS24 - 15W PS24 - 30W PS24 - 60W

132 | LOGIC CONTROLLERS

Output voltage 5 V DC (4,75 V ––> 6,25 V) 12 V DC (11,4 V ––> 15 V) 24 V DC (22,8 V ––> 28,8 V) 24 V DC (22,8 V ––> 28,8 V) 24 V DC (22,8 V ––> 28,8 V) 24 V DC (22,8 V ––> 28,8 V)

Nominal power 20 W 25 W 7,5 W 15 W 30 W 60 W

Nominal output current 4A 2.1A 0.3A 0.6A 1.2A 2.5A

Ordering code 88950305 88950306 88950303 88950304 88950307 88950302

www.oem.co.uk


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – remote display and HMI

• Universal screen compatible with any Millenium 3 logic controller • Set and parameterise your application data in advance • Backlit LCD screen with 4 lines of 18 characters and keypad with 6 keys or 10 keys and 4 LEDs • Direct communication with the Millenium 3 via the programming port • Plug and play: no additional software (the function keys and LEDs are controlled by the Millenium 3 Soft SLIn/ SLOut FBD functions) • Check bit for controlling communication

Ordering guide Part number

Type

Designation

88970410

RD

Remote LCD screen/keypad

88970412

RD

Kit with remote LCD screen/keypad + 3 m cable (88970102)

88970411

RD

Remote LCD screen/keypad + 4 function keys + 4 LEDs

88970413

RD

Kit with remote LCD screen/keypad + 4 function keys + 4 LEDs + 3 m cable (88970102)

Millenium 3 – remote display and HMI

• 4.3’‘ & 7”TFT-LCD compact resistive touch panels, 65536 colours, LED backlight • Wide viewing angle: 70° horizontally and vertically • Fan-less cooling system • Text, data, graphic and animation display • Processing of alarms and recipes • 400 M Hz core logic, 64 MB RAM • 128 MB flash memory storage • Direct communication via the Millenium 3 programming port • Programmable with user-friendly EB software • RS232/RS485 serial port (4.3” only) • 2 RS232/RS485 serial ports, USB 1.1 port, USB 2.0 port (7” only) • SD card slot (7” only)

Ordering guide Part number

Type

Designation

Size

88970492

RD

MTP6/50 user kit (fixing brackets, MTP-M3 cable)

4.3”

88970494

RD

MTP8/50 user kit (fixing brackets, MTP-M3 cable)

4.3”

88970501

PA

MTP6/50-MTP8/70 programming kit - USB-MiniUSB connection (EB /helpfile CD, USB-MiniUSB cable)

88970502

PA

MTP8/50-MTP8/70 programming kit - Ethernet crossover connection (EB/ helpfile CD, RJ45 crossover cable)

88970496

RD

MTP8/70 user kit (MTP8/70, fixing brackets, MTP-M3 cable)

88970501

RD

MTP6/50-MTP8/70 programming kit - USB-MiniUSB connection (EB /helpfile CD, USB-MiniUSB cable)

88970502

RD

MTP8/50-MTP8/70 programming kit - Ethernet crossover connection (EB/helpfile CD, RJ45 crossover cable)

0116 284 9900

7”

Programming

Connection

USB-MiniUSB cable

Direct connection M3-MTP Modbus RS232/RS485 serial port

Ethernet RJ45 crossover cable

Direct connection M3-MTP Modbus RS232/RS485 serial port, Ethernet TCP/IP port

USB-MiniUSB cable /Ethernet RJ45 crossover cable

Direct connection M3-MTP2 Modbus RS232/RS485 serial ports, USB port, Ethernet port

LOGIC CONTROLLERS

| 133


Logic controllers

Millenium 3 – accessories

• Connection accessories • Programming tools and software • Faceplates • Communication accessories

Ordering guide Connection accessories Type

Description

88970102

Part number

PA

3 m serial link cable : PC-Millenium 3

88970109

PA

USB cable 3 m : PC-Millenium 3

88970123

PA

1,80 m serial link cable : DB9 M / DB9 F

88970510

PA

500 mm serial link cable Millenium 3-DB9 M

Programming tools & software Type

Description

88970111

Part Number

M3 Soft

Multilingual programming software containing specific library functions (CD-ROM)

88970116

M3 Alarm

Alarm management software (CD-ROM)

88970108

PA

ROM memory cartridge

Faceplate adaptors Part number

Type

Description

MA

IP67 sealed faceplate for the following products : - XD10 or CD12

MA

IP67 sealed faceplate for the following products : XD10 + XR06 or XN03 or XN05 or XA04 CD20 or XD26 XD10 + XN03 or XN05 + XR06 or XA04- XD10 + XR10 or XR14

MA

IP67 sealed faceplate for the following products : XD26 + XR06 or XN03 or XN05 or XA04- XD10 + XN03 XA04 + XR10 or XR14- XD10 + XE10 + XR06 or XA04 XD26 + XN03 or XN05 + XR06 or XA04- XD26 + XR10 XR14- XD10 + XE10 + XR10 or XR14 - XD26 + XE10 + XR06 XA04- XD26 + XN03 or XN05 + XR10 or XR14

88970809

MA1

IP40 faceplate : CD12 or XD10

88970810

MA1

IP40 faceplate : CD20 or XD26

89750160 89750161

89750162

Communication accessories Part number 88970125

Description RJ45 tee joint wiith 20cm cable

88970126

EOL ferrules RC120 Ω 1nF (pack of 2)

88970127

RJ45 wiring kit ( 2 tees, 2 ferrules 1 x 4 pair FTP cable, 3m)

134 | LOGIC CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Logic controllers

Technical specification General characteristics

24 Vac input

Earthing Depending on the part number ; refer to the quick reference guide supplied with the product IP 40 on front panel Protection IP 20 on terminal block Certifications UL,CSA,GL pending Conformity to standards IEC/EN 61131-2 (Zone B), IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, IEC/EN 61000-6-4 Programming method SFC/function blocks/ladder logic Program size CB,CD,XD :typically 250 blocks Program memory Flash EEPROM Removable memory EEPROM 368 bits/200 words Data memory backed up for 10 years LCD display Display with 4 lines of 18 characters Real-time clock Drift <12 min/year at 25 °C) 6 s/month (at 25°C with user- definable correction of drift) Data retention :10 years (lithium battery) Storage temperature -40 to +70°C Operating temperature -20 to +40°C Relative humidity -no 95 %max. condensation acc.to IEC/EN 60068-2-3 &IEC/EN 60068-2-30

Input voltage 24 Vac (+20% -15%) Supply frequency range 50/60 Hz (+4 %/-6 %) Input impedance 4.6 kΩ ≥14 Vac Pull-in voltage at logic state 1 Drop out voltage at logic state 0 ≤5 Vac Status indicator On LCD screen for CD and XD

100...240 Vac power supply Operating voltage 100 - 240 Vac (+10%-15%) Supply frequency range 50/60 Hz (+4 %/-6 %) Operating limits 85 - 264 Vac Immunity from micro power cuts 10ms CB12-CD12-XD10 :7 VA Max. absorbed power CB20-CD20-EC20 :11 VA XD10 with extension -XD26 :12VA XD26 with extension :17 VA

24 Vac power supply Operating voltage 24 Vac (+20%-15%) Supply frequency range 50/60 Hz (+4 %/-6 %) 20.4 - 28.8 Vac Operating limits Immunity from micro power cuts 10ms Max. absorbed power CB12-CD12-XD10 :4VA CB20-CD20 :6 VA XD10 with extension -XD26 :7.5VA XD26 with extension :10VA

24 Vdc power supply Operating voltage 24 Vdc (+25%-20%) 19.2 - 30 Vdc Operating limits Immunity from micro power cuts 1ms Max. absorbed power CB12-CD12-CD20 with solid state outputs XD10 with solid state outputs :3W XD26 with solid state outputs :5W CB20-CD20 with relay outputs XD26 with relay outputs :6 W XD10 with extension :8 W XD26 with extension :10 W

12 Vdc power supply Operating voltage 12 Vdc (+20%-13%) Operating limits 10.4 - 14.4 Vdc Immunity from micro power cuts 1ms Max. absorbed power CD12 : 1.5W CD20 : 2.5W

100 - 240 Vac input Input voltage Supply frequency range Input impedance Pull-in voltage at logic state 1 Drop out voltage at logic state 0 Response time Status indicator

0116 284 9900

100 - 240 Vac (+10% -15%) 50/60 Hz (+4 %/-6 %) 350 KΩ ≥79 V AC ≤40 V AC 50 ms On LCD screen for CD and XD

Analogue input (24 Vdc models only) CB12-CD12-XD10 4 inputs from IB to IE CB20-CD20-XD26 6 inputs from IB to IG Measurement range 0 to 10 V or 0 to power supply voltage 10 bits Resolution Conversion time Controller cycle time 30 Vdc Max. input voltage Input impedance (KΩ) >12 kΩ Precision at 25ºC ±5% Precision at 55ºC ±6.2 % Potentiometer control 2.2 kΩ/0.5 W

24 Vdc input Current drain 24 Vdc (+25% -20%) Input current 0.75 mA/2.2 mA max 7.4 kΩ Input impedance Pull-in voltage at logic state 1 ≥15 Vdc Drop out voltage at logic state 0 ≤5 Vdc Galvanic isolation No Sensor type Contact - 3 wire PNP On LCD screen for CD and XD Status indicator

12 Vdc input Input voltage 12 Vdc (+20% -13%) Input current 0.9 mA/2 mA max 6.45 kΩ Input impedance Pull-in voltage at logic state 1 ≥5.6 Vdc Drop out voltage at logic state 0 ≤2.4 Vdc Galvanic isolation No Sensor type Contact - 3 wire PNP On LCD screen for CD and XD Status indicator

Analogue input (12 Vdc models only) CB12-CD12-XD10 4 inputs from IB to IE CB20-CD20-XD26 6 inputs from IB to IG 0 to 10 V or 0 to power supply voltage Measurement range Resolution 10 bits Controller cycle time Conversion time Max. input voltage 14.4 Vdc Input impedance (KΩ) 14 kΩ Precision at 25ºC ±5% ±6.2 % Precision at 55ºC Potentiometer control 2.2 kΩ/0.5 W

Relay outputs Max. breaking voltage 250 Vac/150 Vac Breaking current CB-CD-XD10-XR06-XR10 :8 A XD26 :8 x 8 A relays, 2 x 5 A relays XR14 :4 x 8 A relays, 2 x 5 A relays Service life 10.000.000 operations Min. load 10mA/12 Vdc Response time 10ms Status indicator On LCD screen for CD and XD

TOR /PWM solid state output PWM solid state outputs CD12-XD10 :O4 CD20-XD26 :O4 <O7 Breaking voltage 19.2-28.8 V DC Breaking current 0.625 A Min. load 1 mA Max. incandescent load 0.1A Leakage 0.1mA/24 Vdc Response time 1ms Insulation no PWM frequency 14 Hz to 1806 Hz (configurable) PWM cyclic ratio 0 to 100 % (256 steps) PWM precision at 120 Hz <5% (20% to 85%) load at 10mA PWM precision 500Hz <10%(20% to 80%) load at 10mA Status indicator On LCD screen for CD and XD LOGIC CONTROLLERS

| 135


NANO PLC

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Product overview

138

Controllers, extensions and interfaces

139

Programming software and remote access

140

Dimensions and part numbers

141


Nano PLC

more than just a Nano-PLC em4 is a leading edge device supported by best-in-class tools that enables you to create and implement the smartest automation applications

lab

soft

web

app

partners community

remote Fully connected nano-PLC includes all em4 lab functionalities

alert Nano-PLC that can alert you via SMS or email

local The em4 for standalone use or local are network

3 high-tech designs that are easy to integrate in your machine Glossy black

Glossy white

Robust

Ready to use accessories • USB interface • RS485 Modbus interface • MTP touch panels

Compact and expandable • up to 46 I/Os with the same nano-PLC

Accuracy and performance • Measure precisely your high end industrial sensors with the most accurate configurable analog inputs embedded in a nano-PLC (including 4-20 mA) • The inherent performance allows you to upgrade your machine over time: • More eficiency (the 32 bit processor calculation) • More memory availablee for your application (up to 1000 function blocks) • More control (50 μs per function block)

138 | NANO PLC

www.oem.co.uk


Nano PLC

Controllers, extensions and interfaces EM4 – Local/Remote/Alert • • • • • • • • •

26 I/O 24 VDC (-15% +20%) power supply Highly visible HMI 4 configurable digital inputs for encoder (20 kHz), or high speed count (60 kHz) 12 digital/analog inputs including 4(0-10 V, 0-20, 4-20mA) 2 static PWM outputs 8 relay outputs (2 x 6 A, 6 x 8 A) Large memory (100 FB ) Programmable locally with an USB interface Optional Interface for Modbus RS485 slave

Digital and analogue extensions Up to two same or different expansions can be added to the base station to expand up to 46 I/OS • Digital; 6 digital/analog configurable inputs (0-10V or potentiometer) 4 relay outputs (2 x 6 A and 2 x 8 A) • Analogue; 6 digital/analog configurable inputs (0-10 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA) with a good accuracy for industrial sensors 4 static outputs (2x Digital/PWM and 2x 0-10 V) allowing controlling analog actuators (controlled valve, controlled pump...)

Interfaces Modbus RS485 slave interface Control or supervise one or several em4 via Modbus RS485 USB interface Connect em4 soft or other application via USB port

0116 284 9900

NANO PLC

| 139


Nano PLC

Programming software and remote access EM4 – “Soft” software • Easy-to-use – quick, simple and intuitive programming that requires no specialist knowledge ,a simulation mode that represents PLC operation and a debug mode to test the application program in the field • Application-oriented – create and save custom macros, read a Millenium 3 application program and save it in em4 format, use our complete range of basic and dedicated function blocks,and discover our new range of remote management and maintenance function blocks • Technical details – use the easy FBD/SFC programming language with a large library of standard and specific powerful FB’s • New remote function blocks – include event management for pushing alert messages, Log data for recording a history of values, XBin, XWin for remotely adjusting set points, XBout, XWout for reading remotely data values • Windows XP, Seven, and Windows 8 compatible

EM4 – “Web” • • • • • •

Manage your EM4 fleet, online, anywhere in the world Manage your access rights, as well as our customers's Download your application program or firmware Monitor and control your devices – track them on a map Display your data history Receive event notifications by email or SMS

EM4 – “App” • Mobile complement to the "em4 web" platform, the em4 mobile app is the ultimate way to control and monitor your em4 from your smartphone • This is a free application, included in your em4 remote PLC. It uses a fully secured and optimized infrastructure to ensure total protection of your data.Simply scan the QR on the product, log in, and instantly begin monitoring and controlling your device.

140 | NANO PLC

www.oem.co.uk


Nano PLC

Ordering EM4 – Local/Remote/Alert

em4 alert B26 24VDC-2GS Glossy White

88981153

em4 remote B26 24VDC-2GC Glossy Black

88981154

em4 remote B26 24VDC-2GC Glossy White

88981106

Starter Kit em4 local B26 24VDC Glossy Black

88981107

Starter Kit em4 local B26 24VDC Glossy White

88981116

Starter Kit em4 alert B26 24VDC-2GS Glossy Black

88981117

Starter Kit em4 alert B26 24VDC-2GS Glossy White

88981156

Starter Kit em4 remote B26 24VDC-2GC Glossy Black

88981157

Starter Kit em4 remote B26 24VDC-2GC Glossy White

88980180

Evaluation Case em4 local B26 24VDC GB

88980181

Evaluation Case em4 alert B26 24VDC-2GS GB

88980185

Evaluation Case em4 remote B26 24VDC-2GC GB

88982213

em4 extension E10A 24VDC Glossy Black

88982214

em4 extension E10A 24VDC Glossy White

88980110

em4 interface USB Black

88980111

em4 interface USB interface White

88980120

em4 interface RS485 24VDC Modbus S Black

88980121

em4 interface RS485 24VDC Modbus S White

88980150

em4 Set of I/O Simulator for B26 24VDC

88980160

Antenna 3M Standard

88980161

Antenna 3M Int/Ext Flat

88980162

Antenna 10M Ext

88980170

USB cable 3M B Type

88980140

em4 soft (USB key)

48.7 / 1.91 62.6 / 2.46 64.8 / 2.55

90 / 3.54

88981114

108.1 / 4.25

em4 alert B26 24VDC-2GS Glossy Black

mm inch

B26 2GC Glossy 124.6 / 4.90 87.6 / 3.45 43.2 / 1.70

64.8 / 2.55

48.7 / 1.91 60.4 / 2.38

90 / 3.54

em4 local B26 24VDC Glossy White

88981113

45 / 1.77

88981104

124.6 / 4.90 87.6 / 3.45 43.2 / 1.70

45 / 1.77

em4 local B26 24VDC Glossy Black

99.4 3.91

88981103

0116 284 9900

B26 2GC Robust

Product Description

99.4 3.91

Part no

108.1 / 4.25

• • • •

80 / 3.15

26 I/O 24 VDC (-15% +20%) power supply Highly visible HMI 4 configurable digital inputs for encoder (20 kHz), or high speed count (60 kHz) 12 digital/analog inputs including 4(0-10 V, 0-20, 4-20mA) 2 static PWM outputs 8 relay outputs (2 x 6 A, 6 x 8 A) Large memory (100 FB ) Programmable locally with an USB interface Optional Interface for Modbus RS485 slave

80 / 3.15

• • • •

mm inch

NANO PLC

| 141


PANEL METERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Moving coil meters

144

Moving iron meters

146

Shunts

147

N24/25 series indicators

148

N20/N20Z indicators with outputs

148

N30U/N30O programmable displays with outputs

150

N30H/N30P programmable displays with outputs

151

NA3, NA5/6 bargraph displays

152

NA5/NA6 programmable bargraph meter

153

B


Panel meters

Moving coil meters

• • • •

DC current and voltage measurement DIN sizes 48, 72, 96 and 144mm Red pointer option Built in rectifier option

Technical data Accuracy class: Direct current range: Direct voltage range: Red pointer option:

Protection degree: - case - terminals Operating temperature: Material:

1.5 1 mA to 30 A 60 mV to 1000 V MA17 & MA19 on request

IP50 (IP65 on request) IP20 with protective cover -20 to 60 deg C Thermoplastic case with glass front

Dimensions a

e

f

g

d

k

c

a

58

Type EA16 EA17 EA19 EA12

b

22

a

b

48 72 96 144

4 4 405

c

d

e

f

48

68 92 137

5 5 5 6

10 10 10 10

45 48

g

h

2035 68 32.5 92 55.5 138

c

Part number key Moving coil meters Din size: 48 x 48 72 x 72 96 x 96 144 x 144 Protection degree: IP50 (standard) IP65 Meter type: ammeter direct (select code from table) voltmeter direct (select code from table) ammeter 4-20mA Scale options: normal red mark blank scale no unit no range no range or unit scale 0 - 20% Scale colour: white black without scale Red pointer: no pointer red pointer Panel mounting angle: 90 degrees (standard) Please enquire for other options

144 | PANEL METERS

XXXX

X

XXXX

X

X

XXXX

X

MA16 MA17 MA19 MA12 N I XXXX XXXX A900 0 B C D E F H 0 1 2 0000 0001 0 X

www.oem.co.uk


Panel meters

Ammeter codes Ammeter Direct input range connection with scale 100mA 150mA 250mA 400mA 500mA 600mA 1A 1.5A 2.5A 4A 5A 6A 10A 15A 20A 25A 30A 40A 50A 60A 80A 100A 150A 200A 250A 300A 400A 500A 600A 800A 1000A 1500A 2000A 3000A 4000A 5000A 10000A

E114 E115 E116 E117 E118 E119 E201 E202 E203 E204 E205 E206 E207 E208

CT 1A Secondary with scale

CT 5A Secondary with scale

E212 E213

CT 1A Secondary with scale overload x 2

CT 5A Secondary with scale overload x 2

Direct Connection with scale overload x 6

CT 1A Secondary with scale overload x 6

CT 5A Secondary with scale overload x 6

G307 G308 G309 G310 G311 G312 G313

H407

F114 F116 F117

E301

E305

E405

E307 E308 E309

E407 E408 E409

E311 E312 E313 E314 E315 E316 E317 E318 E319 E320 E321

E411 E412 E413 E414 E415 E416 E417 E418

E210 E211

Direct Connection with scale overload x 2

F119 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 F209 F210 F211 F212 F213

E420 E421 E422 E423 E424 E450 E451 E452 E454 E455 E456 E459

E323 E324 E350 E351 E354

F305

F405

F307 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 F316 F317 F318 F319 F320 F321 F322 F323 F324 F350 F351 F352 F354 F355

F407 F408 F409 F411 F412 F413 F414 F415 F416 F417 F418

G201 G202 G203 G204 G205 G206 G207 G208 G209 G210 G211

G316 G317 G318 G319 G320

F420 F421 F422 F423 F424 F450 F451 F452 F454 F455

H410 H411 H412 H413 H414 H415 H416 H417 H418 H419 H420 H421

Voltmeter codes Voltmeter input range

Direct connection with scale

Voltmeter input range

Direct connection with scale

6V

E605

150V

E612

10V

E606

250V

E613

15V

E607

300V

E620

25V

E608

400V

E614

40V

E609

500V

E615

50V

E621

600V

E616

60V

E610

800V

E617

100V

E611

1000V

E618

120V

E622

0116 284 9900

PANEL METERS

| 145


Panel meters

Moving iron meters

• • • •

AC current and voltage measurement DIN sizes 48, 72, 96 and 144mm Red pointer option IP50 standard (IP65 on request)

Technical data Accuracy class: Frequency: Direct current range: Direct voltage range: Overload current option: Red pointer option:

Protection degree: - case - terminals Operating temperature: Material:

1.5 50/60 Hz 100 mA to 100 A (25A EA16) 6V to 1000 V (600 V EA16) x 2 or x 6 overload EA17 & EA19 on request

IP50 (IP65 on request) IP20 with protective cover -20 to 60 deg C Thermoplastic case with glass front

Dimensions a

e

f

g

d

k

c

a

58

Type EA16 EA17 EA19 EA12

b

22

a 48 72 96 144

b 4 4 405

c

d

e

f

68 92 137

5 5 5 6

48 45 45 48

10 10 10 10

g

h

2035 68 32.5 92 55.5 138

c

Part number key Moving iron meters Din size: 48 x 48 72 x 72 96 x 96 144 x 144 Protection degree: IP50 (standard) IP65 Meter type: ammeter with scale (select code from table) ammeter CT 1A secondary no scale ammeter CT 5A secondary no scale ammeter CT 1A secondary no scale overload ammeter CT 5A secondary no scale overload ammeter CT 1A secondary no scale overload ammeter CT 5A secondary no scale overload voltmeter with scale (select code from table) voltmeter VT 100V secondary no scale voltmeter VT 110V secondary no scale Scale options: normal red mark blank scale no unit no range no range or unit scale 0 - 20% Scale colour: white black Red pointer: no pointer red pointer Panel mounting angle: 90 degrees (standard) Please enquire for other options

146 | PANEL METERS

XXXX

X

XXXX

X

XXXX

X

X

EA16 EA17 EA19 EA12 N I

x x x x

2 2 6 6

XXXX E3 E4 F3 F4 G3 H4 XXXX E7 E8 0 B C D E F H 0000 1000 0 1 0 X

www.oem.co.uk


Panel meters

Ammeter codes Ammeter input range

Direct connection with scale

Direct connection AC rectifier with scale

Ammeter input range

Direct connection with scale

Shunt 50mV with scale

100µA

A0009

1A

A201

AB01

AE01

150µA

A0010

1.5A

A202

AB02

AE02

250µA

A0011

P011

2.5A

A203

AB03

AE03

400µA

A0012

P012

4A

A204

AB04

AE04

600µA

A0013

P013

5A

A205

1mA

A101

P101

6A

A206

AB06

AE06

1.5mA

A102

P102

10A

A207

AB07

AE07

2.5mA

A103

P103

15A

A208

AB08

AE08

4mA

A104

P104

20A

A209

AB09

5mA

A105

25A

A210

AB10

6mA

A106

P106

40A

AB12

10mA

A107

P107

50A

AB13

15mA

A108

P108

60A

AB14

20mA

A109

100A

AB16

25mA

A110

P110

150A

40mA

A111

P111

200A

AB18

60mA

A113

P113

250A

AB19

100mA

A114

P114

400A

AB21

150mA

A115

P115

600A

AB23

AE23

250mA

A116

P116

1kA

AB50

AE50

400mA

A117

P117

1.5kA

AB51

AE51

600mA

A119

P119

2.5kA

AB53

AE53

AA07

AA17

Shunt 60mV with scale

Shunt 75mV with scale

Shunt 100mV with scale

Shunt 150mV with scale

AE09 AD10

AE10 AE12 AE14

AC16

AD16

AB17

AD17

AE16

AC19

AD19

AE19

AC21

AD21

AE21

AE17

Voltmeter codes Voltmeter input range

Direct connection with scale

60mV 75mV

Direct connection AC rectifier with scale

Voltmeter input range

Direct connection with scale

Direct connection AC rectifier with scale

A505

15V

A607

P607

A511

25V

A608

P608

100mV

A506

40V

A609

P609

150mV

A507

60V

A610

P610

250mV

A508

100V

A611

P611

400mV

A509

150V

A612

P612

600mV

A510

250V

A613

P613

1V

A601

300V

A620

1.5V

A602

P602

400V

A614

P614

2.5V

A603

P603

500V

A615

P615

4V

A604

P604

600V

A616

P616

6V

A605

P605

800V

A617

10V

A606

P606

1000V

A618

Shunts • Extension of DC current measuring ranges of moving-coil ammeters • Accuracy class 0.5 • Shunts of 1…15 kA ranges • 50 mV, 60 mV, 75 mV, 100 mV & 150 mV versions available

0116 284 9900

PANEL METERS

| 147


Panel meters

N24/N25 series

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs fixed:

Digital panel meter

N24T/N25T:

Pt100, J, K type

N24S/N25S:

0/4…20 mA; 0…60mV dc, 0…10 V; ±60 mV; ±10 V dc

N24H/N25H:

±100 V dc; ±250 V dc; 400V dc; 1 A; 5 A; 0-100 V dc; 0-250 V dc

N24Z/N25Z:

100 V ac; 250 V ac; 400 V ac; 1 A; 5A; 20…500Hz

Outputs: For N24/N25:

24V ± 5% 30 mA: S, T versions – optional

Dimensions:

96 x 48 x 64mm

Protection level:

IP65 front

Supply voltage:

230 V ac; 110 V ac 24 V ac; 85…253 V ac/dc; 20…40 V ac/dc

N20 series

Technical data

N XX

Digits: 24 4 25 5 Kind of input signal: standard: voltage, current temperature: thermocouples, resistance thermometers ac signals dc signals: high voltage and current Input signal: See table 2 on page 150 Supply voltage: 230 V ac 110 V ac 24 V ac 85…253 V ac/dc with supply output 24V/30mA* 20…40 V ac/dc with supply output24V/30mA* Unit: See table 3 on page 150

X

X

X

XX 00

E

0

00

8

S T Z H X 1 2 3 4 5 XX

• DC voltage, DC current, temperature or resistance input • 3 colour display red, green and orange, 5 digit (14mm) • 2 OC alarm outputs

Part number key

Inputs fixed:

Digital panel meter

Current:

0/4…20 mA, ±20 mA

Voltage:

0…60 mV; 0-10 V; ± 10 V dc

Temperature:

Pt100, J, K type

Outputs:

2 x OC alarm outputs

N20:

Output for supply external transducers 24V ± 5% 30 mA

Readout field:

5-digit three-colour LED display digit height: 14mm, colours: green, orange, red, indication range: -19999…99999

Dimensions:

96 x 48 x 64mm (with terminals)

Protection level:

IP 65 front

Supply voltage:

85…253 V ac/dc; 20…40 V ac/dc

148 | PANEL METERS

• DC voltage, DC current, temperature or resistance input • AC voltage or AC current input option (Z) • 4 digit (20mm) or 5 digit (14mm)

Input: Pt100: - 50…400°C Thermocouple J: - 50…1200°C Thermocouple K: - 50…1370°C 0…20 mA 4…20 mA ± 20 mA 0…60 mV 0…10 V ± 10 V Supply voltage: 85…253 ac/dc 20…40 ac/dc Unit: See table 1 on page 150

N20

X

X

XX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 XX

www.oem.co.uk


Panel meters

N20Z series

Technical data Inputs fixed: Current: Voltage: Frequency: Outputs: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

Part number key 1A, 5A ac 100 V; 250 V; 400 V ac 20…500 Hz 2 x OC alarm outputs 96 x 48 x 64mm (with terminals) IP 65 front 85…253 V ac; 20…40 V ac

N30U Universal meter

Technical data Inputs programmable: Temperature: Current: Voltage: Outputs: Relay output: Analog output: OC output: Auxiliary supply: Digital interface: RS-485: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

0116 284 9900

• AC voltage, AC current or frequency input • 3 colour display red, green and orange, 5 digit (14mm) • 2 OC alarm outputs

Digital panel meter

N20Z

Input: 100 V 250 V 400 V 1A 5A frequency 20…500 Hz Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac (45…65 Hz) or dc 20…40 V ac (45…65 Hz) or dc Unit: See table 1 on page 150

X

X

XX

00

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 XX

• Inputs for temperature, resistance, current and voltage • 5 digit (14mm) 3 colour programmable display with highlighted unit • 2 relay alarm outputs as standard (plus 2 optional) • RS485 and analogue output option • 21 point scaling Part number key

Pt100, Pt500, Pt1000, J, K, N, E, R, S type 400Ω, 4000Ω, 0/4…20 mA, ±20 mA 0-10V, -10 - 60 mV dc 2 x relays, NO contacts 250 V ac/ 0,5 A ac 2 x relays, CO contacts 250 V ac/0,5 A ac – optional Current programmable, 0/4…20mA – optional Voltage programmable, 0…10V – optional OC type, passive npn, 30V dc/30mA – optional 24 V dc/ 30mA – optional

Digital panel meter Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc Additional outputs: lack RS-485, analog outputs RS-485, analog outputs swiched-over relay outputs AL3, AL4 Unit: See table 1 on page 150

N30U

X

X

XX

00

8

1 2 0 1 2 XX

MODBUS RTU – optional 96 x 48 x 93mm IP65 front 85…253 V ac/dc; 20…40 V ac, 20…60 V dc

PANEL METERS

| 149


Panel meters

N30O pulses/frequency meter

Technical data

• Inputs for counting DC pulses to measure frequency and rotational speed • 5 digit (14mm) 3 colour programmable display with highlighted unit • 2 relay alarm outputs as standard (plus 2 optional) • 21 point scaling Part number key

Inputs programmable: voltage 5…36VDC: Number of pulses Cntr – 100 kHz Frequency < 10 kHz – 100 kHz Frequency > 10 kHz – 1 MHz Rotational speed – 100 kHz Period t<10s – 100 kHz Period t>10s – 100 kHz Worktime counter Encoder Outputs: Relay output: 2 x relays; NO contacts; 250 V ac/ 0,5 A ac 2 x relays; CO contacts; 250 V ac/ 0,5 A ac – optional Analog output: Current programmable 0/4…20 mA – optional Voltage programmable 0…10V – optional OC output: OC type, passive npn, 30 V dc/30 mA – optional Auxiliary supply: 24 V dc/30 mA – optional Digital interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU – optional Dimensions: 96 x 48 x 93mm Protection level: IP65 front 85…253 V ac/dc; 20…40 V ac/dc Supply voltage:

N20/N30 tables

Digital panel meter

N30O

Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc Additional outputs: lack RS-485, analog outputs RS-485, analog outputs change-over relay outputs AL3, AL4 Unit: See table 1 below.

X

X

XX 00

E

0

1 2 0 1 2 XX

N24/N25 tables

Table 1. Code of the highlighted unit:

Table 2. Meter type:

Code

Unit

Code

Unit

Code

Unit

No

S

T

Z

H

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

lack of V A mV kV mA kA W kW MW var kvar Mvar VA kVA MVA kWh MWh kvarh Mvarh

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

kVAh MVAh Hz kHz

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50m 51 52 53 54 55 56

pcs imp rps m/s l/s turns/min rpm mm/min m/min l/min 3/min pcs/h m/h km/h m3/h kg/h l/h

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0…20 mA 4…20 mA 0…60 mA 0…10 V ± 60 mV ± 10 V

Pt100: -50…150 °C Pt100: -50…400 °C Thermocouple J Thermocouple K

100 V ac 250 V ac 400 V ac 1 A ac 5 A ac 20…500 Hz

±100 V dc ±250 V dc ±400 V dc ±1 A dc ±5 A dc 0…50 V dc 0…200 V dc

XX

on order

150 | PANEL METERS

kΩ °C °F K % %RH pH kg bar m l s h m3 obr

Table 3. Codes of highlighted unit: N24/N25 Code

Unit

Code

Unit

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

lack of unit ˚C % A V mV mA kA

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

kV turns rpm bar Pa kPa MPa on order

www.oem.co.uk


Panel meters

N30H high DC meter

Technical data Inputs programmable: Current: 1 A; 5A Voltage: 100 V dc; 500 V dc; Outputs: Relay output: 2 x relays, NO contacts, 250 V ac/0,5 A ac 2 x relays, CO contacts 250 V ac/0,5 A ac – optional Analog output: Current programmable, 0/4…20mA – optional Voltage programmable, 0…10V load – optional OC output: OC type, passive npn, 30V dc/30mA – optional Auxiliary supply: 24 V dc/30mA – optional Digital Interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU – optional External features: 96 x 48 x 93mm Dimensions: Protection level: IP65 front Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac/dc; 20…40 V ac, 20…60 V dc

N30P power meter

Technical data Inputs: Voltage: 100 V; 400 V Current: 1 A; 5 A Measuring ranges: Measured value, current, voltage, frequency, active power, reactive power, apparent power, cofficient PF, tangents ϕ, ϕ, active energy, reactive energy, apparent energy Outputs: Relay output: 2 x relays, NO contacts, 250 V ac/0.5 A ac 2 x relays, CO contacts 250 V ac/0.5 A ac – optional Analog output: Current programmable 0/4…20 mA – optional Voltage programmable 0…10 V – optional Energy pulse output: OC type, passive Output pulse: 5000 imp./kWh – optional Digital interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU – optional Dimensions: 96 x 48 x 93mm Protection level: IP65 front Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac/dc; 20…40 V ac/dc

0116 284 9900

• Inputs for higher levels of DC current and DC voltage • 5 digit (14mm) 3 colour programmable display red, green and orange with highlighted unit • 2 relay alarm outputs as standard (plus 2 optional) • 21 point scaling Part number key Digital panel meter

N30H

Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc Additional outputs: lack RS-485, analog outputs RS-485, analog outputs change-over relay outputs AL3, AL4 Unit: See table 1 on page 150

X

X

XX

00

8

1 2 0 1 2 XX

• Inputs for single phase AC current/voltage and measures all network parameters • 5 digit (14mm) 3 colour programmable display red, green and orange with highlighted unit • 2 relay alarm outputs as standard (plus 2 optional)

Part number key Digital panel meter Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc Additional outputs: lack pulse output RS-485, analog outputs pulse output RS-485, analog outputs change-over relay outputs AL3, AL4 Unit: See table 1 on page 150

N30P

X

X

XX

00

8

1 2 0 1 2 XX

PANEL METERS

| 151


Panel meters

NA3 digital meters with bargraph

• • • •

3 or 7-colour bargraph Signalling of set alarm value overflow Current or voltage analog output Communication in SCADA systems (RS485/Modbus interface RTU and ASCII)

Technical data Meter: Inputs programmable: Outputs: Analogue output: Relay output:

Open collector: Digital interface: External features: Readout field: NA3-F: NA3-B: NA3-D: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

NA3 type – horizontal, 1-measuring channel in 3 options: with bargraph, with bargraph and display, only with display NA5 type – vertical, 1-measuring channel, with bargraph and display NA6 type – vertical, 2-measuring channels, with 2 bargraphs and 2 displays Pt100, Pt500, Pt1000, J, K, N, E, R, S, T type 400Ω, 4000Ω (NA5), 0…20 mA, 0…2/5A 0…60 mV, 0…10/600 V dc Current programmable 0/4…20 mA – optional Voltage programmable 0…10 V – optional 1 or 2 relays NOC contacts, 250 V ac/5A – optional

Passive, OC type – optional RS-485, MODBUS ASCII, RTU – optional

4 LED displays with 7 segments, digits of 7mm high, indication range -1999…9999 multicoloured bargraph as above 4 LED displays with 7 segments, digits of 14mm high, 3 alarm diodes, indication range as above 96 x 24 x 125mm IP40 front 95…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc

Part number key Digital panel meter

NA3

Meter verson: with a bargraph and digital display with a bargraph with a digital display Bargraph colour: without bargraph (NA3D) 3 colour (R, G, R + G) 7 colour (R, G, B, R + G, R + B, G + B, R + G + B) Display colour: without display red green blue Input signal: universal input Analog output: lack current programmable 0/4…20 mA voltage programmable 0…10 V Additional output: lack RS-485, digital output + 1 relay RS-485, digital output + 1 output of OC type 2 relays 2 outputs of OC type Supply voltage: 85…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc

152 | PANEL METERS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

0

00

0

F B D 0 T M 0 R G B U 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 1 2

www.oem.co.uk


Panel meters

NA5/NA6 programmable bargraph meter

• Universal input for temperature, resistance, voltage & current • Fully programmable from front panel buttons • One or two channel • Digital display & multicolour LED bargraph

Technical data Inputs programmable: Pt100, Pt500, Pt1000, J, K, N, E, R, S, T type 0…10kΩ, ± 40 mA, ± 5 A, ± 300 mV, ± 600 V dc Outputs: Analogue outputs: Current programmable 0/4…20 mA – optional Voltage programmable 0…10 V – optional Relay outputs: 4 relays: NO contacts 250 Vac, 5A – optional

8 outputs of OC type: Digital outputs: Memory parameters: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

Passive, OC type with npn transistor - optional RS-485, MODBUS, ASCII, RTU – optional NA5, NA6: 750 samples (channel 1 or 2) NA5, NA6: 48 x 144 x 100mm (with terminals) NA5, NA6: IP 50 - front 95…230…253 V ac/dc: 20…24…40 V ac/dc

Part number key Digital panel meter

NA5

Bargraph colour: 3 colours (R, G, R + G) 7 colours (R, G, B, R + G, R + B, G + B, R + G + B) Display colour: without display red green blue Input signal: universal input Analogue output signal: without analogue output current programmed, 0/4…20 mA voltage programmed, 0…10 V Digital output signal: without output RS-485 digital output Additional outputs: without output 4 relay outputs 8 OC outputs Supply: 95…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc

0116 284 9900

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

T M 0 R G B U 0 1 2 0 1 0 4 8 1 2

0 00 0

Digital panel meter

NA6

Bargraph colour: 3 colours (R, G, R + G) 7 colours (R, G, B, R + G, R + B, G + B, R + G + B) Display colour (on channels 1 and 2): without LED displays red - red red - green red - blue green - red green - green green - blue blue - red bue - green blue - blue Input signal: universal input Analogue output signal: without output current programmed, 0/4…20 mA voltage programmed, 0…10 V Digital output signal: without output RS-485 digital output Additional outputs: without output 4 relays outputs 8 OC outputs Supply: 95…253 V ac/dc 20…40 V ac/dc

X XX X

X

X

X

X

0 00 0

T M 00 RR GG BB GR GG GB BR BG BB U 0 1 2 0 1 0 4 8 1 2

PANEL METERS

| 153


POWER NETWORK AND SYNCHRONISATION METERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


N14 power network meter

156

ND10 power network meter

156

ND20 advanced power network meter

157

N10/N10A advanced power network meter

157

ND1 3-phase power quality analyser and recorder

158

KS3 synchronising unit

158

N27D 1-Phase rail mount network meter

160

N27P 1-phase rail mount power network meter

160

N43 3-phase rail mounted network meter

160


Power network and synchronisation meters

N14 power network meter

Technical data Inputs: Current: Voltage: Measurement: Voltage: Current: Power: Outputs: Relay outputs: Impulse energy output: Digital interface: RS-485: Display: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

Part number key N14 1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) 3 x 57.7/100V, 3 x 230/400V, 3 x 400/690V* Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, mean ph to ph Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, in Neutral wire Active, reactive, apparent, 3 -ph power, 15 min active power. 4 - quadrant power & energy measurement Power factor, ph angle, tg φ, freq, 3-ph active & reactive energy 1 x relay, NO contacts OC passive, impulse constant 5000imp/kWh

Current input In: 1 A (X/1) 5 A (X/5) Voltage input (phase/phase-to-phase) Un: 3 x 57, 7/100 V 3 x 230/400 V 3 x 400/690 V** Version: standard input voltage 3 x 110/ 190 V custom-made ** Version only for direct measurement

X

X

XX

8

1 2 1 2 3 00 01 XX

MODBUS RTU LED 3 x 3, 14mm digits 96 x 96 x 77mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 40…400Hz

ND10 power network meter

• Measurement of basic power network parameters in a 4-wire balanced or unbalanced system • Meter supply from measurement circuit • Interface RS-485 Modbus slave (option) • 2 alarm outputs

Part number key

Technical data Inputs: Current: Voltage: Measurement: Voltage: Current: Power: Harmonics: Outputs: Relay outputs: Impulse energy output: Digital interface: RS-485: Display: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

• Measurement of power network parameters in 3 or 4 wire balanced or unbalanced systems • Interface RS-485 Modbus slave as standard • Configurable alarm output and current and voltage ratios

ND10 1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) 3 x 57.7/100V, 3 x 230/400V, 3 x 290/500V Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, mean ph to ph Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, in neutral wire Active, reactive, apparent, 3 -ph power, 15 min active power. 4 - quadrant power & energy measurement Power factor, ph angle, tg φ, freq, 3-ph active & reactive energy THD, voltage & current

Current input In: 1 A (X/1) 5 A (X/5) Voltage input (phase/ phase-to-phase) Un: 3 x 57.7/100 V 3 x 230/400 V 3 x 290/500 V Digital output: without RS485 interface with RS485 interface

X

X

X

00

E

0

1 2 1 2 3 0 1

2 x relay, NO contacts 0.5A, 230V a.c OC passive, impulse constant 5000… 20000 imp/kWh MODBUS RTU - optional LCD 3.5” monochrome backlit 96 x 96 x 77mm IP65 front Supplied from measuring circuit

156 | POWER NETWORK AND SYNCHRONISATION METERS

www.oem.co.uk


Power network and synchronisation meters

ND20 power network meter

Part number key

Technical data Inputs: Current: Voltage: Measurement: Voltage: Current: Power: Energy: Harmonics: Outputs: Relay outputs: Analog output: Impulse energy output: Digital interface: RS-485: Display: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

ND20 1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) 3 x 57.7/100V, 3 x 230/400V Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, mean ph to ph Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, in neutral wire Active, reactive, apparent, 3 -ph power, 15 min active power. 4 - quadrant power & energy measurement Power factor, ph angle, tg φ, freq, 3-ph active & reactive energy THD, voltage & current up to 21st 1 x relay, NO contacts 0.5A, 230V a.c 1 x 0/4…20mA OC passive, impulse constant 1000…20000 imp/kWh

X

X

X

X

00

E

0

1 2 1 2 0 1 1 2

• Measurement and conversion of power network parameters in 3 or 4-wire balance or unbalanced systems • Measurement and visualisation of several scores of power network quantities, current and voltage harmonics • Digital RS-485 Modbus protocol • Programmable selection of parameter pages Part number key

Technical data

0116 284 9900

Current input In: 1 A (X/1) 5 A (X/5) Voltage input (phase/phase-to-phase) Un: 3 x 57.7/100 V 3 x 230/400 V Analog current output: without analog output with programmable output 0(4) … 20 mA Supply voltage: 85…253 V d.c. or a.c. (40…400 Hz) 20…40 V d.c. or a.c. (40…400 Hz)

MODBUS RTU LCD 3 .5” monochrome - backlit 96 x 96 x 77mm IP65 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 40…400Hz, 20…40V a.c/d.c, 40…400Hz

N10/N10A meter

Inputs: Current: Voltage: Measurement: Voltage: Current: Power Harmonics: Outputs: Relay outputs: Analog output: Impulse energy output: Digital interface: RS-485: Display: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

• Measurement of power network parameters in 2, 3 or 4-wire balanced or unbalanced systems • High accuracy class • Interface RS-485 Modbus slave as standard • Analogue output • Configurable analogue, alarm and pulse outputs (energy)

N10/N10A 1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) 3 x 57.7/100V, 3 x 230/400V Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, mean ph to ph Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, in neutral wire Active, reactive, apparent, 3 -ph power, 15 min active power. 4 - quadrant power & energy measurement power factor, ph angle, tg φ, freq, 3-ph active, reactive & apparent energy THD, voltage & current up to 25th 3 x relay, NO contacts (1 x relay N10A) 1 x 0/4…20mA (3 x ±5mA N10A) OC passive, impulse constant 1000…9999 imp/kWh (N10 only)

Current input In: 1 A (X/1) 5 A (X/5) Input phase voltage Un: 100 V 400 V Digital output: without interface with RS-485 interface Display: red green

X

X

X

X

0

00

8

1 2 1 2 0 1 1 2

MODBUS RTU - optional LED 4 x 5, 14mm digits red or green 144 x 144 x 77mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c POWER NETWORK AND SYNCHRONISATION METERS

| 157


Power network and synchronisation meters

ND1 3-phase power quality analyser and recorder

• Measurement and recording of over 300 electric energy quality parameters • 5 instruments in 1; 3-ph analyser, transducer, recorder, webserver and controller • Analysis of current and voltage harmonics up to the 51st • User friendly interface based on Windows

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs: Current: Voltage: Logic Measurement Voltage: Current: Power Harmonics Outputs: Relay outputs Analog outputs Auxiliary supply Digital interface RS-485 Ethernet Data storage Display Dimensions Protection level Supply voltage:

ND1 1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) 3 x 57.7/100V, 3 x 230/400V, 3 400/690V 12 x 0/5…24V d.c Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, mean ph to ph Phase, mean 3-ph, ph to ph, in neutral wire Active, reactive, apparent, 3 -ph power, 15 min active power. 4 - quadrant power & energy measurement power factor, ph angle, tg φ, freq, 3-ph active, reactive & apparent energy voltage dips, voltage swells, voltage assymmetry, flicker parameters energy tarriffs x 4 THD, voltage & current up to 51st

X

Current input: 1 1A 2 5A Voltage input: 57.7/100 V 230/400 V 400/690 V NOTE: Each ND1 analyser is equiped with 6 alarms (electromecanic outputs, 12 logic inputs and Ethernet interface.

X

00

E

0

1 2 3 relays), 4 analog

6 x relay, NO contacts 4 x 0/4…20mA 2 x 24V d.c/30mA 2 x MODBUS RTU - 1 x master, 1 x slave 10 Base-T, RJ45, Modbus TCP/IP, Webserver, HTTP, NTP, FTP Compact flash card - 4GB measurment and logging of energy quality acc. to EN 50160 LCD TFT 5.7” colour touch screen, 320 x 240 pixels 144 x 144 x 155mm IP65 front 85…253V a.c/d.c

KS3 synchronising unit

Technical data Inputs: Voltage: 100V, 110V, 230, 400V Frequency: 15…500Hz Measurement: Voltage: -20…0…20% Frequency: -10…0…10% Phase shift: 0…360° Outputs: Relay outputs: 2 x relay, NO contacts (SYNC/ALARM) Digital interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU Display: 4 x 5, 14mm LED digits (KS3.1), synchroscope circle 72 x LED, volt & freq meter 68 x LED (KS3-2) Dimensions: 144 x 144 x 77mm Protection level: IP40 front Supply voltage: 85…253V a.c/d.c, 40…400Hz, 18…30V a.c/d.c

158 | POWER NETWORK AND SYNCHRONISATION METERS

• Designed to automatically synchronise 3-phase generators connected in parallel with power networks of 50/60Hz • Measurement through voltage transformers • Measurement and visulisation of phase, frequency and voltage differences • Measurement of minimum and maximum voltage and frequency values Part number key KS3 Kind of display: LED digits bargraphs (diode lines) Input voltages: 100 V 110 V 240 V 400 V Digital output: without interface with RS-485 interface Supply voltage: 85…250 V d.c./a.c. 24 V d.c./a.c.

X

XX

X

X

00

8

1 2 01 02 03 04 0 1 0 1

www.oem.co.uk


Power network and synchronisation meters

N27D 1-Phase rail mount network meter

Technical data

• Measurement of true RMS AC voltage, AC current, active power and frequency • Direct 63A connection • Modular housing (3 module wide) with acc. to EN 62208

Inputs: Current: 63A Voltage: 500V Measurement: True RMS voltage, RMS current, frequency, active power Display: OLED 53 x 110 x 60mm Dimensions: Protection level: IP00 front Supply voltage: 230V a.c ±10%, 45…65Hz

Part number key N27D

00

E

0

N27P 1-phase rail mount power network meter

Technical data

• Measurement of 1-phase network parameters • Universal input 63A direct or CT • Programmable analogue and relay outputs • Modular housing (3 modules wide) with acc. to EN 62208 Part number key N27P

X

Current measuring range: 1 A/5 A a.c 32 A/63 A a.c. Outputs: 2 relays 1 relay and 1 analog 0/4…20mA

X

00

E

0

1 2 1 2

N43 3-phase rail mounted network meter

Technical data

• Measurement of power network parameters in 3 or 4-wire balanced or unbalanced system • Universal input 63A direct or CT • Configurable alarm outputs and transformer ratios • Modular housing (6 modules wide) with acc. to EN 62208 Part number key N43 Current input In: 1 A/5 A (X/1; X/5) 63 A Voltage input (phase/phase-to-phase) Un: 3 x 57.7/100 V 3 x 230/400 V 3 x 290/500 V Auxiliary supply: 85…253 V a.c., 90…300 V d.c. 20…40 V a.c., 20…60 V d.c.

0116 284 9900

Inputs: Current: 1A/5A, 32A/63A Voltage: 100V/400V Measurement: Voltage, current, frequency, active power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor, Tan φ, φ, active energy, reactive energy Outputs: 1 or 2 x relay, NO contacts Relay outputs: Current: 0/4…20mA - optional Digital interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU USB: 1.2/1.2 programming port Display: OLED Dimensions: 53 x 110 x 60mm Protection level: IP40 front Supply voltage: 85…253V a.c, 40…400Hz, 90…300V d.c

X

X

X

1 2

00

E

0

Inputs: Current: Voltage: Measurement: Voltage: Current: Power: Harmonics: Outputs: Relay outputs: Impulse energy output: Digital interface: RS-485: Display: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) or 63A direct 3 x 57.7/100V, 3 x 230/400V, 3 x 290/500V Phase, ph to ph, ph to neutral - RMS Phase, ph to ph, ph to neutral - RMS Active, reactive, apparent Active & reactive energy Power factor & frequency THD, voltage & current 3 x relay, NO contacts O/C passive, impulse constant 5000… 20000 imp/kWh MODBUS RTU LCD 3.5” monochrome backlit 105 x 110 x 60mm IP50 front 85…253V a.c, 40…400Hz, 90…300V d.c 20…40V a.c, 40…400Hz, 20…60V d.c

1 2 3 1 2 POWER NETWORK AND SYNCHRONISATION METERS

| 159


POWER SUPPLIES

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Introduction

162

1 Phase 24V 5-10A Piano

164

1 Phase 24V 0.6-5A

165

1 Phase 24V 3-5A

166

1 Phase 24V 10-40A

167

2 & 3 Phase 24V 4.2-10A

168

3 Phase 24V 20-40A

169

1 Phase 12V 1.3-15A

170

1 Phase 48V 1-20A

171

3 Phase 48V 5-20A

172

1 & 3 Phase (other voltages)

173

DC-UPS

174

Buffer modules

177

Redundancy modules

178

DC-DC converters

179

ASI & accessories

180

Special versions

181


Power supplies Introduction Company Puls Puls is a privately owned German company with over 20 years experience in the manufacture of DIN rail switch mode power supplies. They lead the way using innovation and cutting edge technology to produce the smallest, most efficient units available on the market. They have become one of the largest manufacturers in the world with all production taking place in their own factories to ensure the highest level of quality control.

• Specialist manufacturer with 100% focus on PSU’s • Reliability is a guiding principle • High focus on continuous product development • Ecological thinking Efficiency & long lifetime Puls power supplies are characterised by high efficiency, small size, low power consumption and long life time. Energy savings can in many cases exceed the purchase cost after just a few years of operation. All components are of the highest quality which helps achieve excellent MTBF values.

• • • •

Long lifetime and high reliability Lower temperature in the panel Energy saving Lower operating costs

Robust input circuit to protect against external interference It is difficult to completely protect against problems caused by poor power supply networks. With Puls every unit is designed with a robust primary input circuit that can withstand disruptions, voltage spikes and short interruptions. All Puls power supplies are approved to VDE0160 (protection against transients).

• • •

Protection against mains transients Long hold up times protect against short interruptions Active inrush current protection (Dimension)

162 | POWER SUPPLIES

Compact dimensions Thanks to clever circuit design and high efficiency Puls has continuously managed to reduce the housing size of each successive series. The picture shows a Silverline single phase 20A unit which was introduced in 1998 with a width of 230mm. Sitting on top is the latest C series single phase 20A unit with a width of just 65mm which is over a 70% reduction in size in less than 15 years!

• • • •

Save valuable panel space Patented robust DIN rail clip Light weight units Shock & vibration resistant www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies

erie

S

S

Large power reserves for difficult loads The Dimension family has two different power reserve functions to help overcome higher current demands. These can be used to overcome short term, higher start up currents and avoid the need to over specify the power supply rating.

Series Q The Q series has a bonus power feature that allows up to 50% additional output current for up to 4 seconds. After this time the current returns to nominal but the bonus power can be used again after a short recovery period.

erie

Series C The C series has a power reserve feature that allows up to 25% more output current. If the ambient temperature does not exceed 40°C this can be taken continuously or for shorter periods at higher temperatures.

Common to both Q & C series are powerful short circuit currents. This typically helps MCB protection devices on the secondary side to successfully trip in the event of a fault. Keep in mind longer cable runs can dramatically reduce short circuit current and here we recommend using electronic fuses for protection.

Worldwide approvals Puls has all international approvals usually required for export purposes. In addition there are also CB certificates and marine approvals. Several products also have additional classifications such as ATEX, NEC class 2 and SEMI F47. These help to provide security and simplifies export to other countries.

Puls + a little bit more Continuous product development from Puls also brings many other small technical advantages:

+

• • • • • • •

Comprehensive and reliable data Reliable DIN rail mount clip Active inrush current protection Specific MTBF values for each model Robust connection terminals Small ventilation holes Latest technology

The Puls family

Piano

Miniline

Piano is the latest series and features an excellent price to performance ratio

Compact units for lower current applications

Dimension C-series

The standard series with very high reliability but slightly fewer features

Dimension Q-series

Dimension DC-UPS

The premium series featuring “state of the art” technology

Back up system with intelligent battery monitoring

• Output current 5A & 10A

• Output current from 0.6A to 5A

• Output current from 3A to 20A

• Output current from 3A to 40A

• Load current 10A & 20A options

• Compact size

• From 22.5mm wide

• High performance

• DC OK relay

• Single battery concept on 10A unit

• Economical – fewer features

• Multiple output voltage options

• Compact housing

• 50% bonus power

• Constant output voltage regardless

• Screw & screwless terminals

• 20% power reserve

• Screwless terminals

• Screw connection terminals

0116 284 9900

of battery level • Multiple diagnostics & status outputs POWER SUPPLIES

| 163


Power supplies Piano series The Piano series offers compact units that meet the essential industrial requirements of today’s applications. The excellent relationship between performance and price opens up many new possibilities without compromising on quality or reliability. The robust housing is made of reinforced polycarbonate that can withstand ambient temperatures up to 70°C. The power supply can even operate at this temperature with a derating of the output current and in addition the units have good resistance against shock and vibration. Many industrial applications require only a 230 V AC input. By removing the wide range / auto switching input options the circuitry is greatly simplified which brings advantages for reliability. efficiency and cost.

1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 5 A

Supply voltage AC

220-240 V AC -15/+10 %

Supply voltage DC

No

Input current at 230 V AC

• • • •

39mm wide Efficiency 90.5% DC-OK relay Cost effective

1.12 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

5A

Efficiency at 230 V AC

90.5 %

Operating temperature (without derating output)

-10 to +55 °C

Approvals

UL 60950-1

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

39 x 124 x 124

EMC

Class A

Part number

Input voltage

Output data

PIC120.242C

230 V AC

24-28 V DC/5 A

PIC120.241C

230 V AC

24-28 V DC/5 A DC-OK output

1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 10 A

Supply voltage AC

220-240 V AC -15/+10 %

Supply voltage DC

No

Input current at 230 V AC

• • • •

49mm wide Efficiency 91.2% DC-OK relay Cost effective

2.2 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

10 A

Efficiency at 230 V AC

91.2 %

Operating temperature (without derating output) Approvals

-10 to +55 °C UL 60950-1

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

49 x 124 x 124

EMC

Class A

Part number

Input voltage

Output data

PIC240.241C

230 V AC

24-28 V DC/10 A DC-OK output

164 | POWER SUPPLIES

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies 1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 0.6 A. 1.3 A & 2.5 A

• • • •

From 22.5mm wide AC & DC input voltage High efficiency Low no load current

Model

ML15.241

ML30.241

ML60.241

Supply voltage AC

85-264 V AC

85-264 V AC

85-264 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-375 V DC

88-375 V DC

88-375 V DC

Input current 120/230 V AC

0.28/0.17 A

0.54/0.3 A

0.98/0.58 A

Output voltage Output current nominal Efficiency at 230 V AC Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

24-28 V DC

24-28 V DC

24-28 V DC

0.63 A (15 W)

1.3 A (30 W)

2.5 A (60 W)

85.1 %

89.4 %

89.7 %

22.5 x 75 x 91

22.5 x 75 x 91

45 x 75 x 91

UL508 listed, UL60950-1, GL. ABS, CB-scheme

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

ML15.241

85-264 V AC/88-375 V DC

24-28 V DC

0.6 A

ML30.241

85-264 V AC/88-375 V DC

24-28 V DC

1.3 A

ML60.241

85-264 V AC/88-375 V DC

24-28 V DC

2.5 A

1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 5 A

Model

• • • •

72mm wide Screw terminals High efficiency up to 90.4% NEC Class 2 version

ML120.241

Supply voltage AC

100-120 V/ 220-240 V AC

Supply voltage DC

218-377 V DC. + to L & - to N terminal

Input current at 120/230 V AC

1.82/1.07 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current nominal Efficiency at 230 V AC Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

5 A (120 W) 3.8 A (NEC-Class 2) 90.4 % 72.5 x 75 x 103 UL508 listed, UL60950-1 recognized, GL, Gost, CB-scheme

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

ML120.241

115/230 V AC

24-28 V DC

5A

115/230 V AC. NEC Class-2

24-28 V DC

3.8 A

ML120.241.Class 2

0116 284 9900

Output current

POWER SUPPLIES

| 165


Power supplies 1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 3.4 A & 5 A

Model

QS3.241

QS5.241

Supply voltage AC

100-240 V AC ±15 %

100-240 V AC ±15 %

Supply voltage DC

110-300 V DC ±20 %

110-300 V DC ±20 %

1.42/0.82 A

1.10/0.62 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

3.4 A (80 W)

5 A (120 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds at 24V DC

5 A (120 W)

7.5 A (180 W)

Efficiency 120 V AC/230 V AC

88.7/90 %

91.6/92.7 %

S

Input current 120/230 V AC

erie

• • • •

50% bonus power Up to 92.7% efficiency High short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

DC-OK

No

Yes

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

32 x 124 x 102

40 x 124 x 117

Approvals

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

QS3.241

100-240 V AC/100-240 V DC

24 V DC

3.4 A

QS5.241

100-240 V AC/93-345 V DC

24 V DC

5A

1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 3 A & 5 A

S

UL508 listed, UL60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF47, CB-scheme

erie

• • • •

Model

20% power reserve Up to 90.2% efficiency Slimline Standard version with high reliability

CS3.241

CS5.241

Supply voltage AC

90-264 V AC

100-120/200-240 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-375 V DC

N/A

Input current 120 V/230 V

1.24/0.68 A

2.05/1.23 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

3.3 A (80 W)

5 A (120 W)

Power reserve up to 45 °C

No

6A

88/89.8 %

89.4/90.2 %

Efficiency 120/230 V AC Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

32 x 124 x 102

32 x 124 x 117

Approvals

Part number

UL508 listed, UL60950-1, GL, ABS, CB-scheme

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

CS3.241

90-264 V AC/88-375 V DC

24-28 V DC

3A

CS5.241

115/230 V AC

24-28 V DC

5A

166 | POWER SUPPLIES

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies 1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 10 A & 20 A

Model Supply voltage AC Supply voltage DC

• • • •

erie

20% power reserve Up to 94% efficiency Slimline (20 A=65 mm) Standard version with high reliability

CPS20.241 100-264 V AC

No

No - use CPS20.241-D1

3.73/2.25 A

4.36/2.33 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

10 A (240 W)

20 A (480 W)

Power reserve up to 45 °C

12 A (288 W)

24 A (576 W)

Efficiency at 120/230 V AC

91/91.6 %

92.7/94.0 %

Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

-25 to +60 °C 60 x 124 x 117

65 x 124 x 127

UL508 listed, UL60950-1, GL, ABS, CB-scheme

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

CS10.241

115/230 V AC

24-28 V DC

10 A

CPS20.241

100-264 V AC

24-28 V DC

20 A

1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 10 A & 20 A

Model

QS10.241

QS20.241

Supply voltage AC

85-276 V AC

85-276 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-187 V DC

88-187 V DC

2.2/1.2 A

4.56/2.48 A

Input current 120/230 V AC

S

• • • • erie

50% bonus power Up to 93.9% efficiency HIgh short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

10 A (240 W)

20 A (480 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds at 24V DC

15 A (360 W)

30 A (720 W)

Efficiency 120 V AC/230 V AC

92.6/93.5 %

92.4/93.9 %

Yes

Yes

DC-OK relay Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

60 x 124 x 117

82 x 124 x 127

Approvals Part number

UL 508 listed, UL60950-1, CSA C22.2 No.107 listed, GL. ABS. Semi F-47 CB-scheme

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

QS10.241

100-240 V AC/88-187 V DC

24-28 V DC

10 A

QS20.241

100-240 V AC/88-187 V DC

24-28 V DC

20 A

1 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 40 A

Supply voltage AC Input current 230 V AC

S

S

Input current 120/230 V AC

CS10.241 100-120/200-240 V AC

erie

• • • •

50% bonus power Active inrush current limiter High short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

100-240 V AC 4.5 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

40 A (960 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds at 24V DC

60 A (1 440 W)

Efficiency at 230 V AC

94.6 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) DC-OK relay Approvals

125 x 124 x 127 Yes UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF47, CB-scheme, Class 1, Div 2

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

QS40.241

100-240 V AC

24-28 V DC

40 A

0116 284 9900

POWER SUPPLIES

| 167


Power supplies 2 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 4.2 A

Supply voltage AC Input current at 400 V AC Output voltage

• • • •

380 – 480 V AC Space saving Efficiency up to 90 % Version for NEC-Class 2

Output current. 24 V DC Efficiency 400/480 V AC Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

380-480 V AC ±15 % 0.46 A 24-28 V DC 4.2 A (100 W). 3.75 A (NEC-Class 2) 89.5/89 % -10 to +60 °C 72.5 x 75 x 103 UL 508 listed, UL60950-1, GL, ABS

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

ML100.200

380-480 V AC

24-28 V DC

4.2 A

ML90.200

380-480 V AC

24-28 V DC

3.75 A. NEC-Class 2

2 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

S

Output current 5 A

erie

Supply voltage AC

• • • •

Output current

20 % power reserve 90.4 % efficiency Integral primary fuses Standard version with high reliability

380-480 V AC

Input current 400/480 V AC

0.75/0.68 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

5 A (120 W)

Power reserve up to 45 °C

6 A (144 W)

Efficiency at 400 V AC

90.4 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

40 x 124 x 117 UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF47, CB-scheme

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

CT5.241

380-480 V AC

24-28 V DC

5A

3 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 10 A

Supply voltage AC

S

Input current 400/480 V AC

erie

• • • •

20 % power reserve 92.8 % efficiency Integral primary fuses Standard version with high reliability

380-480 V AC 0.7/0.6 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

10 A (240 W)

Power reserve up to 45 °C

12 A (288 W)

Efficiency at 400 V AC

92.8 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

62 x 124 x 117

Approvals

UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF4, CB-scheme

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

CT10.241

380-480 V AC

24-28 V DC

10 A

168 | POWER SUPPLIES

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies 3 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 20 A

Supply voltage AC

323-552 V AC

S

Input current 400/480 V AC

erie

• • • •

50 % bonus power 95 % efficiency High short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

20 A (480 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds at 24V DC

30 A (720 W)

Efficiency at 400 V AC

QT20.241

95 %

DC-OK relay

Yes

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

0.79/0.65 A

Output voltage

65 x 124 x 127 UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF47, CB-scheme

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

3-phase 380-480 V AC

24-28 V DC

20 A

3 phase 24 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 40 A

Supply voltage AC

323-552 V AC

S

Input current 400/480 V AC

erie

• • • •

Active inrush current limiter High short circuit current Integral primary fuses Maximum performance for demanding applications

24-28 V DC

Output current at 24 V DC

40 A (960 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds at 24V DC

QT40.241

Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

S

110 x 124 x 127 UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF47, CB-scheme, Class 1, Div 2

Output voltage

Output current

24-28 V DC

40 A

TECHNICAL DATA Model Supply voltage AC

Semi regulated Ideal for motor & solenoid loads High short circuit current Alternative to using transformer

XT40.241

XT40.242

360-440 V AC

432-528 V AC

Input current

1.65 A

1.4 A

Output voltage

24.1 V

24.1 V

Output current at 24 V DC

40 A (960 W)

40 A (960 W)

Bonus power for up to 15 seconds

50 A (1200 W)

50 A (1200 W)

Efficiency at 400 V AC

95.5 %

95.5 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

96 x 124 x 159

96 x 124 x 159

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

Yes -25 to +60 °C

Input voltage

Output current 40 A

erie

95.3 %

DC-OK relay

3-phase 380-480 V AC

3 phase 24 V DC

• • • •

60 A (1 440 W)

Efficiency at 400 V AC

Approvals

Part number

1.65/1.35 A

Output voltage

UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF47, CB-scheme, Class 1, Div 2

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

XT40.241

400 V AC semi regulated

24 V DC

40 A

XT40.242

480 V AC semi regulated

24 V DC

40 A

0116 284 9900

POWER SUPPLIES

| 169


Power supplies 1 phase 12 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 1.3 A. 2.5 A & 4.2 A

• • • •

From 22.5 mm wide AC & DC supply voltage High efficiency Screwless terminals (ML30, ML50)

Model

ML15.121

ML30.102

ML50.102

Supply voltage AC

85-264 V AC

85-264 V AC

85-264 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-375 V DC

85-375 V DC

85-375 V DC

Input current at 100/230 V AC

0.34/0.17 A

<0.6/<0.25 A

<1/<0.6 A

Output voltage

12-15 V DC

10-12 V DC

12-15 V DC

82.5 %

84 %

90 %

1.3 A (15 W)

2.5 A (30 W)

4.2 A (50 W)

Efficiency at 230 V AC Output current at 12 V DC Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

-10 to +60 °C 22.5 x 75 x 91

45 x 75 x 91

45 x 75 x 91

UL 508 listed, UL 60950, CB-scheme, GL (GL: only ML15.121)

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

ML15.121

85-264 V AC/88-375 V DC

12-15 V DC

1.3 A

ML30.102

85-264 V AC/85-375 V DC

10-12 V DC

2.5 A

ML50.102

85-264 V AC/85-375 V DC

12-15 V DC

4A

1 phase 12 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 4.5 A & 7.5 A

• • • •

Model

High efficiency Parallel connection allowed Space saving Screwless terminals (ML100)

ML60.121

ML100.102

Supply voltage AC

85-264 V AC

85-132/184-264 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-375 V DC

220-375 V DC

Input current at 120/230 V AC

0.91/0.54 A

<1.9/<0.9 A

Output voltage Output current at 12 V DC Efficiency at 230 V AC

7.5 A (90 W)

87.2 %

88.5 %

Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

12-15 V DC 4.5 A (60 W)

-10 to +60 °C 45 x 75 x 91

72.5 x 75 x 103

UL508 listed, UL60950, GL, ABS. CB-scheme, NEC Class 2 (CB & NEC Ej ML100.102)

Input voltage

Output voltage

ML60.121

85-264 V AC/85-375 V DC

12-15 V DC

4A

ML100.102

115/230 V AC

12-15 V DC

7.5 A

1 phase 12 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

S

Output current 15 A

erie

• • • •

50 % bonus power Up to 91.8 % efficiency High short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

Supply voltage AC

85-276 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-187 V DC

Input current at 120/230 V AC

1.65/0.93 A

Output voltage

12-15 V DC

Output current at 12 V DC

15 A (180 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds 12 V DC

22.5 A

Efficiency at 230 V AC

91.8 %

DC-OK relay Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number QS10.121

170 | POWER SUPPLIES

Output current

Yes -25 to +60 °C 60 x 124 x 117 UL508 listed, UL60950, GL, ABS, CB-scheme, SEMI F47

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

85-276 V AC/88-187 V DC

12-15 V DC

15 A

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies 1 phase 48 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 1 A & 2.1 A

Model

ML50.105

ML100.105

85-264 V

85-132/184-264 V

Supply voltage DC

85-375 V

220-375 V

Input current at 115/230 V AC

<1/<0.6 A

2.1/1 A

48-56 V DC

48-56 V DC

1A

2.1 A

90 %

91 %

Operating temperature (without derating output)

-10 to +60 °C

-10 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

45 x 75 x 91

73 x 75 x 103

Supply voltage AC

• • • •

High efficiency AC & DC supply voltage Space saving Screwless terminals

Output voltage Output current at 48 V DC Efficiency

Approvals

Part number

UL 508 listed, UL60950-1, ML100.105 also GL, ABS.

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

ML50.105

85-264 V AC/85-375 V DC

48-56 V DC

1A

ML100.105

115/230 V AC/220-375 V DC

48-56 V DC

2.1 A

1-phase 48 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

S

Output current 5 A & 10 A

erie

• • • •

Model

50 % bonus power Up to 91.8 % efficiency High short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

QS10.481

QS20.481

Supply voltage AC

85-276 V AC

85-276 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-187 V DC

88-187 V DC

Input current 120/230 V AC

2.22/1.22 A

4.56/2.48 A

Output voltage

48-56 V DC

48-55 V DC

Output current at 48 V DC

5 A (240 W)

10 A (480 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds 48 V DC

7.5 A

15 A

Efficiency at 230 V AC

92 %

94.3%

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

60 x 124 x 117

82 x 124 x 127

Approvals

Part number

UL508 listed, UL60950-1, GL, ABS

Input voltage

Output voltage

QS10.481

85-276 V AC/88-187 V DC

48-56 V DC

5A

QS20.481

85-276 V AC/88-187 V DC

48-56 V DC

10 A

1 phase 48 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 20 A

Supply voltage AC Input current 230 V AC

S

Output voltage

erie

Output current

• High short circuit current • 50 % bonus power • Maximum performance for demanding applications • Active inrush current limiter

170-264 V AC 4.6 A 48-54 V DC

Output current at 48 V DC

20 A (960 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds 48 V DC

30 A (1440 W)

Efficiency at 230 V AC DC-OK relay Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

95 % Yes -25 to +60 °C 125 x 124 x 127 UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, GL, ABS, SEMIF47, CB-scheme

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

QS40.484

170-264 V AC

48-54 V DC

20 A

0116 284 9900

POWER SUPPLIES

| 171


Power supplies 3 phase 48 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 5 A

Supply voltage AC

323-576 V AC

Supply voltage DC

450-780 V DC

S

Input current at 400 V

erie

• • • •

20 % power reserve 92.8 % efficiency Small size Standard version with high reliability

0.7 A

Output voltage

48-56 V DC

Output current at 48 V DC

5 A (240 W)

Power reserve up to 45 °C

6 A (288 W)

Efficiency 400 V AC Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

92.8 % -25 to +60 °C 62 x 124 x 117 UL508 listed, UL60950-1, GL

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

CT10.481

380-480 V AC

48-56 V DC

5A

3 phase 48 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 10 A

Supply voltage AC

S

• • • • erie

50 % bonus power Up to 93 % efficiency High short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

323-552 V AC

Input current 400/480 V AC

0.79/0.65 A

Output voltage

48-55 V DC

Output current at 48 V DC

10 A (480 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds 48 V DC

15 A (720 W)

Efficiency at 400 V AC

95.4 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

65 x 124 x 127 UL508 listed, UL 60950, CB-scheme, GL, ABS

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

QT20.481

380-480 V AC

48-55 V DC

10 A

3 phase 48 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 20 A

Supply voltage AC Input current 400/480 V AC

S

• • • • erie

Up to 93 % efficiency High short circuit current Integral primary fuses Maximum performance for demanding applications

323-576 V AC 1.65/1.35 A

Output voltage

48-54 V DC

Output current at 48 V DC

20 A (960 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds at 48 V DC

30 A (1440 W)

Efficiency at 400 V AC DC-OK relay Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

95.4 % Yes -25 to +60 °C 110 x 124 x 127 UL 508 Listed, UL 60950-1, GL, Class 1, Div 2

Part number

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

QT40.481

380-480 V AC

48-54 V DC

20 A

172 | POWER SUPPLIES

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies 1 phase 5 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 3 A & 5 A

• • • •

Model

High efficiency From 22.5 mm wide AC & DC input voltage Screwless terminals (ML30.101)

ML15.051

ML30.101

Supply voltage AC

85-264 V AC

85-264 V AC

Supply voltage DC

85-375 V DC

85-370 V DC

Input current at 120/230 V AC

0.28/0.17 A

<0.6/<0.35 A

Output voltage

5-5.5 V DC

5-5.5 V DC

77.2 %

>80 %

Output current at 5 V DC

3A

5A

Operating temperature (without derating output)

-10 to +60 °C

-10 to +60 °C

22.5 x 75 x 91

45 x 75 x 97

Efficiency at 230 V AC

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

UL 508 listed, UL 60950, CSA, CB-scheme, GL, ABS

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

ML15.051

100-240 V AC/100-300 V DC

5 V DC

3A

ML30.101

100-240 V AC/85-370 V DC

5 V DC

5A

1 phase ±12 V DC

TECHNICAL DATA

Output current 4.2 A

• • • •

High Efficiency AC & DC input voltage Jumper for 12 or 15 V Screwless terminals

Supply voltage AC

85-264 V AC

Supply voltage DC

85-375 V DC

Input current at 100/230 V AC

<0.65/<0.4 A

Output voltage

±12-15 V DC

Efficiency Output current at 12 V DC Operating temperature

ML30.106

1 phase 30 V DC Output current 8 A

S

• • • •

45 x 75 x 91 UL 508 listed, UL 60950, CSA, CB-scheme, GL, ABS

Input voltage

Output voltage

Output current

100-240 V AC/85-375 V DC

±12 V DC

4.2 A

3 phase 36 V DC Output current13 A

50 % bonus power Up to 94.8 % efficiency High short circuit current Maximum performance for demanding applications

erie

TECHNICAL DATA Model

QS10.301

QT20.361

Supply voltage AC

100-240 V AC ±15 %

323-552 V AC

Supply voltage DC

88-187 V DC

No

Input current

2.22/1.22 A

0.79/0.65 A

Output voltage

28-32 V DC

36-42 V DC

Output current at 30/36 V DC

8 A (240 W)

13.3 A (480 W)

Bonus power for 4 seconds 30/36 V DC

12 A (360 W)

20 A (720 W)

Efficiency

93.5 %

94.8 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

60 x 124 x 117

65 x 124 x 127

Approvals

Part number

-10 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

86 % 2.8 A (+12 V). 1.4 A (-12 V)

UL508 listed, UL 60950, GL

Input voltage

Output voltage

QS10.301

100-240 V AC/110-150 V DC

30 V DC

8A

QT20.361

380-480 V AC

36 V DC

13 A

0116 284 9900

Output current

POWER SUPPLIES

| 173


Power supplies DC-UPS Puls DC UPS systems provide great flexibility and reliability and are very simple to install. A complete DC UPS system consists of a control unit, battery and power supply with appropriate power for the application. During a loss of supply voltage the battery is automatically connected through the control unit to provide a continuous output voltage to the connected loads. The controller requires only one 12 V battery (10 A unit only) which converts the battery voltage to 22.3 V DC. This saves the expense of a second battery and avoids the problems associated with the need for matched batteries. The controller also ensures the output voltage is constant and does not follow the battery voltage as it discharges. Battery capacity used by the DC-UPS is therefore 100% compared to two batteries connected in series where one of the batteries is never fully charged. Two relay outputs indicate status; module ready (battery capacity> 85%) and module active (buffer mode). The controller also monitors the battery condition and another relay output activates when replacement is necessary.

DC-UPS

UB20.241 can handle 20 A continuous load current and is meant for applications with higher power needs. Batteries between 3.9 Ah to 130 Ah can be connected which gives greater flexibility in achieving the required backup times. This controller requires two series connected 12 V DC batteries but still features advanced battery control and monitoring. Using a centre pin connection the controller is able to monitor and charge each battery separately. This ensures maximum battery lifetime is still achieved.

TECHNICAL DATA

24 V/10 A External battery 3.9-40 Ah

• • • •

Input voltage

24 V DC

Battery voltage

Only needs 1 x 12 V battery Optimised battery charging Status relay outputs Adjustable maximum back up time

12 V DC

Output voltage (normal mode)

24 V DC (supply -0.23 V)

Output voltage (buffer mode)

22. 25 V DC ±1 % at max. load

Output current (buffer mode)

10 A (15 A for 5 s)

Output current (normal mode) 24 V Charging time

15 A 5 h for 7 Ah battery. 17 h for 26 Ah battery 6.3 mins at10 A

Buffer time with 7Ah battery Operating temperature

20.5 mins at 5 A -25 to +70 °C (power reduction with 0.43 A/º over 60 ºC)

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number UB10.241

Description

Output

DC-UPS controller for battery 3.9-40 Ah

24 V DC/10 A

DC-UPS

TECHNICAL DATA

24 V/10 A External battery 17-130 Ah

• • • •

Input voltage

Only needs 1 x 12 V battery Optimised battery charging Longer back up times Status relay outputs

174 | POWER SUPPLIES

12 V DC

Output voltage (normal mode)

24 V DC (supply -0.23 V)

Output voltage (buffer mode)

22. 25 V DC ±1 % at max. load

Output current (buffer mode)

10 A (15 A for 5 s)

Output current (normal mode) 24 V Charging time Buffer time with 26 Ah battery

15 A 9 h for 26 Ah battery 34 h for 100 Ah battery Min. 99 mins at 5 A. Typ. 130 mins at 5 A Min. 39 mins at 10 A. Typ. 55 mins at 10 A Min. 62 h at 0.5 A. Typ. 82 h at 0.5 A Min. 3 h at 10 A. Typ. 4 h at 10 A

Operating temperature

-25 to +50 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

49 x 124 x 117

Approvals

UB10.242

24 V DC

Battery voltage

Buffer time with 100 Ah battery

Part number

49 x 124 x 117 UL508 listed, UL 60950, CB-scheme, GL, ABS

UL508 listed, UL 60950-1, CB-scheme

Description

Output

DC-UPS controller for battery 17-130 Ah.

24 V DC/10 A

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies DC-UPS

TECHNICAL DATA

12 & 24 V/10 A External battery 3.9-40 Ah

Input voltage

24 V DC

Battery voltage

12 V DC

Output voltage (normal mode)

24 V DC (supply -0.23 V)

Output voltage (buffer mode)

• • • •

Only needs 1 x 12 V battery Dual outputs 12 & 24 V DC Status relay outputs Optimised battery charging

Output current (buffer mode)

Output current (normal mode)

22. 25 V DC ±1 % at max. load/12 V DC ± 2 % 24 V output

10 A (7 A if 12 V output fully loaded)

12 V output

5A

24 V output

15 A (12.3 A if 12 V output fully loaded)

12 V output

5A

Charging time

5 h for 7 Ah battery. 17 h for 26 Ah battery Min. 5.3 mins at 10 A

Buffer time with 7 Ah battery

Typ. 6.3 mins at 10 A Typ. 20.5 mins at 5 A

Operating temperature

-25 to +70 °C (power reduction with 6 W/º over 50ºC)

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number UB10.245

49 x 124 x 117 UL508 listed, UL 60950, CB-scheme

Description

Output

DC-UPS controller for battery 3.9-40 Ah

12 & 24 V DC/12 A

DC-UPS

TECHNICAL DATA

24 V/10 A Integral battery 5 Ah

Input voltage

• 5 Ah High power battery • Compact size with easy change battery compartment • Status relay outputs • Only 1 x 12 V battery required & included

24 V DC

Output voltage (normal mode)

24 V DC

Output voltage (buffer mode)

22.3 V DC ±1 % at max. load

Output current (normal mode)

15 A

Output current (buffer mode)

10 A (15 A for 5 s)

Buffer time

5 A min. 13 min. 10 A min. 5 min

Charging time Battery

3h 12 V DC maintenance free VRLA. 5 Ah high power

Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

0 to +40 °C 123 x 124 x 119 UL508 listed, UL 60950, GL, ABS, CB-scheme

Part number

Description

Output

UBC10.241

DC-UPS controller with integral 5 Ah battery

24 V DC/10 A

DC-UPS

TECHNICAL DATA

24 V/20A External batteries (x2) 3.9-130 Ah

Input voltage Battery voltage

• Seperate control of each battery • Status relay outputs • Selectable output voltage in buffer mode • Temperature compensated charging

Output voltage (normal mode)

24 V DC

Output voltage (buffer mode)

Switchable 22.5. 24. 25 or 26 V DC (Input voltage must be 0.8 V higher than selected output)

Output current at (normal mode) Output current (buffer mode)

Charging time

0116 284 9900

20 A (30 A for 4 seconds then output reverts to hick up mode) 70 mA 8 h for 12 Ah fully discharged battery

Buffer time with 2 x 7 Ah battery

Min. 4 min at 20 A. Typ. 5.12 min at 20 A

Buffer time with 2 x 12 Ah battery

Min. 11.53 min at 20 A. Typ. 14.51 min at 20 A

Approvals

UB20.241

25 A (If input greater than 28 A then 25 A fuse required)

Input current (not charging)

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Part number

24 V DC 2x12 V in series

46 x 124 x 127 UL508 listed, UL 60950, GL, ABS, CB-scheme

Description

Output

DC-UPS controller for battery 3.9-130 Ah.

24 V DC/20 A POWER SUPPLIES

| 175


Power supplies Battery holder modules & batteries For 10 & 20 A DC UPS: with 7, 12 & 24 Ah battery

• • • •

For 20 A DC-UPS

7 Ah DIN rail mount Cables included Heavy duty terminals Easy and quick to change batteries

For 10 A DC-UPS

Battery modules use maintenance free VRLA batteries (valve regulated lead acid) and are charged at Puls before delivery. Battery modules can be ordered with (UZK) or without a battery (UZO). All battery modules from Puls support the 1-Battery-Concept. The 24 V battery modules are equippped with a centre-tap protected against over-current and with an

integrated temperature sensor. Users who opt for using their own batteries and who still want to take advantage of the PULS-1-Battery-Concept, can use the sensor board with a PT 1000 temperature sensor and centre-tap fuse.

Part number

Description

UZB12.051

12 V, 5 Ah battery replacement for UBC10.241

90 x 106 x 70 mm

Dimensions

UZB12.071

12 V, 7 Ah battery replacement for UZK12.071, UZK24.071

151 x 98 x 65 mm

UZB12.121

12 V, 12 Ah battery replacement for UZK24.121

151 x 98 x 98 mm

UZB12.261

12 V, 26 Ah battery replacement for UZK12.261

175 x 125 x 166 mm

UZK12.071

12 V, 7 Ah battery module with battery for UB10

155 x 124 x 112 mm

UZK12.261

12 V, 26 Ah battery module with battery for UB10

214 x 179 x 158 mm

UZK24.071

24 V, 7 Ah battery module with battery for UB20

137 x 186 x 143 mm

UZK24.121

24 V, 12 Ah battery module with battery for UB20

203 x 186 x 143 mm

UZO12.07

Same as the UZK12.071 battery module without battery

155 x 124 x 112 mm

UZO12.26

Same as the UZK12.261 battery module without battery

214 x 179 x 158 mm

UZO24.071

Same as the UZK24.071 battery module without battery

137 x 186 x 143 mm

UZO24.121

Same as the UZK24.121 battery module without battery

203 x 186 x 143 mm

UZS24.100

Sensorboard with PT 1000 temperature sensor and centre-tap fuse

23 x 15 x 110 mm

Typical buffer times The table below shows typical buffer times of standard battery modules. The aging effect during operation is not included. We recommend calculating a buffer time reduction of 30 – 50% for the life of the batteries Buffer current UBC10.241

0.5 A

1A

3A

5A

7A

10 A

15 A

20 A

3h 30 min

2h

30 min

16 min 15s

11 min

6 min 15s

5s

-

UBC10 + 12 V, 7 Ah battery

5h

2h 30 min

40 min

21 min 30s

13 min

6 min 45s

5s

-

UBC10 + 12 V, 26 Ah battery

22h

12h

3h 40 min

2h 10 min

1h 30 mini

55 min

5s

-

UBC10 + 12 V, 65 Ah battery

54h

30h

10h 30 min

6h

4h

2h 45 min

5s

-

UBC10 + 12 V, 100 Ah battery

84h

46h

16h 12 min

9h

6h

4h 7 min

5s

-

UBC10 + 24 V, 7 Ah battery

11h 35 min

6h 8 min

1h 58 min

1h 4 min

42 min

26 min

13 min

8 min

UBC10 + 24 V, 12 Ah battery

20h

10h 30 min

3h 20 min

1h 50 min

1h 12 min

45 min

23 min

15 min

176 | POWER SUPPLIES

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies Buffer module Buffer modules work in a similar way to a DC UPS system and can bridge short power failures or voltage fluctuations with a 24V DC output for a certain period. EDLC supercaps or electrolytic capacitors are used as the energy source which allows operation at high or low temperatures. Unlike the required replacement of batteries in a typical DC UPS system, a regular replacement of the capcitors is not necessary. In buffer mode, the output voltage is regulated and the change from normal to buffer mode is without interuption. All buffer modules are protected against overload and short circuit.

Buffer module

TECHNICAL DATA

For 24 V DC

Input

24 V DC

Output voltage (buffer mode)

Alt: 1

22.5 V DC Default

Alt: 2

Vnom -1 V DC

Output current (buffer mode) max.

200 ms at 22.5 V DC/20 A 3.6 s at 22.5 V DC/1 A

Buffer time

• Bridges temporary power failure • Buffers 24 V DC at 20 A for 200 ms • Status outputs • Maintenance free

20 A

Status outputs

Module ready, module active, external shutdown

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Part number

64 x 124 x 102 UL 508 listed, UL60950-1, CB-scheme

Description

UF20.241

Buffer module 24 V DC Max. 20 A for 200 ms

Buffer module

TECHNICAL DATA

For 24 V DC with EDLC supercaps

Model

UC10.241

UC10.242

Input

24 V DC

Output voltage (buffer mode)

• • • •

EDLC supercaps Longer buffer times Long lifetime Maintenance free

Current consumption charging max

15 A (360 W)

Charging time

Buffer time

16 min

32 min

5A

39 s

78 s

10 A

16.5 s

33 s

15 A

9s

18 s

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Module ready, module active, external shutdown 126 x 124 x 117

198 x 124 x 117

UL 508 listed, UL60950-1 recognised, CB-scheme

Description

UC10.241

Buffer module 6 kWs. 15 A

UC10.242

Buffer module 12 kWs. 15 A

0116 284 9900

Max. 1.3 A

Load current max

Status outputs

Part number

22.25 V DC at 10 A / 22.12 V DC at 15 A

POWER SUPPLIES

| 177


Power supplies Redundancy module 10 A

TECHNICAL DATA Input voltage DC

10-48 V DC

Max. current

• • • •

45 mm wide Double diodes Increase system reliablity Large screw terminals

Operating temperature

Approvals

Description

MLY10.241

Redundancy module 10 A 10 - 60 V DC

20 A

• • • •

32 mm wide Double diodes Relay status output Increase system reliability

Model

YR2.DIODE 12-48 V DC

24-48 V DC

2x10 A or 1x20 A

2x10 A or 1x20 A

Max. current per channel Max. current Operating temperature Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Approvals

Description Redundancy module 20 A 10-60 V DC

YRM2.DIODE

20 A

20 A

-40 to +60 °C

-40 to +60 °C

32 x 124 x 102

32 x 124 x 117

UL508 listed, UL60950, GL, ABS, CB-scheme

Redundancy module with relay output 20 A 10-60 V DC

Redundancy module 40 A & 80 A

• • • •

Compact size Mosfet technology Minimal power loss Increase system reliability

TECHNICAL DATA Model

YR40.241

YR80.241

Supply voltage DC

12-28 V DC

12-28 V DC

Max current per channel

20 A

40 A

Max current

40 A

80 A

2 x 32.5 A

2 x 65 A

1 000 A for 1 ms

1 500 A for 1 ms

Short circuit current max 5 seconds Peak current max Voltage drop at max load

140 mV

95 mV

Dimensions W x H x D

36 x 124 x 127 mm

46 x 124 x 127 mm

Approvals

UL508 listed, UL60950, CSA, GL, CB-scheme, Atex (113G EX nAC II T3)

Description

YR40.241

Redundancy module 40 A 16.8 - 36.4 V DC

YR80.241

Redundancy module 80 A 16.8 - 36.4 V DC

178 | POWER SUPPLIES

UL508 listed, UL60950, GL

Input voltage

YR2.DIODE

Part number

45 x 75 x 91 mm

TECHNICAL DATA

Part number

YRM2.DIODE

-40 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

Part number

Redundancy module

2 x 5 A or 1 x 10 A

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies DC-DC converter

TECHNICAL DATA

24/24 & 24/12 V DC

Model

CD5.241

CD5.121

18-32 V DC

18-32 V DC

5.5 A

4.6 A

Output voltage

23-28 V DC

12-15 V DC

Output current at Unom

5 A (120 W)

8 A (96 W)

Supply voltage Current consumption at max load/ Unom

• • • •

32 mm wide Isolated output voltage Wide range input voltage 20 % power reserve

Power reserve up to 45 °C Efficiency

9.6 A

90.3 %

88.2 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

32 x 124 x 102

32 x 124 x 102

UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, Class 1 Div 2, GL, ATEX II 3G Ex nAC II T4 (Atex only 24/24 VDC)

Approvals

Part number

6A

Description

Input

Output

CD5.241

DC-DC converter

24 V DC

24 V DC/5 A

CD5.121

DC-DC converter

24 V DC

12 V DC/8 A

DC-DC converter

TECHNICAL DATA

48/24 & 12/24 V DC

Model

CD5.242

CD5.243

36-60 V DC

8.4-16.2 V DC

2.75 A

9.2 A

Output voltage

23-28 V DC

23-28 V DC

Output current at Unom

5 A (120 W)

4 A (96 W)

Supply voltage Current consumption at max load/ Unom

• • • •

32 mm wide Isolated output voltage Wide range input voltage 20 % power reserve

Power reserve up to 45 °C Efficiency

6A

4.8 A

90.3 %

87.7 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

32 x 124 x 102

32 x 124 x 102

Approvals

UL 508 listed, UL 60950-1, Class 1 Div 2

Description

Input

Output

CD5.242

DC-DC converter

48 V DC

24 V DC/5 A

CD5.243

DC-DC converter

12 V DC

24 V DC/4 A

Part number

DC-DC converter

TECHNICAL DATA

24 V DC/20 A

Supply voltage

480-840 V DC

Max voltage between input & Earth Primary fuse

600 V R.M.S. Integral 4 A not user replaceable

Input current at 600 V DC/20 A

• Designed for connection to be DC-bus • 600 V DC input voltage • Integral primary fuses • Efficiency 95 %

0.85 A

Output voltage

24-28 V DC

Output current at Unom

20 A

Efficiency

95 %

Operating temperature

-25 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

65 x 124 x 127

Approvals

UL 508 listed, UL60950-1, CB-scheme

Part number

Input

Output

QTD20.241

480-840 V DC

24 V DC/20 A

0116 284 9900

POWER SUPPLIES

| 179


Power supplies 1-phase AS-interface 30.6 V DC Output current 2.8 A. 4 A & 8 A

TECHNICAL DATA Model Supply voltage AC* Input current 115/230 V AC

• 115/230 V AC • DIN rail mount • Overload protection with electronic fuse (SLA8) • Ground fault monitor (SLA4)

Output voltage V DC Output current Efficiency

SLA3.100

SLA4.100

SLA8.100

85-132/184-264 V

85-132/184-264 V

85-132/184-264 V

2/0.9 A

2.7/1.3 A

6/2.8 A

30.55 V ±3 %

30.55 V ±3 %

30.55 V ±3 %

2.8 A

4A

8A

90.5 %

90 %

92 %

Operating temperature**

-10 to +60 °C

-10 to +60 °C

-10 to +60 °C

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

49 x 124 x 102

73 x 124 x 102

91 x 124 x 102

Approvals

UL508 listed, UL 60950

* Selectable on front face with switch ** Up to 70 °C with reduced load current

Description

Input

Output

SLA3.100

Part number

Power supply for ASI

115/230 V AC

30.55 V DC/2.8 A

SLA4.100

Power supply for ASI

115/230 V AC

30.55 V DC/4 A

SLA8.100

Power supply for ASI

115/230 V AC

30.55 V DC/8 A

Mounting brackets Mounting brackets for a direct wall or panel mounting without DIN rail. Other brackets for sideways installation of the power supplies with or without DIN rail for control cabinets which don’t have the required installation depth.

Wall mount

Side mount

Part number

Description

ZM1.WALL

Wall mounting bracket for light DIMENSION units

ZM2.WALL

Wall mounting bracket for QS20, QS40, QT40, CPS20…

ZM3.WALL

Wall mounting bracket for ML60, PISA11 and MLY (VPE 25 peices0

ZM1.UBC10

Wall mounting bracket for UBC10

ZM11.SIDE

Side mounting bracket for CS3, CS5, QS3, YR2 YRM2

ZM12.SIDE

Side mounting bracket for CT5, QS5

ZM13.SIDE

Side mounting bracket for CS10, CT10, QS10, CPS20…

ZM14.SIDE

Side mounting bracket for QT20, QTD20, UF20

ZM15.SIDE

Side mounting bracket for QS20 (except QS20.244)

180 | POWER SUPPLIES

www.oem.co.uk


Power supplies NEC-Class 2 protection module

• • • •

NEC-Class 2 compliant outputs Electronically protected outputs 45 mm wide Remote monitoring & control functions

The protection module PISA11.CLASS 2 fulfills two basic functions. First it distributes the current of a large (non NEC Class 2) power source to four NEC Class 2 output channels and therefore allows for a simpler wiring method and easier approval process of the entire machine. The second function is to permit only so much current on the outputs that the input voltage of this unit (which corresponds to the output voltage of the power supply) does not fall below 21V. This ensures a safe and uninterrupted supply voltage for sensitive equipments, such as PLCs, controls or sensors, when they are connected directly to the same power supply as the PISA module. Less critical loads that are not affected by short voltage interruptions or that could even be the cause of a fault on the 24V power supply are connected to one of the four NEC Class 2 output channels of the PISA module.

ATEX approval

• For zone 2 category 3G • From 5 to 40 A • DC-DC converter

Puls can offer a number of units with Atex approval that can be installed in Zone 2, Category 3G, group 11a, 11b and 11c applications. The Atex options include power supplies, DC-DC converters for 24/24 VDC and redundancy modules in the Mini Line and Dimension families. Please enquire for more details about models with ATEX approvals.

Low temperature operation -40 °C

• Operating temperature -40 to +60 °C • AC & DC supply voltage • Active inrush current limiter

0116 284 9900

The Mini Line 2 is a newly developed series of lower power units with very compact dimensions and low weight. The series includes ML60.242 (24 V DC) and ML60.122 (12VDC) that both have electronic inrush current protection which helps ensure the units always operate correctly even in extreme cold temperatures. Other power supplies typically use an NTC resistor to limit the inrush current but at low temperatures they have too high a resistance and prevent the unit from starting up. Electronic inrush current protection solves this problem and also ensures a stable output voltage even with dynamic loads where the power requirements can change rapidly.

POWER SUPPLIES

| 181


PUSHBUTTONS AND PILOT LIGHTS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Introduction

184

Pushbuttons

188

Mushroom heads

189

Selector & key switch heads

190

Twin/triple touch heads

192

Mechanical reset button

192

Contact/LED block & clips

194

Pilot lights

197

Legend plates & accessories

198

Control stations

200


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

A whole new range Baco was founded in 1919 in Strasbourg (France) and have since established themselves as a leading manufacturer in the world wide market of control & signalling devices. This offer has a modern ergonomic design that builds on the success of their previous range. Baco have implemented

many innovative improvements that include optimised dimensions, LED technology and a wider choice of connection possibilities. All of this results in a product that is reliable, looks great and is easier than ever to install and connect.

A simple concept

Head Insulating material ensures electrical safety Integrated anti rotation pins IP66 standard (IP67 with shroud) Modern ergonomic design Choice of bezels in chrome or black Wide range of functions

Locking Ring

Clip Enhanced rigidity Metal locking lever For 1, 3 & 5 blocks Contacts simply click in place

Contact/LED Block Simply snap in to place Cannot be pulled out Stackable LED blocks offer long life and economy (100,000 hours) Corrosion resistant Conforms to EN IEC 60947-5-1 RoHS compliant

Enkelt att montera ochconnection installera Easy installation & fast

2

1

Huvudet sitter på plats Head held firmly in the 22mm fixing hole by 4 integral Fyra antirotationskuddar håller anti rotation pins allowing easy huvudet säkert på plats vilket positioning. underlättar placeringen.

184 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

Silikonring Head tightened securely with the M22 locking ring huvudet thatSilikonringen can be fittedhåller with one hand. på plats vilket gör att man med ett enhandsgrepp enkelt monterar kontramuttern M22.

Snabbt Fast fixing montage of the contact assembly, simply Blocken med cliplock skjuts push on and then in place på the huvudet. Vrid sedan with metal lever. på metallåset.

Snabb anslutning Quick connection using spring terminal contact blocks, För snabb och vibrationssäker cables are simply pushed in. anslutning, använd fjäderklämma. Skjut bara in kabeln. Klart! www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

A commitment to quality Standard features such as IP66 ingress protection and IK05 impact rating mean that this range offers exceptional reliability and can be used with confidence in critical

applications. To reinforce this commitment to quality Baco are able to offer a 10 year guarantee on all new purchased products!

Resilient & robust

IK 05 IP 66 Twin touch and triple touch heads feature an ergonomic design and are available in both illuminated and non illuminated options.

Ø 22.5mm fixing hole Special hole cut out for anti rotation All heads mount in a Ø22mm hole and are IP66/IK05 rated as standard.

Mushroom heads are available in a wide range of sizes and turn to reset versions have a patented, ergonomic triangular design. EN418 snap action types have a visible yellow indicator ring and there is also a flag indicator option.

Control stations can be supplied equipped in many standard versions or empty for custom assembly. Special versions can be configured exactly to your requirements. Including custom markings to suit your application.

Flera anslutningsmöjligheter

Every connection possibility

Skruvmontage Ett traditionellt montagesätt med rejäla skruvar. Screw terminals for a traditional connection method.

0116 284 9900

Fjäderklämma Snabb och vibrationssäker installation. Push in connection using spring clamp terminals for a completely safe & time saving solution.

Flatstiftanslutning Monteras snabbt och säkert connection med 6,35 mm Faston hylsor &eller 2x2,8 mm.using quickly easilly made 6.35mm or 2 x 2.8mm faston terminals.

Kretskortmontage Med lödstift för direkt montage på kretskort. Pin terminals intended for direct soldered connection to PCB’s.

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 185


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Technical specification General characteristics

Data

Storage temperature

- 40°C to + 70°C

Normes

Operating temperature

- 25°C to + 70°C

Climatic resistance

Constant humid heat Cyclical damp heat Resistance to saline mist

IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-30 IEC 60068-2-52

Degree of protection

IP66 for standard heads & equipped control stations IP67 for shrouded heads IP20 rear of panel on contact blocks & pilot lights

IEC 60529

Protection against mechanical shocks

IK05 non illuminated & illuminated heads IK07 empty control station

IEC 50102

Protection against electrical shocks

Class II

IEC 60947-5-1

Terminal marking

IEC 60947-1

Maximum tightening torque

M22 head locking ring 3N.m Screw terminals 1.2Nm

Vibration

Resistant to vibration on 3 axis

IEC 60068-2-6

Approvals

UL United States & Canada BV Bureau Veritas Certification OC/CB

UL 508 Settlement Marine IEC 60947-5-1 IEC 60947-5-5 IEC 60947-5-4

Contact block characteristics

Screw terminal Push in terminal

Faston connection

Pin terminals

Normes

Rated insulation voltage

690V AC

320V AC

250V AC

IEC/EN 60947-1

Degrees of pollution 3

600V AC

300V AC

250V AC

UL 508 IEC/EN 60947-5-1

NC contacts

Positive opening

Positive opening

Positive opening

Rated impulse withstand voltage

6kV

6kV

4kV

Thermal current

10A/AC15 2.5A/DC13

10A/AC15 2.5A/DC13

5A/AC15 1A/DC13

IEC 60947-5-1

Electrical performance AC15

120V/6A 240V/3A 380V/1.9A 480V/1.5A 500V/1.4A 600V/1.2A

120V/6A 240V/3A

120V/3A 240V/1.5A

IEC 60947-5-1

Electrical performance DC13

125V/0.55A 250V/0.27A 400V/0.15A 500V/0.13A 600V/0.1A

125V/0.55A 250V/0.27A

125V/0.22A 250V/0.1A

IEC 60947-5-1

24V DC/5mA 5V DC/1mA

24V DC/5mA

24V DC/5mA 5V DC/1mA

Minimum current

Standard contacts Gold contacts

Electrical durability

1 million operations (AC15 240V/1.5A) (DC13 250V/0.1A)

Connection capacity

Without ferrule With ferrule Faston size Pin diameter

0.5mm2 - 2 x 2.5mm2 0.5mm2 - 2 x 1.5mm2

6.35mm/2 x 2.8mm 1mm

LED block characteristics

Data

Normes

Rated insulation voltage

300V

IEC/EN 60947-5-1

Rated impulse withstand voltage

4kV (with filter block)

IEC/EN 60947-1

Operating voltage & current consumption

24V AC/DC 25mA ± 20% 48V AC/DC 15mA ± 5% 130V AC 50 or 60Hz 20mA ± 10% 230V AC 50 or 60Hz 16mA ± 30%

Lifetime at rated supply voltage

Red & Yellow 100,000 hours at 25°C Other colours 50,000 hours at 25°C

Selector/key switch working diagram of contacts

not actioned

actioned

Position and contact view from front

186 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Drill plans +0,4

Ø 22,3 -0

B

A

A B

Dimension (mm) = 30 = 33 = 40 > 40 > 45 = 38 = 50 = 45 = 54 = 77 = 50

Description With or without legend (standard) For IP67 silicon shroud With large legend plate For mushroom head Ø40 For selector switch with long handle For super flush button (Ø30 hole) If with 5 position clip With or without legend (standard) With twin touch With twin touch & legend plate Joystick

Hole for Anti rotation

Max panel thickness E = 1 to 6mm

E

Colour guidelines EN60204-1 Colour

Signalling

Control

Red

Indicates dangerous situation

Emergency stop

Green

Indicates normal situation

Black Yellow

Stop/Off Indicates abnormal situation

Blue

Indicates situation requiring defined action

Reset

White

No specific meaning

Start/On

Assembly examples Illuminated pushbuttons & pilot lights

Non illuminated pushbuttons

Pushbutton with 1 contact block on a single clip

Pushbutton with 1 or 2 contact blocks on 3 position clip

Pushbutton with 3 contact blocks on 3 position clip

Pushbutton with 4 or 5 contact blocks on 5 position clip

Pushbutton with 4, 5 or 6 contact blocks using second row on 3 position clip

0116 284 9900

43

Pilot light with LED block on a single clip

Illumintated pushbutton with LED & 1 or 2 contact blocks on 3 position clip

43

43

43

43

Illuminated pushbutton with LED block & 3 or 4 contact blocks using second row on 3 position clip

64,5

Illuminated pushbutton with LED block & transformer with 1 or 2 contact blocks on 3 position clip

50

64,5

Illuminated pushbutton with LED block & 3 or 4 contact blocks on 5 position clip

80,5

50

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 187


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Pushbuttons IP66 Non illuminated Red Green Spring return Part number

L21AA01

L21AA02

Black

Yellow

White

Blue

L21AA03

L21AA04

L21AA05

L21AA06

Red Green Black Spring return, mushroom, Ø32 mm Part number

L21AC01

L21AC02

L21AC03

Yellow

White

Blue

L21AC04

-

-

L21AD04

-

-

Spring return, with text/symbol, ***= 3 digit code L21AA31*** L21AA32*** L21AA33*** L21AA34*** L21AA35*** L21AA36*** Part number L21AA81 L21AA82 L21AA82 -

Spring return, mushroom, Ø40 mm Part number

L21AB01

L21AB02

L21AB03

L21AB04

L21AB05

L21AB06

Part number

L23AA04

L23AA05

L23AA06

Part number

Spring return, super flush Part number

L23AA01

L23AA02

L23AA82

L21AE01

-

L21AE03

-

-

-

L21CA01

L21CA02

L21CA03

L21CA04

L21CA05

L21CA06

L21CB03

L21CB04

L21CB05

L21CB06

Latching projecting

L23AA31*** L23AA32*** L23AA33*** L23AA34*** L23AA35*** L23AA36*** L23AA81

L21AD03

Latching

L23AA03

Spring return, super flush, with text/symbol, ***= 3 digit code Part number

L21AD02

Spring return, mushroom, Ø70 mm

Spring return, projecting Part number

L21AD01

L23AA83

Part number

L21CB01

L21CB02

For black plastic bezel instead of matt chrome bezel please change part numbers from L21xxxx to L22xxxx. For heads with a text or symbol please specify relevant 3 digit code further on in this section.

Illuminated

Part number

Red Spring return

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

L21AH10

L21AH20

L21AH40

L21AH50

L21AH60

Red Green Yellow White Blue Spring return, super flush, with text/symbol, ***= 3 digit code Part number

Spring return, with text/symbol, ***= 3 digit code Part number

Spring return, mushroom, Ø40 mm

L21AH31*** L21AH32*** L21AH34*** L21AH35*** L21AH36***

Part number

Spring return, projecting Part number

L21AK10

L21AK20

L23AH10

L23AH20

L21AL10

L21AL20

L21AL40

L21AL50

-

L21CH20

L21CH40

L21CH50

L21CH60

L21CK40

L21CK50

L21CK60

Latching L21AK40

L21AK50

L21AK60

Part number

L23AH60

Part number

Spring return, super flush Part number

L23AH31*** L23AH32*** L23AH34*** L23AH35*** L23AH36***

L21CH10

Latching projecting L23AH40

L23AH50

L21CK10

L21CK20

For black plastic bezel instead of matt chrome bezel please change part numbers from L21xxxx to L22xxxx. For heads with a text or symbol please specify relevant 3 digit code further on in this section.

188 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Mushroom heads IP66 The Machinery Directive distinguishes between stop and emergency stop. A stop button should be black but is allowed to be red. As a rule an emergency stop button locks in a set position before the contact breaks (snap action) and there is a need

to reset it manually. For mushroom heads complying with EN418/IEC 60947-5-5 see emergency stop mushroom heads.

Non illuminated

Red

Green

Black

Yellow

Part number

Red

Green

Black

Yellow

L22ED01

L22ED02

L22ED03

L22ED04

L22ED01B

-

-

-

L22DD01

-

L22DD03

-

L22GM01

-

-

-

Red

Green

Yellow

L22EM10

L22EM20

L22EM40

L22DM10

L22DM20

L22DM40

Turn reset, Ø40 mm

Turn reset, Ø32 mm L22EC01

L22EC02

L22EC03

L22EC04

Part number

With text “STOP-STOP-STOP” Part number

Pull reset, Ø32 mm Part number

Pull reset, Ø40 mm L22DC01

-

-

-

Part number

Key reset, Ø40 mm Part number

Illuminated

Red

Green

Yellow

Turn reset, Ø32 mm Part number

Turn reset, Ø40 mm L22EL10

-

-

Pull reset, Ø32 mm Part number

0116 284 9900

Part number

Pull reset, Ø40 mm L22DL10

-

-

Part number

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 189


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Emergency stop mushroom heads IP66 Baco’s ”Emergency Stop” mushroom heads comply with EN418/IEC 60947-5-5. They are available in 3 sizes Ø 32 mm, Ø 40 mm & Ø 54 mm and various options including turn reset, pull reset, key reset, illuminated & flag indication. To reinforce that these are

”Emergency Stop” mushroom heads there is a yellow ring around the bottom of the button that is only visible when the button is in the deactivated position.

Emergency stop mushrooom heads

Pull reset, Ø32 mm Part number

Turn reset, Ø40 mm L22DQ01

Key reset, Ø32 mm Part number

Part number

L22ER01

Key reset, Ø40 mm L22GQ01

Part number

Pull reset illuminated, Ø40 mm

Pull reset, Ø40 mm

Part number

Part number

L22DN10

L22DR01

Pull reset with flag indicator, Ø54mm L22GR01

Part number L22DU01J L22DU01A Green “1” Yellow “1” Red “0” Red “0”

Legend plate

Part number LWE16 LWE16-300 LWE00 LWE00-300

Description Ø60 mm, 22,5 mm, no text Ø60 mm, 22,5 mm, text: ”EMERGENCY STOP” Ø80 mm, 22,5 mm, no text Ø80 mm, 22,5 mm, text: ”EMERGENCY STOP”

Part number LWA0240

Description Padlockable shroud

Shroud

190 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Selector/key switch heads 2 position IP66 Non illuminated 0

1

0 1

0

0

1

1

0 1

Short handle

Stable 45°

Spring return 45°

Stable 45°

Spring return 45°

Stable 90°

Stable 90°

Part number

L21KA03

L21KB03

L21KC03

L21KD03

L21KE03

L21KF03

Part number

L21KP03

L21KQ03

L21KR03

L21KS03

L21KT03

L21KU03

Part number

L21LA00*

L21LB00*

L21LC00*

L21LD00*

L21LE00*

L21LF00*

Part number

-

-

-

-

L21LG00**

L21LH00**

Long handle

With key

* Key removeable ”0” only ** key removeable ”0” & ”1” Supplied with 2 keys profile 455 - other profiles available on request

Part number

L21TA03

L21TB03

-

-

-

L21TF03

Red Part number

L21KG10

L21KH10

L21KJ10

L21KK10

L21KL10

L21KM10

Green Part number

L21KG20

L21KH20

L21KJ20

L21KK20

L21KL20

L21KM20

Black Part number

L21KG30

L21KH30

L21KJ30

L21KK30

L21KL30

L21KM30

Part number

L21KV30

-

L21KX30

L21KY30

-

-

With knob

Illuminated

Short handle

Long handle

0116 284 9900

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 191


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Selector/key switch heads 3 position IP66 Non illuminated

Long handle

Spring return _0 1_>

Spring return _0 2_>

Spring return _0 2 1_>

Stable

Part number

L21MA03

L21MB03

L21MC03

L21MD03

L21MK03

Part number

-

L21MR03

L21MS03

L21MT03

L21MU03

Part number

L21NA00*

L21NB00*

L21NC00*

L21ND00*

L21NL00*

Part number

L21NE00**

-

-

-

L21NK00***

_> _

Short handle

Stable

With key *K  ey removeable “0” only, ** Key removeable “1” & “2”, ***Key removeble ”1”, ”0” & ”2” Supplied with 2 keys profile 455 - other profiles available on request

With knob

Part number

L21UA03

L21UB03

L21UC03

L21UD03

L21UK03

Red Part number

L21ME10

L21MF10

L21MG10

L21MH10

L21MJ10

Green Part number

L21ME20

L21MF20

L21MG20

L21MH20

L21MJ20

Black Part number

L21ME30

L21MF30

L21MG30

L21MH30

L21MJ30

Part number

-

L21ML30

L21MM30

L21MN30

L21MP30

Illuminated

Short handle

Long handle

192 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Twin/triple touch heads IP66 Non illuminated

Illuminated

”START”/”STOP”

Part number

L61QA21

L61QA22K

L61QA33C

L61QA22

Part number

L61QH21

”START”/”STOP”

Part number

Part number

L61QB21

L61QB21B

”STOP”

”STOP”

L61BA22

L61BA22B

L61QH22V

L61QH21A

”START”/”STOP”

Part number

L61QK21

L61QK21A

L61QK53

Mechanical reset pushbutton adjustable IP65 Adjustable 26-63 mm with travel of 11mm

Red

Green

Black

Yellow

White

Blue

Part number

L21HA01

L21HA02

L21HA03

L21HA04

L21HA05

L21HA06

Part number

L21HB01

L21HB02

L21HB03

L21HB04

L21HB05

L21HB06

Flush

Projecting

Button for potentiometer Potentiometer For shaft Ø=6-6.35 mm L=46-51 mm Part number

0116 284 9900

L21RP03

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 193


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Contact blocks & clips Bacoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s contact blocks are available in four different connection options, standard screw, push to fit spring clamp, flat blade for faston terminals and with PCB pins. Use up to 6 contacts on one head by using

Contact

a 3 module clip and stacking a further 3 contacts directs on the back. For any illuminated heads the LED block is always mounted in the middle.

LED x1

NO NC

3

x2

4

1

2

Mounting clips 3 position clip

Single clip

Part number

Type

331E

Part number

5 position clip

333E

Part number

335E

Connection

Standard NO

Standard NC

Standard NO+NC

Gold plated NO

Gold plated NC

Screw

33E10

33E01

-

33E10Y7

33E01Y7

Screw

-

33E01C (delayed opening)

-

-

-

Screw

-

-

33E11

-

-

Push fit spring clamp

33R10

33R01

-

-

-

Faston 6.35 mm 2x2.8 mm

33D10

33D01

-

-

-

PCB pins

33P10

33P01

-

-

-

194 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

LED-block

Type

Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

Part number

Part number

Part number

Part number

Part number

Screw 24 V AC/DC

33EARL

33EAGL

33EAYL

33EAWL

33EABL

Screw 115 V AC

33EARM

33EAGM

33EAYM

33EAWM

33EABM

Screw 230 V AC

33EARH

33EAGH

33EAYH

33EAWH

33EABH

Push fit spring clamp 24 V AC/DC

33RARL

33RAGL

33RAYL

33RAWL

33RABL

Push fit spring clamp 115 V AC

33RARM

33RAGM

33RAYM

33RAWM

33RABM

Push fit spring clamp 230 V AC

33RARH

33RAGH

33RAYH

33RAWH

33RABH

Faston 24 V AC/DC

33DARL

33DAGL

33DAYL

33DAWL

33DABL

Faston 115 V AC

33DARM

33DAGM

33DAYM

33DAWM

33DABM

Faston 230 V AC

33DARH

33DAGH

33DAYH

33DAWH

33DABH

PCB pin 24 V AC/DC

33PARL

33PAGL

33PAYL

33PAWL

33PABL

Connection/ voltage

Contact block for mounting in base of LBX-control station

Part number 33S01

2

1

33S10

4

3

Screw

LED block for mounting in base of LBX control station

24 V AC/DC LED Part number

Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

33SARL

33SAGL

33SAYL

33SAWL

33SABL

33SARM

33SAGM

33SAYM

33SAWM

33SABM

33SARH

33SAGH

33SAYH

33SAWH

33SABH

130 VAC LED Part number

Screw

230 VAC LED Part number

0116 284 9900

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 195


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Contact block assemblies Contact blocks & clip

3

4

1

2

Screw terminal Part number

331E10

3

4

1

2

3

4

3

4

1

2

1

2

331E01

333E20

333E02

333E11

Contact blocks, LED & clip 2 NO+24 V AC/DC LED Part number

Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

333EARL20

333EAGL20

333EAYL20

333EAWL20

333EABL20

333EARH20

333EAGH20

333EAYH20

333EAWH20

333EABH20

333EARL11

333EAGL11

333EAYL11

333EAWL11

333EABL11

333EARH11

333EAGH11

333EAYH11

333EAWH11

333EABH11

334EAGL22

334EAYL22

334EAWL22

334EABL22

334EAGH22

334EAYH22

334EAWH22

334EABH22

2 NO+230 V AC LED 3

4

3

4

Part number

1 NO, 1 NC+24 V AC/DC LED Part number 1 NO, 1 NC+230 V AC LED 3

Part number

4 X2

X1 1

2

1 NO/1 NC, 1 NO/1 NC+LED 24 V AC/DC LED Part number

334EARL22

1 NO/1 NC, 1 NO/1 NC+LED 230 V AC 1

2

4

1

2

x1

x2 3

4

Part number

334EARH22

3

Contact block & LED accessories

Diode block

Part number

Transformer block

Filter block

Single

Double

230/24 V

400/24 V

130 V

230 V

33ET

33ETT

33EHC

33ELC

33EFM

33EFH

196 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

Junction block

Empty module

33EY

33EX

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Pilot lights One piece pilot light (excluding lamp)

Direct supply 0-400 V lamp type Ba9S (not included)

Part number

Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

L20SA10

L20SA20

L20SA40

L20SA50

L20SA60

One piece pilot light for LED The pilot light comes complete with a white diffuser cap under the lens which is used to spread the LED light across the entire lens. It is also possible to have a text or symbol, please enquire for further details. Without LED Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

L20SA31

L20SA32

L20SA34

L20SA35

L20SA36

L20SA10L

L20SA20L

L20SA40L

L20SA50L

L20SA60L

L20SA10M

L20SA20M

L20SA40M

L20SA50M

L20SA60M

Part number

L20SA10H

L20SA20H

L20SA40H

L20SA50H

L20SA60H

Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

Part number

L20SE10

L20SE20

L20SE40

L20SE50

L20SE60

Part number

L20SE31***

L20SE32***

L20SE34***

L20SE35***

L20SE36***

Part number Inc. 12-24 V AC/DC LED lamp Part number Inc. 115 V AC LED lamp Part number Inc. 230 V AC LED lamp

Pilot light head

With text or symbol *** = 3 digit code

LED block & clip for pilot light head

12-24 V AC/DC Part number

Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

331EARL

331EAGL

331EAYL

331EAWL

331EABL

331EARM

331EAGM

331EAYM

331EAWM

331EABM

331EARH

331EAGH

331EAYH

331EAWH

331EABH

115 V AC Part number 230 V AC Part number

0116 284 9900

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 197


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Legend plates & holders Standard round

Wide round

Standard square

For twin touch

For type LIAx

For type LIBx

For type LIAx

For type LIAx

LWP3

LWG3

LWP4

LWP2

Part number

Type

Description

Part number Aluminium

Part number White

Part number Red

Part number Black

Part number Transparent

2 line 13 characters per line

LIA9

LIA5

LIA1

LIA3

LIA7

2 line 18 characters per line

LIB9

LIB5

LIB1

LIB3

LIB7

Standard text/symbol codes Standard text Text Alarm Auto Close Down Fast Forward Hand

Code 521 513 314 336 310 305 524

Text Hand - 0 - Auto Hand - Auto Jog Lower Off On Open

Code 591 583 328 308 304 303 313

Text Power On Raise Reset Reverse Run Running Slow

Code 330 307 315 306 327 3326 309

Text Start Stop Tripped Up 0-I 0 - I - Start I - 0 - II

Code 301 302 3327 335 081 093 091

Standard symbols ISO /DIN Description

Symbol

Code

Description

Symbol

Code

Description

Symbol

Code

Continuous straight line movement A01 ISO 1

Unclamp, release ISO 64A

A64

Clutch A74 ISO 74/ DIN 46

Alternating straight line movement ISO 5

A05

Unclamp, release ISO 64D

B64

De-clutch ISO 75/ DIN 45

A75

Continuous rotating movement clockwise ISO 7A/DIN 100

A07

Brake ISO 65

A65

Warning <<Live>> (energised) ISO 92/DIN 45

A92

Continuous rotating mov. anti clockwise ISO 7B

B07

Release brake ISO 66

A66

Main switch ISO 94

A94

Forward A16 ISO 16

Automatic cycle (or semi automatic) ISO 67

A67

Lubrication jet ISO 101

C01

Increase in value ISO 28

A28

Manual control ISO 68

A68

Machine lighting ISO 102/ DIN 139

C02

Decrease in value ISO 29

A29

<<ON>> Close circuit ISO 69

A69

Greasing C07 ISO 107/DIN 175

Adjustable ISO 62

A62

<<STOP>> Open circuit ISO 70

A70

Blow ISO 108/ DIN 264

Clamp, block apply pressure ISO 63A

A63

ON/OFF close + open circuit ISO 71

A71

Suction C09 ISO 109/ DIN 264

Clamp, block apply pressure ISO 63B

B63

Close circuit manual impulse ISO 72/ DIN 168

A72

(Sound) Alarm DIN 155

C08

D01

Additional standard symbols B01

198 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

E01

F01

B62

E62

F62

003

004

005

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Accessories Silicon shroud for pushbutton gives IP67 protection

Part number

Silicon shroud for twin touch gives IP67 protection

Colour

Part number

Colour

LWA0251

Red

LWA0203

Red

LWA0252

Green

LWA0204

Green

LWA0253

Black

LWA0205

Black

LWA0255

Transparent

LWA0228

Transparent

Shroud

Part number

Colour

LWA0223

Padlockable shroud

Transparent

Blanking plug

Ø48 mm, L=29 mm

Ø22,5 mm

Part number

Part number

Part number

LWA0225

LWA0240

LWA0229

Black

LWA0215

Grey

Reduction ring

Colour

DIN rail adaptor

Padlockable cover for pushbutton

Part number

Part number

Part number

LWA0219

LWA0238

LWA0226

Ø30-22,5 mm

Fixing tool

Anti rotation plate

Terminal for LBX stations

Square bezel

Part number

Part number

Part number

Part number

LWA0234

LWA0237

LWA0216

LWA0230

0116 284 9900

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 199


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Control stations series LBX LBX is a series of compact push button stations that can be equipped with any of the heads available in the Baco range. The contact & LED blocks detailed on this page snap into the base of the station and remain there while the lid is removed. It is possible to use the standard contact blocks

and clips detailed elsewhere in this section if you want the contacts to remain on the back of the head while the lid is removed. Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per position or 2 contacts and 1 LED block for illuminated devices.

Contact block for control station (max. 3 per position)

Part number

Type

Contact

33S01

NC

2

33S10

NO

4

1 3

LED block for control station Red

Green

Yellow

White

Blue

33SARL

33SAGL

33SAYL

33SAWL

33SABL

33SARM

33SAGM

33SAYM

33SAWM

33SABM

33SARH

33SAGH

33SAYH

33SAWH

33SABH

24 V AC/DC LED Part number 130 V AC LED Part number 230 V AC LED x1

x2

Part number

Empty station Grey lid Part number

1 hole

2 hole

3 hole

4 hole

5 hole

LBX0100

LBX0200

LBX0300

LBX0400

LBX0500

LBX0100J

-

-

-

-

Yellow lid Part number

Start stop 1 NO contact LBX10110

Symbol

Contact

Colour

3

4

1

2

3

4

3

4

Green

1 NC contact LBX10610

Off on

Red

Selector switch LBX12510

Grey/black

Key switch LBX12610

200 | PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

Grey/black

www.oem.co.uk


Pushbuttons & pilot lights

Start stop up down Part number

Symbol

Contact 3

LBX20120

1

3

LBX308830

1

LBX30430

Colour Green

4

Red

2

Green

4

Red

2

3

4

Green

3

4

Green

1

3

Red

2

Green

4

Mushroom head Part number

Turn reset Ø40mm

Text

LBX10510

EMERGENCY STOP

LBX10520

EMERGENCY STOP

Contact 1

2

1

2

1

2

1 NC

2 NC

Emergency stop Conforms to EN418, IEC 60947-5-5 & ISO 13850 Part number

Text

LBX17301

EMERGENCY STOP

LBX17302

EMERGENCY STOP

”Snap-action” turn reset Ø40mm

LBX15301

EMERGENCY STOP

LBX15302

EMERGENCY STOP

”Snap-action” pull reset Ø40mm

LBX11301

EMERGENCY STOP

LBX11302

EMERGENCY STOP

”Snap-action” key reset Ø40mm

”Snap-action” pull reset with flag Ø54mm

0116 284 9900

LBX13101

-

LBX13102

-

Contact 1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1 NC

2 NC

1 NC

2 NC

1 NC

2 NC

1 NC

2 NC

PUSHBUTTONS & PILOT LIGHTS

| 201


RELAYS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


1-pole terminal relay 6 A

204

1-pole interface relay 10 A

206

2-pole interface relay 5 A

207

Solid state interface relay

207

2-pole miniature relay 10 A

208

4-pole miniature relay 5 A

209

2-pole 8 pin industrial relay 10A

210

3-pole 11 pin industrial relay 10A

211

4-pole industrial relay 10 A

212

3-pole industrial power relay 16 A

213

Time cube for 8 & 11 pin relay

214

Sockets

215


Relays Compact plug-in relay PRC/ZPRC • • • •

TS 35 DIN rail mount Compact 6.2 mm wide, plug-in relay Integrated EMC coil protection & LED Pluggable external cross connectors

Using the mount/dismount lever The mounting and dismounting mechanism forms a reliable connection by latching the relay with the socket base. The fitted relay can be removed, easily and without force, from the socket base by using the dismount function of the lever.

Pluggable relay Pluggable relays are also available with AgSNO and gold contacts, to fit with the many functions of your individual requirements.

Pluggable external cross-connections The AQI/PRC pluggable cross-connection system enables a time-saving distribution of potentials. The AQI/PRC is constructed so that it is protected against accidental touch. It is available as a 20-pole unit, in either yellow, blue or black. The cross-connection can be shortened to fewer poles in order to fit the required interface. Insulation plating can be used to insulate the ends.

Base options PRC – Screw terminal ZPRC – Tension spring terminal

Coil spec Part number

Coil voltage

Power rating AC/DC

Operating range

Holding current

Drop-out voltage

Dimensions

PRCU 1/12 V AC/DC

12 V AC/DC

0.2 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

87.3 x 6.2 x 79.9

PRCU 1/24 V AC/DC

24 V AC/DC

0.2 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

87.3 x 6.2 x 79.9

PRCU 1/125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

0.2 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

87.3 x 6.2 x 79.9

PRCU 1/240 V AC/DC

220-240 V AC

0.2 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

87.3 x 6.2 x 79.9

Contact spec Part number

No. of contacts

Max. continuous current/Max. inrush current

Rated voltage/ Max switching voltage

Min. switching load

PRCU 1/12 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

300 mW (5 V/5 mA)

PRCU 1/24 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

300 mW (5 V/5 mA)

PRCU 1/125 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

300 mW (5 V/5 mA)

PRCU 1/240 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

300 mW (5 V/5 mA)

204 | RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Relays

Compact interface relay IRC PLUS • • • • •

TS 35 DIN rail mount 6.2 mm wide, plug-in relay Fuse module option LED indicator Plug-in cross connectors

• Timer relay • Multifunction • Time ranges 0.1 - 3 s 3-60 s, 1-20 m, 0.3- 6 h

The IRCPU fuse insert module can be used in all systems. It is unique in the way it meets the requirement that each coupling relay output must be protected by a replaceable 5 x 20 mm standard micro-fuse within the available 6.2 mm width.

It is delivered with a dummy plug inserted in the frame. The connections for the fuse are bridged internally, so that it can be used without a fuse module. The indicator pin is not visible when the product is delivered. When the fuse module is plugged in with an inserted fuse (dummy plug has been removed), the fuse is in series with the CO of the output connection (11).

The indicator pin is not visible when the product is delivered

When the fuse module is pulled out (e.g. due to a failed fuse), the output remains cut off so that the cause of the blown fuse can be found (security logistics).

Status of the indicator pin Status of the indicator pin Status of the indicator pin

In order to reactivate the output, either the fuse module must be fitted with a functional fuse and plugged in again, or the indicator pin must be moved gently in the direction of the arrow, as shown initially.

Moving the indicator pin

Coil spec Part number

Coil voltage

Power rating AC/DC

Operating range

Holding current

Drop-out voltage

Dimensions

IRCPU 1/12 V AC/DC

12 V AC/DC

0.2 VA / 0.2 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

94.3 x 6.2 x 95.4

IRCPU 1/24 V AC/DC

24 V AC/DC

0.25 VA / 0.25 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

94.3 x 6.2 x 95.4

IRCPU 1/125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

0.7 VA / 0.7 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

94.3 x 6.2 x 95.4

IRCPU 1/240 V AC/DC

220-240 V AC

1 VA / 0.4 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

94.3 x 6.2 x 95.4

24 V AC/DC

0.4 VA / 0.3 W

(0.8-1.1) Un

0.6 Un

0.1 Un

94.3 x 6.2 x 95.4

MFR IRCPU 1/24 V AC/DC Contact spec Part number

No. of contacts

Max. continuous current/Max. inrush current

Rated voltage/ Max switching voltage

Min. switching load

IRCPU 1/12 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

500 mW (12 V/10 mA)

IRCPU 1/24 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

500 mW (12 V/10 mA)

IRCPU 1/125 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

500 mW (12 V/10 mA)

IRCPU 1/240 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

500 mW (12 V/10 mA)

MFR IRCPU 1/24 V AC/DC

1 CO contact

6/10 A

250/400 V AC

500 mW (12 V/10 mA)

Timer relay MFR IRCPU 1/24 V AC/DC

Functions AI: ON delay; DI: ON pulse; SW: Blinker ON; BE: OFF delay with control contact; CE: ON and OFF delay with control contact; DE: Impulse-ON with control contact; EE: Impulse-OFF with control contact

Part number

Accessories

TW/IRC

Partition plate

AQI/IRC/16

External cross-connector, blue, black, red

FCA/IRC

Ribbon cable adpater

SM-IRC

Fuse module

0116 284 9900

RELAYS

| 205


Relays 1-pole interface relay 10 A

TECHNICAL DATA Type

• Robust flat pins for industrial applications • Mechanical flag & LED indication • Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Bifurcated contact option for low loads

C10A10…

Coil type

AC

DC

Coil load

1.1 VA

0.65 W

Min. activation UNx

0.75

0.75

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.10

1.10

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

Max. drop-out voltage UN

0.35

0.15

Surge current

30 A (10 ms)

Recommended min. load

10 mA / 10 V DC (C10T13 5 mA / 5 V DC)

Isolation class, EN60947

250 V (pollution 3, Group C)

Isolation, contact/coil

8 mm-4 kV

Screw socket

S-10. S-10M

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

Interface relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C10A10X24A

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10X48A

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10X115A

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10X230A

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10X12D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10X24D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10X48D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10X110D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S-10 / S-10M

Interface relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & bridge rectifier for AC/DC operation C10A10BX24AD

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC/DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10BX48AD

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC/DC

S-10 / S-10M

Interface relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes C10A10FX12D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10FX24D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10FX48D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10A10FX110D

Standard AgNi

1 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S-10 / S-10M

Interface relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C10T13X24A

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S-10 / S-10M

C10T13X48A

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S-10 / S-10M S-10 / S-10M

C10T13X115A

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

115V AC

C10T13X230A

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S-10 / S-10M

C10T13X12D

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10T13X24D

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10T13X48D

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10T13X110D

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S-10 / S-10M

Interface relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & bridge rectifier for AC/DC operation C10T13BX24AD

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V AC/DC

S-10 / S-10M

C10T13BX48AD

Bifurcated AgNi + 3µAu

1 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

48V AC/DC

S-10 / S-10M

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

206 | RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Relays

2-pole interface relay 5 A

TECHNICAL DATA Type

• Robust flat pins, for industrial applications • Mechanical flag & LED indication • Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Integrated suppression components

C12A21...

Coil type

AC

DC

Coil load

1.1 VA

0.65 W

Min. activation UNx

0.8

0.8

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.1

1.1

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

Max. drop-out voltage UN

0.35

0.10

Surge current

15 A (20 ms)

Recommended min. load

10 mA / 10 V (C12A22 5 mA / 5 V DC)

Isolation, contact/coil

5000 V

Isolation, pole/pole

3000 V

Safety class

IP40

Screw socket

S-12

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

Interface relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C12A21X24A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S-12

C12A21X48A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S-12

C12A21X115A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S-12

C12A21X230A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S-12

C12A21X12D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S-12

C12A21X24D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S-12

C12A21X48D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S-12

C12A21X110D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S-12

Interface relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & bridge rectifier for AC/DC operation C12A21BX24AD

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V AC/DC

S-12

C12A21BX48AD

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V AC/DC

S-12

Interface relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication with gold plate contacts C12A22X230A

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S-12

C12A22X24D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S-12

24V AC/DC

S-12

Interface relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & bridge rectifier for AC/DC operation with gold plate contacts C12A22BX24AD

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

2 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

1-pole solid state interface relay

TECHNICAL DATA Type Input voltage

• Robust flat pins • LED indication • Input 5-32 V DC

CSS DC

CSS AC/AZ

5-32 V DC

5-32 V DC

Drop-out voltage

2.5 V

2.5 V

Power consumption

3 mA

10 mA

Recommended min. load

1 mA

50 mA

1V

1.5 V

<10 mA

0.55 mA (230 V 50 Hz)

Max. voltage drop Leakage current Safety components

Varistor and diode

Isolation input/output

RC protection 4000 V

Screw socket

S-10. S-10M

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Part number

Description

Control voltage

Load voltage

Solid state relay NPN 2A

5-32 V DC

5-50 V DC

CSSAC

Solid state relay NPN 3A

5-32 V DC

24-250 V AC

CSSAZ

Solid state relay 3A zero-voltage switching

5-32 V DC

24-250 V AC

CSSDC

0116 284 9900

RELAYS

| 207


Relays 2-pole miniature relay 10 A

Type

• Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Mechanical flag • Optional LED and suppression components • Special contact options

C7A20...

Coil type

AC

DC

Coil load

1.5V A

1W

Min. activation UNx

0.80

0.80

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.10

1.10

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

0.25

0.20

Max. drop-out voltage UN Recommended min. load

10 mA / 10 V DC (C7T21 5 mA / 5 V)

Surge current

30 A (20 ms)

Isolation class (EN60947)

250 V Pollution 3, Gr C

Isolation, contact/coil

2500 V

Isolation, pole/pole

2500 V

Screw socket

S7M, S7IO

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button C7A2024A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S7C

C7A2048A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S7C

C7A20115A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S7C

C7A20230A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S7C

C7A2012D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S7C

C7A2024D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S7C

C7A2048D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S7C

C7A20110D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S7C

Miniature relay with flange for direct mounting C7A20E230A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

N/A

C7A20E24D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

N/A

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C7A20X24A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S7C

C7A20X48A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S7C

C7A20X115A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S7C

C7A20X230A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S7C

C7A20X12D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S7C

C7A20X24D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S7C

C7A20X48D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S7C

C7A20X110D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S7C

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes C7A20FX12D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S7C

C7A20FX24D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S7C

C7A20FX48D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S7C

C7A20FX110D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S7C

24V DC

S7C

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S7C

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes with gold flashed contacts C7A29FX24D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes with gold plate contacts C7A28FX24D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

Miniature relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C7T21X230A

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S7C

C7T21X24D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S7C

Miniature relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling protection diode C7T21DX24D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S7C

C7T21DX110D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S7C

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling protection diode with double make contact for high DC switching C7X10DX24D

Double make AgNi

1 N/O

10A / 250V AC1

1A / 220V DC1

24V DC

S7C

C7X10DX110D

Double make AgNi

1 N/O

10A / 250V AC1

1A / 220V DC1

110V DC

S7C

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes with contacts for high inrush current C7W10FX24D

High inrush AgNi/W

1 N/O

10A / 250V AC (500A 2.5mS)

N/A

24V DC

S7C

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

208 | RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Relays

4-pole miniature relay 5 A

TECHNICAL DATA Type

• Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Mechanical flag • Optional LED and suppression components • Latching option

C9A41...

Coil type

AC

DC

Coil load

1.5 VA

1W

Min. activation UNx

0.80

0.80

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.10

1.10

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

Max. drop-out voltage UN

0.25

0.20

Recommended min. load

10 mA / 10 V (C9-A42 5 mA / 5 V)

Surge current (10 ms)

15 A

Isolation class (EN60947)

Order

150 V Pollution 2

Isolation, contact/coil

2500 V

Isolation pole/pole

2000 V

Screw socket

Miniat

C9A4

C9A4

S9M

C9A4 Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

C9A4

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button

C9A4

C9A4124A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S9M

C9A4148A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S9M

C9A41115A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S9M

C9A41230A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S9M

C9A4112D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S9M

C9A4124D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A4148D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A41110D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S9M

C9A4

24V AC

S9M

C9A4

C9A4

C9A4

Miniat

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication

C9A4

C9A41X24A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

C9A41X48A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S9M

C9A41X115A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S9M

C9A4

C9A41X230A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S9M

C9A4

C9A41X12D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S9M

C9A41X24D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S9M

C9A41X48D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S9M

C9A41X110D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A4

Miniat

C9A4

C9A4

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes C9A41FX12D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A41FX24D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A41FX48D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S9M

Miniat

C9A41FX110D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S9M

C9A4

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication with gold plate contacts

C9A4

C9A42X24A

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S9M

C9A42X48A

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S9M

C9A42X115A

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S9M

C9A42X230A

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S9M

C9A42X12D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S9M

C9A42X24D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S9M

C9A42X48D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S9M

C9A42X110D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A4

C9A4

C9A4

C9A4

C9A4

Miniat

C9A4

Miniature relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes with gold plate contacts C9A42FX12D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A42FX24D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A42FX48D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S9M

C9A4

C9A42FX110D

Standard AgNi + 10µAu

4 C/O

5A / 250V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S9M

Miniat

Miniature relay with latching (remanence on/off) coil, mechanical flag & test button

C9R2

C9R2124A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 120V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S9M

C9R2148A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 120V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S9M

C9R21115A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 120V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S9M

C9R21230A

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 120V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S9M

C9R2112D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 120V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S9M

C9R2124D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 120V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S9M

C9R2

C9R2148D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

5A / 120V AC1

5A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S9M

C9R2

C9R2

C9R2

C9R2

C9R2

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

0116 284 9900

RELAYS

| 209


Relays 2-pole 8-pin industrial relay 10 A

TECHNICAL DATA Type

• Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Bifurcated contact option for low loads • Optional LED and suppression components

C2-A20...

Coil type

AC

DC

Coil load

2.2 VA

1.3 W

Min. activation UNx

0.80

0.80

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.10

1.10

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

Max. drop-out voltage UN

0.15

0.10

Recommended min. load

10 mA / 10 V DC (C2-T21 5mA / 5 V)

Surge current Isolation class (EN60947)

30 A (20 ms) 250 V, Pollution 3, Group C

Isolation, contact/coil

2500 V

Isolation, pole/pole

2500 V

Screw socket

S2B, S2S

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

Industrial 8 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button C2-A2024A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A2048A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20115A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20230A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A2012D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A2024D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A2048D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20110D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S2B / S2S

Industrial 8 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C2-A20X24A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20X48A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20X115A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20X230A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20X12D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20X24D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20X48D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20X110D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S2B / S2S

Industrial 8 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes C2-A20FX12D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20FX24D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20FX48D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A20FX110D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S2B / S2S

Industrial 8 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes with gold flashed contacts C2-A29FX12D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A29FX24D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A29FX48D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-A29FX110D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S2B / S2S

Industrial 8 pin relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C2-T21X230A

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S2B / S2S

C2-T21X24D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S2B / S2S

Industrial 8 pin relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling protection diode C2-T21FX24D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S2B / S2S

C2-T21FX110D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

2 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S2B / S2S

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

210 | RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Relays

3-pole 11-pin industrial relay 10 A

TECHNICAL DATA Type

• Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Optional LED and suppression components • Latching option

C3-A30...

Coil type

AC

DC

Coil load

2.2 VA

1.3 W

Min. activation UNx

0.80

0.80

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.10

1.10

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

0.15

0.10

Max. drop-out voltage UN Recommended min. load

10 mA / 10 V DC (C3-T31 5 mA / 5 V)

Surge current

30 A (20 ms)

Isolation class (EN60947)

250 V, Pollution 3, Group C

Isolation, contact/coil

2500 V

Isolation, pole/pole

2500 V

Screw socket

S3B, S3S

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

Industrial 11 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button C3-A3024A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A3048A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30115A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30230A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A3012D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A3024D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A3048D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30110D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S3B / S3S

Industrial 11 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C3-A30X24A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30X48A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30X115A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30X230A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30X12D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30X24D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30X48D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30X110D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S3B / S3S

Industrial 11 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes C3-A30FX12D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30FX24D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30FX48D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A30FX110D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S3B / S3S

Industrial 11 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes with gold flashed contacts C3-A39FX12D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A39FX24D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A39FX48D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-A39FX110D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S3B / S3S

Industrial 11 pin relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C3-T31X230A

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-T31X24D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S3B / S3S

Industrial 11 pin relay with bifurcated contacts for low level switching with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling protection diode C3-T31FX24D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-T31FX110D

Bifurcated AgNi + 0.2µAu

3 C/O

6A / 250V AC1

6A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S3B / S3S

Industrial 11 pin relay with latching (remanence on/off) coil, mechanical flag & test button C3-R20115A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-R20230A

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S3B / S3S

C3-R2012D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S3B / S3S

C3-R2024D

Standard AgNi

2 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S3B / S3S

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

0116 284 9900

RELAYS

| 211


Relays TECHNICAL DATA

4-pole industrial relay 10 A

Type

• Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Optional LED and suppression components • Latching option

C4-A40...

Coil type

AC

DC

Coil load

2.4 VA

1.4 W

Min. activation UNx

0.80

0.80

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.10

1.10

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

Max. drop-out voltaage UNx

0.15

0.10

Recommended minimum load

10 mA / 10 V

Surge current (20 ms) Isolation class (EN60947)

30 A 250 V Pollution 3, Gr C

Isolation, contact/coil

2500 V

Isolation, pole/pole

2500 V

Screw socket

S4J

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

Industrial 14 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button C4-A4024A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S4J

C4-A4048A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S4J

C4-A40115A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S4J

C4-A40230A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S4J

C4-A4012D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S4J

C4-A4024D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S4J

C4-A4048D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S4J

C4-A40110D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S4J

Industrial 14 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C4-A40X24A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S4J

C4-A40X48A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S4J

C4-A40X115A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S4J

C4-A40X230A

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S4J

C4-A40X12D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S4J

C4-A40X24D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S4J

C4-A40X48D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S4J

C4-A40X110D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S4J

Industrial 14 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes C4-A40FX12D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S4J

C4-A40FX24D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S4J

C4-A40FX48D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S4J

C4-A40FX110D

Standard AgNi

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S4J

Industrial 14 pin relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes with gold flashed contacts C4-A49FX12D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S4J

C4-A49FX24D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S4J

C4-A49FX48D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S4J

C4-A49FX110D

Standard AgNi + 0.2µAu

4 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S4J

Industrial 14 pin relay with latching (remanence on/off) coil, mechanical flag & test button C4-R30115A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S4J

C4-R30230A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S4J

C4-R3012D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S4J

C4-R3024D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

10A / 250V AC1

10A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S4J

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

212 | RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Relays

3-pole industrial power relay 16 A

TECHNICAL DATA Type

C5-A30...

Coil load

• Colour-coded test button lift to latch push to test • Mechanical indication flag • Optional LED and suppression components

2.4 VA

1.4 W

Min. activation UNx

0.80

0.80

Max. over-voltage UNx

1.10

1.10

Min. holding voltage UNx

0.60

0.35

Max. drop-out voltage UN

0.15

0.10

Recommended minimum load

10 mA / 5 V DC

Surge current (20 ms)

40 A

Isolation class (EN60947)

500 V, Pollution 3, Group C

Isolation, contact/coil

4000 V

Isolation, pole/pole

4000 V

Screw socket

S5S / S5M

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Contact type

Poles

AC rating max

DC rating max

Coil voltage

Socket

Industrial 11 pin power relay with mechanical flag & test button C5-A3024A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A3048A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30115A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30230A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A3012D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A3024D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A3048D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30110D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S5S / S5M

Industrial 11 pin power relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication C5-A30X24A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

24V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30X48A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

48V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30X115A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

115V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30X230A

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

230V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30X12D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30X24D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30X48D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30X110D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S5S / S5M

Industrial 11 pin power relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling / polarity protection diodes C5-A30FX12D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

12V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30FX24D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

24V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30FX48D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

48V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-A30FX110D

Standard AgNi

3 C/O

16A / 400V AC1

16A / 30V DC1

110V DC

S5S / S5M

Industrial power relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication with double make contact for high DC switching C5-X10X115A

Double make AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

1.2A / 220V DC1

115V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-X10X230A

Double make AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

1.2A / 220V DC1

230V AC

S5S / S5M

Industrial power relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling protection diode with double make contact for high DC switching C5-X10FX24D

Double make AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

1.2A / 220V DC1

24V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-X10FX48D

Double make AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

1.2A / 220V DC1

48V DC

S5S / S5M

Industrial power relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication with double make, magnetic blow out contact for high DC switching C5-M10X115A

Double make + mag AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

10A / 220V DC1

115V AC

S5S / S5M

C5-M10X230A

Double make + mag AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

10A / 220V DC1

230V AC

S5S / S5M

Industrial power relay with mechanical flag & test button + LED indication & free wheeling protection diode with double make, magnetic blow out contact for high DC switching C5-M10FX24D

Double make + mag AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

10A / 220V DC1

24V DC

S5S / S5M

C5-M10FX48D

Double make + mag AgNi

1 N/O

16A / 400V AC1

10A / 220V DC1

48V DC

S5S / S5M

Other types and voltages upon request.* All AC coils have a frequency of 50/60 Hz.

0116 284 9900

RELAYS

| 213


Relays Time cube for 8 & 11 pin relays

TECHNICAL DATA Repeater precision

• • • • •

Part Number CT2E30/S

Use with standard C2 / C3 relays Wide range supply voltage Multi-time range 0.2 sec–30 min. 5 timing function options Simply plug between relay & socket

± 0.5 % or 20 ms

Reset time, (type E, W, B)

<150 ms

Reset time, (type A, K)

<200 ms

Activation time, (V AC)

80 ms

Activation time, (V DC)

50 ms

Max. relay current

See relay data

Material

Cicoloy

Pins

Timer function

Activated by

Voltage range

Relay type

Socket

8

Delay on make

Supply voltage

9.5 - 18V DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2E30/L

8

Delay on make

Supply voltage

20 - 65V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2E30/H

8

Delay on make

Supply voltage

90 - 265V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2W30/S

8

Single pulse

Supply voltage

9.5 - 18V DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2W30/L

8

Single pulse

Supply voltage

20 - 65V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2W30/H

8

Single pulse

Supply voltage

90 - 265V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2B30/S

8

Symmetrical recycling

Supply voltage

9.5 - 18V DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2B30/L

8

Symmetrical recycling

Supply voltage

20 - 65V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2B30/H

8

Symmetrical recycling

Supply voltage

90 - 265V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2A30/S

8

Delay on break

Control input

9.5 - 18V DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2A30/L

8

Delay on break

Control input

20 - 65V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2A30/M

8

Delay on break

Control input

90 - 150V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2A30/U

8

Delay on break

Control input

180 - 265V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2K30/S

8

Single pulse

Control input

9.5 - 18V DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2K30/L

8

Single pulse

Control input

20 - 65V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2K30/M

8

Single pulse

Control input

90 - 150V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT2K30/U

8

Single pulse

Control input

180 - 265V AC/DC

C2

S2B / S2S

CT3E30/S

11

Delay on make

Supply voltage

9.5 - 18V DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3E30/L

11

Delay on make

Supply voltage

20 - 65V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3E30/H

11

Delay on make

Supply voltage

90 - 265V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3W30/S

11

Single pulse

Supply voltage

9.5 - 18V DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3W30/L

11

Single pulse

Supply voltage

20 - 65V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3W30/H

11

Single pulse

Supply voltage

90 - 265V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3B30/S

11

Symmetrical recycling

Supply voltage

9.5 - 18V DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3B30/L

11

Symmetrical recycling

Supply voltage

20 - 65V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3B30/H

11

Symmetrical recycling

Supply voltage

90 - 265V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3A30/S

11

Delay on break

Control input

9.5 - 18V DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3A30/L

11

Delay on break

Control input

20 - 65V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3A30/M

11

Delay on break

Control input

90 - 150V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3A30/U

11

Delay on break

Control input

180 - 265V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3K30/S

11

Single pulse

Control input

9.5 - 18V DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3K30/L

11

Single pulse

Control input

20 - 65V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3K30/M

11

Single pulse

Control input

90 - 150V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

CT3K30/U

11

Single pulse

Control input

180 - 265V AC/DC

C3

S3B / S3S

214 | RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Relays

Sockets for C10 & C12 interface relays • • • •

TECHNICAL DATA Type Fits relay

DIN rail or PCB mount Integral retaining clip Bridge bar option for A2 terminal Bridge bar option for contact side (S-10M & S-12 only)

Nominal load

S-10

S-10M

S-12

C10...

C10...

C12... 6 A/250 A

10 A/250 A

16 A/250 A

Isolation conn./conn.

3000 V

3000 V

3000 V

Isolation conn./rail

5000 V

5000 V

5000 V

Material

Noryl/Celanex

Noryl/Celanex

Noryl/Celanex

Dimensions mm

15.6 x 75 x 26

16.9 x 75 x 26

16.9 x 75 x 26

S-10

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Part Number

Description

For relay / socket

S-10

DIN rail socket with screw terminals for C10 relay

C10

S10P

PCB socket for C10 relay

C10

S-10M

DIN rail socket with screw terminals for C10 relay

C10

S-12

DIN rail socket with screw terminals for C12 relay

C12

S12P

PCB socket for C12 relay

C12

S10BB

Bridge bar for A2 terminal (4 way in packs of 5)

S-10

B20-G

Bridge bar for A2 terminal (4 way in packs of 5)

S-10M / S-12

V10G

Bridge bar for contact side (1 way in packs of 5)

S-10M / S-12

V40G

Bridge bar for contact side (4 way in packs of 5)

S-10M / S-12

Sockets for C7 and C9 miniature relays

TECHNICAL DATA Type

S7C

Fits relay

C7...

C9...

10 A/250 V

6 A/250 V

Isolation conn./conn.

2500 V

2500 V

Isolation conn./raila

2500 V

2500 V

Cicoloy, Noryl

Cicoloy, Noryl

22.5x75x26 mm

22.5x75x26 mm

Nominal load

• DIN rail, panel or PCB mount • Integral retaining clip • Bridge bar options for S9M

S9M

Material Dimensions

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Part Number

Description

For relay / socket

S7C

DIN rail socket with screw terminals for C7 relay

C7

S7L

Panel mount socket with solder lugs for C7 relay

C7

S7P S7PO

PCB mount socket for C7 relay

C7

PCB mount socket with flange for C7 relay

C7

S9M

DIN rail socket with screw terminals for C9 relay

C9

S9L

Panel mount socket with solder lugs for C9 relay

C9

S9P

PCB mount socket for C9 relay

C9

PCB mount socket with flange for C9 relay

C9

S9M-BX

Bridge bar for A2 terminal (4 way in packs of 5)

S9M

S9M-V1

Bridge bar for contact side (1 way in packs of 5)

S9M

S9M-V4

Bridge bar for contact side (4 way in packs of 5)

S9M

S9PO

* Technical data and dimensions for solder and circuit board sockets available upon request.

0116 284 9900

RELAYS

| 215


Relays Sockets for 8-pin C2 industrial relays • • • •

TECHNICAL DATA Type

S2B

S2S

Fits relay

C2...

C2...

C2...

10 A/250 V

10 A/250 V

10 A/250 V 2500 V

Nominal load

DIN rail, panel or PCB mount Marking label Coding ring option Integrated retaining clip

S2L, S2P, S2PO

Isolation

2500 V

2500 V

Material

Cicoloy

Cicoloy

-

38 x 68 x 24

38 x 80 x 25

-

Dimensions mm

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Part Number

Description

For relay / socket

S2B

DIN rail socket with screw terminals on 1 level for C2 relay

C2

S2S

DIN rail socket with screw terminals on 2 levels for C2 relay

C2

S2L

Panel mount socket with solder lugs for C2 relay

C2

S2P S2PO

PCB mount socket for C2 relay

C2

PCB mount socket with flange for C2 relay

C2

S3C

Metal retaining clip for C2, C3 & C4 relays

S3CT

Metal retaining clip for C2 & C3 relays with time cube

S2BC

Coding ring (pack of 5) for S2B / S2S

S2B / S2S

SO-NP

Black (no function) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

SO-OP

Orange (push only) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

Sockets for 11-pin C3 industrial relays

TECHNICAL DATA Type

S3B

S3S

Fits relay

C3...

C3...

C3...

10 A/250 V

10 A/250 V

10 A/250 V 2500 V

Nominal load

• • • •

Part Number

DIN rail, panel or PCB mount Marking label Coding ring option Integrated retaining clip

Isolation

2500 V

2500 V

Material

Cicoloy

Cicoloy

-

38 x 68 x 24

38 x 80 x 25

-

Dimensions mm

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Description

For relay / socket

S3B

DIN rail socket with screw terminals on 1 level for C3 relay

C3

S3S

DIN rail socket with screw terminals on 2 levels for C3 relay

C3

S3L

Panel mount socket with solder lugs for C3 relay

C3

S3P S3PO

PCB mount socket for C3 relay

C3

PCB mount socket with flange for C3 relay

C3

S3C

Metal retaining clip for C2, C3 & C4 relays

S3CT

Metal retaining clip for C2 & C3 relays with time cube

S3BC

Coding ring (pack of 5) for S3B / S3S

S3B / S3S

SO-NP

Black (no function) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

SO-OP

Orange (push only) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

216 | RELAYS

S3L, S3P, S3PO

www.oem.co.uk


Relays

Sockets for C4 industrial relays

TECHNICAL DATA Type

S4J

Fits relay Nominal load

• DIN rail, panel or PCB mount • Marking label • Integrated retaining clip

S4L, S4P, S4PO

C4...

C4...

10 A / 250 V

10 A / 250 V

Isolation

2500 V

2500 V

Material

Cicoloy

Cicoloy

38 x 92 x 32

-

Dimensions mm

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Part Number

Description

For relay / socket

S4J

DIN rail socket with screw terminals for C4 relay

C4

S4L

Panel mount socket with solder lugs for C4 relay

C4

S4P

PCB mount socket for C4 relay

C4

PCB mount socket with flange for C4 relay

C4

SO-NP

Black (no function) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

SO-OP

Orange (push only) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

S4PO

Sockets for C5 industrial power relays

TECHNICAL DATA Type

S5S

Fits relay

C5...

C5...

16 A / 400 V

16 A / 400 V

Nominal load

• DIN rail, panel or PCB mount • Marking label • Integrated retaining clip

S5L, S5P, S5PO

Isolation

2500 V

2500 V

Material

Cicoloy

Cicoloy

38 x 80 x 29

-

Dimensions mm

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e : w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Part Number

Description

For relay / socket

S5S

DIN rail socket with screw terminals for C5 relay

C5

S5L

Panel mount socket with solder lugs for C5 relay

C5

S5P

PCB mount socket for C5 relay

C5

PCB mount socket with flange for C5 relay

C5

SO-NP

Black (no function) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

SO-OP

Orange (push only) test button for C2, C3, C4 & C5 relays

C2 / C3 / C4 / C5

S5PO

0116 284 9900

RELAYS

| 217


RS-485 NETWORK MODULES

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


SM1 - Analogue input converter - 2 channel

220

SM2 - Analogue input converter - 4 channel

220

SM3 - Digital/pulse input converter - 2 channel

220

SM4 - Digital output converter - 4/8 channel

221

SM5 - Digital input converter - 8 channel

221

SM7 - Radio transmission module

221

MR03 - High power radio transmission module

222

PD8 - Converter RS-485 to ethernet interfaces

222

PD8W - Converter RS-485 to ethernet wi-fi interfaces

222

PD10 - Converter USB to RS-485 module

223

SM9 - Converter power supply module

223

SMC - RS-485 programmable logic controller

223


RS-485 network modules

SM1 – Analogue input converter – 2 channel

• Conversion of standard signals and temperature • Programmable measurement characteristics • Mathmatical functions

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs fixed: Temperature: PT100 Current: 0/4…20mA Voltage: 0…10V Resistance: 0…400Ω Outputs: RS-485/RS-232: MODBUS ASCII/RTU Dimensions: 22.5 x 120 x 100mm Protection level: IP40 Front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/dc Supply voltage:

Input signal: 2 voltage inputs 2 current inputs 1 voltage input + 1 current input 2 resistance inputs or Pt100 Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…50 V a.c./d.c.01

SM2 – Analogue input converter – 4 channel

• • • •

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs fixed: Temperature: PT100 Current: 0/4…20mA Voltage: 0…10V Resistance: 0…400Ω Outputs: Logic: 2 x OC outputs RS-485/RS-232: MODBUS ASCII/RTU Dimensions: 45 x 120 x 100mm Protection level: IP40 front Supply voltage: 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/dc

0…10 V 0/4…20 mA 0…10 V+0/4…20 mA Pt100 or resistance < 400Ω

00 01 02 03

SM2

Technical data

Part number key

8

XX

X

8

00 01 02 03 1 2

Conversion of logic states or impulses 2 programmable logic or counter inputs Auxiliary counters with reset function Counter states stored in non-volatile memory

SM3 0 logic 0…2.4V, 1 logic 3.4…24V 0…4 294 967 295 impluses @ min. 0.5ms, 800Hz max

X

1 2

Input signal: 4 voltage inputs 0…10 V 4 current inputs 0/4…20 mA 2 voltage inputs + 2 current inputs 0…10 V+0/4…20 mA 4 resistance inputs 0…400Ω or Pt100 Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…50 V a.c./d.c.01

• • • •

220 | RS-485 NETWORK MODULES

XX

Conversion of standard signals and temperature Programmable measurement characteristics Mathmatical functions 2 programmable OC outputs

SM3 – Digital/pulse input converter – 2 channel

Inputs: Logic: Counter: Outputs: RS-485/RS-232: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

SM1

Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…50 V a.c./d.c.

X

00

8

1 2

MODBUS ASCII/RTU 22.5 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/dc

www.oem.co.uk


RS-485 network modules

SM4 – Digital output converter – 4/8 channel

• Remote control of outputs steered through RS-485 • 4 relay or 8 OC outputs

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs: RS-485: Outputs: Relay: Logic: RS-485/RS-232: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

SM4 MODBUS ASCII/RTU 4 x relay, NO contacts 8 x OC MODBUS ASCII/RTU 45 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/dc

Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…50 V a.c./d.c. Kind of outputs: 8 outputs of OC type 4 relay outputs

Technical data

Part number key SM5

MODBUS ASCII/RTU 45x120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/dc

Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…50 V a.c./d.c.

• Data transmission by radio in non-licenced 433Mhz or 868 Mhz band • 10 Channels • up to 300m range • Module grouping with addressed links

Technical data

Part number key

0116 284 9900

SM7 Supply voltage: 85…230…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…24…50 V a.c./d.c. 7…35 V d.c. Radio transmission frequency: 433 MHz 868 MHz

8

X

00

8

1 2

SM7 – Radio transmission module

Inputs: RS-485, RS-232: MODBUS ASCII/RTU Coding: NRZ, Manchester Frequency: 433 Mhz, 868 Mhz Range direct line: 300m for 433Mhz unit Receiver sensitivity: -110dBm Outputs: -20… 5 dBm (10 dBm 433Mhz) Dimensions: 45 x 120 x 100mm Protection level: IP20 front Supply voltage: 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/dc, 7…35V d.c

00

1 2

• 8 relay logic inputs read though RS-485 • Signalling of input state by LED’s

0 logic - open circuit, 1 logic - short circuit

X

1 2

SM5 – Digital input converter – 8 channel

Inputs: Logic: Output: RS-485/RS-232: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

X

X

X

8

1 2 3 1 2

RS-485 NETWORK MODULES

| 221


RS-485 network modules

MR03 – High power radio transmission module

• Data transmission by radio in non -licenced 869 Mhz band • 3 Channels • up to 2Km range • Point–to–Point or Broadcast mode operation

Technical data

Part number key MR03

Inputs fixed: RS-485/RS-232: MODBUS ASCII/RTU Frequency: 869.4 - 869.65 MHz Range direct line: up to 2000m Receiver sensitivity: >-103dBm Outputs: 20, 23, 27 dBm (500mW) Dimensions: 115 x 65 x 40mm Protection level: IP54 front Supply voltage: 12…30V a.c, 8…30V d.c

PD8 – Converter RS-485 to Ethernet interfaces

• Enables access to RS-485 devices via Ethernet • Configuration through any Web browser • Supports UDP serial bridge mode

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs fixed: RS-485/RS-232: Baud rate: Transmission range: Digital interface: Ethernet: Protocol: Baud rate: USB1.1/2.0: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply Voltage:

PD8 MODBUS ASCII/RTU up to 115200 bits/s up to 1200m at 9600 bit/s

Supply voltage: 85...253 V a.c./d.c. 20...50 V a.c./d.c.

X

00

00

E

8

0

1 2

10/100 base-T Digi Realport®, TCP/IP, HTTP, ICMP, DHCP,ARP 10/100 Mbit/s RCI (configuration port) 45 x 120 x 100mm IP30 front 85…253V a.c, 20…50V a.c /d.c

PD8W – Converter RS-485 to Ethernet wi-fi interfaces

• Enables access to RS-485 devices via Ethernet Wi-Fi • Configuration through any Web browser • Supports UDP serial bridge mode

Technical data Inputs: RS-485/RS-232: Baud rate: Transmission range: Digital interface: Ethernet Wi -Fi: Protocol: Baud rate: Supports: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

222 | RS-485 NETWORK MODULES

MODBUS ASCII/RTU up to 115200 bits/s up to 1200m at 9600 bit/s

Part number key PD8W

10/100 base-T Digi Realport®, TCP/IP, HTTP, ICMP, DHCP,ARP up to 11 Mbit/s WEP, WPA, WPA2, Cisco LEAP, EAP-FAST 45 x 120 x 100mm IP30 front 85…253V a.c, 20…50V a.c /d.c

Supply voltage: 85...253 V a.c./d.c. 20...50 V a.c./d.c.

X

00

E

0

1 2

www.oem.co.uk


RS-485 network modules

PD10 – Converter USB to RS-485 module

• Enables the connection to RS-485 networks to PC • Transparent for communication protocols • Galvanic seperation protects computer USB ports

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs: RS-485/RS-232: MODBUS ASCII/RTU Baud rate: up to 1 Mb/s Output: USB Supports: Windows 7, XP, 2000, Vista, Serever 2003, Server 2008 (x86 and X64) Dimensions: 52 x 44 x 24mm Protection level: IP40 front

PD10

• 24V dc feeder module • Matching module housing

Technical data

Part number key SM9

24V dc, ±0.5V, 1 A 52 x 44 x 100mm IP20 front 105…250V a.c

SMC – RS-485 programmable logic controller

• Creation of algorithms in ST language (CPDev Package) • On-line and off-line simulation • Rich libraries of function block • Steering with RTC usage

Technical data

Part number key

Interface: RS-485: Port 1: Port 2: Baud rate: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

0116 284 9900

SMC MODBUS ASCII/RTU RS-485, RS-232, USB 1.1. PC & HMI comms 2 x RS-485, IO comms up to 1152000 bit/s 45 x 120 x 100mm IP65 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…40V a.c/dc

0

8

1

with isolation

SM9 – Converter power supply module

Output: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

X

Galvanic isolation:

X

00

00

E

0

0

Supply: 85...253 V a.c./d.c.

1

20…40 V a.c./d.c.

2

RS-485 NETWORK MODULES

| 223


SIGNAL TOWERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


ECO40

226

ECO60

227

ECO70

228

Half DOME 90

229


Signal towers S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

ECO40 • • • • •

40 mm Signal tower Available with integrated LED technology Full range of colours Wide voltage range “Push-in” terminal for easy wiring

Light modules Order no. Description Steady light excl. bulb up to 250 V

Orange

Red

Clear

Blue

Green

Yellow

902 001 900

902 002 900

902 004 900

902 005 900

902 006 900

902 007 900

Steady light LED 24 V AC/DC

902 011 405

902 012 405

902 014 405

902 015 405

902 016 405

902 017 405

Steady light LED 230 V AC

902 011 313

902 012 313

902 014 313

902 015 313

902 016 313

902 017 313

Flashing light LED 24 V AC/DC

902 021 405

902 022 405

902 024 405

902 025 405

902 026 405

902 027 405

Flashing light LED 230 V AC

902 021 313

902 022 313

902 024 313

902 025 313

902 026 313

902 027 313

Strobe LED 24 V AC/DC

902 031 405

902 032 405

902 034 405

902 035 405

902 036 405

902 037 405

Strobe LED 230 V AC

902 031 313

902 032 313

902 034 313

902 035 313

902 036 313

902 037 313

Multi-Strobe LED 24 V AC/DC

902 041 405

902 042 405

902 044 405

902 045 405

902 046 405

902 047 405

Multi-Strobe LED230 V AC

902 041 313

902 042 313

902 0443 13

902 045 313

902 046 313

902 047 313

Bases Type

Description

Order number

Base for horizontal mounting

M20 with inside mounting holes

902 570 900

Base for horizontal mounting

With premounted fixation screws

902 571 900

Base for horizontal mounting

With external mounting lugs

902 572 900

Base for vertical mounting

Single side mounting

902 573 900

Base for vertical mounting

Double side mounting

902 574 900

Pole mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

902 582 900

Pole mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

902 583 900

Pole mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

902 584 900

NPT 1/2” thread

902 570 900

Pole mount base Bracket

For pole mount base with plastic foot

900 600 900

Pole mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

902 592 900

Pole mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

902 593 900

Pole mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

902 594 900

Metal bracket, adapter with cable gland

900 700 900

Quick mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

902 562 900

Quick mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

902 563 900

Quick mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

902 564 900

Suitable for all bases

902 800 900

Set for vertical mounting

Base extension, length 100 mm

Tone modules Type

Tone options Tone type

Piezo buzzer

Max. volume

Nominal voltage (V)

Continuous or pulsing

80 dB

110/120 V AC 230/2240 V AC

226 | SIGNAL TOWERS

Voltage range (V)

24 V AC/DC +/- 10%

Nominal current (A)

Order number

0.039

902 500 405

0.021

902 500 310

0.021

902 500 313

www.oem.co.uk


Signal towers S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

ECO60 • • • • •

60 mm Signal tower Available with integrated LED technology Full range of colours Wide voltage range “Clamping yolk” terminals for easy wiring

Light modules Order no. Description

Orange

Red

Clear

Blue

Green

Yellow

Steady light excl. bulb up to 250 V

901 001 900

901 002 900

901 004 900

901 005 900

901 006 900

901 007 900

Steady light LED 24 V AC/DC

901 011 405

901 012 405

901 014 405

901 015 405

901 016 405

901 017 405

Steady light LED 230 V AC

901 011 313

901 012 313

901 014 313

901 015 313

901 016 313

901 017 313

Flashing light LED 24 V AC/DC

901 021 405

901 022 405

901 024 405

901 025 405

901 026 405

901 027 405

Flashing light LED 230 V AC

901 021 313

901 022 313

901 024 313

901 025 313

901 026 313

901 027 313

Strobe LED 24 V AC/DC

901 031 405

901 032 405

901 034 405

901 035 405

901 036 405

901 037 405

Strobe LED 230 V AC

901 031 313

901 032 313

901 034 313

901 035 313

901 036 313

901 037 313

Steady light ”HighPerformance” 24 V AC/DC

901 051 405

901 052 405

901 054 405

901 055 405

901 056 405

901 057 405

Strobe ”HighPerformance” 24 V AC/DC

901 071 405

901 072 405

901 074 405

901 075 405

901 076 405

901 077 405

Bases Type

Description

Order number

Base for horizontal mounting

M20 with inside mounting holes

901 570 900

Base for horizontal mounting

With premounted fixation screws

901 571 900

Base for horizontal mounting

With external mounting lugs

901 572 900

Single side mounting

901 573 900

Base for vertical mounting

Double side mounting

901 574 900

Pole mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

901 582 900

Pole mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

901 583 900

Pole mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

901 584 900

Base for vertical mounting

Pole mount base

NPT 1/2” thread

901 570 900

For pole mount base with plastic foot

901 600 900

Pole mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

901 592 900

Pole mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

901 593 900

Pole mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

901 594 900

Bracket

Set for vertical mounting

Metal bracket, adapter with cable gland

900 700 900

Quick mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

901 562 900

Quick mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

901 563 900

Quick mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

901 564 900

Suitable for all bases

901 800 900

Base extension, length 100 mm

Tone modules Type

Piezo buzzer

0116 284 9900

Tone options Tone type

Max. volume

Continuous or pulsing

90 dB adjustable with potentiometer

Nominal voltage (V)

Voltage range (V)

24 V AC/DC 110/120 V AC

+/- 10%

230/2240 V AC

Nominal current (A)

Order number

0.065

901 500 405

0.031

901 500 310

0.032

901 500 313 SIGNAL TOWERS

| 227


Signal towers S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

ECO70 • • • • •

70 mm Signal tower Available with integrated LED technology Full range of colours Wide voltage range “Clamping yolk” terminals for easy wiring

Light modules Order no. Description

Orange

Red

Clear

Blue

Green

Yellow

Steady light excl. bulb up to 250 V

900 001 900

900 002 900

900 004 900

900 005 900

900 006 900

900 007 900

Steady light LED 24 V AC/DC

900 011 405

900 012 405

900 014 405

900 015 405

900 016 405

900 017 405

Steady light LED 230 V AC.

900 011 313

900 012 313

900 014 313

900 015 313

900 016 313

900 017 313

Flashing light LED 24 V AC/DC.

900 021 405

900 022 405

900 024 405

900 025 405

900 026 405

900 027 405

Flashing light LED 230 V AC.

900 021 313

900 022 313

900 024 313

900 025 313

900 026 313

900 027 313

Strobe LED 24 V AC/DC.

900 031 405

900 032 405

900 034 405

900 035 405

900 036 405

900 037 405

Strobe LED 230 V AC.

900 031 313

900 032 313

900 034 313

900 035 313

900 036 313

900 037 313

Steady LED ”High Performance” 24 V AC/DC

900 051 405

900 052 405

900 054 405

900 055 405

900 056 405

900 057 405

Strobe LED ”High Performance” 24 V AC/DC

900 061 405

900 062 405

900 064 405

900 065 405

900 066 405

900 067 405

Strobe LED ”High Performance” 24 V AC/DC

900 071 405

900 072 405

900 074 405

900 075 405

900 076 405

900 077 405

Bases Type

Description

Order number

Base for horizontal mounting

M20 with inside mounting holes

900 570 900

Base for horizontal mounting

With premounted fixation screws

900 571 900

Base for horizontal mounting

With external mounting lugs

900 572 900

Single side mounting

900 573 900

Base for vertical mounting

Double side mounting

900 574 900

Pole mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

900 582 900

Pole mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

900 583 900

Pole mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube with plastic foot

900 584 900

NPT 1/2” thread

900 570 900

For pole mount base with plastic foot

900 600 900

Pole mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

900 592 900

Pole mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

900 593 900

Pole mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube for direct mounting with screw

900 594 900

Metal bracket, adapter with cable gland

900 700 900

Quick mount base 100 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

900 562 900

Quick mount base 250 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

900 563 900

Quick mount base 400 mm

On aluminium tube with ”foot adapter“

900 564 900

Suitable for all bases

900 800 900

Base for vertical mounting

Pole mount base Bracket

Set for vertical mounting

Base extension, length 100 mm

Tone modules Type

Tone options Tone type

Piezo buzzer

Piezo buzzer 2 tones selectable

Mullti-tone siren 8 tones

228 | SIGNAL TOWERS

Continuous or pulsing

Continuous and pulsing

8 tones

Max. volume 100 dB adjustable with potentiometer

100 dB adjustable with potentiometer

100 dB adjustable with potentiometer

Nominal voltage (V)

Voltage range (V)

24 V AC/DC 110/120 V AC

Nominal current (A)

Order number

0.092

900 500 405

0.041

900 500 310

230/2240 V AC

0.043

900 500 313

24 V AC/DC

0.092

900 510 405

110/120 V AC

0.041

900 510 310

0.043

900 510 313

0.115

900 520 405

0.045

900 520 310

0.043

900 520 313

+/- 10%

+/- 10%

230/2240 V AC 24 V AC/DC 110/120 V AC 230/2240 V AC

+/- 10%

www.oem.co.uk


Signal towers S I G N A L G E R Ä T E

Half DOME 90 mm • • • • •

Visual-audible signal tower in half dome design 6 lens colours, 3 housing colours LED steady or flashing light for each position Optimal signalling effect and visibility from any viewing angle (180°) Optional piezo buzzer in upper housing area available (continuous and pulsing tone, 70-90 dB)

Ordering key To create the order number, enter the letter/number in the marked box. Position 1 symbolises the first light module closest to the connection hatch.

EXAMPLE

Location for the buzzer is always furthest away from the connection hatch. Only one buzzer can be fitted per lighting tower.

Housing colour

Nominal voltage

C

24

HD

Module Position A L

Module Position B

6

B

7

Module Position C L

2

Module Position D B

Module Position E

5

L

4

Tone module D

Z

HDC24L6B7L2B5L4Dz

Housing colour

Module

Nominal voltage

G = grey

L = HDL LED steady light

12 = 12 V AC/DC

C = chrome

B = HDB LED flashing light

24 = 24 V AC/DC

B = black

DZ = HDZ Buzzer coninuous/pulsing tone 70-90 dB

10 = 110/120 V AC 20 = 230/240 V AC

Lens colour

Amber

Red

Clear

Blue

Green

Yellow

1

2

3

4

5

6

How to order correctly a halfDome90 LED signal tower

Position E Position D Position C Position B Position A

Configuration

Type

New

Buzzer continuous/pulsing tone

HDZ

DZ

LED steady light, clear

HDL

L4

LED flashing light, blue

HDB

B5

LED steady light, red

HDL

L2

LED flashing light, yellow

HDB

B7

LED steady light, green

HDL

L6

Nominal voltage 24 V AC/DC

24

Housing colour chrome

C

Housing for 5 lights

Correct order no.

HDC24L6B7L2B5L4DZ

HD5

For design reasons light modules cannot be changed after despatch of product

0116 284 9900

SIGNAL TOWERS

| 229


SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Information

232

Selection guide

235

Input & output relays for AC

236

Input & output relays for DC

237

Mounting bases & cables

238

EX series relays

239


Solid state interface relays

Introduction Delcon of Finland was founded in 1975 as a specialist manufacturer of solid state interface relays. Their relay design utilizes pulse transformer technology which gives some unique advantages over traditional opto coupler based solid state relays and electro mechanical relays. This helps ensure a long lifetime and trouble free performance in harsh industrial applications where difficult loads, noise and interference can cause big problems. Delcon is market leader in Finland and Sweden where their relays are widely found in power plants and large factories working in the wood, pulp and paper industry. Other significant customers include Alstom Grid who use Delcon relays extensively in their HVDC power network control systems.

Changing relays is a costly business Compared to the total system cost a relay is a relatively inexpensive component. However, a relay that fails in a system runs the risk of becoming the most expensive component. Choosing a relay with a shorter life span than the entire system will probably result in costly unwanted system downtime! The life span of an industrial system is typically considered to be 15 years. If your application has any of the following requirements then select Delcon relays for a hassle free and safe operation that spans the entire system life.

• Frequent switching – relays operate at least once per minute • Inductive loads – fitting clamp diodes can help but increases switch off time • Inductive loads combined with high switching frequency • High dc voltages

Cost Cost of 3rd replacement

Cost of 2nd replacement Cost of 1st replacement

e Delcon Cost pric Lifetime

lay E-Mech re Cost price

9 year 6 year 3 year

Cost of Delcon Cost of E-Mech relay Cost of downtime

232 | SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state interface relays

Problems with interference?

Problems with signalling?

cables installed adjacent to signal cables, especially over long disturbances can cause the LED indicator of opto coupler/ ! Power ! Electrical cable runs, create a capacitive effect that can cause opto coupler or electromechanical relays to glow when the relay is switched off and no electro mechanical relays to switch on or remain on after the control signal switches off

input signal present. This makes it difficult to quickly diagnose faults and rectify problems

in the power supply causes damage to relay coils/opto ! Transients √ Solution: coupler relays

!

Interference from frequency inverters can provide false on/off switching

√ Solution:

The Delcon LED is synchronized with the output so it is impossible for it to glow without being on. The relays have good hysteresis with clearly defined on/off points for reliable operation in high noise environments.

Delcon relays have built in capacitive suppression to allow safe, reliable operation even with very long cable runs. An RC circuit protects the relays from transients and high frequency interference.

Problems with inductive loads?

Problems with high dc voltage?

and solenoid valves are commonly used throughout industry, ! Reduced switching capacity ! Contactors they are also problematic inductive loads for electromechanical relays ! Electromechanical relays are significantly derated at higher dc voltages to handle require special version electromechanical relays that are ! Usually ! Contacts weld physically bigger and take up more space ! Short lifetime

√ Solution: Delcon ac output relays are rated at 3A and can switch inductive loads without any derating. Delcon dc output relays have no derating up to 24 V dc and thereafter still offer significantly less derating compared to electromechanical relays.

0116 284 9900

√ Solution:

Delcon dc output relay types CRA & CRA4 can switch up to 300 V dc with no derating compared to electromechanical relay and in a smaller package. Example SLO24CRA4 switching 40mS inductive load at 3A/110Vdc will give service life of 15 years or more.

SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

| 233


Solid state interface relays

Installation techniques Delcon’s interface relays are installed in the same way as typical electro mechanical relays and are available in two different versions. Each relay can be ordered as either a plug-in type or pre soldered to a DIN-rail base with screw terminals. The part numbers for the plug in types are as per the selection guide and the pre soldered din rail base versions use the same number with a suffix “S” at the end e.g. SLO 24TR (plug in) SLO 24TRS (din rail base).

If the plug-in type is used there are DIN-rail sockets or 8 / 16 channel mounting bases available. The DIN-rail socket is either MIS1N or MOS1N for input or output. The 8 / 16 channel mounting bases prefixed MBS use a flat cable connector to the PLC and many PLC adapters are available.

Connection example

Typical output (load)

Bridge bar

Flat cable

PLC adapter card

Typical input (sensor)

PLC controller inputs & outputs

16 way base & relays

Dimensions

Output Relay

Input Relay 12

12

79

47

43

47

43

Din Rail Base Relay

6.35

6.35

Fusing

To protect SL series solid state relays against short circuit/overload a fast fuse with the correct rating for the load and the capacity of the relay should be chosen. For triac output relays (SLO…TR, SLO 24TRA and SLO 24TH) use for example a 3.15A fuse. 234 | SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

5

5.08 2.54

7.62

5.08 10.16

5 10.16

7.62

5.08 5.08

7.62

10.16

5.08

80

12.5

To protect DC output relays (SLO…CR, SLO…CRA, SLO…CRA4, SLO…CRX and also SLO…IRA) use a fast fuse with the lowest nominal value that is practically possible. Note that when the overload current is not large it is possible that a fuse will not protect the relay because of the tolerance on the fuse rating. www.oem.co.uk


Solid state interface relays

Selection guide Relay Plug- in relay colour AC applications/input relays

DIN- rail relay unit

Description

Control voltage

Load current

Load voltage

SLI 25CR

SLI 25CRS

regular

24 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 25CRI

normally closed

24 VAC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 49CR

SLI 49CRS

regular

48 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 49CRI

normally closed

48 VAC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 120CRCS

change-over

120 VAC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 120CRI

SLI 120 CRIS

normally closed

120 VAC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 120CH

SLI 120CHS

transient protection add.

120 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 120CR

SLI 120CRS

regular

120 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 120CRP

SLI 120CRPS

2-wire sensor

120 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 230CRCS

change-over

230 VAC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 230CH

SLI 230CHS

transient protection add.

230 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 230CR

SLI 230CRS

regular

230 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 230CRI

SLI 230CRIS

normally closed

230 VAC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 230CRP

SLI 230CRPS

2-wire sensor

230 VAC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLO 5IRA

SLO 5IRAS

fast AC switching

5 VDC

1.2 A

0 - 240 VAC/ DC

SLO 5TR

SLO 5TRS

regular

5 VDC

3A

0 - 240 VAC

SLO 24IRCS

change-over

24 VDC

0.15 A

0 - 240 VAC/ DC

SLO 24IRA

SLO 24IRAS

fast AC switching

24 VDC

1.2 A

0 - 240 VAC/ DC

SLO 24TH

SLO 24THS

transient protection add.

24 VDC

3A

0 - 240 VAC

SLO 24TR

SLO 24TRS

regular

24 VDC

3A

0 - 240 VAC

SLO 24TRA

SLO 24TRAS

motor

24 VDC

2.5 A

0 - 240 / 415 VAC

SLO A120TR

SLO A120TRS

regular

120 VAC

1A

0 - 240 VAC

SLO P120TR

SLO P120TRS

2-wire sensor

120 VAC

3A

0 - 240 VAC

SLO A230TR

SLO A230TRS

regular

230 VAC

1A

0 - 240 VAC

SLO P230TR

SLO P230TRS

2-wire sensor

230 VAC

1.5 A

0 - 240 VAC

SLI 12CR

SLI 12CRS

regular

12 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 12CRI

normally closed

12 VDC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 24CRI

normally closed

24 VDC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 24CR

SLI 24CRS

regular

24 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 24CRF

SLI 24CRFS

fast DC function

24 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 24CRL

SLI 24CRLS

min. input load 15 mA

24 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 48CRI

normally closed

48 VDC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 48CR

SLI 48CRS

regular

48 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 125CRI

normally closed

125 VDC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 125CH

SLI 125CHS

transient protection add.

125 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 125CR

SLI 125CRS

regular

125 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 250CRI

normally closed

250 VDC

30 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 250CH

SLI 250CHS

transient protection add.

250 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLI 250CR

SLI 250CRS

regular

250 VDC

50 mA

0 - 60 VDC

SLO 5CRA

SLO 5CRAS

100 ms inductive load*

5 VDC

1.8 A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 5CR

SLO 5CRS

regular

5 VDC

3A

0 - 60 VDC

SLO 5CRX

SLO 5CRXS

high current

5 VDC

10 A

0 - 24 VDC

SLO 12CRA

SLO 12CRAS

100 ms inductive load*

12 VDC

1.8 A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 12CR

SLO 12CRS

regular

12 VDC

3A

0 - 60 VDC

SLO 12CRX

SLO 12CRXS

high current

12 VDC

10 A

0 - 24 VDC

SLO 24CRA

SLO 24CRAS

100 ms inductive load*

24 VDC

1.8 A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 24CR

SLO 24CRS

regular

24 VDC

3A

0 - 60 VDC

SLO 24CRA4

50 ms inductive load*

24 VDC

4A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 24CRX

SLO 24CRXS

high current

24 VDC

10 A

0 - 24 VDC

SLO 48CRA

100 ms inductive load*

48 VDC

1.8 A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 48CRA4

50 ms inductive load*

48 VDC

4A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 120CRA

100 ms inductive load*

120 VDC

1.8 A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 120CRA4

50 ms inductive load*

120 VDC

4A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 220CRA

100 ms inductive load*

220 VDC

1.8 A

0 - 250 VDC

SLO 220CRA4

50 ms inductive load*

220 VDC

4A

0 - 250 VDC

AC applications/ output relays

DC applications/ input relays

DC applications/ output relays

* with max. current and 24 V voltage on load side

0116 284 9900

SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

| 235


Solid state interface relays

Input relays for AC • Galvanic isolation 4 kV, 8 mm creep distance • Effective interference elimination • Compatible with both NPN and PNP logic • LED indication

The relays are used as an interface between AC sensors and control systems. The integrated interference protection provides reliable operation even in very demanding electrical environments. Thanks to interference protection, signal cables can be run alongside power cables on, for example, cable racks for more than 1.5 km without capacitive cross-talk affecting relays. The relays have no mechanical parts, which provides very reliable application. The CRP models are especially designed for connecting to 2-wire sensors that generate leakage current. The CRP relays are blind to leakage currents up to 3.5 mA. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number SLI25CR

Description

Control voltage

Load

Mounting

Input relay

24 V AC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI120CR

Input relay

120 V AC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI230CR

Input relay

230 V AC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI120CRP

Input relay

120 V AC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI230CRP

Input relay

230 V AC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI380CRS

Input relay

400 V AC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

MIS1GN

Socket for input relays

JUMPER 16-13

DIN rail

Jumper bar for Delcon’s sockets, max. 16 way

Output relays for AC • Galvanic isolation 4 kV, 8 mm creep distance • 3 A inductive or resistive load • Effective interference elimination • LED indication

The relays are used as an interface between control systems and AC loads. The relays can handle inductive loads without load current reduction, which makes them very suitable for connection to, for example, solenoid valves and contactors. The relays have no mechanical parts, which means very reliable application. The integrated interference protection provides reliable operation even in very demanding electrical environments. Thanks to interference protection, signal cables can be run alongside power cables on, for example, cable racks for more than 1.5 km without capacitive cross-talk affecting relays. The SLOP models are especially designed for connection to 2-wire sensors that produce leakage current. The relays are immune to leakage currents up to 3.0 mA. For forward/reverse control of AC motors, the SLO24TRA is used. The relay has a higher operating voltage and withstands regenerated voltages from motors. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Control voltage

Load

Mounting

SLO5TR

Output relay

5 V DC

0-265 V AC/3 A

Plug-in

SLO24TR

Output relay

24 V DC

0-265 V AC/3 A

Plug-in

SLO24IRA

Output relay

24 V DC

0-300 DC or 0-265 V AC/1.2 A

Plug-in

SLOP120TR

Output relay

120 V AC

0-265 V AC/3 A

Plug-in

SLOP230TR

Output relay

230 V AC

0-265 V AC/1.5 A

Plug-in

SLO24TRA

Output relay

24 V DC

0-265 V AC Motor load 0-460 V AC Static load

Plug-in

MOS1GN JUMPER 16-13

Socket for output relays

DIN rail

Jumper bar for Delcon’s sockets, max. 16 way

236 | SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state interface relays

Input relays for DC • Galvanic isolation 4 kV, 8 mm creep distance • Effective interference elimination • Compatible with NPN/PNP logic • LED indication

The relays are used as an interface between DC sensors and control systems. The integrated interference protection provides reliable operation even in very demanding electrical environments. Thanks to interference protection, signal cables can be run alongside power cables on, for example, cable racks for more than 1.5 km without capacitive cross-talk affecting relays. The relays have no mechanical parts, which provides very reliable application. If high frequencies occur from sensors for counting inputs, for example, we recommend SLI24CRF. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oem . c o . u k

Description

Control voltage

Load

SLI12CR

Order number

Input relay

12 V DC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Mounting Plug-in

SLI24CR

Input relay

24 V DC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI24CRF

Input relay, high frequency 10 kHz.

24 V DC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI48CR

Input relay

48 V DC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI125CR

Input relay

125 V DC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

SLI250CR

Input relay

250 V DC

0-60 V DC/50 mA

Plug-in

MIS1GN JUMPER 16-13

Socket for input relay

DIN rail

Jumper bar for Delcon’s sockets, max. 16 way

N/C relays also available upon request.

Output relays for DC • Galvanic isolation 4 kV, 8 mm creep distance • Voltages up to 300 V DC • Up to 10 A load current • LED indication

The relays are used as interfaces between control systems and DC loads. The relays handle inductive loads and high DC voltages with low load reduction compared to mechanical relays, which provide a long lifetime. If a diode is mounted across a load, such as 1N4007, the nominal current applies, even with high inductive loads. (Keep in mind that the drop-out time increases when mounting a diode.) The relays have no mechanical parts, which means very reliable application. The integrated interference protection provides reliable operation even in very demanding electrical environments. Thanks to interference protection, signal cables can be run alongside power cables on, for example, cable racks for more than 1.5 km without capacitive cross-talk affecting relays. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Order number

Description

Control voltage

Load

Mounting

SLO5CR

Output relay

5 V DC

0-60 V DC/3 A

Plug-in

SLO24CR

Output relay

24 V DC

0-60 V DC/3 A

Plug-in

SLO24CRA4

Output relay

24 V DC

0-300 V DC/4 A

Plug-in

SLO24CRA

Output relay

24 V DC

0-300 V DC/1.8 A

Plug-in

SLO24CRX*

Output relay

24 V DC

0-32 V DC/10 A

Plug-in

SLO120CRA

Output relay

120 V DC

0-300 V DC/1.8 A

Plug-in

SLO120CRA4

Output relay

120 V DC

0-300 V DC/4 A

Plug-in

SLO220CRA

Output relay

120 V DC

0-300 V DC/1.8 A

Plug-in

SLO220CRA4

Output relay

220 V DC

0-300 V DC/4 A

MOS1GN JUMPER 16-13

Socket for output relay

Plug-in DIN rail

Jumper bar for Delcon’s sockets, max. 16 way

* For mounting in socket MOS1GN or MBS16, 6.3 A applies. For solder connection in socket 10 A Order no. SLO24CRXS .

0116 284 9900

SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

| 237


Solid state interface relays

Mounting base for adapter system, 16-channel • Simple and reliable installation • Test buttons for function simulation • PNP or NPN • Link for inputs or outputs Order number

Description

MBS16BDP

Mounting base for 16 relays. PNP, test button

MBS16ADP

Mounting base for 16 relays. NPN, test button

The MBS16 mounting base is connected to Delcon adapters as appropriate for the control system. The connection is made with a flat cable, which provides a reliable connection between control systems and interface relays. MBS16 can be connected for 16 inputs, 16 outputs or 8 inputs and 8 outputs. Change-over is accomplished with jumper link. There is a test button for each channel for activation of relays, which simplifies troubleshooting and commissioning. Input or output cable is connected via a 2-pole terminal block. For common bridging of zero, for example, use the 16-pole jumper bar, Jumper 16-13. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Mounting base for adapter system, 8-channel • Simple and reliable installation • Test buttons for function simulation • Expandable to 16 channels • 3-level terminal block Order number MB8BIP2 MB8BIPE2 MB8BOP2 MB8BOPE2

Description Mounting base for 8 input relays, base unit. PNP Mounting base for 8 input relays, expansion unit. PNP Mounting base for 8 output relays, base unit. PNP Mounting base for 8 output relays, expansion unit. PNP

Series MB8 mounting bases are for 8 channels but can be expanded to 16 channels with two 8-channel mounting bases connected together with a flat cable. This enables expansion from 8 channels to 16 channels at a later stage. MB8 is connected to Delcon’s PROFIBUS unit or Delcon’s adapters as appropriate for the control system. The connection is made with a flat cable, which provides a reliable connection between the control system and interface relays. There is a test button for each channel for activation of relays, which simplifies troubleshooting and commissioning. The terminal block is of the 3-level type and enables feed of 3-wire sensors. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Adapter cable for all PLC systems The cable is supplied with a connector for a 16-channel mounting base. The other end has open cables for PLC attachment, for example. The cable is colour coded per DIN 47100 and the wiring diagram is available at Delcon's website. www.delcon.fi. The cable is excellent for use in all applications in which there is no PLC adapter or when signals are to be taken from a terminal block, for example. Order number

Description

RC20X-100

1 m cable

RC20X-200

2 m cable

RC20X-300

3 m cable

238 | SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

The cable is supplied in standard lengths but can be supplied in other lengths upon request. For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state interface relays

EX series Relay type

Application

Control voltage

Load voltage

Max current

Ex-input relays DC control, AC load EXI 12CH

Limit switches

12 VDC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 24CH

Limit switches

24 VDC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 24CHF

Fast connection

24 VDC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 24CHL

Increased input current

24 VDC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 48CH

Limit switches

48 VDC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 125CH

Limit switches

120 VDC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 250CH

Limit switches

250 VDC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

Ex-input relays AC control, DC load EXI 25CH

Limit switches

24 VAC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 49CH

Limit switches

48 VAC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 120CH

Limit switches

120 VAC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 120CHI

Normally closed operation

120 VAC

0...28 VDC

100 mA

EXI 120CHP

2-wire proximity switches

120 VAC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 230CH

Limit switches

230 VAC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 230CHI

Normally closed operation

230 VAC

0...28 VDC

100 mA

EXI 230CHP

2-wire proximity switches

230 VAC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

EXI 230CHR

Output current limited

230 VAC

0...28 VDC

50 mA

Ex-output relays DC control, DC load EXO 5CH

Resistive loads

5 VDC

0...60 VDC

3A

EXO 5CHA

Inductive loads

5 VDC

0...250 VDC

1.8 A

EXO 5CHX

Resistive loads

5 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A*

EXO 5CHXSN

Resistive loads

5 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A

EXO 12CH

Resistive loads

12 VDC

0...60 VDC

3A

EXO 12CHA

Inductive loads

12 VDC

0...250 VDC

1.8 A

EXO 12CHX

Resistive loads

12 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A*

Resistive loads, DIN-rail

12 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A

EXO 24CH

Resistive loads

24 VDC

0...60 VDC

3A

EXO 24CHA

Inductive loads

24 VDC

0...250 VDC

1.8 A

EXO 24CHA4

Inductive loads

24 VDC

0...250 VDC

4A

EXO 24CHX

Resistive loads

24 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A*

EXO 12CHXSN

EXO 24CHXSN

Resistive loads, DIN-rail

24 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A

EXO 48CHA

Inductive loads

48 VDC

0...250 VDC

1.8 A

EXO 48CHA4

Inductive loads

48 VDC

0...250 VDC

4A

EXO 48CHX

Resistive loads

48 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A*

EXO 48CHXSN

Resistive loads, DIN-rail

48 VDC

0...28 VDC

10 A

EXO 120CHA

Inductive loads

120 VDC

0...250 VDC

1.8 A

EXO 120CHA4

Inductive loads

120 VDC

0...250 VDC

4A

EXO 220CHA

Inductive loads

220 VDC

0...250 VDC

1.8 A

EXO 220CHA4

Inductive loads

220 VDC

0...250 VDC

4A

* 6.3 A when used with a mounting base Ex-output relays DC control, AC load EXO 5IHA

Fast switch off

5 VDC

0…240 VAC/250 VDC

1.2 A

EXO 5TH

AC loads

5 VDC

0…240 VAC

3A

EXO 12TH

AC loads

12 VDC

0…240 VAC

3A

EXO 24IHA

Fast switch off

24 VDC

0…240 VAC/250 VDC

1.2 A

EXO 24TH

Wider operation temp range

24 VDC

0…240 VAC

3A

EXO 24TR

AC loads

24 VDC

0…240 VAC

3A

EXO P120TH

AC loads

120 VAC

0…240 VAC

3A

EXO P230TH

AC loads

230 VAC

0…240 VAC

1.5 A

Ex-output relays AC control, AC load

0116 284 9900

Mounting bases for EXl-relays:

Mounting bases for EXO-relays:

MIS 1GNEX (screw connectors) MIS 1CCNEX (spring connectors) MIS 1TNEX (screw connectors with test contacts)

MOS 1GNEX (screw connectors) MOS 1CCNEX (spring connectors) MOS 1TNEX (screw connectors with test contacts)

SOLID STATE INTERFACE RELAYS

| 239


SOLID STATE RELAYS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Introduction

242

Panel mount

244

DIN rail mount

246

Plug-in mount

248

Accessories

250


Solid state relays

Introduction Crydom, a market leading and global expert in Solid State Switching Technology, has a distinguished record of providing high quality, world class Solid State Relay and Control Products for a variety of heating, lighting and motion control applications. Utilising state of the art designs, materials and technology, Crydom offers a wide range of AC and DC output SSRs in industry standard Panel Mount, PCB Mount and DIN Rail packages, all meeting global safety and standards agency requirements such as CE, RoHS, UL, IEC, etc. Bolstered by four decades of Solid State Relay operations experience, Crydom specialises adapted and fully custom-designed SSR products for nearly any application where unique specifications and optimised performance are critical for success.

Applications Although there are literally thousands of individual uses for Solid State Relays and Contactors most can be categorised into the following applications: Heating Control This encompasses the largest segment of solid state relay customers. Applications include, but are not limited to, professional food equipment, plastic moulding/extrusion machinery, HVAC&R and soldering equipment. Benefits: Temperature accuracy, long life, no maintenance, safe product, easy to interface. Suitable for heater, fan, blower and valve control.

Lighting Control These applications are usually broken down into three categories: theatrical, warehouse and commercial. Many of the products used in this segment are designed for the specific application. Benefits: Dimming, silent operation, fast switching, long life, no maintenance, safe product, easy to interface, reduced parts count.

Motion Control Includes elevators, lifts, hoists, exercise equipment, conveyor systems, solar, fans, solenoid and valve control. Benefits: Endurance, shock & vibration resistance, Soft Start, reversing, no arcing, fast switching, long life, no maintenance, easy to interface, reduced parts count.

242 | SOLID STATE RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state relays

What is a Solid State Relay/Contactor? A Solid State Relay or Contactor (SSR or SSC) is an electronic component that switches Power (AC or DC current) to a load circuit and provides electrical isolation between an applications control circuit and

load circuit. It is a competitive technology to Electromechanical Relays (EMRs) and other switching technologies such as Mercury Displacement Relays (MDRs).

Why use solid state switching technology? Long Life Solid state relays and contactors have no moving parts therefore there is no mechanical wear and tear on the output contacts. The typical life expectancy of a solid state relay may be more than 50 times that of an electromechanical relay. Ideal for repetitive applications.

Quiet Operation Solid state switching solutions make no acoustical noise when the output contacts change states. This is highly desirable in many commercial and medical applications.

Minimum Electrical Noise Zero voltage turn-on and zero current turn-off allows for minimum electrical disturbances generated by SSRs.

Lower Power Consumption Solid state relays and contactors require very little input power ‘coil current’ to switch large loads. Crydom solid state relays can switch up to 150A load current with less than 15mA current draw from the control input.

Shock & Vibration Resistant Solid state switching solutions are not susceptible to erratic or unreliable operation when operating under tough environments.

Ideal for Harsh Environments SSRs and SSCs do not generate sparks or electric arcs; do not bounce either electrically or mechanically. Designed as pollution degree 2 devices per IEC 60664-1. Isolation levels up to 4k V. Magnetic fields have little effect on SSR.

High Compatibility with Control Systems DC controlled SSRs can be switched ON or OFF by digital systems such as PLC and µC based systems. AC controlled SSRs can be driven by limit switches, thermal switches and sensors carrying AC control signals.

Fast Switching Random turn-on solid state relays and contactors respond to a control signal in less than 100 µs. Phase control and Burst control can be easily achieved to provide accurate AC power control.

Position Insensitive Suitable for mounting in either vertical or horizontal position, ‘dead bug’ position and adjacent mounting. 0116 284 9900

SOLID STATE RELAYS

| 243


Solid state relays

Panel mount – AC output – series 1

• • • • • •

Rated from 10 to 125A @24-280VAC Rated from 12 to 90A @ 80-230VAC 3-32VDC, 18-36 or 90-280VAC control voltage “Ultra-low” input current ( 2-4mA DC typical) Zero or random turn-on UL508 overload endurance rated

Dimensions

Ordering template

Ordering guide Part number

Control voltage

Maximum load current

Line voltage range

A1210

90-280 VAC

10 Amps

24-140 VAC

A1210E

18-36 VAC

10 Amps

24-140 VAC

A1210T

90-280 VAC

10 Amps

24-140 VAC

A1225

90-280 VAC

25 Amps

24-140 VAC

A1225E

18-36 VAC

25 Amps

24-140 VAC

A1225T

90-280 VAC

25 Amps

24-140 VAC

A1240

90-280 VAC

40 Amps

24-140 VAC

A1240E

18-36 VAC

40 Amps

24-140 VAC

244 | SOLID STATE RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state relays

Panel mount – AC output – CW series

• Heavy duty SSR with rating from 10 to 125A @12-280AC or 48-660VAC • EMC (Level 3) compliant • Flexible 3-32VDC, 18-36VAC or 90-280 VAC control voltage • Zero or random turn-on • IP20 “touch safe” cover • UL508 overload endurance rated

Dimensions

Ordering template

Ordering guide Part number

Control voltage

Maximum load current

Line voltage range

CWA2410

90-280 VAC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA2410E

18-36 VAC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA4810

90-280 VAC

10 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA4810E

18-36 VAC

10 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWD2410

3-32 VDC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWD4810

4-32 VDC

10 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA2425

90-280 VAC

25 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA2425E

18-36 VAC

25 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA4825

90-280 VAC

25 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA4825E

18-36 VAC

25 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWD2425

3-32 VDC

25 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWD4825

4-32 VDC

25 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA2450

90-280 VAC

50 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA2450E

18-36 VAC

50 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA4850

90-280 VAC

50 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA4850E

18-36 VAC

50 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA2490

90-280 VAC

90 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA2490E

18-36 VAC

90 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA4890

90-280 VAC

90 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA4890E

18-36 VAC

90 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA24125

90-280 VAC

125 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA24125E

18-36 VAC

125 Amps

24-280 VAC

CWA48125

90-280 VAC

125 Amps

48-660 VAC

CWA48125E

18-36 VAC

125 Amps

48-660 VAC

0116 284 9900

SOLID STATE RELAYS

| 245


Solid state relays

DIN rail mount – AC output – DRA series

• Ready-to-use DIN rail mountable solid state relays assemblies using standard Crydom SIP SSRs • Ratings from 3 to 8 Amps • Operating voltage of 12-530 VAC • Fits standard 35 mm DIN rail profiles • AC & DC control voltage versions available depending upon selected SSR • Available with zero voltage turn-on (resistive loads) or random turn-on (inductive loads) output

Dimensions

Ordering template

Ordering guide Part number

Control voltage

Maximum load current

Line voltage range

DRA1-MP120D3

3-32 VDC

3 Amps

12-120 VAC

DRA1-MP240D3

3-32 VDC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

DRA1-MP240D4

3-32 VDC

4 Amps

24-280 VAC

DRA1-CX240A5

90-140 VAC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-CX240D5

3-15 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-CXE240D5

15-32 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-CX380D5

4-15 VDC

5 Amps

48-380 VAC

DRA1-CXE380D5

15-32 VDC

5 Amps

48-380 VAC

DRA1-MCX240D5

3-15 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-MCXE240D5

15-32 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-MCX380D5

4-15 VDC

5 Amps

48-380 VAC

DRA1-MCXE380D5

15-32 VDC

5 Amps

48-380 VAC

DRA4-CX240D5

3-15 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA4-CXE240D5

15-32 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA4-MCX240D5

3-15 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA4-MCXE240D5

15-32 VDC

5 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-SPF240A25

90-140 VAC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

DRA1-SPFE240A25

18-36 VAC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

DRA1-SPF240D25

3-15 VDC

10 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-SPFE240D25

15-32 VDC

10 Amps

12-280 VAC

DRA1-SPF380D25

4-15 VDC

10 Amps

48-380 VAC

246 | SOLID STATE RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state relays

DIN rail mount – AC /DC output – series One DR

• 3, 6 & 12 Amps output power rating • 60 & 100 VDC, 24 to 600 VAC operating voltage ratings • 4-32 VDC, 24, 120 & 230 VAC control input options available • IP20 housing with unique integrated heat sink design • High power density for multiple units • UL & cUL listed • CE & RoHS compliant

Dimensions

Ordering template

Ordering guide Part number

Control voltage

Maximum load current

Line voltage range

DR24D03

4-32 VDC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24E03

18-36 VAC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24B03

90-140 VAC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24A03

208-265 VAC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR48D03

4-32 VDC

3 Amps

48-600 VAC

DR06D03

4-32 VDC

3 Amps

1-60 VDC

DR10D03

4-32 VDC

3 Amps

1-100 VDC

DR24A06

208-265 VAC

6 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24B06

90-140 VAC

6 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24D06

4-32 VDC

6 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24E06

18-36 VAC

6 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR48D06

4-32 VDC

6 Amps

48-600 VAC

DRD24D06

4-32 VDC

6 Amps

24-280 VAC

DRD48D06

4-32 VDC

6 Amps

48-600 VAC

DR06D06

4-32 VDC

6 Amps

2-60 VDC

DR10D06

4-32 VDC

6 Amps

2-100 VDC

DR24B12

90-140 VAC

12 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24D12

4-32 VDC

12 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR24E12

18-36 VAC

12 Amps

24-280 VAC

DR48A12

208-265 VAC

12 Amps

48-600 VAC

DR48B12

90-140 VAC

12 Amps

48-600 VAC

DR48D12

4-32 VDC

12 Amps

48-600 VAC

DR48E12

18-36 VAC

12 Amps

48-600 VAC

DR06D12

4-32 VDC

12 Amps

2-60 VDC

DR10D12

4-32 VDC

12 Amps

2-100 VDC

0116 284 9900

SOLID STATE RELAYS

| 247


Solid state relays

Plug-In mount – AC output – ED series

Dimensions

• AC output solid state relay in an industry standard EMR plug-in package • Ratings of 3 & 5 Amps • Operating voltage of 24-280 VAC • Wide range of AC or DC control voltage options • Quick connect termination for easy installation in sockets or on boards • UL & IEC general use & motor controller ratings available

Ordering template

Ordering guide Part number

Control voltage

Maximum load current

Line voltage range

ED24C3

18-32 VDC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

ED24D3

3-15 VDC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

ED24F3

48-72 VDC

3 Amps

24-280 VAC

ED24B5

90-140 VAC

5 Amps

24-280 VAC

ED24C5

18-32 VDC

5 Amps

24-280 VAC

ED24D5

3-15 VDC

5 Amps

24-280 VAC

ED24E5

18-36 VAC

5 Amps

24-280 VAC

ED24F5

48-72 VDC

5 Amps

24-280 VAC

248 | SOLID STATE RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state relays

Plug-In Mount – DC Output – ED Series

• DC output solid state relay in an industry standard EMR plug in package • Ratings of 5 Amps • Load voltage range of 1-48 and 1-80 VDC • Fits standard DIN rail & PCB mountable sockets • LED input status indicator • AC or DC control • cUL recognized, IEC rated, CE & RoHS compliant • Motor controller rated

Dimensions

Ordering template

Ordering guide Part number

Control voltage

Maximum load current

ED06B5

90-140 VAC

5 Amps

Line voltage range 1-48 VDC

ED06C5

18-32 VDC

5 Amps

1-48 VDC

ED06D5

5-15 VDC

5 Amps

1-48 VDC

ED06E5

18-36 VAC

5 Amps

1-48 VDC

ED06F5

48-72 VDC

5 Amps

1-48 VDC

ED10B5

90-140 VAC

5 Amps

1-80 VDC 1-80 VDC

ED10C5

18-32 VDC

5 Amps

ED10D5

5-15 VDC

5 Amps

1-80 VDC

ED10E5

18-36 VAC

5 Amps

1-80 VDC

0116 284 9900

SOLID STATE RELAYS

| 249


Solid state relays

DIN rail mount – AC output – CKR series

Dimensions

• Solid state relay with ratings from 10 to 30 Amps • Operating voltage of 24-660 VAC • Flexible control voltage of 4-32 VDC, 18-36 VAC, 90-280 VAC • Elective internal TVS (“P” suffix) eliminates the need for external overvoltage protection • Enhanced surge current ratings for the 30 Amps

Ordering template

Ordering guide Part number

Control voltage

Maximum load current

Line voltage range

CKRA2410

90-280 VAC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRA2410E

18-36 VAC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRD2410

4-32 VDC

10 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRA4810

90-280 VAC

10 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRA4810E

18-36 VAC

10 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRD4810

4-32 VDC

10 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRA6010

90-280 VAC

10 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRA6010E

18-36 VAC

10 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRD6010

4-32 VDC

10 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRA2420

90-280 VAC

20 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRA2420E

18-36 VAC

20 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRD2420

4-32 VDC

20 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRA4820

90-280 VAC

20 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRA4820E

18-36 VAC

20 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRD4820

4-32 VDC

20 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRA6020

90-280 VAC

20 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRA6020E

18-36 VAC

20 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRD6020

4-32 VDC

20 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRA2430

90-280 VAC

30 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRA2430E

18-36 VAC

30 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRD2430

4-32 VDC

30 Amps

24-280 VAC

CKRA4830

90-280 VAC

30 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRA4830E

18-36 VAC

30 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRD4830

4-32 VDC

30 Amps

48-530 VAC

CKRA6030

90-280 VAC

30 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRA6030E

18-36 VAC

30 Amps

48-660 VAC

CKRD6030

4-32 VDC

30 Amps

48-660 VAC

250 | SOLID STATE RELAYS

www.oem.co.uk


Solid state relays

Accessories

• Heat sinks • Thermal pads • Protective covers • Sockets

Ordering guide Heat sinks Part number HS351

Thermal resistance

Description

Mounting type

Dims (HxWxD)

3.5°C/W

Suitable for 1 single or dual SSR

3.20 x 1.78 x 1.78

HS301

3.0°C/W

Suitable for 1 single or dual SSR

HS251 HS201

2.5°C/W 2.0°C/W

Suitable for 1 single or dual SSR Suitable for 1 single or dual SSR

HS172 HS151

1.7°C/W 1.5°C/W

Suitable for 1 or 2 single or dual SSRs Suitable for 1 single or dual SSR

HS103

1.0°C/W

HS072

0.7°C/W 0.5°C/W

Suitable for 1, 2 or 3 single or dual SSRs; one 3 phase SSR Suitable for 1 or 2 single or dual SSRs Suitable for 1, 2 or 3 single or dual SSRs; one 3 phase SSR

Panel mountable or DIN Rail mountable version available as HS351DR Panel mountable or DIN Rail mountable version available as HS301DR Panel mountable Panel mountable or DIN Rail mountable version available as HS201DR Panel mountable Panel mountable or DIN Rail mountable version available as HS151DR Panel mountable or DIN Rail mountable version available as HS103DR Panel mountable Panel mountable

HS053

3.20 x 1.78 x 1.58 2.31 x 1.98 x 1.51 3.20 x 1.78 x 3.15 3.95 x 2.31 x 1.51 3.20 x 1.78 x 3.74 5.20 x 3 x 2.37 5.50 x 4.75 x 2.63 6 x 4.9 x 3.5

Thermal pads Part number

Description

HSP-1

25 pack of non-adhesive thermal pads for standard hockey puck package SSRs (2.25 x 1.75 in)

HSP-2

Thermal pad for standard hockey puck package SSRs (2.25 x 1.75 in)

HSP-3

Thermal pad for large puck panel mount SSRs (4 x 2.9 in)

HSP-5

Thermal pad for large puck panel mount SSRs (4 x 2.9 in)

HSP-6

Thermal pad for mini-puck panel mount SSRs

Covers Part number

Description

KS100

Clear plastic cover for standard 2.25 x 1.75 In hockey puck style SSR

KS100-SMR

Clear plastic cover for SMR-6 and MC series

KS300

Clear plastic cover for large 4 x 2.9 In hockey puck style SSR

Sockets Part number DRS1

Series

Description

DRS series

DRS4

DRS series

10 mm single channel DIN rail mountable socket to mount Crydom PCB mount relays onto standard 35 mm DIN Rail profiles 54 mm four channel DIN Rail mountable socket to mount Crydom PCB mount relays onto standard 35 mm DIN Rail profiles Finger safe IP10 DIN Rail mountable socket to mount ED Series relays onto standard 35 mm DIN Rail profiles PC Board mountable socket for ED series relays

DRSED

ED series

PCBSED

ED series

0116 284 9900

SOLID STATE RELAYS

| 251


SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Introduction & overview

254

Technical data

256

3-pole switch for panel & rear mount

257

3-pole switch for modular & enclosure

258

3-pole switch body & additional contacts

260

Auxilliary contacts & accessories

261


Switch disconnectors

Reverso 25A ­– 100A All the switch bodies, neutral poles and additional contacts have reversible terminals and can therefore be used in both rear mounting and front mounting applications. This is possible thanks to a patented system where by the terminals can be inverted by means of a sliding terminal block. When pushed down this also locks the switch body to the DIN rail in rear mounting applications.

• Same switch body can be rear or front mounted • Modular system with auxiliary contacts that can be snapped in place • Door interlocking with clutch drive option • 7+7 mm contact gap

Yellow/red presentation

1 0

254 | SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Front mount with padlockable handle

Rear mount with clutch drive, door interlock & padlockable handle

Enclosure with integral padlockable handle IP66

Enclosure & padlockable handle

www.oem.co.uk


Switch disconnectors Standard versions Front mount with padlockable handle

Rear mount with clutch drive, door interlock & padlockable handle

Enclosure with integral padlockable handle IP66

Enclosure & padlockable handle

3 pole

0172001

0165009

0172061

3 pole + NC/NO

0172011

0165019

0172071

4 pole neutral L

0172021

0165029

0172081

4 pole neutral L + NC/NO

0172031

0165039

0172091

4 pole neutral R

0172041

0165049

4 pole neutral R + NC/NO

0172051

0165059

6 pole

0172009

6 pole + NC/NO

0172029

3 pole

0172101

0165109

0172161

3 pole + NC/NO

0172111

0165119

0172171

4 pole neutral L

0172121

0165129

0172181

4 pole neutral L + NC/NO

0172131

0165139

0172191

4 pole neutral R

0172141

0165149

4 pole neutral R + NC/NO

0172151

0165159

6 pole

0172109

6 pole + NC/NO

0172129

3 pole

0172201

0165209

0172261

3 pole + NC/NO

0172211

0165219

0172271

4 pole neutral L

0172221

0165229

0172281

4 pole neutral L + NC/NO

0172231

0165239

0172291

4 pole neutral R

0172241

0165249

4 pole neutral R + NC/NO

0172251

0165259

6 pole

0172209

6 pole + NC/NO

0172229

3 pole

0172301

0165309

0172361

3 pole + NC/NO

0172311

0165319

0172371

4 pole neutral L

0172321

0165329

0172381

4 pole neutral L + NC/NO

0172331

0165339

0172391

4 pole neutral R

0172341

0165349

4 pole neutral R + NC/NO

0172351

0165359

6 pole

0172309

6 pole + NC/NO

0172329

3 pole

0172401

0165409

0172461

3 pole + NC/NO

0172411

0165419

0172471

4 pole neutral L

0172421

0165429

0172481

4 pole neutral L + NC/NO

0172431

0165439

0172491

4 pole neutral R

0172441

0165449

4 pole neutral R + NC/NO

0172451

0165459

6 pole

0172409

6 pole + NC/NO

0172429

3 pole

0172501

0165509

0172561

3 pole + NC/NO

0172511

0165519

0172571

4 pole neutral L

0172521

0165529

0172581

4 pole neutral L + NC/NO

0172531

0165539

0172591

4 pole neutral R

0172541

0165549

4 pole neutral R + NC/NO

Type 25A

Type 32A

Type 50A

Type 63A

Type 80A

Type 100A

0172551

0165559

6 pole

0172509

6 pole + NC/NO

0172529

0116 284 9900

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

| 255


Switch disconnectors

TECHNICAL DATA

Size 1 25 A

Size 1 32A

Size 2 50A

Size 2 63A

Size 3 80A

Size 3 100A

General Rated breaking current (Ie) AC 21

25

32

50

63

80

100

Thermal rated current (Ith) AC 20

25

32

50

63

80

100

Ith for enclosed circuit-breaker A

20

25

40

50

63

80

Nom. supply voltage (Ui) V AC

690

690

690

690

690

690

6

6

6

6

6

6

0.1

0.1

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

Surge withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 6 Mech. lifetime (without load) x 106

-30 °C to +70 °C

Operating temperature Cable area, multi-conductor mm

0.75-6

1.5-16

2.5-35

Cable area, single conductor max.

10 mm

25 mm

50 mm

UL, cUL File E57 817

Approval Enclosure class

IP40, (IP65 with extra sealing or in enclosure)

CE-marked per

IEC 947-3, EN 60 947-3

Closing and breaking characteristics Max. closing capacity Aeff/400 V

710

710

1270

1270

1970

1970

Max. breaking capacity Aeff/400 V

330

330

800

800

800

800

1500

Short-circuit characteristics 350

430

500

760

1100

Max. short-circuit current Aeff/400 V

1

1

1.8

1.8

2.8

2.8

With protection gl/gG A

25

32

50

63

80

100

Short-time current Icw A/400 V/1 s

Rated power AC23 (kW) 3x230 V

5.5

5.5

15

15

19

22

3x400 V

5.5

7.5

15

18.5

22

30

3x500 V

5.5

7.5

15

22

30

37

3x690 V

5.5

7.5

15

18.5

18.5

22

18.5

Rated power AC3 (kW) 3x230 V

4

4

7.5

11

15

3x400 V

5.5

7.5

15

18.5

22

30

3x500 V

5.5

7.5

15

22

30

37

3x690 V

5.5

7.5

15

18.5

18.5

22

14.8

21

35

42

57

69

Rated operating current AC23 400 V Electrical data for signal contact 10A

Thermal rated current Ith Rated breaking current AC15

Screw assembly switch size 1

256 | SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

230 V-6 A

Screw assembly switch size 2 & 3

400 V-4 A

One hole mount switch size 1

www.oem.co.uk


Switch disconnectors

3-pole switch body for panel mount with padlockable handle

3-pole switch body for panel mount with yellow/red handle

3-pole switch body for panel mount with grey handle

25A

0172001

25A

0174001

32A

0172101

32A

0174101

50A

0172201

50A

0174201

63A

0172301

63A

0174301

80A

0172401

80A

0174401

100A

0172501

100A

0174501

3-pole switch body for rear mount with clutch drive & padlockable handle

3-pole switch body for rear mount with clutch drive and yellow/red handle

3-pole switch body for rear mount with clutch drive and grey handle

25A

0165009

25A

0168009

32A

0165109

32A

0168109

50A

0165209

50A

0168209

63A

0165309

63A

0168309

80A

0165409

80A

0168409

100A

0165509

100A

0168509

0116 284 9900

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

| 257


Switch disconnectors

3-pole switch body for modular housing with grey/black handle

3-pole switch body for modular housing with grey/black handle (red/yellow on request) 25A

0174005

32A

0174105

Size

A

B

C

D

25-32A

79

*43.5

14.5

53

50-63A

89

63

18

63

99

73

26.8

73

50A

0174205

80-100A

63A

0174305

80A

0174405

*On 25A and 32A switches there are no covers. the signal contact is normally hidden by the cabinet with DIN rail

100A

0174505

3-pole switch body in enclosure with integral padlockable handle IP66

3-pole switch body in enclosure 2 knockout openings (PG16, M25) on top & bottom Padlockable handle yellow/red 25A

0172061

32A

0172161

Self adhesive sign for enclosure Blank

0174599

Main switch

0174569

Padlockable handle grey 25A

0174061

32A

0174161

258 | SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

www.oem.co.uk


Switch disconnectors

3-pole switch body

3-pole switch body

Size

25A

0172000

32A

0172100

50A

0172200

63A

0172300

80A

0172400

100A

0172500

A

B

C

D

1

75.4

44

31.5

50

2

85

53.6

42.2

60

3

93

71.8

52.6

70

Additional contact, neutral pole & junction block

Size

Additional contact

Neutral pole

A

B

C

1

75.4

14.5

43.5

2

85

17.9

60

3

93

26.8

70

Junction block

25A

0172075

25A

0172065

25-32A Size 1

0172185

32A

0172175

32A

0172165

50-63A Size 2

0172385

50A

0172275

50A

0172265

80-100A Size 3

0172585

63A

0172375

63A

0172365

80A

0172475

80A

0172465

100A

0172575

100A

0172565

0116 284 9900

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

| 259


Switch disconnectors

Auxilliary contacts & terminal covers

3 pole cover

4th pole or neutral contact

Cover block for delayed closing signal covers 1 side

Cover for 0172179 (NO & NC) (covers one side)

3 pole terminal cover

Signal contact 1NO & 1 NC max 400V lth 10A All sizes

25-32A Size 1

0172167

50-63A Size 2

0172367

80-100A Size 3

0172567

Cover for 4th pole or neutral contact (covers one side)

0172179

Late make contact max 400V, lth 10A 25-32A Size 1

0172195

50-63A Size 2

0172395

80-100A Size 3

0172595

25-32A Size 1

0172177

50-63A Size 2

0172377

80-100A Size 3

0172577

Cover block delayed closing signal contact (covers both sides) 0172199 Cover for 0172179 (NO & NC) (covers one side) 0172189

Padlockable handle, function label & IP65 kit

Padlockable handle

Function label

Yellow/red 66 x 66 size 1-2

0172601

Blank

0172629

Grey 66 x 66 size 1-2

0174601

Main switch

0172649

Yellow/red 86 x 86 size 2-3

0172621

IP65 seal kit for panel mount

Grey 86 x 86 size 2-3

0174621

25-63A

0172267

80-100A

0172277

Yellow/red 66 x 66 one hole size 1

260 | SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

0172603

IP65 seal kit for rear mount 25-63A

0172259

80-100A

0172269

www.oem.co.uk


Switch disconnectors

Engraved legend plate & handle

Rear mounting plate

Rear mounting plate

Legend plate & handle Yellow/red 64 x 64 mm

0172602

Size 1 (25-32A)

0172187

Grey 64 x 64 mm

0174602

Size 2 (50-63A)

0172387

Size 3 (80-100A)

0172587

Yellow/red 48 x 48 mm one hole mount

0172604

Grey 48 x 48 mm one hole mount

0174604

Clutch drive & door interlock kit

Clutch drive presentation from 25A to 100A Clutch drive kit & door interlock shroud Kit 1 (no shaft)

0174179

Kit 2 (short shaft)

0174189

Kit 3 (long shaft)

0174199

Interlock shroud Shroud

0174249

Rear mounting plate

X (mm)

No shaft

Short shaft

Long shaft

Size

A

B

25 - 32A

86 to 100

86 to 250

86 to 400

1

25

85

Size 1 (25-32 A)

0172187

50 - 63A

96 to 110

96 to 260

96 to 410

2

35

90

Size 2 (50-63 A)

0172387

80 - 100A

106 to 120

106 to 270

106 to 420

3

50

100

Size 3 (80-100 A)

0172587 Each kit contains all of the parts required to convert a standard switch body and padlockable handle for rear mount with clutch drive. Consult the table for each kits panel depth dimensions. The door interlock shroud is available separately

0116 284 9900

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

| 261


TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


CAL ET thermostats

264

West N series controllers N2300 1/32 Din indicators & controllers

264

CAL 3300,9400, 9500P fixed build PID controllers

264

CALGrafix monitoring software

268

Lumel analogue RE55 controller

270

Lumel compact RE series

270

West P series modular controllers P6100, P8100, P4100 P6170, P8170, P4170 valve motor controllers P6700, P8700, P4700 temperature alarm policeman P6010, P8010 indicators

271

Dual loop multifunction controllers Lumel RE92

275

West PRO-EC44

276

Advanced process & temperature controllers PMA KS20,West PRO16 1/16 Din PMA KS40, KS41, KS42 1/8, 1/4 Din PMA KS90, KS92 1/8, 1/4 Din PMA KS98 1/4 Din PMA/West Blue Control software

278

Din-Rail temperatrure & process controllers PMA Rail line converters and bus couplers PMA KS45 universal controller

282


Temperature Controllers

ET thermostats

• • • •

Digital thermostats PID or on-off control with digital display PT100, thermocouple or NTC sensor input Flexible outputs

Technical data Series:

Key features

ET2011

ET2411

ET2412

Selectable dual set point

Single NTC input

Single NTC input

Auto PID Tune

Adjustable setpoint limits

Independent Alarm types

Soft Start feature

Selectable Sensor fail state

Selectable Sensor fail state

Zero point input shift

Zero point input shift

Zero point input shift

Thermocouple (J,K,T,S,R) or PT100

NTCH (-60 to 150°C)

NTCH (-60 to 150°C)

Relay Outputs SSR Output

9-30 V DC, 7/24 V AC, 110 V AC, 230 V AC (see order no.) 1 (8A or 16A/P Version) 1 (20mA @12V)

12/24 V AC/DC, 230 V AC (see order no.) 1 ( xx = 5A, 8A or 16A) -

12/24 V AC/DC, 230 V AC (see order no.) 2 (8A) -

Control Type

On/Off, PID, Dual set point

On/Off

On/Off

Control strategy Hysteresis Accuracy Display Dimensions (wxhxd) Protection level

Heat or Cool Adjustable 1 - 50°C 0.5 % of full scale, ±1 digit 4 -digits , 12.5mm, Red 77 x 35 x 71mm IP65 front , IP20 Rear

Heat or Cool Adjustable 0.1 - 20°C ±1 °C 4 -digits , 12.5mm, Red 77 x 35 x 61mm IP65 front , IP20 Rear

Heat or Cool Adjustable 0.1 - 20°C ±1 °C 4 -digits , 12.5mm, Red 77 x 35 x 61mm IP65 front , IP20 Rear

Sensor Type Supply voltage

Ordering guide Order number

Description

Supply voltage

ET2011T-230

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, J, K, T, S, R type sensor

230VAC

ET2011T-110

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, J, K, T, S, R type sensor

110VAC

ET2011T-024

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, J, K, T, S, R type sensor

24VAC

ET2011T-012

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, J, K, T, S, R type sensor

12VAC

ET2011T-SM

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, J, K, T, S, R type sensor

9-30VDC/7-24VAC

ET2011RT-230

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, PT100 sensor

230VAC

ET2011RT-110

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, PT100 sensor

110VAC

ET2011RT-024

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, PT100 sensor

24VAC

ET2011RT-012

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, PT100 sensor

12VAC

ET2011RTSM

Digital thermostat, relay, SSR output, PT100 sensor

9-30VDC/7-24VAC

ET2411-230-xx

Digital thermostat, relay output, NTCH sensor

230VAC

ET2411-024-xx

Digital thermostat, relay output, NTCH sensor

24VAC/DC

Digital thermostat, relay output, NTCH sensor

12VAC/DC

ET2411-012-xx ET2412-230

Digital thermostat, two relay outputs, NTCH sensor

230VAC

ET2412-024

Digital thermostat, two relay outputs, NTCH sensor

24VAC/DC

Digital thermostat, two relay outputs, NTCH sensor

12VAC/DC

ET2412-012 ENTCH-APS-1.5S

Sensor, air probe, max. 150°C stainless steel shell, 1.5m silicone cable

-

ENTCH-LPS-1.5S

Sensor, liquid probe, max. 150°C stainless steel shell, 1.5m silicone cable

-

264 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

N2300 1/32 DIN indicator and controller

• • • •

Red or green display Two process alarms Manual or easy tune Setpoint lock

Overview The West 2300 is available as an indicator or controller. Small size does not come at the expense of features, they have large 10mm high displays, 2 amp

relays and full 3-wire PT100 inputs. The controller features our hands-free Easy Tune PID algorithm.

Specification Features: Functions: Control types: Setpoint lock: Output configuration: Alarm 1 & 2 types: Human interface: Input: Thermocouple: RTD: DC linear:

Three term PID controller, indicator with alarms or indicator only versions available Controller versions have PID with easy-tune, manual tuning plus pre-tune or on-off control Limits operator access to the controller setpoint value Up to 3 total. Max 1 for control, max 2 for alarms Process high, process low, setpoint deviation and band 3 button operation, 4 digit 10mm high LED display (available in either red or green), plus on-control, set-up, alarm and setpoint indicators J, K, R, S, T, B, & N 3 wire PT100, 50Ω per lead maximum (balanced) 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-50mV, 10-50mV. Scaleable -1999 to 9999, decimal point as required

Impedance: Accuracy: Sampling: Sensor break detection: Outputs & operations: Control & alarm relays: Control SSR outputs: Communications: Front panel protection: Dimensions:

>10MΩ for thermocouple and mV ranges, 4.7Ω for mA ranges +/- 0.1% of input span (0.25% for J & T T/C) +/- 1 LSD (T/C CJC better than 0.7°C) 4 per second, 14 bit resolution approximately <2 seconds (except on 0-20mA range), control O/P’s turn off, high alarms activate for T/C and mV ranges, low alarms activate for RTD, mA ranges Contacts SPDT 2 amp resistive at 240V AC, >500,000 operations (if comms or 2nd relay is fitted, all relay contacts become SPST) Drive capability >10V DC into 500Ω minimum 2 wire RS485, 1200 to 9600 Baud, Modbus IEC IP66 (behind panel protection is IP20) 49 x 25 x 100mm

Part number key N2300 Output type: Indicator only Indicator + alarm 1 (relay) Indicator + alarm 1 (SSR) Controller (relay) + alarm 1 (SSR) Controller (SSR) + alarm 1 (relay) Option: No option fitted Alarm 2 relay output RS485 comms Display colour & power supply: Green display/100-240V AC supply Red display/100-240V AC supply Green display/12-30VDC/24VAC supply Red display/12-30VDC 24VAC supply

0116 284 9900

XX

X

X

00 01 02 12 21 0 1 2 0 1 2 3

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 265


Temperature controllers 3300, 9400, 9500P

• • • •

Self-tuning of all PID parameters Clear display, intensive digits Well-arranged, easy-to-understand menu system Communication to PC for configuration/logging

Technical data Supply voltage: Sensor types: Temperature range: Display range for 9500P with linear input signal: Calibration accuracy: Sampling frequency: Temperature coefficient: Reference conditions: LED display: Display shows:

100-240 V 50-60 Hz ±10 %, 4-5 VA 12-24 V (AC/DC) ±20 %, 4 VA (9400 and 9500P only have 100-240 V) - PT100 - Thermocouples J, K, N, R, S, T, E, L, B - Linear signals 4-20 mA, 0-10 V -200 °C to +1800 °C, see applicable sensor type -199 to 9999 (scalable) ±0.25 % of full scale ±1 °C Input signal 10 Hz, CJC 2 sec 150 ppm/°C of sensor range Of supply voltage +22 °C ±2 °C, min. 15 minute connection Resolution 1/0.1 green light with high brightness Four digits, 10mm high, Models 9400 and 9500P also show the set point value in 9mm orange digits - Actual value, set point value - Output status flashing LEDs - Error messages, functions/values

Memory: Relay output: SSD output: Analogue output (9500P):

Protection class: Ambient temperature: Moisture stability: Approvals: CE-marked according to: Connection: Enclosure: Weight:

10 years without supply voltage (EEPROM) 2 A, 250 V AC, resistive load for models with two relay outputs, relay 1: 2 A, relay 2: 1 A, 250 V AC 9500: all relays are 2 A/250 V AC resistive load 5 V +0/-15 %, max. 15 mA, non-isolated non-isolated 9500P: 6 V +0/-15 %, max. 20 mA, 4-20 mA, ±0.1 % of full scale, max. 500 Ω 0-5 V ±0.1 % of full scales, max. 10 mA, 500 Ω min. 1000 Ω 0-10 V ±0.1 % of full scale, max. 10 mA, 500 Ω IP66 at front 0 °C to +50 °C (32 to +130 °F) Max. 80 % RH, non-condensing UL, CSA EN50081-1, EN50082-2, EN61010 Screw terminal, controller extendable from case Flame retardant polycarbonate 3300: 110g, 9400: 130g, 9500P: 180g

Program function, capacity 9500P Function/data • Up to 31 programs can be saved • The program can consist of max. 126 segments (program steps) • Outputs can be controlled by events in the program • Terms such as Copy, Paste, Edit, Delete are used on the display • Call underlying programs into a “running” program • Loop function; the program restarts • Hold back; the program “stops” before the next segment starts • In the event of a power outage; hold, continue or reset • Memory use indication during programming NOTE! The number of stored programs and the size per program is restricted by the controller’s total memory capacity (351 Bytes). Different segments take up different amounts of memory capacity. Used bytes per function added to give a total “bytes used” per program.

Function Program Ramp Ramp + “Hold back” Soak time Step (change set point value) Loops (1-3) Loop (4 -) Call up program Event output

Bytes 1 4 5 2 3 1 2 1 1

Dimensions 3300

9400/9500/9500P

Cut-outs Panel size 24 x 48mm Width 45mm + 0.6-0.0mm Height 22.2mm + 0.3mm-0.0mm Maximum panel thickness 9.5mm (3300 is not polarity dependent at 12-24 V DC supply voltage.)

Cut-outs Panel size 48 x 48mm Width 45mm + 0.6-0.0mm Height 45mm + 0.6mm-0.0mm Maximum panel thickness 9.5mm

266 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

Order number The following models are those normally stocked, other combinations with regard to e.g. outputs and interfaces are stocked in limited numbers or are ordered on request. Type Temperature controller 3300 24 x 48mm

Temperature controller 9400 48 x 48mm

Process/program controller 9500P 48 x 48mm

NOTE! All controllers in these series can be purchased with a communication card. Third digit from the end of the order number identifies the type. A dash signifies no communication.

Order number

Outputs

Input signal

Communication

CAL33000000

SSD/relay

standard*

-

Supply voltage 100-240 V AC

CAL33000003

SSD/relay

standard*

-

12-24 V AC/DC

CAL33000020

SSD/relay

standard*

RS232

100-240 V AC

CAL33000040

SSD/relay

standard*

RS485

100-240 V AC

CAL33110000

relay/relay

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL33110040

relay/relay

standard*

RS485

100-240 V AC

CAL94000000

SSD/relay

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL94000040

SSD/relay

standard*

RS485

100-240 V AC

CAL94110000

relay/relay

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL94220000

SSD/SSD

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL94220040

SSD/SSD

standard*

RS485

100-240 V AC

CAL95001PA00

SSD/relay/relay

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL95001PA40

SSD/relay/relay

standard*

RS485

100-240 V AC

CAL95111PA00

three relays

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL95111PA40

three relays

standard*

RS485

100-240 V AC

CAL95111PB00

three relays

4-20 mA

-

100-240 V AC

CAL95B11PA00

4-20 mA/2 x relay

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL95D11PA00

0-10 V/2 x relay

standard*

-

100-240 V AC

CAL95B11PB00

4-20 mA/2 x relay

4-20 mA

-

100-240 V AC

*With standard input signal means; PT100, thermocouple and mV-input. 3300, 9400 and 9500 always have this version. 9500P with analogue input signal (0-20/4-20 mA, 0-10 V) can only be used for the selected (ordered) signal, e.g. 0-10 V.

CAL1R

Resistor (1 Ω, 1 %) for linear input signal 4-20 mA (or 0-20 mA)

CAL681R

Resistor R1, (681 Ω, 1 %) for linear input signal 0-10 V

CAL340KR

Resistor R2, (340 kΩ, 1 %) for linear input signal 0-10 V

All controllers with “Standard” input signal can be adapted using the resistors below to receive 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or 0-10 V. See the Connection tab above.

Accessories Plastic bezels for series 8000, 9900, 9300, 9400 and 9500P for other cut-outs 96 x 48mm hole cut-out

96 x 96mm hole cut-out

Bracket for mounting in cabinets or on DIN rails. Hole cut-out 45 x 45mm

NOTE! When the controllers are mounted in an adapter the stated protection class is not met. CAL 3300 can be mounted in a 48 x 48-hole by using adapter no. 26546830. Order number 904.200

Description Panel adapter, 48 x 48 to 48 x 96

904.400

Panel adapter, 48 x 48 to 96 x 96

1574009

Bracket for 48 x 48mm instrument

AX2-DL01

0116 284 9900

DIN rail adapter 44 x 65mm TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 267


Temperature controllers CALgrafix

• • • •

Process and monitoring software Charting and logging for PV, SP and % power Lower cost alternative to SCADA Simple set-up

Area of use CAL Controls software CALgrafix is for the controller series 3300, 9300, 9400, 9500 and 9500P. This can be used to program the controllers, but also as a freestanding program for general process monitoring. Here follows a brief presentation, contact OEM Automatic, product area Temperature for additional information.

Program control, series 9500P CALgrafix supports the program function in 9500P with very high user-friendliness (ramping, soak time, recipe handling etc.). Program profiles are created through “click-and-drag” and by doing so creating the required control profile. When this has been done values and times can be adjusted to the required function.

Example of functions • Click on the selected instrument to change set point values or configuration • Copy an instrument’s settings to another, e.g. when commissioning mould jets with several zones • Up to 128 instruments can be connected simultaneously • Save one or more controllers’ settings in files (recipe handling) • Printer function direct on the PC screen • Logging/screen dump in real time of temperature or other measurement values up to 12 measurement values per diagram • Storage of measured loggings in log files • Adjustable scale for measurement values/time, adjustable log frequency • Configuration, copying of settings • “Recipe handling” in files • Logging of selectable parameters as actual/set point values, output power in % alarm indications • Time controlled logging function • Simplified programming of ramps/soak times etc. for 9500P and CALogix (“drag and drop”) • List of settings per controller • OPC compatible, connection in network • Monitoring of non-CAL clients too (via OPC) • Audio files (.wav) can be imported for audible alarms • Interconnection of several networks • Digital photos (bitmap) can be imported and used as a background • Logging can be scaled to be able to show different units, e.g. pressure and temperature

The instrument is mounted on machines or other measurement position at the “factory site” where the machine operator can see process values or set point values and can directly via the buttons set another set point value or another configuration. CAL’s instruments are primarily designed for temperature control, but can also as here be used for measurement, control or monitoring of all applicable process signals where the signal source is 0-20/4-20 mA or 0-10 V. In addition to heating control via contactors or solid state relays there is also an analogue output on 9500P. This can control e.g. a frequency converter to control a speed, a pump or a proportional valve which in turn can control e.g. humidity level, pressure, etc.

Example of displays in CALgrafix

RS485/RS232 converter

°C Oil temperature

BAR

A

V

%RH

Hydraulic pressure

Current

Voltage

Humidity

Sensor

Order number

Analogue output ex.4-20 mA

Description: For communication

1003GB000

CALgrafix Professional, software for CAL’s controllers and other clients/servers, with OPC-server

3C25000K3

Adapter RS232 to RS485

268 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

Hz Speed

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers RE55 - Analogue set temperature controller

• • • • •

Large knob & pointer for easy setting of setpoint Relay or transistor control output Alarm output option Programming push button option Password protection

Part number key RE55

Technical data Inputs fixed: RTD: Pt100 Thermocouple: J, K, S type Control type: On/off or PID with autotune Outputs fixed: Relay control: 1 x CO contacts 2A , 230V a.c Binary: 1 x 0/5V SSR control Relay alarm: 1 x NO contact - 1A, 230VAC - optional Display: 4 x 10mm LED digits Dimensions: 96 x 96 x 65mm Protection level: IP40 front Supply voltage: 85…253V ac/dc, 40-440Hz

Input: Pt100/1.3850 -50..100°C 0..100°C 0..150°C 0..250°C 0..400°C 0..600°C Fe-CuNi (J) 0..250°C 0..400°C 0..600°C 0..900°C NiCr-NiAl (K) 0..600°C 0..900°C 0..1300°C PtRh10-Pt (S) 0..1600°C Option: On/Off controller PID controller configurable controller with push-buttons Control output: relay voltage 0/5 V

RE71 - Basic single output controller

• • • •

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs fixed: RTD: Pt100 Thermocouple: J, K, S type Control type: On/Off or PID with autotune Outputs fixed: Relay: 1x relay, NO contacts 5A , 230V a.c Binary output: 0/6V for SSR Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 93mm Protection level: IP65 front Supply voltage: 230V a.c ±10%, 50/60Hz

0116 284 9900

XX

X

X

00

8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 1 2

Single output Simple operation Relay or binary output 230VAC - only

RE71 Input signal: RTD Pt100 (-50...100°C) RTD Pt100 (0...250°C) RTD Pt100 (0...600°C) Thermocouple J (Fe-CuNi)(0...250°C) Thermocouple J (Fe-CuNi)(0...600°C) Thermocouple J (Fe-CuNi)(0...900°C) Thermocouple K (NiCr-NiAl)(0...600°C) Thermocouple K (NiCr-NiAl)(0...900°C) Thermocouple K (NiCr-NiAl)(0...1300°C) Thermocouple S (PtRh10-Pt)(0...1600°C) Output: relay binary 0/6 V for SSR control

XX

X

00

E

0

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1 2

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 269


Temperature controllers

RE22 – Compact single output controller

• • • •

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs programmable: RTD: Pt100, PT1000 Thermocouple: J, K, S, T, R, E, B, N, L-type Current: 0/4…20mA 0…5/10V dc Voltage: Control type: On/Off or PID with autotune Outputs fixed: 1x relay, NO contacts 5A , 230V a.c Relay: Binary output: 0/5V for SSR Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 93mm Protection level: IP65 front Supply voltage: 230VAC, 110VAC or 24VAC

RE72 - Compact 3 output controller

Universal input Simple operation Relay or binary output Soft start function

RE22 Input: universal for RTD and TC sensors

X

X

00

8

1 2

universal linear: - current: 0/4..20 mA - voltage: 0..5/10V Output: relay binary 0/5 V for SSR control Supply: 230 V 50/60 Hz 110 V 50/60 Hz 24 V 50/60 Hz

• • • • • •

X

1 2 1 2 3

Universal input Binary input control Timer function Remote setpoint input Simple profiler RS-485 Modbus as standard

Part number key RE72 X

Technical data Inputs programmable: RTD: Pt100, PT1000 Thermocouple: J, K, S, T, R, E, B, N, L-type Current: 0/4…20mA 0…5/10V dc Voltage: Control type: On/Off, PID with autotune, step valve control Outputs fixed: Relay: 2x NO contacts 2A , 230V a.c, O/P 1 & 2 1 x NO contact 1A, 230V a.c, O/P 3 Binary output: 0/5V for SSR Outputs programmable: Current: 0/4..20mA 0-10V d.c Voltage: Auxiliary supply output: 24V d.c/1W - optional Digital interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU Display: 2 x 4 digit, 10mm, red & green Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 93mm Protection level: IP65 front Supply voltage: 85…253V ac/dc, 20…40V ac/dc

270 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

Output 1: relay voltage: 0/5 V continuous current: 0/4 .. 20 mA continuous voltage: 0 .. 10 V Output 2: relay voltage: 0/5 V continuous current: 0/4 .. 20 mA continuous voltage: 0 .. 10 V Options: none output 3 - relay binary input current transformer input additional current input: 0/4 .. 20 mA transducer supply: 24 V d.c. 1 W Supply: 85 .. 253 V a.c./ d.c. 20 .. 40 V a.c./ d.c.

X

X

X

00

E

0

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

P6100, P8100, P4100, temperature and process controllers

• • • •

Jumperless configuration Auto detected hardware Process and loop alarms Modbus and ASCII comms

Overview With their improved interface, technical functionality and field flexibility, the WEST 6100, 8100 and 4100 give you the best comprehensive control for most temperature and process control loops.

They have a universal input and are available with a red and green displays. Plug-in modules allow up to 2 alarm relays (latching or non-latching), PV retransmission, remtote set point (RSP) or transmitter PSU.

Specification Sensor break detection:

Control types:

Full PID with pre-tune, self-tune, manual tuning, or on-off control. Heat only or heat & cool. Selectable from front panel or via digital input, with Auto/manual: bumpless transfer. Output configuration: Up to 3 possible, for control, alarm, 24VDC transmitter power supply or retransmit of process value or setpoint. Alarm 1 & 2 types: Process high, process low, SP deviation, band, logical OR / AND. Also 1 loop alarm for process control security. Process alarms have adjustable hysteresis. 4 button operation, dual 4 digit 10mm & 8mm high Human interface: (6100+, 8100+) and 13mm & 10mm high (4100+) LED displays PC configuration: Off-line configuration from PC serial port to dedicated config socket Input: Thermocouple: J, K, C, R, S, T, B, L, N & PtRh20%vsPtRh40%. RTD: 3 Wire PT100, 50Ω per lead maximum (balanced) 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 50mV, 10 to 50mV, 0 to 5V, DC linear: 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V. Scaleable -1999 to 9999, with adjustable decimal point Impedance: >10MΩ for Thermocouple and mV ranges, 47KΩ for V ranges and 5Ω for mA ranges Accuracy: ±0.1% of input range ±1 LSD (T/C CJC better than 1°C) Sampling: 4 per second, 14 bit resolution approximately

<2 seconds (except zero based DC ranges), control O/P’s turn off. High alarms activate for T/C and mV ranges, Low alarms activate for RTD, mA or V ranges Outputs & operations: Control & alarm relays: Contacts SPDT 2 Amp resistive at 240V AC Control SSR Drive capability >10V DC in 500 Ω minimum driver outputs: 0.01 to 1 Amp AC, 20 to 280Vrms, 47 to 63Hz Triac outputs: DC linear outputs: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA into 500Ω max, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V into 500Ω min. Control outputs have 2% over/under drive applied. Accuracy ±0.25% at 250Ω (degrades linearly to 0.5% for increasing burden to specified limits) Transmitter Output 24VDC (nominal) into 910Ω minimum to power power supply: external devices 2 Wire RS485, 1200 to 19200 Baud, Modbus and ASCII Communications: protocol (selectable) Digital input: Selects between 2 setpoints or auto/manual control. Volt free or TTL input Remote setpoint input: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2 to 10V. Scaleable -1999 to 9999. Local/remote setpoint selected from front panel Front panel protection: IEC IP66 (behind panel protection is IP20) Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 110mm (P6100), 48 x 96 x 100mm (P8100), 96 x 96 x 100mm (P4100)

Part number key P6100/P4100/P8100 Input type: 3 wire RTD or DC mV Thermocouple DC mA DC Voltage Option slot 1: Not fitted Relay DC for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Triac Option slot 2: Not fitted Relay DC driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Triac

0116 284 9900

X

X

X

X

X

X

1 2 3 4

X

X 0 R

0 1 2 3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 2 0 1 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Option slot B (not on 6100:) Not fitted Remote setpoint input (full) Display colour: Red upper & lower Green upper & lower Red upper, green lower Green upper, red lower Power supply: 100-240V AC 24-48V AC or DC Option slot A: Not fitted RS485 communications Digital input Remote setpoint input (basic) Option slot 3: Not fitted Relay DC driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Transmitter power supply TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 271


Temperature controllers

P6170, P8170, P4170 valve motor controller

• • • •

Jumperless configuration Auto detected hardware Process and loop alarms Modbus comms

Overview The new Plus Series VMD Controllers (6170, 8170, 4170) have been specifically designed for open loop valve motor drive applications and feature the improved

Plus Series interface and greater field flexibility.

Specification Control types: Valve control: Auto/manual:

Full PID with pre-tune, self-tune and manual tuning modes Open loop valve motor drive Selectable from front panel or via digital input, with bumpless transfer Output configuration: Up to 4 possible, two required for valve control, additional outputs for alarm, 24VDC transmitter power supply or retransmit of process value or setpoint Alarm 1 & 2 types: Process high, process low, SP deviation, band, logical OR / AND. Also 1 loop alarm for process control security. Process alarms have adjustable hysteresis Human interface: 4 button operation, dual 4 digit 10mm & 8mm (6170+ and 8170+) and 13mm & 10mm (4170+) high LED displays PC configuration: Off-line configuration from PC serial port to dedicated configuration socket Input: Thermocouple: J, K, C, R, S, T, B, L, N & PtRh20%vsPtRh40% RTD: 3 Wire PT100, 50Ω per lead maximum (balanced) DC linear: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 50mV, 10 to 50mV, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V. Scaleable -1999 to 9999, with adjustable decimal point >10MΩ for Thermocouple and mV ranges, 47KΩ for V Impedance: ranges and 5Ω for mA ranges Accuracy: ±0.1% of input range ±1 LSD (T/C CJC better than 1°C) Sampling: 4 per second, 14 bit resolution approximately

Sensor break detection: Outputs & options: Control & & alarm relays: Control SSR driver outputs: Triac outputs: DC linear outputs:

<2 seconds (except zero based DC ranges), control O/P’s turn off, high alarms activate for T/C and mV ranges, low alarms activate for RTD, mA or V ranges Contacts SPDT 2 Amp resistive at 240V AC (120V AC max for direct VMD) Drive capability >10V DC in 500 Ωminimum 0.01 to 1 Amp AC, 20 to 280Vrms, 47 to 63Hz. 140V max for direct VMD 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA into 500Ω max, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V into 500Ω min. Accuracy ±0.25% at 250Ω (degrades linearly to 0.5% for increasing burden to specified limits) Retransmit of PV or SP only

Transmitter power supply:

Output 24VDC (nominal) into 910Ω minimum to power external devices Communications: 2 Wire RS485, 1200 to 19200 Baud, Modbus protocol Digital input: Selects between 2 setpoints or auto/manual control. Volt free or TTL input Remote setpoint: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2 to 10V. Scaleable -1999 to 9999 Auxiliary input: For valve position indication or remote setpoint input Front panel protection: IEC IP66 (behind panel protection is IP20) Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 110mm (P6170), 48 x 96 x 100mm (P8170), 96 x 96 x 100mm (P4170)

Part number key P6170/P4170/P8170 Input type: 3 wire RTD or DC mV Thermocouple DC mA DC voltage Option slot 1: Not fitted Relay DC for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Triac Option slot 2: Not fitted Relay DC driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Triac Dual relay

272 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

X

X

X

X

X

X

1 2 3 4

X

X 0 R

0 1 2 3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 2 0 1 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Option slot B (not on 6170): Not fitted Auxiliary input (full) Display colour: Red upper & lower Green upper & lower Red upper, green lower Green upper, red lower Power supply: 100-240V AC 24-48V AC or DC Option slot A: Not fitted RS485 communications Digital input Auxiliary input (basic) Option slot 3: Not fitted Relay DC driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Transmitter power supply Dual relay

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

P6700, P8700, P4700 alarm unit (Policeman)

• • • •

High or low trip points 5 amp latching limit relay Remote reset option Exceed and relay indicators

Overview The West range of 6700, 4700 and 8700 have a programmable safety cut out with optional outputs for annunciators and alarms. A latched relay cuts power to your process if safe values are exceeded. These units must be reset before the

process can continue. They have the improved Plus Series hardware and user interface for optimal ease of use.

Specification Features: Output configuration: Up to 3 possible, for latching trip relays, alarm/annuncator relays, 24VDC transmitter power supply or retransmit of process value or limit trip setpoint Alarm 1 & 2 types: Process high, process low, Limit SP deviation, band, logical OR alarms or trip annunciator. Alarms have fully adjustable hysteresis Output reset action: Limit output can be reset only when exceed condition is absent. Local or remote reset options Annunciator reset action: Annunciator output can be reset at any time. Local or remote reset options Human interface: 4 button operation, dual 4 digit 10mm & 8mm (6700+ & 8700+), 13mm & 10mm (4700+) high LED displays PC configuration: Off-line configuration from PC serial port to dedicated config socket Input: Thermocouple: J, K, C, R, S, T, B, L, N & PtRh20%vsPtRh40% RTD: 3 wire PT100, 50Ω per lead maximum (balanced) DC linear: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 50mV, 10 to 50mV, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V. Scaleable -1999 to 9999, with adjustable decimal point Impedance: >10MΩ for thermocouple and mV ranges, 47KΩ for V ranges and 5Ω for mA ranges Accuracy: ±0.1% of input range ±1 LSD (T/C CJC better than 1°C) Sampling: 4 per second, 14 bit resolution approximately

Sensor break detection: Outputs & options: Limit trip relay outputs: Alarm relay outputs:

<2 secs (except zero based DC ranges), limit trip and annunciators activate. High alarms activate for temperature and mV ranges, low alarms activate for, mA or V ranges

Latching SPDT, contacts 5Amp resistive Non-latching SPDT, contacts 2Amp resistive at 240V AC, >500,000 operations

SSR driver alarm outputs: Drive capability >10V DC in 50Ω minimum Triac alarm outputs: 0.01 to 1 Amp AC, 20 to 280Vrms, 47 to 63Hz DC linear retransmit outputs: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA into 500Ω max, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V into 500Ω min. Accuracy ±0.25% at 250Ω (degrades linearly to 0.5% for increasing burden to specified limits) Transmitter power supply: Output 24VDC (nominal) into 910Ω minimum to power external devices Communications: 2 Wire RS485, 1200 to 19200 Baud, Modbus and ASCII protocol (selectable) Digital input: Volt free or TTL input. -0.6 to 0.8V or contact closure resets latched relays and annunciators Front panel protection: IEC IP66 (Behind panel protection is IP20) Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 110mm (P6700), 48 x 98 x 100mm (P8700), 98 x 98 x 100mm (P4700)

Part number key P6700/P4700/P8700 Input type: 3 wire RTD or DC mV Thermocouple DC mA DC voltage Option slot 1: Latching limit relay (fixed) Option slot 2: Not fitted Relay DC driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Triac

0116 284 9900

X

X

X

X

X

X

1 2 3 4

X 0 1 2 3

1

0 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 1 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display colour: Red upper & lower Green upper & lower Red upper, green lower Green upper, red lower Power supply: 100-240V AC 24-48V AC or DC Option slot A: Not fitted RS485 communications Digital input Option slot 3: Not fitted Relay DC driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Transmitter power supply

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 273


Temperature controllers

P6010 and P8010 panel indicator

• • • •

Jumperless configuration Auto detected hardware Up to 4 alarm outputs Modbus and ASCII comms

Overview The 6010 and 8010 have multi-point scaling, tare function and improved flexibility. They have a universal input and are available with a red of green or colour change display (P8010 only).

Plug-in modules allow up to four alarm relays (latching or non-latching), PV retransmission or transmitter PSU.

Specification Features: Output configuration: Up to 4 total. Max 3 single/1 dual relay, max 1 retransmit of PV, max 1 transmitter power supply Up to 5. Process high low or logical OR (direct or reverse Alarms: acting). With adjustable hysteresis Viewable values: Process variable, maximum value, minimum value and alarm 1 elapsed time since reset Human interface: 3 button operation, 4 digit 10mm (6010) or 13mm (8010) high red or green display, plus 3 alarm 1 max and 1 min indicator PC configuration: Off-line configuration from PC serial port to dedicated config socket Input: Thermocouple: J, K, C, R, S, T, B, L, N & PtRh20%vsPtRh40%. RTD: 3 Wire PT100, 50Ω per lead maximum (balanced) DC linear: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 50mV, 10 to 50mV, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V. Scaleable -1999 to 9999, with adjustable decimal point Impedance: >10MΩ for thermocouple and mV ranges, 47KΩ for V ranges and 5Ω for mA ranges Accuracy: ±0.1% of input range ±1 LSD (T/C CJC better than 1°C) 4 per second, 14 bit resolution approximately Sampling:

Outputs & options: Single alarm relays: Dual alarm relays: SSR driver outputs: Triac outputs: DC linear retransmit outputs:

Contacts SPDT 2 Amp resistive at 240V AC Two x SPST contacts with shared common. 2 Amp resistive at 240V AC Drive capability >10V DC in 500 Ω minimum 0.01 to 1 Amp AC, 20 to 280Vrms, 47 to 63Hz 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA into 500Ω max, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V into 500Ω min. Accuracy ±0.25% at 250Ω (degrades linearly to 0.5% for increasing burden to specified limits)

Transmitter power supply:

Output 24VDC (nominal) into 910Ω minimum to power external devices Communications: 2 Wire RS485, 1200 to 19200 Baud, Modbus and ASCII protocol (selectable) Digital input: External reset of latched relay, stored alarm 1 elapsed time, stored min/max PV values or initiate tare function. Volt free or TTL input Front panel protection: IEC IP66 (behind panel protection is IP20) Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 110mm (P6010), 96 x 48 x 100mm (P8010)

Part number key P6010/P8010 Input type: 3 wire RTD or DC mV Thermocouple DC mA DC voltage Option slot 1: Not fitted Relay DC for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Triac Option slot 2: Not fitted Relay DC driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Triac Dual relay

274 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

X

X

X

X

X

X

1 2 3 4

X 0 1 4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 2

0 1 3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Display colour: Fixed red Fixed green Red/green colour change (P8010 only) Power supply: 100-240V AC 24-48V AC or DC Option slot A: Not fitted RS485 communications Digital input Option slot 3: Not fitted Relay DC Driver for SSR DC 0-10V DC 0-20mA DC 0-5V DC 2-10V DC 4-20mA Transmitter power supply Dual relay

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

RE92 dual loop controller

• • • •

Simple and user friendly Universal separated measuring inputs SMART PID algorithm Digital communication RS-485 (standard), Ethernet (option)

Description The RE92 is an advanced dual loop controller for industrial use. It was designed for demanding industrial applications. RE92 can control two controlled objects independently or control two physical values in one object (e.g. in the two-zone furnaces). Thanks to the universal measuring inputs, it can be used for controlling of temperature and other physical values (e.g. pressure, humidity). Every user can update controller’s software individually, thus getting access to the additional features added by the LUMEL development team.

Intuitive and user-friendly interface • 3.5” full-colour graphic screen with luminosity control • menu available in English • password-protected regulator access (4 users, 3 access levels) • signaling a state of binary inputs and two-state outputs Reliable control with fixed set-point • 4 set point values switchable by the binary inputs (for each loop) • soft-start function for set point values change, programmable increase/ decrease • also an additional input may serve as the source of set point value (input 3)

Modern control functions • independent dual loop control • PID control, on/off, three-step control of heating-cooling, and step-by--step control • innovative SMART PID algorithm with auto-tuning function (automatic selection of PID parameters) • the source of control signal is one of the two inputs or the sum/difference of the signal from two inputs combined • 4 sets of PID parameters and additional set for cooling (for each loop) • 6 types of alarm with programmable hysteresis and memory (latch function) • digital communication - RS-485 (standard), Ethernet (option) • Gain Scheduling feature - automatic PID set switching, depending on the set temperature (when the object behaves decidedly differently in various temperatures)

Advanced programming control • 20 internal programs (10 programs per loop) • 15 units per program • signaling up to 6 events per unit (two-state outputs) • selection of PID parameters for any unit • iterations number setting (up to 9999 repetitions)

Technical data Digital interface: Interface type, protocol: Mode Baud rate RS-485, MODBUS RTU: 8N2, 8E1, 8O1, 8N1 2400, 4800,9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s Ethernet, MODBUS TCP Slave: External features: Readout field: colour display 320 x 240 pixels TFT 3,5’’ Dimensions: 96 x 96 x 100mm Weight: < 0.5 kg Protection level: IP65 front Rated operating conditions: Supply voltage: 85...253 V a.c./d.c. frequency: 40...50...440 Hz

Inputs: Programmable: Universal main inputs 1 and 2 RTD: Pt100, Pt500, Pt1000 Thermocouple: Ni100, Cu100, J, K, S, T, R, B, E, N-type Current (I): 0/4 ... 20 mA Voltage (U): 0 ... 5/10 V DC linear: 0+20.0 mA 4-20mA, 0-5v, 0-10v Additional input: 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-5v, 0-10v 0-100Ω/1000Ω Outputs: Output type: Properties Remarks Relay: 6/4 outputs switching contacts, 2 A/ 230 V Voltage transistor: 0/2 outputs 0/5 V (Imax = 20 mA) Continuous voltage: 0...2 outputs 0...10 V, Rload > _1 k Ω Continuous current: 0...2 outputs 0/4...20 mA, Rload < _ 500 Ω

Part number key RE92 Input 3: none current: 0/4...20 mA voltage: 0...5/10 V potentiometer transmitter: 100/1000 Ω Output 1 and 2: 2 relays 2 binary outputs 0/5 V

0116 284 9900

X

X

X

0 1 2 3

X

X 0 1

0 1 1 2

0 1

00

E

0 Transducer supply: none 24 V d.c. Ethernet: none with Ethernet Analog outputs: none 2 continuous 0/4...20 mA and 0...10 V TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 275


Temperature controllers

PRO-EC44 Dual loop controller

• • • • •

One or two control loops Graphical/text LCD display Datalogger with RTC USB configuration and data access BlueControl software configurable

Description Pro-EC44 is a 1/4 DIN process controller with graphical text display, advanced control capability and modular I/O options providing flexibility to fit wide range of industrial manufacturing and process applications. Fast and easy front panel setup for both for simple and advanced control tasks Pro-EC44 simplifies user setup with a step by step wizard configuration saving working through several menus for initial setup. A Logical menu structure for intuitive navigation allows fast changes and updates to individual settings. Configure controllers without connecting to a PC Configuration files can be downloaded to a controller using a flash memory stick via the front USB port allowing for fast programming. Settings can also be read via the USB port to clone additional devices or configure a replacement. Datalog files can also be extracted locally via the USB for convenient access of process data. Easy access user operation The Pro-EC44 pages are formatted to show users important process information on a single page, minimising the steps to access data and settings. A colour change green/red LED backlight provides easily recognisable alarm indication to improve response times for corrective action. Comprehensive control… and much more. Pro-EC44 includes many features to ensure good control performance on a wide

range of applications. Single or dual loop capability in a single device, cascade, valve and ratio enhanced control with support features such as real time clock, timer, gain scheduling and profiler ensure Pro-EC44 has the flexibility for a process system needs. In addition datalogging, trending, USB, Ethernet options add even more capability to an already powerful device. Fast configuration via configuration interface. Direct access for programming is available via a top of controller connection port. The interface provides easy and fast access with Blue Control software to configure the controller or drilldown into process issues with minimal disruption. Key features: • ON/OFF, PID heat only & heat/cool, valve motor drive, ratio cascade control • 5 PID sets manual or automatic gain scheduling • 7 alarms – absolute, deviation, rate of change, sensor break, recorder memory, power • 255 segment profiler shared in 64 programs • Ethernet – Modbus TCP, RS485 - Modbus RTU (master/slave) • Up to to 2 analogue inputs, 9 outputs, remote setpoint input, 9 digital inputs

Technical data Supply voltage: 100-240V 50/60Hz, 20VA 24..48AC/DC (20-48V ac, 50/60Hz, 15VA, 22-65V dc, 12W) Input signal 1/2: Pt100 Thermocouples L, J, K, N, S, R, T, C, D, E, B-type Linear, 0/4…20mA, 0…5/10V, 0…50mV Digital inputs: Contact input 2…24V dc.-0.6…0.8V Logic/Inv Logic or Volt free Display: 160 x 80 pixel monochrome, green/Red backlight Outputs: CO, 2A@ 250VAC Relay option 1-3: Dual relay option 2-3: CO, 2A@250VAC (shared common) Base relay option 4-5: CO, 2A@250VAC

276 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

SSR option 1-3: >10V into 500Ω min. Dual SSR option 2-3: >10V into 500Ω min. 20..280Vrms (47…63Hz), 0.01…1A Triac 1-3: Linear DC option 1-3: 0/4…20mA, 0…5/10V Base linear DC option 6-7: 0/4…20mA, 0…5/10V Tranmitter supply 2-3: 24Vdc nominal, 910Ωmin (1 only) Comms RS485 A: Slave, Modbus RTU, up to 115200bps Comms Ethernet A: Slave, Modbus RTU, 10/100BaseT Data recorder: 1Mb nvfm, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec/min Profiler: max 255 segments, 64 profiles Protection Class: IP65 - front Dimensions: 96 x 96 x 117mm

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

Part number key EC440 Unit type: Controller Controller with USB Port Controller/recorder Controller/recorder with USB Port Profiler Not fitted Profiler Power supply: 100-240V AC 24-48V AC or DC (COMING SOON) Control loops: One control loop One loop + auxiliary input Two control loops Base option 1: Relay output Relay output + linear DC output Base option 2 Not fitted Relay output Relay output + linear DC output Plug-in module slot 1 Not fitted Relay output DC drive output for SSR Linear DC output Triac output

0116 284 9900

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

C U X R

X 1 2 3 4 5

0 P

0 1 0 2

0 1 3 4 5

1 A 2 1 M

0 1 2 8 9 Y T

0 1 M 0 1 2 L 8

0 1 2 8 9 Y T

Manual & HMI Language: English French German Italian Spanish Option C: Not fitted Multiple Digital Input Plug-in Module Slot A: Not fitted RS485 Serial Comms - Modbus RTU Digital Input Auxiliary Input A Ethernet Port - Modbus TCP Plug-in Module Slot 3: Not fitted Relay Output DC Drive Output for SSR Triac Output Dual relay Output Dual SSR Driver Output 24VDC transmitter power supply Plug-in module slot 2: Not fitted Relay output DC drive output for SSR Triac output Dual relay output Dual SSR Driver output 24VDC transmitter power supply

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 277


Temperature controllers

KS20-1/PRO16 Advanced controller

• • • • • •

Universal controller Two inputs, up to 6 outputs Four digital inputs Two switchable parameter sets 16 x 16 segment profiler PMA or West branded

General information Modbus Master function supports setpoint changes e.g. in extruder applications

KS20-1 (48 x 48mm) This is a universal temperature controller for advanced industrial applications. The unit can provide simple on/off control, continuous PID Control, or 3 point stepping control. The process value signal from the sensor is connected to the universal input. A second analogue input is available for current measurement or as an external setpoint signal. The KS20-1 has an optional transmitter supply, digital inputs and modbus RS-485. • Input 1 is a universal input (temperature, resistance and mA/V • Input 2 (input 0/4..20mA, dc, 0..30mA ac) can be used for external setpoint or input for current transformer • Outputs: relay, SSR and analogue Other functions • Digital inputs (switch off ouput, switch setpoint value, change parameter set etc) • Extra function button (switch off output, boost, manual control, program control etc) • Modbus master/slave • Maintenance manager and error list • BluePort® and BlueControl software configurable

Master KS 90-1

1

2

Slaves KS 90-1, KS 50-1, KS 40-1

3

4

1

1199

°C °F para func Ada Err

1200

SP.x

2

3

126 125

OK

1

run

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

1

run

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run Ada

Err

SP.E SP.2

F

KS 90-1

KS 40-1

advanced

180°C

KS 40-1

universal

185°C

KS 40-1

universal

190°C

190°C

KS 40-1

universal

195°C

195°C

200°C

KS 40-1

universal

200°C 205°C

KS 40-1

universal

200°C 205°C

KS 40-1

universal

210°C 215°C

universal

215°C 220°C

+5°C

Technical data Note that these technical data are not fully complete, but show the most significant for KS20. For more details see www.oem.co.uk Outputs: Supply voltage: 90-260V 48…62Hz, 7VA CO, 2A@ 250VAC, 500VA Relay option 1-3: 24VAC/DC Dual relay option 2: NO, 2A@250VAC, 500VA (21-26V ac, 48…62Hz, 7VA, 18-31V dc, 7W) SSR option 1-3: 10V into 500Ω min. Input signal 1: Pt100, PT1000, 0-4500Ω Dual SSR option 1-3: 10V into 500Ω min. Thermocouples L, J, K, N, S, R, T, C, D, E, B-Type 0/4…20mA, 0-10V Linear DC option 1-3: Linear, 0/4…20mA, 0…10V Tranmitter supply - option: 18V dc/22mA Input signal 2: 0/4…20mA, 0…30mA ac Communication - option: RS-485 master/slave, Modbus RTU, addresses 0-99, max 32 controlller/bus, Analogue inputs: Accuracy 0.1%, resloution >14 bit, 2400, 4800, 9600,19200 bits/s Scan time 100mS Protection Class: IP65 - front Digital inputs: Contact input; 3.3V/<10mA, DI1 & DI2 Dimensions: 48 x 48 x 118mm 24VDC, DI3 & DI4 Display: LED 4 digit 10/8mm

Part number key 1/16 Din Universal industrial controller Supply voltage 100-240V AC 24VAC 50/60Hz or 18 to 30VDC Heater current/transmitter power supply TPS HC / mA Option 1: Relay (switch over) Single SSR Dual SSR Linear mA/VDC Output Option 2: Not fitted Relay (switch over) Dual Relay Single SSR Dual SSR

278 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

KS20

1

X

X

X

X

X

X

0 1 0 C B

T H R A Y L 0 R D A Y

0 R A Y L C

2

0

-

XX 01 – West branded 03 – PMA branded Option A: Not fitted RS485 Dual isolated digital input Option 3: Not fitted Relay (switch over) Single SSR Dual SSR Linear mA/VDC output RS485

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

KS40-1/KS41-1/KS50-1 Advanced controller

• Universal controller • Panel size 48 x 96, 96 x 96mm • Two inputs, three outputs • Three digital inputs • BluePort® interface and BlueControl software configurable

General information KS40-1/KS50-1 (48 x 96mm), KS41-1 (96 x 48mm) and KS42-1 (96 x 96mm) This is a universal controller for industrial applications with PID control, two or three point control. KS40/42 also offers a basic program function with 4 ramp steps, transmitter supply, digital inputs, Modbus RS422/485, can be connected over for manual operation using the “hand” button. They also have a large number of alarm functions in different combinations. A number of functions can be “moved out” to be reached directly with the front buttons.

• Input 1 is a universal input (temperature, resistance and mA/V) • Input 2 (input signal 0/4-20 mA DC/0-50 mA AC) can be used for an external set point or input for current transformer • Outputs: three relays or two relays/one logic (13 V or analogue)

KS50-1is a version produced for the plastics industry and has certain special functions: • Two selectable sets of parameters • Two inputs, five outputs • Extra function button (switch off output, switch to set point value two, change parameter set, etc. • In the event of a fault control can continue automatically with average values • Boost-function - burn out material in the event of “freezing” • Master/slave function with multi-zone control

KS40-1 Burner is a version produced for burners and has certain special functions: • Quick configuration for burner applications • Two inputs, three outputs • Extra function button (switch off output, switch to set point value two, change parameter set, etc. • 2-step/3-step control modulating, for step motors

Technical data Note that these technical data are not fully complete, but show the most significant for KS40/42. For more details and for KS40 Burner/KS50 see www.west-cs.com Supply voltage: 90-260 V 48-62 Hz, approx. 8 VA Relay output OUT1/2: 2 A, 250 V AC, 500 VA 24 V AC/DC Relay output, OUT3: 2 A, 250 V AC, 500 VA (21-26 V AC, 48-62 Hz approx. Universal output, OUT3: logic output: 0/13 V, max. 20 mA, isolated from inputs 8 VA, 18-31 V DC, approx. 8 W) analogue output: 0/4-20 mA, resolution 0.1 %, Input signal INP1: PT100, PT1000, resistance 0-4500 Ω max. 500 Ω, 0-10 V, resolution 0.1 %, min. 2 kΩ Thermocouples L, J, K, N, S, R transmitter supply max13 V DC/22 mA Linear signal 0-20/4-20 mA, 0-10 V Transmitter supply (option): 18 V DC/22 mA Input signal INP2: Linear signal 0-20/4-20 mA, 0-50 mA AC Communication (option): RS422/485, Modbus RTU (galvanic isolated), Analogue inputs: Accuracy 0,1 %, resolution >14 bit, addresses 00-99, max. 32 controllers/bus scanning rate 100 ms (2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bits/s) Digital inputs: Contact input: 2.5 V/50 µA Protection class: IP65 front Optocoupler input: “0” = -3 to 5 V DC, Dimensions: 48 x 96 x 118mm (KS40), “1” = 15 to 30 V DC, approx. 5 mA 96 x 48 x 118mm (KS41), 96 x 96 x118mm (KS42) Display: KS40-1: LED four digits, 10/8mm high KS42-1: LED four digits, 19/10mm high

Ordering guide See website for ordering codes

0116 284 9900

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 279


Temperature controllers

KS90-1/92-1 Advanced controller

• • • •

Universal process controller Panel size 48 x 96, 96 x 96mm Three inputs, up to six outputs Three digital inputs

General information Other functions: • Digital inputs (switch off output, switch to set point value two, change parameter set, etc) • Extra function button (switch off output, switch to set point value two, change parameter set, etc) • In the event of a fault control can continue automatically with average values • Master/slave function with multi-zone control • Version for program control, up to 16 programs with 16 segments

KS90-1 (48 x 98mm) and KS92-1 (96 x 96mm) This is a universal controller for advanced industrial applications with PID control, two or three point control. KS90-1/92-1 has transmitter supply, digital inputs. Modbus RS422/485 or Profibus, can be connected over for manual operation using the “hand” button. There are also a large number of alarm functions in different combinations. A number of functions can be “moved out” to be reached directly with the front buttons. • Input 1 is a universal input (temperature, resistance and mA/V) • Input 2 (input signal 0/4-20 mA DC/0-50 mA AC, potentiometer) can be used for an external set point or input for current transformer • Input 3 is a universal input (temperature, resistance and mA) • Outputs: relays, logics, analogue or optocoupler Example of Master/slave application with KS90-1/KS92-1

Master KS 90-1

1

2

Slaves KS 90-1, KS 50-1, KS 40-1

3

4

1199

°C °F para func Ada Err

1200

1

SP.x

2

3

126 125

OK

1

run

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run

1

SP.x

Ada

Err

2

3

126 125

OK

run Ada

Err

SP.E SP.2

F

KS 90-1

advanced

180°C

KS 40-1

KS 40-1

universal

185°C

universal

190°C

190°C

195°C

KS 40-1

KS 40-1

universal

195°C 200°C

KS 40-1

universal

200°C 205°C

KS 40-1

universal

200°C 205°C

KS 40-1

universal

210°C 215°C

universal

215°C 220°C

+5°C Note that these technical data are not fully complete, but show the most significant. For more details see www.west-cs.com

Technical data Supply voltage: Input signal INP1: Input signal INP2: Input signal INP3: Analogue inputs: Digital inputs:

90-260 V 48-62 Hz, approx. 8 VA 24 V AC/DC (21-26 V AC, 48-62 Hz approx. 8 VA, 18-31 V DC, approx. 8 W) PT100, PT1000, resistance 0-4500 Ω Thermocouples L, J, K, N, S, R, T, C, D, E, (B = over 100 °C) Linear signal 0-20/4-20 mA, 0-10 V (2.5-1150 mV) Linear signal 0-20/4-20 mA, 0-50 mA AC, potentiometer 0-4500 Ω As INP1 (not 0-10 V) Accuracy 0.1 %, resolution >14 bit, scanning rate 100 ms Contact input: 5 V/100 µA Optocoupler input: “0” = -3 to 5 V DC, “1” = 15 - 30 V DC, approx. 5 mA

Display: KS90-1: LED four digits, 10/8mm high Text display: 8-digit, numerical or bar graph Relay output, OUT1-4: 2 A, 250 V AC, 500 VA Universal output, OUT3-4: logic output: 0/13 V, max. 20 mA, isolated from inputs analogue output:0/4-20 mA, resolution 0.1 %, max. 500 Ω 0-10 V, resolution 0.1 %, min. 2 kΩ transmitter supply max. 13 V DC / 22 mA Optocoupler output OUT5-6: 18-32 V DC/70 mA, positive load control (galvanic isolated) Communication (option): RS422/485, Modbus RTU (galvanic isolated), addresses 00-99, max. 32 regulators/bus (2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bits/s) Profibus DP Protection class: IP65 front

Ordering guide See website for ordering codes

280 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

KS98-1 Advanced process controller

Process controller - KS98-1 The KS 98-1 multiloop controller provides advanced functionality to its users. It benefits from having a large number of analog and digital inputs and outputs as standard. The KS98-1 offers a high resolution LCD display (160 x 80 pixels). Individual plain text lines can be displayed with the current function states. Setpoint, actual values or manipulated variables can be visualised in either bar graphs or trend curves. The instrument offers an extensive function library to support the engineering of individual solutions from analog signal conditioning to digital signal operations and cascade control systems to complex meshed control loops.

BlueControl

• • • •

All automation functions in one unit Controller, computing, sequencing and programmer Comprehensive function library IO expansion via module C or CANopen bus

PMA’s most advanced process controller, for demanding applications. “Mini-PLC” for mathematical calculations, a large number of digital inputs and outputs, master-slave applications etc. • Up to 8 inputs/8 control loops • Up to 6 control outputs, more via bus • Up to 12 digital inputs, 6 digital outputs • Multi-function display for e.g. actual/set point value, logging curves, bar graph, time, etc. • Library with 350 ready function blocks • Profibus, Interbus • Programmed in BlueControl For detailed information: www.west-cs.com

• • • • • • • •

Trend curves, logging function Offline simulation Customer optimise the display menu in the controller Customised text field Create “start-up logo” with e.g. the company name Save data to file Help text for all parameters Linearisation of customer specific input signal - 16 points

Overview BlueControl software for PMA’s controllers, ProVU & Pro series BlueControl software is a fully developed PC application for controllers, which is easily connected via a socket on the front (on ProVU & Pro 16 sockets are fitted

on underside). This facilitates all programming and has a simulation function where controller’s functions are shown in their entirety and all functions can be tested before the controller is used in its real application.

Ordering guide Order number 9407-998-00001

Description Programming adapter for PMA’s controllers

9407-999-11001

Software Blue Control Basic

9407-999-11011

Software Blue Control Expert

9407-999-12001

Software Blue Control Basic, Rail-line

9407-999-12011

Software BlueControl Expert (for Rail line, i.e. KS45 etc)

0116 284 9900

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 281


Temperature controllers

Rail line controllers, converters and bus couplers

• • • •

Series Railline - for DIN rails with different functions Signal converter with limiting value relays Universal inputs; temperature and 4-20mA/0-10 V etc KSvario - control system, up to 30 control zones

Controllers, converters and bus couplers These products are stocked on a smaller scale, contact us if you have any questions. Railline - the same appearance for different features Railline is a series of DIN mounted modules with different functions as shown below. Most models have a display of values and indications. Railline are programmed in BlueControl, where files can be saved and printed, etc. For detailed information: www.pma-online.de

CI45: universal signal converter As CI35 but with more advanced functions, possibility of bus connection, digital input, two universal inputs, two relay outputs, frequency input and output, etc. SG45: for load cells/resistance bridges For accurate measurement and monitoring of loads, pressure sensors and other resistance bridges. Resolution 14 bits, output signal relay, logic or analogue signals.

KS45: digital PID controller Available in several combinations for different inputs and outputs - see product page under Controllers.

TB45: temperature limiter for critical processes For example, gas ovens which require a higher level of protection with an independent unit with its own sensor. Follows DIN standards for different applications (hot water, properties, oil burners, etc.) For detailed information: www.pma-online.de#

CI35: universal signal converter Converter with a universal input, a universal analogue output and one relay output: Resistance sensor (PT100, PT1000, potentiometer etc.) Thermocouple (L, J, K, N, S, R, T, C, D, E, (B = over 400 °C) Linear input signals: 0-10V, -10/+10 V, 0/4-20 mA, -200/+200 mV Output: relay and logic/analogue For detailed data sheet please call

RL400: Plug-in I/O system The input/output modules with fieldbus provide a high degree of flexibility

Ordering guide Order number

Description

CI4511200000000

Universal converter, logic + relay output, digital input, 90-260 VAC

CI4511201000000

Universal converter, logic + relay output, two inputs, count input etc, 90-260 VAC

CI4511320000000

Universal converter, logic + relay output, 24 VAC/DC

TB451000000000D

Temperature limiter, 2 x relay, 90-260 VAC

KS4511200000D00

Controller Railline, screw connection, two relay outputs and analogue/logic output, 90-260 VAC

Bus couplers/IO-modules for process signals etc. Railine also includes a complete series of bus couplers for signal collection to control systems. All modules has several input and/or outputs and are connected to a bus coupler; the left-hand module in the picture. This collects in all measurement values from the various modules and converts to the selected fieldbus. For detailed information: www.west-cs.com For Profibus (DPV1), Ethernet/Modbus TCP, ModBus RTU, CANopen Each fieldbus module can handle up to 16 measurement modules (with an extra amplifier up to 62 measurement modules can be handled). Temperature inputs; PT100, PT1000, thermocouple Analogue input signals: 0/4-20 mA/0-10 V Analogue output modules 0/4-20 mA/0-10 V 4 sensor inputs/unit

RL400 combination modules input/outputs 2 inputs/2 outputs/unit 4 inputs/ unit RL400 digital input/output modules Input: 2 x 4 (24 V DC), 2 x 4 contact input Output: 2 x 4 (24 V DC), 2 x analog, 2 x differential, 4 x relay 230 V

282 | TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

www.oem.co.uk


Temperature controllers

KS45 – Rail line

• • • •

Universal controller For DIN rail mounting Two inputs, three outputs Three digital inputs

General information This is a universal controller for standard industrial applications with PID control, two or three point control. KS45 also offers a basic program function with 4 ramp steps, transmitter supply, Modbus RS422/485, can be connected over for manual operation using the “hand” button. It also has a large number of alarm functions in different combinations. KS45 is a part of the Rail-line family, which includes e.g. fieldbus couplers, signal converters, temperature limiters, etc.

• Input 1 is a universal input (temperature, resistance and mA/V) • Input 2 can be a universal input (temperature, resistance and mA/V) or 0-50 mA AC • Outputs: two relays/one logic (13 V, analogue or transmitter supply) • Five different time functions, adjustable 0.1 to 9,999 min

Technical data Supply voltage:

Display:

90-260 V 48-62 Hz, approx. 8 VA 24 V AC/DC (21-26 V AC, 48-62 Hz approx. 8 VA, 18-31 V DC, approx. 8 W) PT100, PT1000, resistance 4500 Ω, KTY11-6 Thermocouples L, J, K, N, S, R, T, C, D, E, B Linear signal 0-20/4-20 mA, 0-10 V, -10 to 10 V, -200 to 200 mV PT100, PT1000, resistance 4500 Ω, KTY11-6 Thermocouples L, J, K, N, S, R, T, C, D, E, B Linear signal 0-20/4-20 mA, 0-10 V, 0-50 mA AC Accuracy 0,1 %, resolution >14 bit, scanning rate 100 ms Contact input: 5 V/1 mA Optocoupler input: “0” = -3 to 5 V DC, “1” = 15 - 30 V DC, approx. 6 mA

Input signal INP1:

Input signal INP2: Analogue inputs: Digital inputs:

5

6 7 K te lem 8 rm m in e 1 al / 2 3 4

5.5

Dimensions

Multifunction LCD-display, shows actual value, set point value, output status, error messages, functions/values Relay output OUT1/2/3: 2 A, 250 V AC, 500 VA Optocoupler output: OUT1/2 (option:) 18-32 V DC, max. 70 mA, internal voltage drop <1 mA at Imax Universal output, OUT3: logic output: 0/13 V, max. 23 mA, isolated from inputs analogue output:0/4-20 mA, resolution 0.1 %, max. 700 Ω, 0-10 V, resolution 0.1 %, min. 2 kΩ transmitter supply (option):18 V DC/22 mA RS422/485, Modbus RTU (galvanic isolated), Communication (option): addresses 00-99, max. 32 controllers/bus (2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bits/s) Protection class: IP65 front

15 1

6 1 K 7 te lem 18 rm m in e 11 al / 12 13 14

99

2.3

22.5

111 117.5

Part number key KS451

X

1 universal input, 1 digital input with display and BluePort® interface 0 without plug-in connector terminals 1 with screw terminal connector 90...260V AC, 2 output relays, INP2 as current input (0...20mA) 18...30VAC/18...31VDC, 2 output relays, INP2 as current input (0...20mA) 90...260V AC, mA/V/logic + 2 relays, INP2 as current input (0...20mA) 18...30VAC/18...31VDC, mA/V/ logic + 2 relays, INP2 as current input (0...20mA) 90..260V AC, 2 optocoupler outputs,1 relay, INP2 as current input (0...20mA DC and 0...50 mA AC) 18...30VAC/18..31VDC, 2 optocoupler outputs., 1 relay, INP2 as current input (0...20mA DC and 0...50 mA AC) without options RS 485 / MODBUS - protocol System interface (only for 24V versions) * not on versions with optocoupler outputs (KS45-1x4... and KS45-1x5...)

0116 284 9900

X

X

X

0 1 2 3

0

X

00

0

Standard (CE-certification)

D U

DIN 3440 / EN 14597 Ul/cUL certified

0

Standard configuration

9

Customer-specific configuration di1 as contact input

1

di1 as optocoupler input

3*

5

X

0

2*

4

0

INP2 as universal input, 0 -measurement, di1 as contact input INP2 as universal input, 02-measurement di1 as optocoupler input

0 1 2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

| 283


TERMINALS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


Introduction

286

Screw terminals 2.5mm – 120mm

288

Pick-off terminals 4mm – 120mm

290

Screw terminals 50mm – 240mm

292

Screw double-level terminals 2.5mm – 10mm

294

Screw three-level initiator terminals 2.5mm

296

Fuse disconnect terminals 2.5mm – 6mm

298

Disconnect terminals 2.5mm – 4mm

300

Test disconnect and CT-link terminals 10mm

302

RK-Safe-box

305

Thermocouple terminals

306

Terminal blocks spade connection 1mm – 2.5mm

307

Screw terminal direct mount 2.5mm – 10mm

308

High power stud terminals 35mm – 300mm

310

Distribution blocks 80 A – 400 A

312

Tension spring compact terminals 2.5mm

314

Tension spring terminals 2.5mm – 16mm

316

Tension spring double-level terminals 2.5mm

320

Tension spring three-level terminals 2.5mm

322

Tension spring disconnect and fuse terminals 2.5mm

324

Tension spring compact direct mount terminals 2.5mm

326

Pluggable tension-spring terminals 2.5mm

328

Tension spring initiator/actuator terminals 1.5mm

332

Shield-connection clips 3mm – 32mm Ø

334

Busbar support and clamping yokes 0.5mm – 35mm

336

Terminal interface break-out modules

338

Accessories

344

Markers

346

FMS colour printing system

350


Terminals The company Founded and kept in the family since 1977: CONTA-CLIP is an owneroperated company that is a mid-sized global player. Users of electrical and electronic connectivity components have come to trust us for our reliable products. They also trust in our wide-reaching competence within the market and industry which has evolved over many years. In the years since our company was founded, we have evolved from a manufacturer to an innovator.

Connection types CONTA-CLIP have continually evolved their systems starting with the ‘wire protection’ screw terminal. They can now offer up to seven different connection types. The most common of which are highlighted below.

Screw

• Maximum contact force • Resistant to vibration • The lowest voltage drop • Wire size from 0.08 – 240 mm2

Tension spring

Pressure spring

Stud

• High resistance to vibration • Fast connection • Reduces wiring time up to 50% • Wire size from 0.08mm – 16mm2

• ‘Push in’ technology • No tools required • High resistance to vibration • Reduces wiring time up to 80% • Wire size from 0.08mm – 10mm2

• Power connections • 1000 V up to 520 A • Excellent contact force • Wire size from 0.2mm – 300mm2

CONTA–CON

CONTA–ELECTRONICS

CONTA–INSTALL

Product offer CONTA–CONNECT

• DIN rail screw terminals • Push in terminals • Stud terminals • EX terminals • Labelling systems

286 | TERMINALS

• PCB • PCB • PCB • PCB

terminal blocks plug in terminals marking cards rail mounting system

• Relay systems • Converters • Power supplies • Interface modules • Diode modules

• Cable ducting • Cable glands • Ferrules • DIN rail • Crimp connectors

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals Innovative SRK screw terminal range A complete range The SRK range start at 2.5mm² through to 120mm² and the same pluggable cross connectors are also compatible with the SRKD double deck terminals and the SSIK range of fuse holders. Most of the range is available in up to 9 colours, including the 3 phase colours to make power connections easier to identify.

Fast assembly & connection The easy to operate screw connection makes it easy and safe to connect both solid and flexible wires with or without ferrules. The protective Earth terminals have rail connections on both sides of the foot, they simply snap onto the din-rail with no need for screws. The insulated cross connectors are pluggable and simply pushed in to place in one of two channels in the top of each terminal. These features dramatically speed up assembly time but still ensure maximum mechanical and electrical security.

• New design insulation housing with increased stability • PA 6.6 UL 94-VO self-extinguishing plastic. Temperature range: -40°C to +120°C • Shield feed-through connection versions available

0116 284 9900

• Four-way labelling channel • Generous cable entries. All sizes clamp at the same height • 2.5, 4, 6 and 10 mm2 sizes all have the same external dimensions

Features • Feed-through & protective Earth terminals • Compact design • Wide range of sophisticated accessories • Pluggable insulated cross connectors that can be easily modified to suit • Cross connectors can carry max rated current & voltage of the terminals • Large wire entry bay positioned at the same level across all terminal types • Global standards, worldwide approvals • Manufactured in Germany

• The SQIK cap system makes it possible to isolate neighbouring cut-off cross-connectors and potentials. No partition required • Poles are easy to break out • Two-way cross-connect channel for a wide variety of possible cross-connections

• SSL snap on Earth terminals have a double-sided rail contact for secure fixing to the DIN rail • Can be cross-connected

TERMINALS

| 287


Terminals Feed-through terminals SRK • • • •

High stability vibration resistant construction Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rail Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0 Dual cross-connect channels

SRK 2.5/2A

SRK 4/2A

SRK 6/2A

SRK10/2A

48 x 5 x 47mm

48 x 5 x 47mm

48 x 8 x 47mm

48 x 5 x 47mm

2.5mm

4mm

6mm

10mm2

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

2

2

IEC

UL/CSA

Voltage

1000V

Current

24A/32A

Cross connectors (push in)

2

IEC

UL/CSA

IEC

UL/CSA

600V

1000V

25A

32A/41A

600V

1000V

35A

41A/57A

IEC

UL/CSA

600V

1000V

600V

50A

57A/76A

65A

SQI 2.5/2 pole SQI 2.5/3 pole SQI 2.5/4 pole SQI 2.5/10 pole SQI 2.5/30 pole SQIK – Cap

SQI 4/2 pole SQI 4/3 pole SQI 4/4 pole SQI 4/10 pole SQI 4/30 pole SQIK – Cap

SQI 6/2 pole SQI 6/3 pole SQI 6/4 pole SQI 6/10 pole SQI 6/30 pole SQIK – Cap

SQI 10/2 pole SQI 10/3 pole SQI 10/4 pole SQI 10/10 pole SQI 10/30 pole SQIK – Cap

AP 2.5-10

AP 2.5-10

AP 2.5-10

AP 2.5-10

SRK 16/2A

SRK 35/2A

SRK 50/2A

SRK 70/2A

SRK 120/2A

53 x 12.1 x 47mm

59 x 16.1 x 66.1mm

72.5 x 18.5 x 72.5mm

76.5 x 20.5 x 82mm

91 x 27 x 90mm

16mm2

35mm2

50mm

70mm

120mm2

End plate

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

2

2

IEC

UL/CSA*

IEC

UL/CSA*

IEC

UL/CSA*

Voltage

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

1000V

Current

76A/101A

85A

125A/150A

150A

150A/192A

150A

192A/232A

Cross connectors SQI 16/2 pole End plate

SQI 35/2 pole

SQ 50/2 pole SQ 50/3 pole SQ 50/4 pole

IEC

UL/CSA*

IEC

UL/CSA*

600V

1000V

1000V/1000V

205A

269A/290A

228A/220A

SQ 70/2 pole SQ 70/3 pole SQ 70/4 pole

SQ 120/2 pole SQ 120/3 pole SQ 120/4 pole

SAP 16

*Approval applied for

288 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals Feed-through Earth terminals SSL • • • •

High stability vibration resistant construction Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rail Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0 2-Point contact on DIN rail

Part Number

SSL 2.5/2A

SSL 4/2A

SSL 6/2A

SSL 10/2A

SSL 16/2A

Snap-on

Snap-on

Snap-on

Snap-on

Snap-on

48 x 5 x 47mm

48 x 6 x 47mm

48 x 8 x 47mm

48 x 10 x 47mm

53 x 12.1 x 55mm

2.5mm2

4mm2

6mm2

10mm2

16mm2

SQI 2.5/2 pole SQI 2.5/3 pole SQI 2.5/4 pole SQI 2.5/10 pole SQI 2.5/30 pole

SQI 4/2 pole SQI 4/3 pole SQI 4/4 pole SQI 4/10 pole SQI 4/30 pole

SQI 6/2 pole SQI 6/3 pole SQI 6/4 pole SQI 6/10 pole SQI 6/30 pole

SQI 10/2 pole SQI 10/3 pole SQI 10/4 pole SQI 10/10 pole SQI 10/30 pole

SQI16/2

SQIK – Cap

SQIK – Cap

SQIK – Cap

SQIK – Cap

AP 2.5-10-GREEN

AP 2.5-10-GREEN

AP 2.5-10-GREEN

AP 2.5-10-GREEN

SSL 35/2A

SSL 50/2A*

SRK 70/2A*

Snap-on

Screw-on

Screw-on

59 x 16.1 x 65.5mm

72.5 x 18.5 x 72.5mm

76.5 x 20.5 x 82mm

35mm

50mm

70mm2

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Cross connectors (push in)

End plate

Part Number

SAP 16-GREEN

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Cross connectors (push in)

2

2

SQI 35/2 pole

*For Earth connections over 35 mm2 solid copper DIN rail is required to meet full specification

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 289


Terminals

Pick-off terminals SMAG | Test adapter STA Screw technology

Accessories for the SRK terminal blocks CONTA-CLIP offers specific and innovative accessories for the SRK I SSL screw connection system. Pick-off terminals SMAG The SMAG pick-off terminals make possible one or two additional extra wire connectors onto the SRK terminal blocks and therefore extend the standard feed-through terminal by up to four connectors. The SMAGs are mechanically snapped into the SRK terminal blocks. The SMAG busbar is connected via the corresponding base connection of the terminal block, the rated cross section is thereby reduced to the next lower size.

Test adapter STA The STA test adapter can be used to quickly and safely test pre-wired terminal blocks. A test plug block can be mounted with any number of poles using the locking pegs and the STA ZP intermediate plate with widths from 1 to 3 mm. The STA ZP intermediate plate allows the assembly of a test plug block, which can also be mounted on different block widths (SRK/SSL 2.5 | 4 | 6 | 10). Thanks to its innovative design the STA test adapter can be rotated through 180°. It can therefore also be mounted onto the SRK terminal block, whereby one of the cross-connection channels is already occupied by a cross-connector. 290 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Pick-off terminals SMAG | Test adapter STA

• Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0 • SMAGs are compatible with SRK series 4-120 mm Pick-off terminals SMAG Part Number

SMAG 4/2.5

SMAG 6/4

SMAG 10/6

SMAG 16/6

Wire size

2.5mm

4mm

6mm

6mm

Approvals

IEC*

IEC*

IEC*

IEC*

Connection diagram

Voltage

800

800

800

800

Current

24A/32A

32A/41A

41A/57A

41A/57A

SRK 4/2A | SSL 4/2A

SRK 6/2A | SSL 6/2A

SRK 10/2A | SSL 10/2A

SRK 16/2A | SSL 16/2A

For terminal block Part Number

SMAG 35/6

SMAG 50-70/10

MAG 150/240

Wire size

6mm

10mm

10mm

Approvals

IEC*

IEC*

IEC*

Connection diagram

Voltage

1000

1000

1000

Current

41A/57A

57A/76A

57A

SRK 35/2A | SSL 35/2A

SRK 50/2A | SSL 50/2A SRK 70/2A | SSL 70/2A

SRK 120/2A

For terminal block *Approval applied for

Test adapter STA Part Number

Pitch mm Finely stranded mm

2

For terminal block

0116 284 9900

STA 5/1

STA ZP1

STA ZP3

5

1

3

SRK 4/2A | SSL 4/2A SRK 10/2A | SSL 10/2A

SRK 6/2A | SSL 6/2A SRK 10/2A | SSL 10/2A

0.5-1 SRK 2.5/2A | SSL 2.5/2A SRK 4/2A | SSL 4/2A SRK 6/2A | SSL 6/2A SRK 10/2A | SSL 10/2A

TERMINALS

| 291


Terminals

Feed-through terminals RK | RK-D | Measurement pick-off terminal MAG Screw technology

Feed-though terminals for DIN rail and direct mount The RK 50, RK 95, RK 150 and RK 240 terminal blocks are made of a double-layer insulation housing. The specialized construction of the clamping yoke minimizes the contact resistance between the wire and the busbar. The clamp is tightened using a hex-socket screw which creates the required torque together with the clamping yoke. Pegs are located on the plastic housings of the terminal blocks; these lock to adjacent terminals to increase the mechanical stability. A threaded M2.5 bolt can be attached to the injection-moulded pegs in order to further increase the mechanical stability. A diverse line of accessories offers a practical supplement to these products. Direct mount versions available RK...-D

MAG measurement pick-off terminals. The MAG measurement pick-off terminals allow you to tap into the voltage on the RK 50, RK 95, RK 150 and RK 240 terminal blocks when using wires with small cross-sections ranging from 0.2 to 10 mm2. A special socket slot in the RK 50 to RK 240 terminal blocks enables the MAG supplemental connections to be added retroactively. They can be independently snapped on to the base housing of the terminal blocks. MAG terminals are individually snapped into the housing of the main terminal above the wire entry. The electrical contact is then established using the connection screw on the main-wire terminal of the busbar. This technical solution is safe, clever, and simplifies the wiring significantly. The rated voltage is 1000 V because of the total insulation provided by the pick-off terminal. The PMC quick marking system can be used for labelling the terminals.

Inlay plate EP When connecting to rectangular conductors, you are required to attach an inlay plate in the clamping yoke. The EP inlay plates correct the V-shaped form of the clamping yoke to increase the contact area to a maximum on both sides of the conductor

292 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Feed-through terminals RK | RK-D • • • •

Foot can be snapped on TS 32 and TS 35 DIN rails Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2 Direct mount option Pick off terminal

RK 50

RK 95

RK 150

RK 240

79 x 20 x 76.5

84 x 25 x 88.5

93 x 31 x 112.8

93 x 6 x 126.3

50mm2

95mm2

150mm2

240mm2

RK 50-D

RK 95-D

RK 150-D

RK 240

109 x 20 x 65.75

109 x 25 x 77.5

109 x 31 x 99

109 x 36 x 112.8

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Part number

Other colours available Size (LWH) Approvals

IEC

UL/CSA

IEC

UL/CSA

IEC

UL/CSA

IEC

UL/CSA

Voltage

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

Current

150A

150A

232A

230A

309A

275A

380A

370A

Pick off terminal

Inlay plate

MAG 50

MAG 95

MAG 150/240

MAG 150/240

EP 50

EP 95

EP 1150

EP 240

AQI 2/50 AQI 3/50

AQI 2/95 AQI 3/95

AQI 2/150 AQI 3/150

AQI 2/240 AQI 3/240

Cross connector (external)

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 293


Terminals

Double-level terminal blocks SRKD | PE terminal SSLD Screw technology

Double-level terminal blocks SRKD

The SRKD terminal blocks are available to suit wire sizes 2.5 mm², 4 mm² and 10 mm². The standard SRKD models have two potentials with 2 x 2 connections, further options include linked versions with four connections on one potential and as a protective earth terminal with a snap-on PE foot contact. The SRKD range is compatible with the ‘Plug in’ cross connectors used in the existing SRK range. Just like the established SRK series, the new SKRD units feature a compact housing and provide excellent stability, vibration resistance, and optimal attachment of the wires to the contact point. The terminals are equipped with a large wire entry bay that facilitates the insertion of wires. The connection of multiple wires is also possible. The terminal’s robust housing safely anchors all the metal parts on the inside. The foot construction of the snap-on units ensures a reliable, firm hold on the mounting rail.

Part Number

SRKD 2.5

SRKD 2.5/SV

SSLD 2.5

76 x 5.1 x 65

76 x 5.1 x 65

76 x 5.1 x 65

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

IEC

UL/CSA*

Voltage

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

Current

24A

20A

24A

20A

Cross connectors

End plate

294 | TERMINALS

IEC

UL/CSA*

SQI 2.5/2

SQI 2.5/2

SQI 2.5/2

SQI 2.5/3

SQI 2.5/3

SQI 2.5/3

SQI 2.5/4

SQI 2.5/4

SQI 2.5/4

SQI 2.5/30

SQI 2.5/30

SQI 2.5/30

SQIK-Cap

SQIK-Cap

SQIK-Cap

SAPD 2.5-4

SAPD 2.5-4

SAPD 2.5-4-GREEN

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Double-level terminal blocks SRKD | PE terminal SSLD • Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0 • Compatible with SRK cross connectors

Part Number

SRKD 4

SRKD 4/SV

SSLD 4

76 x 6.1 x 65

76 x 6.1 x 65

76 x 6.1 x 65

4mm2

4mm2

4mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

IEC*

UL/CSA*

Voltage

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

Current

32A | 41A

20A

32A | 41A

Cross connectors

IEC

UL/CSA*

20A

SQI 4/2

SQI 4/2

SQI 4/2

SQI 4/3

SQI 4/3

SQI 4/3

SQI 4/4

SQI 4/4

SQI 4/4

SQI 4/10

SQI 4/10

SQI 4/10

SQI 4/30

SQI 4/30

SQI 4/30

SQIK-Cap

SQIK-Cap

SQIK-Cap

SAPD 2.5-4

SAPD 2.5-4

SAPD 2.5-4-GREEN

SRKD 10

SRKD 10/SV

SSLD 10

76 x 10.1 x 68

76 x 10.1 x 68

76 x 10.1 x 68

10mm2

10mm2

10mm2

End plate

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

IEC*

UL/CSA*

Voltage

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

Current

57A | 76A

20A

57A | 76A

Cross connectors

End plate

0116 284 9900

IEC

UL/CSA*

20A

SQI 10/2

SQI 10/2

SQI 10/2

SQI 10/3

SQI 10/3

SQI 10/3

SQI 10/4

SQI 10/4

SQI 10/4

SQI 10/10

SQI 10/10

SQI 10/10

SQI 10/30

SQI 10/30

SQI 10/30

SQIK-Cap

SQIK-Cap

SQIK-Cap

SAPD 10

SAPD 10

SAPD 10-GREEN TERMINALS

| 295


Terminals

Three-level initiator terminals IKD | IK Screw technology

The features in detail

Features of the IK 2.5

The IKD 2.5 can be positioned anywhere in the terminal strip combination. If it is positioned at the start or in the middle of a terminal strip, the remaining exposed part of the IKD 2.5 should be fitted with the short AP/IKD (catalogue no. 2714.2). The cross-distribution of the power supply takes place at the lower and middle levels using the QS, VH and BS accessory products or the pre-assembled Q cross-connector. The pre-assembled Q cross-connections are available with 2 to 10 poles or 100 poles.

• Thin design (5 mm)

The IK 2.5 and IKD 2.5 base terminals are also available with LED status displays. The display speeds up troubleshooting and signals the switching status. This product line covers all standard control voltages, divided into the switching types “positive switching” or “negative switching”.

• Closed wire entry • One terminal per initiator for quick and precise signal assignment • Touch-safe protection (VBG4) without an additional cover • Colour-coding of plus (red) and minus (blue) connections • Additional colour-coded labelling is possible Features of the IKD 2.5 • Thin design (5 mm) • Closed wire entry • Switch signal and power supply can be connected • Touch-safe protection (VBG4) without an additional cover

The IKD base terminals come in four variants: IKD 2.5

IKD 2.5/Q

Raised-up rear wall, so cross-connection only possible on open side of terminal. Different supply voltages can be fed within one terminal combination.

Cross-connection is possible on open and closed sides of the terminal.

IKD 2.5/F

IKD 2.5/F/Q Cross-connection is possible on open and closed sides of the terminal. The lower level is labelled red and the middle level is labelled blue.

Raised-up rear wall, so cross-connection only possible on open side of terminal. Different supply voltages can be fed within one terminal combination. The lower level is labelled red and the middle level is labelled blue.

296 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Three-level initiator terminals IKD | IK • Foot can be snapped on TS 32 and TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2 • Colour coded options

IKD 2.5

IKD 2.5/Q

IKD 2.5/F

IKD 2.5/F/Q

IK 2.5

84.8 x 5 x 58.3

84.8 x 5 x 58.3

84.8 x 5 x 58.3

84.8 x 5 x 58.3

62.8 x 5 x 58.3

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA*

IEC

CSAus/CSA*

IEC

CSAus/CSA*

IEC

CSAus/CSA*

IEC

CSAus/CSA*

Voltage

250V

300V

250V

300V

250V

300V

250V

300V

250V

300V

Current

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

20A

Cross connectors (external)

End plate

AP 2.5/ID

Q2-SRK-IKD

Q2-SRK-IKD

Q2-SRK-IKD

Q2-SRK-IKD

Q3-SRK-IKD

Q3-SRK-IKD

Q3-SRK-IKD

Q3-SRK-IKD

Q4-IKD

Q4-IKD

Q4-IKD

Q4-IKD

Q10-IKD

Q10-IKD

Q10-IKD

Q10-IKD

Q0.5M (98) IKD

Q0.5M (98) IKD

Q0.5M (98) IKD

Q0.5M (98) IKD

AP 2.5/ID

AP 2.5/ID

AP 2.5/ID

AP 2.5/I

*Approval applied for

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 297


Terminals

Fuse-disconnect terminals SSIK | STK | SK Screw technoloogy

Fuse-disconnect terminals SSIK 4 | SSIK 6 The fused terminals feature an extraction lever that locks into its end position and allows a spare fuse to be attached from the side. The following micro-fuses can be attached: SSIK 4 (5x20/5x25/5x30) and SSIK 6 (6.3x25/6.3x32) Two cross-connection channels within the fused terminals allow for potentials to be distributed to adjacent fused and feed-through terminals from the SRK series. For multiplying the potentials, we offer the SQI standard accessory, available with from 2 to 30 poles. An additional connection (SMAG) can also be attached to the outlet side.

Fuse-disconnect terminal STK 2

Fused terminal SK 1

The STK 2 fuse-disconnect terminals feature a compact shape so they take up minimal space. The hinged lever is used to hold the fuse and locks into its open position. LED status displays are available for a variety of voltage ranges.

The SK 1 fused terminals with screw cap are designed for micro-fuses that are 5 x 20-sized (without indicator) and 5 x 25-sized (with indicator). Fuses are screwed into the fused terminal via the screw cap. Status displays using LEDs, neon indicator lamps or glow lamps are available for a wide variety of voltage ranges.

The STKD 1 has the benefit of an additional feed-through terminal.

Fuse-disconnect terminals STK | STKD • •

Foot can be snapped on TS 32 and TS 35 DIN rail Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL94-V2

STK 2

Part Number

VBS…/10

STKD 1

Lever links for STK series

Other colours available Connection diagram

2 way VBS 2/10 3 way VBS 3/10

Size (LWH)

51.4 x 8 x 39

Wire size Voltage | Current

Fuse size mm Cross connectors (external)

End plate

298 | TERMINALS

67 x 8 x 55.5

4mm2

4mm2

IEC

CSAus

IEC

CSAus

500V | 6.3A

600V |16A

500V | 6.3A

600V |16A

5 x 20 / 5 x 25

5 x 20 / 5 x 25

AQI 2/8/11 poles AQI 3/8/11 poles AQI 4/8/11 poles

AQI 2/8/11 poles AQI 3/8/11 poles AQI 4/8/11 poles

APSI - 2

AP/SID 1

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Fuse-disconnect terminals SSIK | SIK10-PA | SK • Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rail • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 V0, glass fibre reinforced • Temperature resistance to 140ºC (RTI elec.) Part Number

SSIK 4/2A/LED

SSIK 4/2A

SSIK 6/2A

SSIK 6/2A/LED

Connection diagram

LED Module

Size (LWH)

58 x 6.1 x 70

58 x 6.1 x 70

59 x 8.1 x 70

59 x 8.1 x 70

4mm

4mm

6mm

6mm

Wire size Approvals

SST/SSIK/LED

2

2

UL/CSA*

Voltage

500V

600V

Current

10A

16A

Fuse size mm

5 x 20 / 5 x 25 / 5 x 30

5 x 20 / 5 x 25 / 5 x 30

6.3 x 25 / 6.3 x 32

6.3 x 25 / 6.3 x 32

SQI 4/2 pole SQI 4/3 pole SQI 4/4 pole SQI 4/10 pole SQI 4/30 pole SQIK – Cap

SQI 4/2 pole SQI 4/3 pole SQI 4/4 pole SQI 4/10 pole SQI 4/30 pole SQIK – Cap

SQI 6/2 pole SQI 6/3 pole SQI 6/4 pole SQI 6/10 pole SQI 6/30 pole SQIK – Cap

SQI 6/2 pole SQI 6/3 pole SQI 6/4 pole SQI 6/10 pole SQI 6/30 pole SQIK – Cap

SAP-SSIK

SAP-SSIK

SAP-SSIK

SAP-SSIK

SIK 10 PA-G

SIK 10/Z PA-G

SK 1/35 PA-G

VBS…/10

VBS…/10/Z

Lever links for SSIK

Lever links for SIK10 series

2 way VBS 2/10

2 way VBS 2/10/Z

3 way VBS 3/10

3 way VBS 3/10/Z

End plate

Part Number

UL/CSA*

30 x 6.1 x 14

2

IEC

Cross connectors (push in)

IEC

2

See LED module 10A

16A

IEC

UL/CSA*

500V

600V

10A

16A

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

60 x 8 x 69

60 x 10 x 69

52 x 12.2 x 62

10mm2

10mm2

10mm2

IEC

UL/CSA

IEC

UL/CSA

IEC

500V

600V

500V

600V

400V

Current

10A

16A

10A

16A

Fuse size

5 x 20 / 5 x 25 / 5 x 30

Voltage

Cross connectors

End plate

6.3 x 32/6.3 x 25

AQI 2/18/8

AQI 2/10/18

AQI 3/18/8

AQI 3/10/18

AQI 4/18/8

AQI 4/10/18

AQI10/18/8

AQI10/10/18

AQI 60/18/8

AQI 50/10/18

AP10-BLACK

IEC

UL/CSA*

See LED module 10A

12-30V AC/DC 30-60V AC/DC 110-250V AC/DC 500V AC/DC

16A

10A 5 x 20 QS 2-SK1 QS 3 -SK1 QS 4 -SK1 QS 10 -SK1

AP/SK1KRG-BLACK

*Approval applied for

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 299


Terminals

Disconnect terminals TRK | STK 2 Screw technology

Different versions | Features The TRK 1.5 (disconnect-blade terminal) and the TRK 1.5/DS (disconnect plug) variants are both available.

The STK 2…/K series feature a hinged lever for disconnecting. The lever comes with a contact sleeve.

Features of the TRK 1.5/TRK 1.5 DS

Features of the STK 2…/K

Same construction as the standard terminal blocks

Same construction as the standard terminal blocks

A sturdy, closed insulation housing

Hinged lever latches into fully open position.

The established disconnect-blade with high-quality surfaces

Minimal and stable level ofcontact resistance

 isconnect terminals can be used as fuse-disconnect terminals by D removing the contact ferrules.

Touch-safe protection also during the disconnect process

The TRK 1.5/STB and TRK 1.5/ 15/STB versions offer the advantage of pre-assembled socket plugs instead of terminal screws. Without any additional accessories, these disconnect terminals feature a test pick-off to be used for speedier troubleshooting or as a measurement pick-off for comparing standardized signals.

Disconnect plugs and diode plugs for the TRK 1.5/DS disconnect terminals are available separately in four versions. Disconnect plug without circuitry •

DS 1-TRK 1.5 (Cat. no. 1403.2)

Disconnect-plug with wire jumper •

DS 1-TRK 1.5 (Cat. no. 1400.2)

Disconnect plug with diode in blocking direction •

DS 1-TRK 1.5 (Cat. no. 1401.2)

Disconnect plug with diode in pass-though direction •

300 | TERMINALS

DS 1-TRK 1.5 (Cat. no. 1402.2)

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Disconnect terminals TRK | STK | STKD • Foot can be snapped on TS 15, TS 32 and TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2

TRK 1.5

TRK 1.5/DS

TRK 1.5

STK 2/K

STKD 1/K

48 x 6 x 48.3

48 x 6 x 65

48 x 6 x 65

49 x 8 x 39

67 x 8 x 55.5

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

4mm2

4mm2

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approval

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

IEC

Voltage

400V

600V

400V

600V

400V

600V

500V

500V

Current

10A

15A

10A

15A

10V

15A

6.3A

6.3A

AQI 2/8/11 2 pole AQI 3/8/11 3 pole AQI 4/8/11 4 pole

AQI 2/8/11 2 pole AQI 3/8/11 3 pole AQI 4/8/11 4 pole

APSI-2

AP/SID

Cross connectors

End plate

0116 284 9900

AQI 4/6/11 2 pole AQI 3/6/17 3 pole AQI 4/6/17 4 pole

AQI 4/6/11 2 pole AQI 3/6/17 3 pole AQI 4/6/17 4 pole

AQI 4/6/11 2 pole AQI 3/6/17 3 pole AQI 4/6/17 4 pole

TERMINALS

| 301


Terminals

Test disconnect terminals PTK | CT-links

Screw technology

Test-disconnect terminals are mostly used in the sectors of electricity generation and supply. They are tailored to the variety of switching demands for current-converter secondary circuits that predominate in these sectors. Current transformers must always have a secondary circuit when electricity meters and measuring instruments are being replaced, or when making comparative measurements. CONTA-CLIP test-disconnect terminals are available in four basic versions, each with or without a pre-assembled socket plug. All versions provide touch-safe protection according to wVBG 4. A captive sliding partition is used to separate the current and voltage paths. The switch position is always easy to detect since the disconnect screw has a yellow insulating sleeve. The STB 14/4 sockets plugs for a test pick-off can be attached to all versions using the PS 4 test plug.

The features in detail Cross-switches QVS

Socket plugs STB 35

Socket plugs STB 14/4

Test plug PS 4

The VH 19 connecting sleeves and the BS 25 screws or the STB 35 socket plugs are required for fastening the QVS cross-switch bridge. The screws and socket plugs are available with or without coloured labelling.

The STB 35 socket plugs are used in the test-disconnect terminals for holding the PS 4 test plug or the KSS 2-8 short-circuit plug. The STB 35 socket plugs can also be used when you need to test at the same time that a QVS is attached.

The STB 14/4 socket plugs can be screwed into the cross-connection channel. The are used to hold the PS 4 test plugs or the KSS 2-8 short-circuit plugs.

The PS 4 test plugs are used for the final testing of already-wired test circuits.

302 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Test disconnect terminals PTK | Pre-assembled CT-links

CONTA-CLIP test-disconnect terminals are available in the following four basic versions, each with or without pre-assembled STB socket plugs PTK 10/LT/HB can be separated lengthwise

PTK 10/LT can be separated lengthwise

PTK 10/QT can be separated perpendicularly

PTK 10/DU Feed through terminal

PTK 10/LT/STB/HB can be separated lengthwise

PTK 10/LT/STB can be separated lengthwise with STB

PTK 10/QT/STB can be separated perpendicularly with STB

PTK 10/DU/STB Feed through terminal with STB

Examples of basic circuits using PTK disconnect terminals Current transformers must always have a secondary circuit when electricity meters and measuring instruments are being replaced, or when making comparative measurements. Otherwise they could be destroyed by â&#x20AC;&#x153;ramping upâ&#x20AC;?. The following circuits are available pre-aasembled. Pre-assembled CT LINK assembly

0116 284 9900

CT LINKASSY1

CT LINKASSY2

CT LINKASSY3

Single phase

3-phase

3-phase with voltage disconnects

TERMINALS

| 303


Terminals

Test disconnect terminals PTK | CT-links • Foot can be snapped on TS 32 and TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2

Part Number

PTK 10/LT

PTK 10/LT/STB

PTK 10/QT

PTK 10/QT/STB

72 x 8 x 47

72 x 8 x 47

72 x 8 x 47

72 x 8 x 47

10mm

10mm

10mm

10mm2

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) inc covers Wire size Approvals

2

2

2

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

400V

600V

400V

600V

400V

600V

400V

600V

Current

10A

45A

10A

45A

10A

45A

10A

45A

Cross connectors QI 2 - 8mm QI 3 - 8mm QI 4 - 8mm QI 10 - 8mm

End plate

Part Number

QI 2 - 8mm QI 3 - 8mm QI 4 - 8mm QI 10 - 8mm

AP/L/Q/D

AP/L/Q/D

AP/L/Q/D

AP/L/Q/D

PTK 10/DU

PTK 10/DU/STB

PTK 10/LT/HB

PTK 10/LT/STB/HB

72 x 8 x 47

72 x 8 x 47

72 x 8 x 63

72 x 8 x 63

10mm2

10mm2

10mm2

10mm2

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) inc covers Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

400V

600V

400V

600V

400V

600V

400V

600V

Current

10A

45A

10A

45A

10A

45A

10A

45A

Cross connectors QI 2 - 8mm QI 3 - 8mm QI 4 - 8mm QI 10 - 8mm

End plate

304 | TERMINALS

AP/L/Q/D

QI 2 - 8mm QI 3 - 8mm QI 4 - 8mm QI 10 - 8mm

AP/L/Q/D

AP/L/Q/D

AP/L/Q/D

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

RK-Safe-box TS 35 | 100 • • • • •

Mounts on TS 35 rail Material of box: Polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0 Material of lid: Polycarbonate UL 94-V2 3-way sealing options Slide mechanism for maintenance

RK-Safe-Box TS 35 | 100 mm Terminal block enclosure CONTA-CLIP's innovative RK-Safe-Box terminal block enclosure is a quick, simply way to protect the terminals blocks that you've installed on DIN rails (such as converter circuits) from being tampered with. Especially when used in front of the electrical meter for power distribution applications, the RK-Safe-Box is very effective at preventing unauthorized re-wiring or access to converter terminals. The side walls border the mounting plate directly. They thus completely surround the protected components. Feed-through guides lead wires though the walls of the RK-Safe-Box. This simplifies wiring and makes it impossible to manipulate the terminals after the RK-Safe-Box is closed. When the transparent lid is removed, the integrated slide mechanism permits you to extend the interior of the RK-Safe-Box by 16 mm. This makes it easy to perform maintenance and to replace terminals or components. Features • Easy and fast mounting to the TS 35 DIN rail • Optimal mechanical attachment to the DIN rail • Cannot be unlocked or snapped out of the DIN rail after it is mounted • Triple seal option • Transparent lid • Tampering is immediately recognizable • Slide mechanism on the two enclosure halves provides improved access for internal component maintenance.

Part Number

Max installation size (LWH) with TS 35 Protection

RK-SAFEBOX-10CM

73 x 94 x 55 IP 20

* Terminal assembly for illustration only

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 305


Terminals

Thermocouple terminals TSK • Busbar materials in compliance with DIN 43713/43714 • Foot can be snapped on TS 32 and TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2

The TSK series can be used to extend thermocouple measurement circuits without introducing errors caused by incompatible junction materials. The CONTA-CLIP TSK terminals can be used to clearly label the thermocouple terminal pair in use. The busbars on the thermocouple terminals are made of the same materials as the compensating lines, in compliance with DIN 43713/DIN 43714. This ensures thermocouple signals are transmitted accurately on the junction between the thermocouple, thermocouple terminal and compensating line. Thus the base value maintained in accordance with DIN/IEC 584. Features of the TSK 2.5 • Two-pole blocks per thermal pair • Thermal pair is clearly labelled on the terminal block • Terminal width of a thermal pair is 10 mm • Material of busbars corresponds to material of compensating lines.

Part Number

TSK 2.5/T/J/E/K/S/R

Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

Thermocouple probe

48 x 10 x 47

Wire size

2.5mm2

End plate

AP 2.5-10

Thermocouple terminals Compensating line

Part no.

Type

Material

TSK 2.5/T

T-Type

Copper/Constantan Cu/CuNi 44

TSK 2.5/J

J-Type

Iron / Constantan Fe/CuNi 44

TSK 2.5/E

E-Type

Nickel-chrome Constantan NiCr/CuNi 44

TSK 2.5/K

K-Type

Nickel-chrome/Nickel NiCr/Ni

TSK 2.5/S

S-Type

E-copper/A-copper E-Cu/A-Cu

TSK 2.5/R

R-Type

E-copper/A-copper E-Cu/A-Cu

Reference junction Supply line, deliver-/return-wire

Measuring instrument

306 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Terminal blocks with spade connection FF | SF • Busbar materials in compliance with DIN 43713/43714 • Foot can be snapped on TS 32 and TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2

The spade connection is a widely standardized connection method. A spade ferrule corresponding to the crosssection is crimped on to the wire end. The spade ferrule then pushes onto the spade terminal so that the wire contacts the terminal. These terminals can be used for interfaces between electronics and electrical systems or for applications where assembled cables are being used.

Features of the FF 2.5 and SF 2.5-4 • Terminal width of only 6 mm • Connects standard spade plugs of sizes 0.8 x 2.8 mm or 0.8 x 6.3 mm • Spade to screw connection with SF 2.5-4 • Up to 4 spade plugs can be joined wto a single potential in one terminal: FF 2.5 • Can be cross-connected

Part Number

FF 2.5

SF 2.5-4

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) TS35

48 x 6 x 47

48 x 6 x 47

Wire size

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Approvals

IEC

IEC

Voltage

500V

500V

Current

15A

15A

Q2-6mm

Q2-6mm

Q3-6mm

Q3-6mm

Cross connectors

End plate

0116 284 9900

Q4-6mm

Q4-6mm

Q10-6mm

Q10-6mm

AP 2.5-10

AP 2.5-10

TERMINALS

| 307


Terminals

Feed-through terminals for direct mounting RKB | BKA | KBL Screw technology

The RKB, BKA and KBL...-D block terminals are a cost effective connection system which can be snapped together using their pegs to match you required number of poles. An EH end support is snapped onto each end of the block terminals. It provides a 3.5mm hole for a mounting screw. If you are using more poles than available in the Conta-clip product line, we recommend using additional EH end supports at interval in order to maintain the stability. We recommend our MV2/BKA assemble fixture if you would like to link self-contained BKA terminal strips.

BKA 2.5/BKA 4 and BKA 10

Block terminals RKB and KBL...-D

The housings of the BKA 2.5/BKA 4 and BKA 10 block terminals offer touch-safe protection in compliance with VBG 4. The clamping-yoke screw connection system establishes a secure mechanical and electrical contact.

The RKB and KBL...-D block terminals also provide all of the advantages of rail-mounted terminal blocks (such as the interior cross-connection system). Individual covers, test plugs, cross-connectors, etc. are compatible with the standard RK terminal blocks.

The compact design allows you to use the BKA blocks within the most confined spaces. For the BKA 2.5 and BKA 4 variants, the EH 2-Z with snap-in pegs can be attached instead of the EH 2. When using the EH 2-Z, the screw and the thread cutting is not necessary. If you need to use a cross-connection, you can make use of the external crossconnections available in our accessories.

308 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Feed-through terminals for direct mounting RKB | BKA | KBL • Modular assembly • Direct mount • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2

Part Number

BKA 2.5

RKB 4

Pre-assembled

BKA 4

Pre-assembled

Other colours available Connection diagram

BKA 2.5/2

BKA 4/2

BKA 2.5/3 Size (LWH)

27 x 6 x 27.5

22 x 5 x 23

4mm2

2.5mm2

Wire size Approvals

IEC

UL

IEC

500V

300V

400V

300CV

Current

32A

20A

24A

20A

Q 2-1.5*

AQI 2/5/11

Q 3-1.5*

AQI 3/5/11

Q 4-1.5*

AQI 4/5/11

Q 10-1.5*

AQI 10/5/11

BKA 4/5

4mm2

BKA 2.5/6 BKA 2.5/8

UL/cUL

BKA 4/4

22 x 6 x 23

BKA 2.5/5

Voltage

Cross connectors

BKA 4/3

BKA 2.5/4

IEC

BKA 2.5/10 BKA 2.5/12 BKA 2.5/13

BKA 4/6 BKA 4/8

UL/CSA

400V

300V

32A

30A/25A

BKA 2.5/14

BKA 4/10 BKA 4/11 BKA 4/12

AQI 2/6/11

BKA 2.5/15

AQI 3/6/11

BKA 2.5/16

AQI 4/6/11

BKA 2.5/18

AQI 10/6/11

BKA 2.5/20 End support

EH1

EH2

BKA 2.5/24

EH2

Part Number

BKA 10

Pre-assembled

KBL 2.5-D

KBL 2.5-4-D

KBL 6-10-D

Other colours available Connection diagram

BKA 10/2 BKA 10/3 BKA 10/4

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals Voltage Current

30 x 8 x 31

BKA 10/5

48 x 5 x 36.5

48 x 6 x 36.5

48 x 8 x 36.5

10mm

BKA 10/6

2.5mm

4mm2

10mm2

2

IEC

CSAus/CSA

400V

300V

57A

57A

Cross connectors

End support

0116 284 9900

EH3

AQI 2/8/11 AQI 3/8/11 AQI 4/8/11

BKA 10/8 BKA 10/10 BKA 10/12 BKA 10/13 BKA 10/14

2

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

300V

300V

700V

600V

300V

600V

20A

32A

32A

55A

20A

65A

BKA 10/15

Q 2-5mm*

Q 2-6mm*

Q 2-8mm*

BKA 10/18

Q 3-5mm*

Q 3-6mm*

Q 3-8mm*

BKA 10/20

Q 4-5mm*

Q 4-6mm*

Q 4-8mm*

BKA 10/24

Q 10-5mm*

Q10-6mm*

Q10-8mm*

EH4

EH4

EH4

TERMINALS

| 309


Terminals

High-power stud terminals HSKG

Stud technology

Stud connection • Stud sizes: M6, M8, M10, M12 to M16 • Wire with cable lug acc. to DIN 46234: up to 300 mm² • Two cable lugs can be connected per stud

Easy to use • Place cable lugs on the stud • By tightening the steel nut, the cable lugs forms a contact with the other cable lug or with the busbar • Secure contacts • Maintenance-free; subsequent tightening of the nut is not needed • High contact strength and vibration resistance provided by the safety/ spring washer and combi-nut • Direct contact of cable lugs, or contact via copper busbar The newest generation of stud terminals from CONTA-CLIP offers secure connections for all energy-transmitting applications. Depending on the wire cross-section, the HSKG stud terminals can be used with M6, M8, M10, M12 and M16 threaded studs. The rated current is from 125 A to 520 A with a rated voltage of 1000 V. The wire connection range is from 2.5 mm² to 300 mm². Wires with crimped cable lugs are applied to threaded bolts and then connected securely to the busbar by tightening the hex nut. Optimal security is guaranteed by the low voltage drop and by the use of self-extinguishing material with a V0 (UL94) flammability rating.

Mounting options • Sliding lock on both sides: can be attached to TS 35 DIN rail • Direct mount possible using the integrated slots in the housing base

Labelling and testing • Receptacles for standard markers • Openings in the ADH covers for measuring voltage

When used together with the ADH hinged covers, the HSKG stud terminals provide outstanding finger and touch protection. The ADH cover is easy to mount; it simply snaps into the side walls of the stud terminals as it is closed. In this quick and reliable way, touch-safe protection of the terminal points is always guaranteed. Terminal holders and covers made from Polyamide 6.6 V0 • Self-extinguishing, UL94-V0 flammability class • Creepage-current protected, CTI = 600 • Temperature resistance: -40° to +120°C • Spec. contact resistance: 1013 Ohm/cm • Spec. surface resistance: 1015 Ohm/cm • Temp. index, mechanical: 120°C (at 0.8 mm) • Temp. index, electrical: 120°C (at 0.8 mm) • Relative temperature index, electrical: 130°C (at 0.8 mm) • Pollutant-free Standards The following standard terminal block requirements are fulfilled:

• EN 60947-7-1 • EN 50124-1 • DIN EN 61373

310 | TERMINALS

Using the ADH covers Individual ADH… covers are available for each width of stud terminal. They are designed for the different sizes and the corresponding clearance and creepage distances. It is also possible to shorten the covers along precreased breakage points. The ADH cover is attached by pressing the cover down onto the base terminal so that the cover snaps onto the terminal.

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

High-power stud terminals HSKG • • • •

Part Number

TS 35 DIN rail or direct mount Integrated washers - ‘Combi-nut’ Stud connection Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

HSKG 35/M6/B/B

HSKG 70/M8/B/B

HSKG 120/M10/B/B

HSKG 185/M12/B/B

HSKG 300/M16/B/B

M6

M8

M10

M12

M16

Stud size Connection diagram

Size (LWH) inc covers

131 x 27 x 60

180 x 32 x 70

226 x 42 x 80

288 x 55 x 90

288 x 55 x 90

35mm

70mm

120mm

185mm

300mm2

Wire size Approvals

2

2

2

2

IEC

UL/cUL*

IEC

UL/cUL*

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

UL/cUL

Voltage

1000V

1000V/600V

1000V

1000V/600V

1000V

1000V/600V

1000V

1000V/600V

1000V

1000V/600V

Current

125A

115A/130A

192A

175A/170A

269A

310/310A

353A

380A/360A

520A

500A/510A

Cross connection rail

Cover profile

QS2/35/6

QS2/70/8

QS2/120/10

QS2/185/12

QS2/300/16

QS3/35/6

QS3/70/8

QS3/120/10

QS3/185/12

QS3/300/16

ADH35

ADH70

ADH120

ADH185/300

ADH185/300

Cover colours *Approval applied for

Test probe opening

Cross connection plate

Flexible marking options Additional bolting options

TS mount / direct mount

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 311


Terminals

Distribution blocks SVB Screw technology

The SVB screw-type distributor block makes it possible to distribute potential and power in a compact space without any additional accessories. You can use the distributor block to establish an electromechanical connection between a wire with a large cross-section and one or more wires with small cross-sections. They can be used in installation and distribution board construction and also in controller construction for machinery. The SVB blocks are mounted by snapping them on to TS 35 DIN rails. They can also be attached directly to a mounting plate using the screw flange located on the side of the housing.

312 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Distribution blocks SVB • High short-circuit resistance rating • IP20-class protection • Foot base can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rail or suitable for direct mounting • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0 SVB 80

SVB 125

SVB 175

SVB 250

SVB 400

66 x 27 x 47

75 x 27 x 47

71 x 45 x 43

96 x 44 x 50

96 x 44 x 50

Part Number

Dimensions (L x W x H) Directly installed Size with TS 35 x 7.5 mm Connection data – Inputs Number of connections Clampable Wire size mm2 Connection data – Outputs Number of connections Clampable Wire size mm2

66 x 27 x 50 A

75 x 27 x 50

B

C

A

B

71 x 45 x 46 C

A

96 x 44 x 55

B

C

A

96 x 44 x 53

B

C

A

1

1

1

1

1

1

2.5 - 16

10 - 35

2.5 - 16

16 - 70

35 - 120

95 - 185

A

B

A

B

C

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

B

C

2

4

6

10

2

5

4

2

5

4

2.5 - 16

2.5 - 6

2.5 - 16

2.5 - 16

6 - 35

1.5 - 16

1.5 - 10

6 - 35

1.5 - 16

1.5 - 10

Approvals

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

Voltage

1000V

600V

Current

80A

80A

UL/cUL

IEC

1000V

600V

125A

115A

1000V

600V

175A

115A

Rated cross section for input and output mm2

16 | 16 - 6

35 - 16 |16

70 | 16

Part Number

SVB 160

SVB 175/3

SVB 125/4

92 x 35 x 50

71 x 80 x 50

74 x 98 x 43

UL

IEC

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

250A

230A

400A

310A

120 | 35 - 16 - 10

UL

185 | 35 - 16 - 10

Dimensions (L x W x H) Directly installed Size with TS 35 x 7.5 mm

92 x 35 x 54

Connection data – Inputs

A

Number of connections

1

Clampable Wire size mm

2

71 x 80 x 46

B

C

A

Number of connections

6

B

74 x 98 x 53 C

3x1

10 - 70

Connection data – Outputs

A

16 - 70 B

C

A

A

B

C

3x1

3x5

3x2

1.5 - 6

4 - 16

6 - 35 B

C

Neutral in/out

Busbar

3x6

2.5 - 16

16 x 5mm max

2.5 - 16

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

UL/cUL

IEC

Voltage

1000V

600V

1000V

600V

690V

Current

160A

160A

175A

115/175A

125A

Clampable Wire size mm Approvals

Rated cross section for input and output mm2

0116 284 9900

2

70 | 126

1

4

6 - 35

70 | 16

1.5 - 6

6 4 - 16 UL/cUL

35 | 16

TERMINALS

| 313


Terminals

Feed-through terminals ZRK | ZSL Proven – Safe – Reliable Tension spring technology

The connection | secure contact

Pluggable cross-connection options

The tension-spring at the wire connection is held securely by the positioned busbar. • The stainless steel spring provides permanent contact force between the wire and the busbar

Distributing potentials with the pluggable ZQI cross-connection system is quick and easy. Two cross-connection channels allow two voltages to be fed across when working with the standard terminals with rated crosssections of 2.5 mm2 and 4 mm2

• Clear separation of electrical and mechanical functions

• Available in 2 – 10 and 99 poles (for custom assemblies)

• The busbars are made from copper with surface coating (tin)

• Simple to insert and thus quicker to install

• Resistant to vibration and maintenance-free

• No insCSAusation plate or partition plate is required between a neighbouring cross-connection, since the ZQI has a touch-safe protective design

• Corrosion-free • Space-saving design • Foot base can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rail

• Cross-connection can carry the fCSAusl rated current and voltage of the corresponding terminal block • Individual terminals can be skipped over by breaking out contact pins in the cross-connector

314 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Feed-through terminals compact ZSRK | ZSLN • Foot can be snapped on TS 15 or TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

Part Number

ZSRK 2.5/2A/15

ZSRK 2.5/3A/15

ZSRK 2.5/2A

ZSRK 2.5/3A

40 x 5.1 x 34

52.5 x 5.1 x 34 (44)

43.5 x 5.1 x 36.5

55 x 5.1 x 36.5 (46.5)

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

800V

300V

800V

300V

800V

300V

800V

200V

Current

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

20A

Cross connectors

End plate

Part Number

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/0.5 m/99

ZQI 2.5/0.5 m/99

ZQI 2.5/0.5 m/99

ZQI 2.5/0.5 m/99

ZAP-SR

ZAP-SR3/15

ZAP-SR3

ZAP-SR3

ZSLN2.5/2A/15

ZSLN 2.5/3A/15

ZSLN 2.5/2A

ZSLN 2.5/3A

Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

40 x 5.1 x 34

52.5 x 5.1 x 34 (44)

43.5 x 5.1 x 36.5

55 x 5.1 x 36.5 (46.5)

Wire size

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

End plate

ZAP-SR-GREEN

ZAP-SR3/15-GREEN

ZAP-SR-GREEN

ZAP-SR3/GREEN

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 315


Terminals

Feed-through terminals ZRK | ZSL • Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

Part Number

ZRK 2.5/2A

ZRK 2.5/3A

ZRK 2.5/4A

ZRK 2.5/2 x 2A

59 x 5.1 x 39

71.3 x 5.1 x 39

83.6 x 5.1 x 39

83.6 x 5.1 x 39

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

800V

600V

800V

600V

800V

600V

800V

600V

Current

24A

27A

24A

27A

24A

27A

24A

27A

Cross connectors

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/0.5 m/99

ZQI 2.5/0.5 m/99

ZQI 2.5/0.5 m/99

End plate

ZAP 2.5/2A

ZAP 2.5/3A

ZAP 2.5/4A

Part Number

ZSL 2.5/2A

ZSL 2.5/3A

ZSL 2.5/4A

ZAP 2.5/4A

Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

59 x 5.1 x 39

71.3 x 5.1 x 39

83.6 x 5.1 x 39

Wire size

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

End plate

ZAP 2.5/2A-GREEN

ZAP 2.5/3A-GREEN

ZAP 2.5/4A-GREEN

316 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Feed-through terminals ZRK | ZSL • Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

ZRK 4/2A

ZRK 4/3A

ZRK 4/4A

ZRK 4/2 x 2A

64 x 6.1 x 42

78.5 x 6.1 x 42

93 x 6.1 x 42

64 x 6.1 x 42

4mm2

4mm2

4mm2

4mm2

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

800V

600V

800V

600V

800V

600V

800V

600V

Current

32A

35A

32A

35A

32A

35A

32A

35A

Cross connectors

ZQI 4/2

ZQI 4/2

ZQI 4/2

ZQI 4/3

ZQI 4/3

ZQI 4/3

ZQI 4/4

ZQI 4/4

ZQI 4/4

ZQI 4/10

ZQI 4/10

ZQI 4/10

End plate

ZAP 4/2A

ZAP 4/3A

ZAP 4/4A

Part Number

ZSL 4/2A

ZSL 4/3A

ZSL 4/4A

ZAP 4/4A

Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

64 x 6.1 x 42

78.5 x 6.1 x 42

93 x 6.1 x 42

Wire size

4mm2

4mm2

4mm2

End plate

ZAP 4/2A-GREEN

ZAP 4/3A-GREEN

ZAP 4/4A-GREEN

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 317


Terminals

Feed-through terminals ZRK | ZSL • Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

ZRK 6/2A

ZRK 10/2A

ZRK 16/2A

64 x 8.1 x 47.5

73.5 x 10.1 x 50.5

81.5 x 12.1 x 51.5

6mm2

10mm2

16mm2

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

1000V

600V

1000V

500V

1000V

1000V

Current

41A

50A

57A

55A

76A

Cross connectors

ZQI 6/2

65A

ZQI 10/2

ZQI 16/2

ZQI 6/3 ZQI 6/4 ZQI 6/10

End plate

ZAP 6/2A

ZAP 10/2A

ZAP 16/2A

Part Number

ZSL 6/2A

ZSL 10/2A

ZSL 16/A

64 x 8.1 x 47.5

73.5 x 10.1 x 50.5

81.5 x 12.1 x 51.5

Wire size

6mm2

10mm2

16mm2

End plate

ZAP 6/2A-GREEN

ZAP 10/2A-GREEN

ZAP 16/2A-GREEN

Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

318 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

ZSRK | SRK accessories Warning signs and shrouds VDE regulations require that the mains terminals be covered. The yellow ZAD covers (labelled with a lightning flash) are used to cover the operational channel, thus they discourage operation of the terminal while live voltage is present.

Part number

Pitch Material For terminal

ZAD 2.5/4/B

ZAD 4/4/B

ZAD 6/4/B

ZAD 10/4/B

5.1 mm

6.1 mm

8.1 mm

10.1 mm

12 mm

PA 6.6 V0

PA 6.6 V0

PA 6.6 V0

PA 6.6 V0

PA 6.6 V0

ZSRK 2.5… ZSLN 2.5… ZRK 2.5… ZSL 2.5… ZRKD 2.5… ZSLD 2.5… ZIKD 2.5… ZTRK 2.5… ZVMAK 2.5… ZIZA 1.5…

ZRK 4… ZSL 4…

ZRK 10… ZSL 10…

ZRK 10… ZSL 10…

ZRK 16… ZSL 16…

ZAD 16/4/B

Actuating tools BWMA/BW The ZSRK/ZRK spring terminals with 2.5 mm2 cross-section can be operated using the BW 1 to BW 10 tools and the BWMA metallic tool. The special BW tools allow you to open multiple terminal points simultaneously. The plastic actuating tool features improved safety when working on running facility sections.

0116 284 9900

BWMA 1 (0.5 X 3.5)

BW…(ZRK)

BW (ZRK)

Metal actuating tool

Plastic actuating tool

Plastic actuating tool

BWMA 1 (0.5 X 3.5)

BW 1 (ZRK)

BW 6 (ZRK)

-

BW 2 (ZRK)

BW 7 (ZRK)

-

BW 3 (ZRK)

BW 8 (ZRK)

-

BW 4 (ZRK)

BW 9 (ZRK)

-

BW 5 (ZRK)

BW 10 (ZRK)

TERMINALS

| 319


Terminals

Double-level terminal blocks ZRKD 2.5 | ZSLD 2.5 Tension spring technology

With a width of just 5 mm, the new ZRKD series is available in thirteen versions and connects with stranded or solid wires up to 24 mm² with a rated current of up to 24A. Solid and stranded wires with wire-end ferrules can be inserted into the connection system with a tool or standard screwdriver. Inserting the tool opens the tension spring for easy conductor insertion. When closed, the conductor is securely clamped against the internal busbar. The PE foot from CONTA-CLIP that contacts the PE potential to the DIN rail is designed to contact on both sides. This means that more material is required; however this offers more safety in the area around the protective earth contact. In all the ZSL series, the foot construction and busbar are made of a single piece of copper. This solid, contiguous construction guarantees low contact resistance as well as the high security of the internal-spring PE contact foot.

Cross-connection system The upper and lower levels can be cross-connected using the ZQI 2,5/â&#x20AC;Ś standard cross-connections. The ZQI insulated cross-connections have a pluggable design and are available with from 2 to 10 poles. They cross connect up to the rated current of the relevant ZRKD terminals.

Vertical connection ZVQI

Colour coding

The upper and lower levels can be connected to each other using the ZVQI vertical cross-connector.

The upper and lower levels can be supplied with colour splash to indicate /N blue and /PE Green/Yellow (for example, ZRKD 2,5 N-PE)

320 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Double-level terminal blocks ZRKD 2.5 | ZSLD 2.5 • Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

ZRKD 2.5

ZRKD 2.5 SV

ZRKD 2.5 N-DU

ZRKD 2.5 DU-PE

ZRKD 2.5 N-PE

83.6 x 5.1 x 64

83.6 x 5.1 x 64

83.6 x 5.1 x 64

83.6 x 5.1 x 64

83.6 x 5.1 x 64

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

Current

24A

10A

24A

10A

24A

10A

24A

10A

24A

Cross connectors

End plate

10A

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAPD 2.5

ZAPD 2.5

ZAPD 2.5

ZAPD 2.5

ZAPD 2.5

ZSLD 2.5

ZBA Labelling Adapter for ZRKD 2.5

83.6 x 5.1 x 64

22 x 5 x 11

Part Number

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size

2.5mm2

End plate

ZAPD 2.5-GREEN

Connecting the PE foot onto the DIN rail As with all CONTA-CLIP PE terminals, the ZSLD terminals also implement a two-sided contact with the DIN rail. In all the ZRK series, the foot construction and busbar are made of a single piece of copper. This solid, contiguous construction guarantees low contact resistance as well as the high security of the internal-spring PE contact foot.

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 321


Terminals

Three-level terminals ZIKD 2.5 | Motor-connection terminal ZVMAK Tension spring technology

Three-level terminal blocks ZIKD 2.5 The ZIKD 2.5 terminal blocks have a width of 5 mm and are available in a variety of designs. They have three levels with six connection points and can handle solid or stranded wires up to 2.5 mm2 with a rated current up to 24A. The lower level is designed as a feed-through or PE connection. All levels can be cross-connected to neighbouring terminal blocks. You can also use a vertical connector to bridge them within a terminal block.

PE foot on both sides

Vertical connection ZVQI

Cross-connection ZQI on 3 levels

Four-level terminal blocks ZVMAK 2,5 The ZVMAK 2.5 has a width of 5mm. It has four levels with seven connection points and can handle solid or stranded wires up to 2.5 mm² with a rated current up to 24A. The lower level is designed as a PE connection. The PE foot contacts both sides of the DIN rail, thus ensuring optimal electrical security. The ZVMAK motor-connection terminals can be cross-connected using the AQI external cross connection.

PE foot on both sides

322 | TERMINALS

External cross-connection AQI

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Three-level terminals ZIKD 2.5 | Motor-connection terminal ZVMAK • Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rails • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

ZIKD 2.5

ZIKD 2.5 SV

ZIKD 2.5 L/L/N

ZIKD 2.5 PE/L/N

ZIKD 2.5 PE/L/L

116.2 x 5.1 x 68

116.2 x 5.1 x 68V

116.2 x 5.1 x 68

116.2 x 5.1 x 68

116.2 x 5.1 x 68

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

Current

24A

15A

24A

15A

24A

15A

24A

15A

24A

Cross connectors

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAP/ID 2.5

ZAP/ID 2.5

ZAP/ID 2.5

ZAP/ID 2.5

ZAP/ID 2.5

ZIKD 2.5 PE/N/N

ZIKD 2.5 SV/PE

ZVMAK 2.5

116.2 x 5.1 x 68

116.2 x 5.1 x 68V

103.5 x 5.1 x 73

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

End plate

Part Number

15A

ZQI 2.5/2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

500V

300V

400V

300V

Current

24A

15A

24A

Cross connectors

15A

ZQI 2.5/2

AQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

AQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4 ZQI 2.5/9 ZQI 2.5/10 ZQI 2.5/99 End plate

0116 284 9900

ZAP/IK 2.5-BLUE

(External) ZAP/IK 2.5-GREEN

ZAP-MA TERMINALS

| 323


Terminals

Disconnect and fuse terminals ZTRK Tension spring technology

The ZTRK base terminal line can be combined in different ways with the product-related line of accessories as two-wire, three-wire and four-wire variants. Without any assembly, the three base terminals can receive auto-fuses or diode plugs. Alternatively, the base terminals are available equipped with a disconnect blade or a fuse holder for G fuses. The functions of all versions can be changed by removing or adding the disconnect blade, the fuse holder, or the diode plug. The plug-in fuse holders are available as models with or without a status display. They offer great flexibility, easy handling and a wide selection of 5x 20 G fuses. Solid and stranded wires with or without wire-end ferrules can be inserted into the connection system with the use of an actuating tool. The tension spring establishes a secure contact between the conductive wire and the busbar.

ZDS/ZTR

Disconnect/Diode plug

ZS/H…./ZTR

For the fuse and disconnect terminals with tension-spring connections, there are many terminals blocks with disconnect blade and disconnect plug available, as well as a fuse holder for auto-fuses and micro-fuses. Each of the tension-spring terminal blocks can be equipped with the standard accessories: the ZQI 2.5 (cross connector) and the PMC SB 5 (quick marking system).

Disconnect terminals ZTRK 2.5/…/MT and ZTRK 2.5/…/ST Disconnect terminals are often used in measurement, regulation and control technology in order to simplify troubleshooting and in order to be able to commission new systems or carry out revisions on older systems. In the tension-spring system, two models (disconnect-plug/disconnect-blade) are available in the base terminal variations of 2-, 3- and 4- wire systems The proven ZDS|ZTR disconnect-plug and ZTRK 2.5…/MT disconnectblade systems with high surface quality and, therefore, low and stable transitional resistance, ensures accurate measurement results. They distinguish themselves by their narrow construction of only 5 mm and a high current capacity of 18A. In addition to the ZTR disconnect-plug models (feed-through connection), ZDS diode plugs (I N 4007) are also available. It is easy to distribute potential voltages in combination with the pluggable ZQI cross connectors.

Fuse plug for 5 x 20 fuses

ZS/H…./ZTR

Plug for fuses with LED

Fuse holder for micro-fuse/auto-fuse ZTRK 2.5/…/OT with auto-fuse and ZTRK 2.5/…/ZS The base terminals can hold auto-fuses without needing any accessories. With the fuse plug ZS/H, available in five variations, 5 x 20 fuses can be accommodated. Due to the special construction of the base terminal/fuse holder, the fuse plugs can be inserted in alternate directions on a pitch of only 5mm. The fuse plugs are available in variations with or without status display (different voltage ranges). With a rated voltage of 400V, the rated current of the fuse plug is 6.3A. In combination with the pluggable ZQI cross connectors, it is easy to distribute voltage potentials. A measurement pick-off can be made on each individual terminal block using the test channel and the ZTA 2.5 test adapter of the PS 2.3 test plug.

Cross-connector ZQI The ZQI insulated cross-connections have a pluggable design and are available with from 2 to 10 and 99 poles. They cross connect up to the rated current of the relevant ZTRK terminals.

324 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Disconnect and fuse terminals ZTRK | FSIK • •

Part Number

Foot can be snapped on TS 35 DIN rails Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

ZTRK 2.5/2A/MT

ZTRK 2.5/3A/MT

ZTRK 2.5/4A/MT

ZTRK 2.5/2A/ST

ZTRK 2.5 3A/ST

68 x 5.1 x 42.3

80.2 x 5.1 x 42.3

92.4 x 5.1 x 42.3

68 x 5.1 x 57.1

80.2 x 5.1 x 57.1

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals Voltage Current

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

400V

400V

400V

400V

400V

18A

18A

18A

18A

18A

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAPT 2.5/2A

ZAPT 2.5/3A

ZAPT 2.5/4A

ZAPT 2.5/2A

ZAPT 2.5/3A

ZTRK 2.5/4A/ST

ZTRK 2.5/2A/ZS

ZTRK 2.5/3A/ZS

ZTRK 2.5/4A/ZS

FSIK 4/2A

92.4 x 5.1 x 57.1

68 x 5.1 x 78.7

80.2 x 5.1 x 78.7

92.4 x 5.1 x 78.7

67.5 x 6.1 x 70

Wire size

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm

Approvals

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC*

Voltage

400V

400V

400V

400V

250V

300

Current

18A

18A

18A

18A

6.3A

6.3A

5 x 20

5 x 20

5 x 20

5 x 20

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

FQI 4/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

FQI 4/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

FQI 4/4

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

FQI 4/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAPT 2.5/4A

ZAPT 2.5/2A

ZAPT 2.5/3A

ZAPT 2.5/4A

FAPSI 4

Cross connectors

End plate

Part Number

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

2

Fuse size mm Cross connectors

End plate

0116 284 9900

2

2

2

UL/cUL*

TERMINALS

| 325


Terminals

Compact terminal series for direct mounting ZSRK | ZSLN Tension spring technology

The ZSRK 2.5/2A/D/F and ZSRK 2.5/2A/RC are direct-mount tensionspring terminals with interior cross-connection channels. The have a compact, modular design with a clamping range of 0.08 - 2.5 mm² and a rated voltage of 800 V. They allow you to mount a terminal block with the number of poles you need. This block can then be directly screwed on to the mounting plate (with the ZSRK 2.5/2A/D/F) or directly snapped on (with the ZSRK 2.5/2A/RC).

It is possible to label with the SB or PMC quick marking systems at each clamping point. If a cross-connection is not being used, that crossconnection channel can be used instead as a labelling channel. Clarity for wiring is ensured with a terminal width of only 5 mm and the tension-spring TOP connection.

These direct-mount terminals can be used for series production and for installations in cramped working conditions. Individual connection groupings or circuits can be visually separated from one other by the different housing colours. Potentials can be multiplied via the interior cross-connection channel with the ZQI 2.5 standard crossconnections (available in 2 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 10 poles and 99 poles).

ZSRK 2.5 direct-mount with screw flange

326 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Compact terminal series for direct mounting ZSRK | ZSLN • Direct mounting – snap-in or screw flange • Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0

Part Number

ZSRK 2.5/2A/D

ZSLN 2.5/2A/D

ZSRK 2.5/2A-RC

ZSLN 2.5/2A/RC

ZSRK 2.5/2A-D/F

40 x 5.1 x 24

40 x 5.1 x 24

40 x 5.1 x 24

40 x 5.1 x 24

40 x 11.1 x 24

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

800V

300V

Current

24A

Cross connectors

IEC

CSAus/CSA

20A

CSAus/CSA 300V

24A

IEC

CSAus/CSA

20A

IEC

CSAus/CSA

800V

300V

24A

20A

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAP-SR-RC

ZAP-SR-RC

End plate

Part Number

IEC 800V

ZSLN 2.5/2A-D/F

ZEH 1

40 x 11.1 x 24

40 x 11.1 x 24

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage Current Cross connectors

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/9

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

End plate

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 327


Terminals

Pluggable tension-spring connection system ZST Tension spring pluggable technology

Conta-Clip's modular and flexible ZST connectivity solutions are in demand wherever off-the-shelf functional units need to be connected or replaced. Using the ZST tension-spring connection system, pluggable wiring is possible up to a rated current of 24 A, a rated voltage of 500 V, and a cross-section range of 0.5 mm² to 4 mm². Advantages of the ZST connection: • Quick installation and mounting • Flexible and modular building block principle • High level of wiring safety due to unique coding option • Highest mechanical stability of the pluggable elements in the base terminals The connection | Contact security The tension spring for the wire connection is held securely by the busbar. • The stainless steel spring provides permanent contact force between the wire and the busbar

Pluggable cross-connection options • Available in 2 – 10 and 99 poles (for custom assemblies) • Simple to insert and thus quicker to install • No insulation plates or partition plates required between neighbouring cross-connections, since the ZQIs have a touchsafe protective design • Cross-connection can carry the full rated current and voltage of the corresponding terminal block • Individual terminals can be skipped over by breaking out contact pins in the cross-connector Housing insulation material • Polyamide PA6.6 UL 94, flammability class V0, self-extinguishing without burning drops • Free of hazardous materials such as halogen or phosphor • Creepage resistance: CTI 600 • Temperature resistant -40˚C to +120˚C

• There is a clear separation of electrical and mechanical functions

Pluggable contact

• The busbars are made from copper with tin surface coating

• Rated current 24 A

• Resistant to vibration and maintenance-free

• Rated voltage 500 V

• Corrosion-free

• Vibration resistant

Quick and easy to wire

• Codable

The easy-to-operate tension-spring connection mechanism reduces your wiring times. • Easy to work with • Easy to operate, even under cramped working conditions, because of the TOP connection • Generous wire-entry geometry • Saves time and money • PE foot contact on both sides – can be snapped on (no screws) to TS 35 x 7.5 and TS 35 x 15 rails • Space-saving design

328 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Pluggable tension-spring connection system ZST • • • •

Part Number

Flexible mounts TS 15, TS 35 or as flying lead coupling Finger-touch safe construction Codable Freely configurable

ZSTK 2.5/1A/1S-H/B

ZSTK 2.5/1A/1S-H/15

ZSTK 2.5/1A/1S-H/35

ZST 2.5/1A

ZST 2.5/1A/Q

40 x 5.1 x 19

40 x 5.1 x 33

44 x 5.1 x 35

26 x 5.1 x 16.5

26 x 5.1 x 21

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size

2

2

2

2

Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

IEC*

UL/CSA*

IEC*

UL/CSA*

IEC*

UL/CSA*

IEC*

UL/CSA*

Voltage

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

500V

300V

Current

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

20A

24A

Cross connectors

20A ZQI 2.5/2 ZQI 2.5/3 ZQI 2.5/4 ZQI 2.5/10 ZQI 2.5/99

End plate

Part Number

ZAPSK1A1S

ZAPSK1A1S

ZAPSK1A1S

ZAPST1A

ZAPST1AQ

ZRKS 2.5/1A/1S

ZSLS 2.5/1A/1S

ZRKS 2.5/1A/2S

ZSLS 2.5/1A/2S

ZRKS 2.5/2A/1S

54 x 5.1 x 39.5

54 x 5.1 x 39.5

72.5 x 5.1 x 39.5

72.5 x 5.1 x 39.5

64 x 5.1 x 39.5

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size

2

2

Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

Voltage

500V

Current

24A

Cross connectors

End plate

IEC*

2

UL/CSA*

2

IEC*

UL/CSA*

300V

500V

20A

24A

IEC*

UL/ CSA*

IEC*

UL/CSA*

300V

500V

300V

20A

24A

20A

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAPS1A2S

ZAPS1A2S-GRN

ZAPS2.5/2A/1S

ZAPS2.5/1A/1S

ZAPS2.5/1A/1SGN

*Approval applied for

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 329


Terminals

Pluggable tension-spring connection system ZST • • • •

Part Number

Flexible mounts TS 15, TS 35 or as flying lead coupling Finger-touch safe construction Codable Freely configurable

ZSLS 2.5/2A/1S

ZRKS 2.5/2A/2S

ZSLS 2.5/2A/2S

ZRKS 2.5/2S

ZSLS 2.5/2S

64 x 5.1 x 39.5

82 x 5.1 x 39.5

82 x 5.1 x 39.5

54 x 5.1 x 39.5

54 x 5.1 x 39.5

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Wire size Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

Voltage Current

Part Number

UL/CSA* 300V

24A

Cross connectors

End plate

IEC* 500V

IEC*

UL/CSA*

20A

IEC*

UL/CSA*

500V

300V

24A

IEC*

UL/CSA*

20A

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAPS2.5/2A/1SGN

ZAPS2A2S

ZAPS2A2S-GREEN

ZAPS2.52S

ZAPS2.52S-GREEN

ZRKS 2.5/4S

ZSLS 2.5/4S

ZST-V

ZST-Z

ZST-C

Locking clip

Strain relief

Coding pin

Other colours available Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

90 x 5.1 x 39.5

90 x 5.1 x 39.5

2.5mm2

2.5mm2

Wire size Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

Voltage

500V

300V

Current

24A

Cross connectors

End plate

IEC*

UL/CSA*

20A ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/2

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/3

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/4

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/10

ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/99

ZAP2.54S

ZAP2.54S-GREEN

*Approval applied for

330 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals Wall bushing for ZST • • • •

Versatile and easy installation Finger-touch safe construction Codable Freely configurable

Wall bushing for ZST

Advantages of wall bushings for the ZST:

CONTA-CLIP's modular and flexible ZST connection systems are in high demand wherever off-the-shelf units need to be connected or replaced. Pluggable wiring is thus permitted up to a rated current of 24A and a rated voltage of 500V. Effective panel feed-through bushings can be constructed simply by snapping the ZST-WA mounting adapter onto the ZSTK 2.5/.../B coupling element. These multi-pole units snap on sideways to the panel; the pressure on the inner slide mechanism ensures a secure attachment to the housing! The outer connector unit can be optionally fitted with locking elements.

• Quick installation and mounting • Flexible and modular building block principle • High level of wiring safety due to unique coding option • Outstanding mechanical attachment of the pluggable elements in the coupling element for the wall bushing

Creating the cut-out in the wall The height of the rectangular cut-out in the wall does not change. The length, however, varies depending on the number of aligned poles in the coupling/plug unit.

Part Number

ZSTK 2.5/1A/1S-H/B

Other colours available

ZST-WAV1

ZST-WA1

Locking pins

Wall adapter

Connection diagram

Size (LWH)

40 x 5.1 x 19

Wire size

44 x 14 x 19

2.5mm2

Approvals

IEC*

UL/CSA*

Voltage

500V

300V

Current

24A

End plate

20A ZAPSK

*Approval applied for

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 331


Terminals

Initiator / Actuator terminals ZIZA | ZMP distribution terminals Tension spring technology

In order to start-up electromechanical functions in machinery and facilities, a link must be established from signal emitters (sensors and limit switches), actuators (valves) and alerts (beacons and sounders) with the controller. These signals are consolidated in decentralized units in order to reduce the wiring overhead and speed up the troubleshooting process. Exacting demands are placed on the connection system that is used in the cramped, hard-to-reach installations for machinery and facilities. Our ZINI/ZAKTO – consisting of the ZIZA base terminals and the ZPL potential distribution strip – is perfectly suited for such exacting requirements. The ZIZA base terminal is designed to feed the sense/control signal level through. It enables the attachment of ZPL potential distribution strips (plus, minus and PE potentials). The potential distribution strip consists of a individual slice each having one electrical connection. Depending on the application, these individual slices can be linked to achieve the required number of poles. No additional cross-connector is needed since the potential distribution strip established its own electrical cross-connection using the base terminal. The ZMP 1.5 potential distribution system makes it possible for the encoder, input, and control voltages (required centrally) to distribute their voltage supplies. It is easy to work with because of the modular design. The number of poles required is determined by the user’s application. The ZMP consists of ZMP 1.5 base terminals with four slots for plugging in the ZPL potential distribution strips. The patented, integrated cross-connection system on the ZPL potential distribution strip results in reduced costs and less time spent with cross-connections. The potential distribution strips are colour-coded (beige, brown, blue, green-yellow, yellow, green, orange and red). Four potentials – together with the ZBA labelling adapters – can be led in parallel in addition to many adjacent potentials. The system is compact, modular, and easy to work with. It is designed for 400 V and a current of 17.5 A.

The ZINI/Zakto labelling adapter The ZBA labelling adapter is used to label the side-by-side ZPL potential distribution strips. The ZBA is also used to separate two different potentials within the ZPL slot on the base terminals. In contrast to the ZBA 2, the ZBA 2/Z has pegs which form a mechanical (but electrically-separated) connection within a receiving channel. The ZBA 2/Z/H features a larger labelling surface which also simplifies the task of separating the contact on the ZPL potential distribution strip from the base terminals.

332 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Initiator / Actuator terminals ZIZA | ZMP • • • •

Foot can be snapped on TS35 DIN rails Housing made from polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V0 Modular or pre-assembled options Pluggable cross connectors (ZQI)

Part Number

ZIZA 1.5/3

ZIZA 1.5/3/B

ZIZA 1.5/3/PE

ZIZA 1.5/4

ZIZA 1.5/4/B

ZIZA 1.5/4/PE

ZMP 1.5

Initiator/actuator terminals 4 connections

Initiator/actuator terminals 2 connections

Initiator/actuator terminals 5 connections

Initiator/actuator terminals 3 connections

Patch panel 4 connections

68.7 x 5.1 x 40.5

68.7 x 5.1 x 40.5

82 x 5.1 x 40.5

82 x 5.1 x 40.5

68.7 x 5.1 x 40.5

0.5-1.5 mm

0.5-1.5 mm

0.5-1.5 mm

0.5-1.5 mm

0.5-1.5 mm2

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) Contact wire range Approvals

2

2

2

2

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

400 V

300 V

400 V

300 V

400 V

300 V

400 V

300 V

400 V

300 V

Current

17.5 A

12.5 A

17.5 A

12.5 A

17.5 A

12.5 A

17.5 A

12.5 A

17.5 A

12.5 A

End plate

ZAP TW -ZIZA 1.5/3

ZAP TW -ZIZA 1.5/3

ZAP TW-ZIZA 1.5/4

ZAP TW-ZIZA 1.5/4

ZAP-ZMP

Part Number

ZIZA 1.5/3/…/POL

ZIZA 1.5/3/…/POL/PE

ZIZA 1.5/4/…/POL/PE

ZPL 1.5

ZBA 2

Other colours available Terminal block 4 connections per signal

Terminal block 4 connections per signal

Terminal block 4 connections per signal

ZIZA 1.5/3/8

ZIZA 1.5/3/8 PE

ZIZA 1.5/4/8 PE

ZIZA 1.5/3/9

-

-

Type

Size (LWH)

ZIZA 1.5/3/10 PE

ZIZA 1.5/4/10 PE

ZIZA 1.5/3/16 PE

ZIZA 1.5/4/16 PE

ZIZA 1.5/3/17

-

-

68.7 x *X x 40.5

68.7 x *X x 40.5

82 x *X x 40.5

0.5-1.5 mm2

0.5-1.5 mm2

0.5-1.5 mm2

Contact wire range Approvals

ZIZA 1.5/3/10 ZIZA 1.5/3/16

Potential distribution strip

ZBA 2/Z/H 0.5-1.5 mm2

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

IEC

CSAus/CSA

Voltage

400 V

300 V

400 V

300 V

400 V

300 V

400 V

300 V

Current

17.5 A

12.5 A

17.5 A

12.5 A

17.5 A

12.5 A

17.5 A

12.5 A

Cross connector

ZQI 2.5/2 to ZQI 2.5/10 ZQI 2.5/99

ZQI 2.5/2 to ZQI 2.5/10 ZQI 2.5/99

ZBA 2/Z

ZQI 2.5/2 to ZQI 2.5/10 ZQI 2.5/99

*X = number poles x 5.1mm plus ends

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 333


Terminals

Shield-connection clip SAB Spring clip technology

A high degree of interference immunity is demanded of the electrical equipment used in industrial processing applications. This is a critical factor that influences the availability of industrial measurement and control systems. When constructing low-interference systems, both the cable shielding and the shielded ground are very important. The juncture where the cable shielding connects to the housing ground is a critical point. The connection should be low-ohm and should also feature minimal inductive resistance. You should be certain that this connection can be established in a practical, simple and quick manner. The rich feature set of CONTA-CLIP's SAB/SSAB clip meets all of these requirements. Busbar mounting with the SAB The SAB can be mounted on a busbar. After connecting the wiring, the shield-connection clip is mounted by simply swivelling the SAB clip onto the busbar. The force on the cable comes from a spring-pressure piece. This regulated pressure ensures a constant optimal contact. This makes the SAB shield-connection clip very convenient to wire. Depending on the length of the terminal blocks, two or more SH/SAB busbar supports should be used. These mechanically connect the front busbar with the DIN rail (support).

The SH1 busbar supports are used where a shield-connection system must be mounted directly onto a panel rather than a DIN rail. The 10 x 3 busbars can be easily and quickly snapped on to these supports. In both cases, the contact with the earth or ground potential can be established with a ZB clamping yoke.

Direct mounting for the SAB…/D The SAB…/D can be mounted directly. The force on the cable comes from a spring-pressure piece. This regulated pressure ensures a constant optimal contact. The SAB… /D can be installed with an M4 screw (included in delivery) directly to the mounting plate. The SAB 8/D M5 shield-connection clip comes with a special feature; it is equipped with a self-cutting M5 SW3 metal screw. As a result, less time is required to mount the clip on the mounting plate, since you only need to drill one 4.2mm hole through the plate. The hole threads will then be cut into the plate by the screw.

DIN rail installation SAB.../MF/35 The SAB…/MF/35 can be installed on a DIN rail. The SAB…/MF/35 is snapped on directly via the internal-spring MF/35 foot without any tools. The force on the cable comes from a

334 | TERMINALS

spring-pressure piece. This regulated pressure ensures a constant optimal contact with the DIN rail.

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Shield-connection clip SAB • Quick snap-on or mounting of the shield-connection clip • Different cable cross-sections can be accommodated because of the elastic nature of the spring force clip • Standards – IEC/EN • Material – steel

SAB 8

SAB 13.5

SAB 20

SAB 32

Size

18.5 x 13 x 26.5

22 x 19.5 x 32.5

27 x 24.5 x 40.5

32 x 36 x 64

Type

SAB 8

SAB 13.5

SAB 20

SAB 32

Cable diameter

3–8

4 – 13.5

10 – 20

15 – 32

SAB 8/D

SAB 13.5/D

SAB 20/D

SAB 32/D

18.5 x 13 x 26.5

22 x 19.5 x 32.5

27 x 24.5 x 40.5

32 x 36 x 64

SAB 8/D

SAB 13.5/D

SAB 20/D

SAB 32/D

SAB 8/D/M5

SAB 13.5/D/M5

SAB 20/D/M5

SAB 32/D/M5

3–8

4 – 13.5

10 – 20

15 – 32

M4 x 10

M4 x 10

M4 x 10

M4 x 10

M5 x 10

M5 x 10

M5 x 10

M5 x 10

4.2

4.2

4.2

4.2

Product

SAB 8/MF/35/S

SAB 13.5/MF/35/S

SAB 20/MF/35/S

SAB 32/MF/35/S

Size

18.5 x 13 x 26.5

22 x 19.5 x 32.5

27 x 24.5 x 40.5

32 x 36 x 64

SAB 8/MF/35/S

SAB 13.5/MF/35/S

SAB 20/MF/35/S

SAB 32/MF/35/S

3–8

4 – 13.5

10 – 20

15 – 32

M4 x 8

M4 x 8

M4 x 8

M4 x 8

4.2

4.2

4.2

4.2

Product

Product

Size

Type Cable diameter mm Screw Drill hole diameter mm

Type Cable diameter mm Screw Drill hole diameter mm

0116 284 9900

Busbar mounting

A SAB application with the SH1

Direct mounting

SAB… /D

Din rail mounting

SAB/…/MF/35

TERMINALS

| 335


Terminals

Busbar support and clamping yoke ZB

Busbars and clamping yokes The ZB clamping yoke can be used in conjunction with the busbars in order to bring the neutral conductor or PE conductor together centrally. In order to help customize the facility wiring, the clamping yoke can be pushed onto the busbar. The SH and ES busbar supports are used for attachment. With longer rails, these can be positioned between the clamping yokes. The clamping yoke as a PE connection is available with green/yellow insulation caps. These caps signal the PE function together with the labelling tags and enable the PE wires to be clearly assigned. If you are using the clamping yoke to connection neutral conductors, then it can be marked with a blue insulation cap.

Mount with busbar support ES 335/K/ST

Mount with busbar support SH 1BG

Mount with busbar support SH SAB BG

Busbar Ssch Product

Ssch 10 x 3

Ssch 6 x 6

Type

Busbar 10 x 3

Busbar 6 x 6

Size

100 x 10 x 3

100 x 6 x 6

Non-insulated

Ssch 10 x 3 MS brass

Ssch 6 x 6 MS brass

Non-insulated

Ssch 10 x 3 CU copper

Ssch 6 x 6 CU copper

Load current

140A/100A

140A/100A

336 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Busbar support • Various mounting options • Material: polyamide 6.6

Product

SH 1

SH SAB

ES 35/K/ST

SES 35

Busbar support

Busbar support

Busbar support

Snap-on busbar support

Type

SH 1

SH SAB

ES 35/K/ST

SES 35 BG

-

-

-

SES 35 BK

Size

24 x 24 x 23.7

50 x 9.5 x 98

50 x 9.5 x 44

48 x 8 x 47.1

Clamping yoke ZB • • • •

Product

Type

Screw connection Material: steel Busbar support Material: polyamide 6.6

ZB 4/… 10 x 3

ZB 4/… 6 x 6

ZB 16/… 10 x 3

ZB 16/… 6 x 6

ZB 35/… 10 x 3

Clamping yoke 4mm2 for busbar 10 x 3

Clamping yoke 4mm2 for busbar 6 x 6

Clamping yoke 16mm2 for busbar 10 x 3

Clamping yoke 16mm2 for busbar 6 x 6

Clamping yoke 35mm2 for busbar 10 x 3

Colours available Non-insulated Insulated Screw connection Screw Rated conductor cross-section, mm2

0116 284 9900

ZB 4

ZB 4/6

ZB 16

ZB 16/6

ZB 35

ZB 4/K

ZB 4/6/K

ZB 16/K

ZB 16/6/K

ZB 35/K

15.5 x 5.3 x 11.7

12 x 5.5 x 15

15.5 x 10 x 16.5

12 x 9.5 x 19.9

18 x 14 x 21

M3 x 8

M3 x 8

M4 x 12

M4 x 12

M6 x 15

0.5-4

0.5-4

2.5-16

2.5-16

16-35

TERMINALS

| 337


Terminals

Interface modules Interface modules allow for a passive mechanical-electrical implementation of standard connectors onto screw or tension-spring PCB terminals.The individual signals of the multi-pole or high-pole connectors are implemented one-to-one to the PCB – from the individual wire via connectors to pre-assembled cables. Thus the assembly time and associated costs are reduced. Because of the compact design of the interface modules, their clear terminal labelling, and their simple assembly on TS32 or TS35 rails, this system represents an attractive alternative to a pure individual wire approach.

RJ 45 USB interface modules

Interface modules FBK…C

RJ 45 and USB modules implement the standardized RJ45 Ethernet and USB connectors from bus systems, computer components, laptops or modems on screw PCB terminals. They can be mounted with the compact RS-SP0 profile on the TS 35 rail.

The FBK modules enable the assembly of pre-assembled cables with connectors (from 10 to 64 poles) according to IEC 603-1/DIN 41651, for use with screw or tension-spring PCB terminals.

w

Interface modules SD…C and high density

Interface modules OE-E

Signal lines can be implemented with SD modules, using male or female connectors, according to IEC 807-2/DIN 41652, on screw or tensionspring PCB terminals. The interface modules are equipped with their respective counterparts, which are available with from 9 to 37 poles. The SD-LA modules also feature a LED status display.

The OE interface modules make use of the EDAC "hermaphrodite" multipole plug (Series 516) on screw connections. This results in excellent shock and vibration resistance. The offset arrangement of the connector means that the neighbouring modules will not be impaired. The EDAC connector is compatible with the ELCO 8016 connector series.

338 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

RJ 45 USB interface modules • Mounts on TS 35 • Unshielded RJ 11/12 modules • R  J 45 module available in shielded and unshielded design

• USB modules features type A and type B connections • Width: 47mm • Housing UL94V-0

RJ 11-12

RJS 45 (shielded)

RJU 45 (unshielded)

RJS45-SH

47 x 26 x 61mm

47 x 31 x 61 mm

47 x 31 x 61 mm

87 x 26 x 63 mm

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

CAT 3

CAT 3

CAT 5

Voltage

125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

Current

1A

1A

1A

1A

Part Number

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Wire size Category

100 Ω

Cable impedance Transmission speed

Part Number

100 Mbps max.

RJS 45-RJS 45 (shielded)

RJS 45-3

USB-AB

47 x 27 x 44 mm

87 x 39 x 53

47 x 33 x 48 mm

0.14 to 1.0 mm²

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

Connection diagram

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Wire size Category Voltage Current Cable impedance Transmission speed

0116 284 9900

CAT 5

CAT 3

125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

30 V AC/DC

1A

1A

1A

100 Ω 100 Mbps max.

TERMINALS

| 339


Terminals

Compact interface modules SD…C | SD High Density • Mounts on TS 35 • D-sub on screw connection or on tension-spring connection (Z) • D-sub connection acc.o MIL-C-24308/ DIN 41652

Part Number

• Module versions from 9 to 37 connections • Male (S) / female (B) versions

SD…B

SD…S…C

C

SD-S15…-HD

SD-B15…-HD

HD-sub male plug

HD-sub female plug

-

-

-

-

Connection diagram

Type Part number

D-sub male plug

D-sub female plug

SD-S 9 C

SD-B 9 C

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

47 x 37 x 61 mm ­ SD-S 9 CZ

47 x 37 x 38 mm –­ 9 way SD-S 15 C

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

SD-S 25 CZ

Part number

Wire size Connection

SD-B 15 CZ

SD-S15CZ-HD

SD-B 25 C

-

-

-

-

47 x 51 x 61 mm ­

SD-B 25 CZ

SD-B 37 C

SD-S 37 C 47 x 107 x 61 mm SD-S 37 CZ

SD-B 37 CZ 47 x 107 x 38 mm ­

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

0.2 to 2.5 mm2 Screw / tension-spring (Z types)

Voltage

125 V AC/DC

Current

1.5 A

340 | TERMINALS

SD-B15CZ-HD 47 x 51 x 38 mm ­

47 x 78 x 38 mm ­

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5

SD-B15C-HD

47 x 78 x 61 mm

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

-

SD-S15C-HD

47 x 51 x 38 mm ­ SD-S 25 C

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

-

SD-B 15 C 47 x 51 x 61 mm ­

SD-S 15 CZ

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

SD-B 9 CZ

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Interface modules SD | SD-LA (with LED) • Mounts on TS 32/TS 35 • D-sub on screw connection • D-sub connection acc. to MIL-C-24308/DIN 41652

Part Number

• Module versions from 9 to 50 connections • Male (S) / female (B) versions • Width: 87 mm • LED indication (SD-LA only)

SD…S

SD…B

SD 2…S

SD 2…B

SD…LA S/B

D-sub male plug

D-sub female plug

Double D-sub male

Double D-sub female

D-sub male/female

SD-S 50

SD-B 50

SD 2-S 9

SD 2-B 9

SD-S/B 9 LA

SD-B 50/3

SD 2-S 15

-

SD 2-S 25

-

SD 2-S 37

Connection diagram

Type Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

87 x 140 x 72 mm SD-S 50/3

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Wire size

87 x 51 x 72 mm

-

87 x 77 x 72 mm

87 x 107 x 72 mm

SD-S/B 15 LA 87 x 56 x 72 mm ­

SD 2-B 25

-

87 x 41 x 72 mm ­ SD 2-B 15

87 x 97 x 72 mm -

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

87 x 37 x 72 mm

SD-S/B 25 LA 87 x 83 x 72 mm ­

SD 2-B 37

SD-S/B 37 LA

87 x 107 x 72 mm

87 x 112 x 72 mm ­

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

Screw connection

Screw connection

Screw connection

Voltage

125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

24 V DC

Current

1.5 A

1.5 A

1A

Connection

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 341


Terminals

Interface modules FBK…C • Mounts on TS 35 • Flat ribbon cable on screw connection or on tension-spring connection (Z) • Male plug connection acc. to DIN 41651

Part Number

• Module versions from 10 to 64 connections • Ejector mechanism for socket block (female connectors) • Width: 47 mm

FBK…C

FBK…CZ

FBK 10C

FBK 10CZ

47 x 36 x 61 mm

47 x 36 x 38 mm

FBK 14C

FBK 14CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 46 x 38 mm

Connection diagram

Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Part number

FBK 16C

FBK 16CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

FBK 20C

FBK 20CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

FBK 26C

FBK 26CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

FBK 34C

FBK 34CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

FBK 40C

FBK 40CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

FBK 50C

FBK 50CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

FBK 60C

FBK 60CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

FBK 64C

FBK 64CZ

47 x 46 x 61 mm

47 x 51 x 38 mm

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

0.2 to 2.5 mm2

Screw connection

Tension-spring connection

Voltage

125 V AC/DC

125 V AC/DC

Current

1.5 A

1.5 A

Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Wire size Connection

342 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Interface modules OE-E • Mounts on TS 32/TS 35 • EDAC plug connector on screw connection • The EDAC series 516 is 100% compatible with the ELCO 8016

• Offset arrangement of plug connector • Does not influence the neighbouring modules • “Left” and “right” versions are available

Part Number

OE-E…

Connection diagram

Type Part number Size (LWH) with TS 35 x 7.5 Wire size Connection

36 way + shield OE-E 38/36 L

56 way + shield OE-E 38/36 R

OE-E 56 L

122 x 107 x 72 mm

OE-E 56 R 122 x 153 x 72 mm

0.2 to 2.5 mm

2

Screw connection

Voltage

250 V AC/DC

Current

2 A/per pole

Left version

Right version

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 343


Terminals

End stops End stops are required for attaching terminal blocks to DIN rails. They are put in at the beginning and end of the terminal rail assembly. Depending on the DIN rail, they differ in the dimensions of the mounting foot and their screw-on or snap-on design.

ES15

ES 35

ES35/2/K

ES 35/K/ST

ES 32/35

Screw-on

Screw-on

Screw-on

Screw-on

Screw-on

Size (L x W x H mm)

26 x 7.5 x 22

46 x 7.5 x 32

50 x 8 x 47

50 x 9.5 x 44

52 x 9.5 x 47

Terminal width mm

7.5

7.5

8

9.5

9.5

DIN rails

TS 15

TS 35

TS 35

TS 35

TS 35/TS 32

Type

SHES 35

ZES 35

ZES 35/2

SES 35

ZES 15

Screw-on

Snap-on

Snap-on

Snap-on

Snap-on

Size (L x W x H mm)

54 x 66 x 14

59 x 6 x 39

49 x 5 x 34

48 x 8 x 47.1

27 x 5 x 24

Terminal width mm

14

6

5

8

5

Material

PA 6.6 V0

DIN rails

TS 35

TS 35

TS 15

Type

PA 6.6 V2

Material

PA 6.6 V2 TS 35

TS 35

Partition plates Partition plates must normally be used between uninsulated cross-connectors. This is required to maintain the required creepage and clearance distances.

Type

344 | TERMINALS

Colour

Width

Material

TW 1.5-4

beige

1.5 mm

PA 6.6 V2

TW 1.5-4-BLUE

blue

1.5 mm

PA 6.6 V2

TW 2.5-10

beige

1.5 mm

PA 6.6 V2

TW 2.5-10-BLUE

blue

1.5 mm

PA 6.6 V2

TW 2.5-10-ORANGE

orange

1.5 mm

PA 6.6 V2

TW 2.5-10-GREEN

green

1.5 mm

PA 6.6 V2

For terminal RK 1.5-4|RK 1.5-4/15|KBL 1.5-4|KBL 1.5-4/15|RKB 4|FF 1/15

RK 2.5|KBL 2.5|RK 2.5-4|RK 6-10|KBL 2.5-4|KBL 6-10|SL 4| SL 4/32|SL 10|SL 10/32|FF 2.5| SF 2.5-4 SRK 2.5/2A | SSL 2.5/2A | SRK 4/2A | SSL 4/2A | SRK 6/2A | SSL 6/2A | SRK 10/2A | SSL 10/2A

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Marker holders for terminal blocks and end stops Marker holders provide a solution for marking a group of terminals or devices on the DIN rail.and are available for attaching to terminal blocks and end stops. Custom marking is possible with BS-1 pen or EMS-2 plotter.

SchT 7 short joint

SchT 7 long joint

SchT 2

SchT 9

SchT 10

Hinged marker holder for terminal block and end stop

Hinged marker holder for terminal block and end stop

Marker holders for end stops

Marker holders for end stops

Marker holders for end stops

Width

8.5 mm

8.5 mm

9.5 mm

8 mm

9.5 mm

Insert marker

ESO (1 sheet x 120 pcs)

ESO (1 sheet x 120 pcs)

ESO 2

Protective strips

STR 1

STR 1

Type

PA6.6, halogen-free

Material

Type

GT 1

GT 2

Group marker holder for TS35/32 DIN rail

Group marker holder for TS35/32 DIN rail

Width

9.5 mm

19.5 mm

Insert marker

ESO GT 1 (1 sheet x 140 pcs)

ESO GT 2 (1 sheet x 60 pcs)

Protective strips

STR GT 1

STR GT 2

Material

PA6.6, halogen-free

Terminal assembly covers

Colour

Width

Material

Length

Height

TWMF BG

beige

2 mm

PA 6.6 V2

88 mm

70 mm

TWMF BU

blue

2 mm

PA 6.6 V2

88 mm

70 mm

TWMF OG

orange

2 mm

PA 6.6 V2

88 mm

70 mm

Type

Type AD 3/1000mm

0116 284 9900

Colour

Width

Material

Length

Height

transparent

1 metre

Polycarbonate

90 mm

70 mm

TERMINALS

| 345


Terminals

Terminal markers Pocket-Maxicards PMC SB 4, SB 5, SB 6, SB 8 The PMC SB 4 – 8 Pocket-Maxicards are suitable for labelling all CONTA-CLIP terminal blocks that are wider than 4/6/8 mm respectively. They are available in a variety of pre-printed standard markers, in a blank version, or custom printed to any requirement. Material: Polyamide 6.6 UL 94-V2, halogen-free

Blank

Custom Print

FW

PMC SB 4 FW & SB 4 GW

PMC SB 5 FW & SB 5 GW

PMC SB 6 FW & SB 6 GW

PMC SB 8 FW

Length x width, 5 x 4 mm

Length x width, 5 x 5 mm

Length x width, 5 x 6 mm

Length x width, 5 x 8 mm

Style

GW

Terminal width ≥ 4.1 mm

Terminal width ≥ 5.1 mm

Terminal width ≥ 6 mm

Terminal width ≥ 8 mm

Number of markers per row 10

Number of markers per row 10

Number of markers per row 10

Number of markers per row 8

Number of markers per card 50

Number of markers per card 50

Number of markers per card 50

Number of markers per card 40

Number of markers per box 500

Number of markers per box 500

Number of markers per box 500

Number of markers per box 400

PMC SB 4/50 (Blank)

PMC SB 5/50 (Blank)

PMC SB 6/50 (Blank)

PMC SB 8/40 (Blank)

MC SB 4/200 - CUSTOM

MC SB 5/200 - CUSTOM

MC SB 6/200 - CUSTOM

MC SB 8/160 - CUSTOM

PMC SB 4/50 FW 1-10

PMC SB 5/50 FW 1-10

PMC SB 6/50 FW 1-10

PMC SB 8/40 FW 1-8

PMC SB 4/50 FW 11-20

PMC SB 5/50 FW 11-20

PMC SB 6/50 FW 11-20

PMC SB 8/40 FW 9-16

PMC SB 4/50 FW 21-30

PMC SB 5/50 FW 21-30

PMC SB 6/50 FW 21-30

PMC SB 8/40 FW 17-24

PMC SB 4/50 FW 31-40

PMC SB 5/50 FW 31-40

PMC SB 6/50 FW 31-40

PMC SB 8/40 FW 25-32

PMC SB 4/50 FW 41-50

PMC SB 5/50 FW 41-50

PMC SB 6/50 FW 41-50

PMC SB 8/40 FW 33-40

PMC SB 4/50 FW 51-60

PMC SB 5/50 FW 51-60

PMC SB 6/50 FW 51-60

PMC SB 8/40 FW 41-48

PMC SB 4/50 FW 61-70

PMC SB 5/50 FW 61-70

PMC SB 6/50 FW 61-70

PMC SB 8/40 FW 49-56

PMC SB 4/50 FW 71-80

PMC SB 5/50 FW 71-80

PMC SB 6/50 FW 71-80

PMC SB 8/40 FW 57-64

PMC SB 4/50 FW 81-90

PMC SB 5/50 FW 81-90

PMC SB 6/50 FW 81-90

PMC SB 8/40 FW 65-72

PMC SB 4/50 FW 91-100

PMC SB 5/50 FW 91-100

PMC SB 6/50 FW 91-100

PMC SB 8/40 FW 73-80

PMC SB 4/50 FW 1-50

PMC SB 5/50 FW 1-50

PMC SB 6/50 FW 1-50

PMC SB 8/40 FW 81-88

PMC SB 4/50 FW 51-100

PMC SB 5/50 FW 51-100

PMC SB 6/50 FW 51-100

PMC SB 8/40 FW 89-96

PMC SB 4/50 GW 1

PMC SB 5/50 GW 1

PMC SB 6/50 GW 1

PMC SB 8/40 FW 97-104

PMC SB 4/50 GW 2

PMC SB 5/50 GW 2

PMC SB 6/50 GW 2

PMC SB 8/40 FW 105-112

PMC SB 4/50 GW 3

PMC SB 5/50 GW 3

PMC SB 6/50 GW 3

PMC SB 8/40 FW 113-120

PMC SB 4/50 GW 4

PMC SB 5/50 GW 4

PMC SB 6/50 GW 4

PMC SB 8/40 FW 1-40

PMC SB 4/50 GW 5

PMC SB 5/50 GW 5

PMC SB 6/50 GW 5

PMC SB 8/40 FW 41-80 PMC SB 8/40 FW 81-120

PMC SB 4/50 GW 6

PMC SB 5/50 GW 6

PMC SB 6/50 GW 6

PMC SB 4/50 GW 7

PMC SB 5/50 GW 7

PMC SB 6/50 GW 7 PMC SB 6/50 GW 8

PMC SB 4/50 GW 8

PMC SB 5/50 GW 8

PMC SB 4/50 GW 9

PMC SB 5/50 GW 9

PMC SB 6/50 GW 9

PMC SB 4/50 GW 0

PMC SB 5/50 GW 0

PMC SB 6/50 GW 0

PMC SB 4/50 GW X

PMC SB 5/50 GW X

PMC SB 6/50 GW X

PMC SB 4/50 GW PE

PMC SB 5/50 GW PE

PMC SB 6/50 GW PE

PMC SB 4/50 GW L1

PMC SB 5/50 GW L1

PMC SB 6/50 GW L1

PMC SB 4/50 GW L2

PMC SB 5/50 GW L2

PMC SB 6/50 GW L2

PMC SB 4/50 GW L3

PMC SB 5/50 GW L3

PMC SB 6/50 GW L3

PMC SB 4/50 GW N

PMC SB 5/50 GW N

PMC SB 6/50 GW N

PMC SB 4/50 GW +

PMC SB 5/50 GW -

PMC SB 6/50 GW -

PMC SB 4/50 GW -

PMC SB 5/50 GW +

PMC SB 6/50 GW +

346 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Terminal markers Pocket-Maxicards PMC BSTR The PMC BSTR Pocket-Maxicards are suitable for labelling all CONTA-CLIP terminal blocks that are wider than 5 mm. These are particulary sauitable for longer sequences of characters. Material: Polyamide 6.6 V2, halogen-free

Style

Blank

Custom Print

FW

GW

PMC BSTR 5/10 & 5/10 custom

PMC BSTR 6/12 & 6/12 custom

PMC BSTR 8/12 & 8/12 custom

PMC BSTR 10/12 & 10/12 custom

Length x width, 10 x 5 mm

Length x width, 12 x 6 mm

Length x width, 12 x 8 mm

Length x width, 10 x 12 mm

Terminal width ≥ 5.1 mm

Terminal width ≥ 6 mm

Terminal width ≥ 8 mm

Terminal width ≥ 10 mm

Number of markers per row 12

Number of markers per row 10

Number of markers per row 7

Number of markers per row 5

Number of markers per card 36

Number of markers per card 30

Number of markers per card 21

Number of markers per card 10

Number of markers per box 360

Number of markers per box 300

Number of markers per box 210

Number of markers per box 100

PMC BSTR 5/36 (Blank)

PMC BSTR 6/30 (Blank)

PMC BSTR 8/21 (Blank)

PMC BSTR 10/10 (Blank)

MC BSTR 5/144 - CUSTOM

MC BSTR 6/120 - CUSTOM

MC BSTR 8/84 - CUSTOM

MC BSTR 10/40 - CUSTOM

PMC BSTR 5/36 FW 1-12

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 1-10

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 1-21

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 1-10

PMC BSTR 5/36 FW 13-24

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 11-20

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 22-42

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 11-20

PMC BSTR 5/36 FW 25-36

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 21-30

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 43-63

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 21-30

PMC BSTR 5/36 FW 37-48

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 31-40

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 64-84

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 31-40 PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 41-50

PMC BSTR 5/36 FW 49-60

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 41-50

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 85-105

PMC BSTR 5/36 FW 61-72

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 51-60

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 1-42

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 1-40

PMC BSTR 5/36 FW 73-108

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 61-70

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 43-84

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 41-80

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 71-80

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 1-105

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 81-120

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 81-90

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW 106-210

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW 1-100

PMC BSTR 6/30 FW 91-100

PMC BSTR 8/21 FW L1, L2, L3, N, PE

PMC BSTR 10/10 FW L1, L2, L3, N, PE

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 1

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 1

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 2

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 2

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 3

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 3

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 4

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 4

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 5

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 5

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 6

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 6

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 7

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 7

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 8

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 8

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 9

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 9

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW 0

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW 0

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW X

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW X

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW PE

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW PE

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW L1

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW L1

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW L2

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW L2

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW L3

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW L3

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW N

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW N

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW +

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW -

PMC BSTR 5/36 GW -

PMC BSTR 6/30 GW +

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 347


Terminals

Warning signs and shrouds VDE regulations require that the mains terminals be covered. The SAD and AD yellow covers (labelled with a lightning flash) are used to cover the operational channel and the cross-connection channel of the terminal. Thus they discourage operation of the terminal while live voltage is present. The SAD 1 covers can be used with the plug in cross connectors and are snapped down on the terminal blocks. The BS 1 marker pen or the EMS labelling system can be used to label the white variants. Width

Terminal type

SAD 1/5/B

Type

5 mm

SRK 2.5/2A

SAD 1/6/B

6 mm

SRK 4/2A

SAD 1/8/B

8 mm

SRK 6/2A

SAD 1/10/B

10 mm

SRK 10/2A

SAD 1/12/B

12 mm

SRK 16/2A

SAD 1/16/B

16 mm

SRK 35/2A

SAD 1/18/B

18 mm

SRK 50/2A

SAD 1/20/B

20 mm

SRK 70/2A

AD1/50/B

20 mm

RK 50

AD 1/95/B

25 mm

RK 95

SAD 1/27/B

27 mm

SRK 120/2A

AD 1/150/B

31 mm

RK 150

AD 1/240/B

36 mm

RK 240

Pre-cut DIN rail

TS 35 Solid-XXX

TS 35-XXX

TS 15 Solid-XXX

TS 15-XXX

TS 35 x 7.5

TS 35 x 7.5

TS 15 unslotted

TS 15 slotted

Unslotted

Slotted 5.2 x 18

Unslotted

Slotted 4.2 x 12

XXX = pre-cut lengths â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 100mm; 200mm; 300mm; 400mm, 500mm, 600mm, 700mm, 800mm, 900mm and 1000mm

DIN rail mounting brackets

TSTW/M6

TSTW/M5

TSTW/F/M6

TSTW/F/M5

TST/M6

TST/M5

Drill hole

M6

M5

M6

M5

M6

M5

Height mm

48

48

32

32

20

20

348 | TERMINALS

www.oem.co.uk


Terminals

Custom DIN rail assemblies Why not let OEM Automatic build complete DIN rail terminal assemblies to your individual specification? If you are building the same combination of DIN rail terminals on a regular basis it may save you time and money by purchasing as a ‘ready to fit’ assembly. Even simple assemblies can be time consuming to build, from cutting the DIN rail to length to creating custom marking of each terminal. OEM Automatic can offer this service and advise on ways to improve your existing profiles which could reduce wiring times and physical size even further. All assemblies can be ordered under a single part number and scheduled or called-off as required to meet planned production.

Benefits of complete DIN rail assemblies: • Reduce stock holding – only buy what you need, when you need it • Reduce purchasing cost – only order one part instead of multiple items

Bespoke markers

• Reduce labour cost – saves skilled work force time in cutting rail & assembly • Reduce material waste – eliminates unused components

Phase colours available for ease of identification

Miniature assemblies

0116 284 9900

TERMINALS

| 349


CONTA-CONNECT

Terminal markers The Maxicard system

Versatile colour printing on a wide variety of materials

Polyamide

Cable and wire markers The Maxicard system

Polyamide

Cable and wire markers The Maxicard system

Polyamide

Device and installation markers

Device and installation markers

The Maxicard system

The Maxicard system

Polyamide

Polyamide

1


Device and installation markers The ALUCARD system

Aluminium

Cable and wire markers The ALUCARD system

Aluminium

Foil markers THE POLYESTERCARD SYSTEM

Polyester

Custom applications

Dampf

Sauerstoff

Benzol

Sauerstoff Trinkwasser

Dampf 3 bar

Trinkwasser Betriebswasser

Dampf Kondensat Dampf Kondensat

2

NH3 flüssig

Emulsion Emulsion

Altöl

Schutzgas Schutzgas

Various

Prozessluft


FMScolour The FMScolor combines the open concept of a plotter with the convenience of an ink-jet printer. The printing method is not dependent on your individual card formats and can be adapted for use with a variety of different materials. Superior print quality, proven durability and versatility:

Impressively durable printing on certified materials

these are the features that make the FMScolor perfect for industrial applications. This printer satisfies technical requirements along the entire value-added chain â&#x20AC;&#x201C; thus helping to reduce both storage costs and delivery times.

8x

The thermal-set ink provides outstanding durability. An additive is used in the preprocessing stage to clean the markers and to ensure that the applied inks do not run. This pre-treatment provides a faster burn-in and improved adhesion for the ink. When stored in a dry, dust-free, grease-free environment, the pre-treated materials retain these optimal properties for months. The certified Maxicard, Polyestercard and Alucard materials are resistant to grease, dry cleaning, oils, acetone, hot-steam pressure washers, coolants, cleaning agents, detergents, and sparks. They are also UV-resistant over 2000Â hours (Central Europe), scratch-resistant and smudgeresistant.

Eight basic colours (C, M, Y, K, plus four light colours) ensure digital colour printing in photo-realistic quality. The high-pigment ink used for the printing provides excellent colour brilliance and extremely high image quality. Colour profiles for the FMScolor allow you to print using RAL and Pantone colour codes.

A wide variety of materials can be printed on Other materials and sizes are available on request in addition to the certified materials (Maxicard (polyamide), Alucard (aluminium) and Polyestercard (polyester)). Printing on brass, stainless steel, laminated panels and adhesive document laminates is also possible. Printable size of material: max. 300 x 500 mm; max. 30 mm height.

Average time for one Maxicard

One print job in only*

2. Insert

1. Select

* Times are approximate

352 | FMSCOLOUR

4. Print

3. Pre-treat

Start next print job


FMScolour Standard printing from Windows-based applications without special software Most programs can easily interface with this printer. Templates are already available for the certified materials which makes the printing process very convenient.

£

Inexpensive operating and printing costs This high-quality, versatile printing solution offers significantly improved usability and reduced complexity compared to the many other methods available for printing labels and markers. There are several cost-saving advantages when this printer is integrated into your work flow: • Easier handling,

Exceptional accuracy and precision The FMScolor also delivers high-quality professional results when printing high-precision scales and dial facings. The key to such precision is the printer's ultra-fine line print (0.01 mm) and high colour fidelity. Perfectly tuned modules throughout the printing process ensure these performance features.

• Just-in-time production without delivery delays, • No need for reserve stock.

Comparing the required times: in-house engraving vs. in-house FMScolor*

Efficient use of ink The water-based ink is environmentally friendly and also allows you to carry out test print-outs with no material loss. After a test print, the ink can simply be washed off with cold water from the carrier before the next printing test. The ink refill kit ensures an efficient use of ink: the 50-ml kit can be used for three or four refills. The water-soluble ink will not result in sticky printer heads or cartridges. There is no danger that the ink might dry out or flake because no heat is created in the printer.

6. Apply

A practical comparison: in-house engraving vs. in-house FMScolor* Printed object Cable markers: 12 x 60 mm, 50,000 pieces Labour costs per day: 8 hours x £ 30 = £ 240 Pieces per day 800 pieces: engraver | 6,000 pieces: FMScolor Labour costs per marker £ 0.30: engraver | £ 0.04: FMScolor

5. Harden

Working days needed 62.5 (3 months): engraver | 8.0: FMScolor Total labour costs £ 15,000: engraver | £ 2,000: FMScolor Your savings with the FMScolor: £13,000 total

* For one project with one label type

FMSCOLOUR

| 353


TIME SWITCHES

w w w. o e m . c o . u k www.oem.co.uk


0116 284 9900

AlphaRex 3

356

AstroRex 3

357

MicroRex D

358

MIcroRex

359

Maxi / EconoRex

360

MaxiRex digital time switches

361


Time switches

AlphaRex ³

TECHNICAL DATA AlphaRex3 D21 4126 31 Supply voltage

230 V ~

Frequency

50/60 Hz

Programme

24 hour or 7 day

No. of channels Effectiive power consumption

1

2

Approx 1 W

ca 1.5 W

Switching capacity cos ϕ =1 Contact

16 A 250 V ~ 1 changeover switch

Parallel compensation

2 changeover switches

600 W nax, 70μF

Switching step

1 minute

Min switching time

1 minute

Accuracy

+/- 0.1 seconds per day

Terminal capacity Programmes

Single strand 1.5 to 4mm2 56

Working reserve

• 24h / 7 day program time • Suited to irregular cycles (e.g security & industrial installations) • Text based programming • +- 0.1 second per day switching accuracy • -20 to +55 operating temperature

AlphaRex3 D22 4126 41

28 per channel 6 years (for time and date only)

Battery reserve

5 years

Programme memory

EEPROM

Summer/winter time

Auto

IP rating

IP20

No of 17.5mm modules

2

Operating temp.

-20ºC to +55ºC

Storage temp.

-20ºC to +60ºC

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

Part number

Range

Supply Voltage

No of Outputs

412631

AlphaRex3 D21

230Vac

Single Channel

412641

AlphaRex3 D22

230Vac

Dual Channel

412872

AlphaRex3 Universal Data Key

412873

AlphaRex3 USB Adapter

356 | TIME SWITCHES

www.oem.co.uk


Time switches

AstroRex ³

TECHNICAL DATA AlphaRex3 Astro D21 4126 54 Supply voltage

230 V ~

Frequency

50/60 Hz

Programme

24 hour or 7 day

No. of channels Effectiive power consumption

1

2

Approx 1 W

1.5 W

Switching capacity cos ϕ =1 Contact

16 A 250 V ~ 1 changeover switch

Min prog. setting

+/- 0.1 seconds per day

Terminal capacity Programmes

Single strand 1.5 to 4mm2 56

Control cable length Control signal

28 per channel

Max 50m 230 V AC/2 mA

Control pulse duration

24h / 7 day program time Suited to outdoor lighting and signage applications Automatic light switching according to sunrise / set times +- 0.1 second per day switching accuracy -20 to +55 operating temperature

2 changeover switches 1 second

Accuracy

• • • • •

AlphaRex3 Astro D22 4126 57

Delay time

100 to 200 ms 0 to 23 h 59 m 59 s

Local co-ordinates

Rsolution 1º/1’ in EXPERT-Mode

Working reserve

6 years (for time and date only)

Battery reserve

5 years

Programme memory

EEPROM

Summer/winter time

Auto

IP rating

IP20

No of 17.5mm modules

2

Operating temp.

-20ºC to +55ºC

Storage temp.

-20ºC to +60ºC

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m . c o . u k

Part number

Range

Supply Voltage

No of Outputs

412654

AstroRex D21

230Vac

Single Channel

412657

AstroRex D22

230Vac

Dual Channel

412872

AlphaRex3 Universal Data Key

412873

AlphaRex3 USB Adapter

0116 284 9900

TIME SWITCHES

| 357


Time switches

MicroRex D

TECHNICAL DATA MicroRex D21 6037 70 Supply voltage Programme

24 hour or 7 day

No. of channels

1

2

No of ON-OFF actions per day/week

28

2 x 14

16 A

16 A

Switching capacity cos ϕ =1 Incandescent lamp cos ϕ =0.6 Contact Terminal capacity

5A

4A

8A

10 A

1 changeover switch

2 changeover switches

1.5 to 4mm single/ 1.5 to 2.5 mm stranded

IP rating

IP20

Parallel compensation

600 W nax, 70μF

Switching step

1 minute

Min prog time

1 minute

Accuracy

• • • •

Digital Time switch LCD display 24 Hour / 7 Day programming 1 second precision

MicroRex D22 6037 71

220 V ~ 50 Hz

+/- 0.1 seconds per day

Terminal capacity Programmes

Single strand 1.5 to 4mm2 56

Working reserve

28 per channel 6 years (for time and date only)

Programme memory Manual switching No of 17.5mm modules

EEPROM Override and permanent 2

Operating temp.

-20ºC to +55ºC

Storage temp.

-20ºC to +60ºC

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

MicroRexD11

MicroRexD21 & MicroRexD21

MicroRexD11

Part number

Range

Supply Voltage

No of Outputs

6037 70

MIcroRex D21

220 V

Single channel

6037 71

MicroRex D22

220 V

Dual channel

0037.00

MicroRex D11

220 V

Single channel

358 | TIME SWITCHES

www.oem.co.uk


Time switches

MicroRex TECHNICAL DATA Type

T11

QT11

QW11

T31

QT31

QW31

Motor

Synchron

Quartz

Quartz

Synchron

Quartz

Quartz

24h

24h

7 d

24h

24h

7d

None

>100 h

>100 h

None

>100 h

>100 h

Switching step

15 min

15 min

2h

15 min

15 min

2h

Min switching step

15 min

15 min

2h

30 min

30 min

4h

Switching accuracy

+/- 5 min

+/-5 min

+/- 30 min

+/- 5 min

+/- 5 min

+/- 30 min

Accuracy

According to frequency

+/- 2.5 sec a day

+/- 2.5 sec a day

According to frequency

+/- 2.5 sec a day

+/- 2.5 sec a day

Switching dial Running reserve

• • • •

Switching capacity

Programmed via captive segment 230VAC 50/60Hz supply voltage 1 x 16A Output Manual changeover for summer / winter time

Resistive 230V ~ cos j = 1

16 A~

Incandescent lamp 230V ~

4 A~

Inductive 230V ~ cos j = 0.6

12 A~

Contact

1 SPST

Operating temperature

-10… +55 °C

Protection

IP 20

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oe m . c o . u k

N

L

16 A

MicroRexT11/QT11/QW11

Part number

MicroRexT11/QT11/QW11

Programme

Segment

MicroRexT11/QT11/QW11

Min switching time

Working reserve

MicroRexT31/QT31/QW31

16 A output via contact N/O Chang.S.

No of Modules

4128 12

24 h

15 min

30 min

without

-

1

3

4128 13

24 h

15 min

30 min

100 h

-

1

3

4127 80

24 h

15 min

15 min

without

1

-

1

4127 90

24 h

15 min

15 min

100 h

1

-

1

4127 94

7d

2h

2h

100 h

1

-

1

4127 95

7d

2h

2h

100 h

-

1

1

0116 284 9900

TIME SWITCHES

| 359


Time switches

Maxi / EconoRex

TECHNICAL DATA MaxiRex T

MaxiRex QT

Supply voltage

EconoRex MT

230 V ~ +10% -15% 16 A

16 A

Switching capacity cos ϕ =1 Incandescent lamp cos ϕ =0.6 Contact

10 A

8A

1000 W

1000 W

1 c/o SPDT

Working reserve

1 c/o

None

100 hrs

Min. switching time

30 mins

Interval

10 mins

IP rating

None 15 mins 15 mins

IP 330

Operating temp.

0ºC to +55ºC

Storage temp.

-10ºC to +60ºC

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w. o e m . c o . u k

• • • • •

24 Hour / 7 day time Working reserve of 6 years 3 position changeover switch Manual override Volt free contacts

MaxiRex panel mounting

MaxiRex & EconoRex wiring

MaxiRex

MaxiRex DIN rail mounting

EconoRex wall mounting

Part number 0497 50

EconoRex panel mounting

Range

Supply Voltage

Output

MaxiRex T

230 V

1 x SPDT 16 A contact

0497 54

MaxiRex QT

230 V

1 x SPDT 16 A contact

0499 83

EconoRex MT

230 V

1 x SPDT 16 A contact

360 | TIME SWITCHES

www.oem.co.uk


Time switches

MaxiRex digital time switches

TECHNICAL DATA MaxiRex D72/1 Plus Supply voltage

MaxiRex D72/2 Plus 220 V ~ 50 Hz

Programme

24 hour or 7 day

No. of channels

1

2

No of ON-OFF actions per day/week

28

2 x 14

16 A

16 A

Switching capacity cos ϕ =1 Incandescent lamp cos ϕ =0.6 Contact

5A

4A

8A

10 A

1 changeover switch

2 changeover switches

Switching step

1 minute

Min prog time

1 minute

Accuracy

+/- 1 second per day

Working reserve Programme memory

• • • •

24 Hour / 7 day time Working reserve of 6 years LCD digital display +/-1 second per day accuracy

MaxiRex D72_2plus

EEPROM

Manual switching

Override and permanent

Operating temp.

-20ºC to +55ºC

Storage temp.

-20ºC to +60ºC

For mor e i nfor ma t i on, vi si t our w e b si t e , w w w.oem . c o . u k

MaxiRex D72_1plus

MaxiRex D72_2plus

MaxiRex D72

Part number

6 years (for time and date only)

MaxiRex DIN mount

MaxiRex panel mount

Range

Supply Voltage

No of Outputs

0496 80

MaxiRex D72/1 Plus

230 V

Single channel

0496 82

MaxiRex D72/2 Plus

230 V

Dual channel

0116 284 9900

TIME SWITCHES

| 361


TIMERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


17.5mm wide DIN rail mount

364

22.5mm wide DIN rail mount

365

35mm wide plug in

366

48mm2 panel mount

367

48mm2 digital panel mount

368

21mm wide plug in

396


Timers

Chronos 2 – DIN rail timers 17.5mm wide

Dimensions

• Multi/mono function • 7 x time ranges (0.1s to 100 hrs) • Multi-voltage • 8A changeover relay or 0.7A solid state output • LED status indicator

Connections

Li L:

U

Functions: A/H/K

Functions: A - At/Ht/B/C/Di - D/ Ac/BW/N/O/P/T/W/ Pt/TL/Tt/Ad/Ah

Li L:

Ordering guide Type

Function

Output

Voltage

Part number

MUR1

Multi-function A-AT-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827105

MXR1

Multi-function N-O-P-W-Ad-Ah-T-Tt-Pt-Tc-Tl

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827185

MAR1

Mono-function A-At

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827115

MBR1

Mono-function B

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827125

MCR1

Mono-function C

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827135

MHR1

Mono-function H-Ht

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827145

MLR1

Mono-function Li-L

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827155

MUR4

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

1 relay (c/o)

12V AC/DC

88827100

MXR4

Multi-function N-O-P-W-Ad-Ah-T-Tt-Pt-Tc-Tl

1 relay (c/o)

12V AC/DC

88827180

MUR3

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

1 relay (c/o)

12…240V AC/DC

88827103

Cage clamp version of MUR3

1 relay (c/o)

12…240V AC/DC

88827503

MUS2

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

Solid state

24…240V AC

88827004

MAS5

Mono-function A

Solid state

24…240V AC/DC

88827014

MHS2

Mono-function H

Solid state

24…240V AC

88827044

MLS2

Mono-function Li-L

Solid state

24…240V AC

88827054

MURC3

364 | TIMERS

www.oem.co.uk


Timers

Chronos 2 – DIN rail timers 22.5mm wide

Dimensions

• Multi/mono function • 7 x time ranges (0.1s to 100 hrs) • Multi-voltage • 1 or 2 x changeover relay • 2 x LED status indicator

Connections

Functions Li L :

Functions : A - At/Ht/B/C/Di - D Ac/BW/N/O/P/T/ W/Pt/TL/Tt/Ad/Ah

Q

K/H

Ordering guide Type

Function

Output

Voltage

Part number

RQR1

Mono-function Q

1 relay (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88866175

RQR6

Mono-function Q

1 relay (c/o)

220 - 240/380 - 440V AC

88866176

RA2R1

Mono-function A-At

2 relays (c/o)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88866215

RU2R4

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht-Di-D-Ac-Bw

2 relays (1 inst.)

12V AC/DC

88866300

RU2R3

Mono-function U

2 relays

12V/240 AC/DC

88866303

RU2R1

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht-Di-D-Ac-Bw

2 relays (1 inst.)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88866305

RX2R1

Multi-function N-O-P-W-Ad-Ah-T-Tt-Pt-Tc-Tl

2 relays (1 inst.)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88866385

0116 284 9900

TIMERS

| 365


Timers

Chronos 2 – plug-in timers 35mm wide

Dimensions

• • • • •

Multi/mono function 7 x time ranges (0.1s to 100hrs) Multi voltage Either 1 or 2 x 8A changeover relay LED status indicator

Connections 8 pin 1 relay

Functions: A - At/H - Ht/B/C Di - D/Ac/BW

2 relay

A

Li L :

11 pin Functions: A - At/H Ht/B/C Di - D/Ac /BW

Li L:

Ordering guide Type

Function

Output

Connection

Voltage

Part number

OUR1

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

1 relay (c/o)

Plug-in (8 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88867105

OA2R1

Mono-function A

2 relays (c/o)

Plug-in (8 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88827215

OCR1

Mono-function C

1 relay (c/o)

Plug-in (8 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88867135

OLR1

Mono-function Li-L

1 relay (c/o)

Plug-in (8 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88867155

OUR4

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

1 relay (c/o)

Plug-in (8 pin)

12V AC/DC

88867100

OUR3

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

1 relay (c/o)

Plug-in (8 pin)

12…240V AC/DC

88867103

PU2R1

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

2 relays (1 inst.)

Plug-in (11 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88867305

PA2R1

Mono-function A-At

2 relays (c/o)

Plug-in (11 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88867415

PC2R1

Mono-function C

2 relays (c/o)

Plug-in (11 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88867435

PL2R1

Mono-function Li-L

2 relays (c/o)

Plug-in (11 pin)

24V DC/24…240V AC

88867455

PU2R4

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

2 relays (1 inst.)

Plug-in (11 pin)

12V AC/DC

88867300

PU2R3

Multi-function A-At-B-C-H-Ht, Di-D-Ac-Bw

2 relays (1 inst.)

Plug-in (11 pin)

12…240V AC/DC

88867303

S2B

Socket for 8 pin types

S2B

S3B

Socket for 11 pin types

S3B

366 | TIMERS

www.oem.co.uk


Timers

TMR48 – panel mount timers 48 x 48mm

Dimensions

• • • • • •

Multi/mono function Multi-range from 0.02 s to 300 h Multi-voltage 12 to 240 VDC/24 to 240 V AC Time setting displayed on dial 2 changeover relays 5 A/250 VAC Display of power and output states by 2 LEDs

Connections

Ordering guide Type TMR48L

Function

Voltage

Part number

Multi-Function A, B, C, W, G, AC, BW

12 - 240 VDC

88886516

24 – 240 VAC TMR48U

Mono-Function A

12 – 240 VDC

88886016

24 – 240 VAC TMR48A

Multi- function A1, A2, H1, H2, Q1, Q2, D-Di

12 – 240 VDC

88886106

24 –240 VAC TMR48X

0116 284 9900

L, Li, G, Gi

12 – 240 VDC

88886116 TIMERS

| 367


Timers

Digital – panel mount timers 48 x 48mm 812 – 814 – 815 – 815E

• LCD or LED (815E) • Multi-range • Multi-voltage • 1 or 2 relay outputs • Reset function on panel (Timers 815, 815E) • Data saved in the event of a break in supply (Timers 815, 815E) • Access to programming lockable (Timers 814, 815 and 815E) • Up or down timing mode • Internal power supply by battery (10 years/20°C) (Not 815E)

Dimensions

Connections M812

TIMER 814/815

G815 +~

U

Reset

5 6 7

4 3 2

1 11

8 9 10

(1)

~

M814

2 •—• 7 : 12 Vdc 24 Vac/dc G814

Panel thickness 1 to 3.5 mm

Clip for panel-mounting Positioning screw

2 •—• 11 : 12 Vdc 2 •—• 8 : 12 Vdc 24 Vac/dc 24 Vac/dc (1) Other loads may be connected in parallel

Panel cut-out: 45 square± 0.3

Ordering guide Type

Connections

Function

Output(s)

Voltage

Part number

812

Removable 8 pin base

Mono-function A

2 timed changeover - 2x 5A

24VAD

88857409

812

Removable 8 pin base

Mono-function A

2 timed changeover - 2x 5A

110VAC

88857406

812

Removable 8 pin base

Mono-function A

2 timed changeover - 2x 5A

220...240VAC

88857400

814

Removable 8 pin base

Multi-function A-B-C-D-Di-H

1 x 8A timed changeover

12VDC/24...48VAD

88857003

814

Removable 8 pin base

Multi-function A-B-C-D-Di-H

1 x 8A timed changeover

24VAD/110...240VAC

88857005

814

Removable 11 pin base

Multi-function A-B-C-D-Di-H

1 x 8A timed changeover

12VDC/24...48VDC

88857103

814

Removable 11 pin base

Multi-function A-B-C-D-Di-H

1 x 8A timed changeover

24VAD/110...240VAC

88857105

815

Removable 11 pin base

Multi-function A1-A2-AM-Amt

2 timed changeover or 1 timed + 1 instant (2 x 8A)

12VDC/42...48VAD

88857302

815

Removable 11 pin base

Multi-function A1-A2-AM-Amt

2 timed changeover or 1 timed + 1 instant (2 x 8A)

24VAD/110VAC

88857307

Multi-function A1-A2-AM-Amt

2 timed changeover or 1 timed + 1 instant (2 x 8A)

24VAD/220...240VAC

88857301

Multi-function A1, A1C, A2, AM, Amt, B, BM, C, CM, D, Di, DiM, Dpause, H, HM, T, TM, W, WM

2 timed changeover or 1 timed + 1 instant (2 x 5A)

12-24VAD/100...240VAC

88857311

815 815E

368 | TIMERS

Removable 11 pin base Removable 11 pin base

www.oem.co.uk


Timers

4 pole multi-range timer RTMA

• • • • • • •

Dimensions

Function diagram

4 pole changeover relay output Multi-time range (0.1s to 100hrs) Mounts on industry standard 14 pin socket 12Vdc, 24Vdc, 24Vac, 110Vac or 240Vac Small size (21mm x 27mm x 63mm) LED indication of relay status and power on Delay on energisation (‘A’ function)

Function A 1 relay

Terminal identification 13 - 14 :

Socket SD14

Supply

1-5-9 2 - 6 - 10 3 - 7 - 11

Timed relay outputs

4 - 8 - 12

Ordering guide Type

Voltage

Part number

RTMA412D

12Vdc

88896201

RTMA424D

24Vdc

88896202

RTMA424A

24Vac

88896203

RTMA4110A

110Vac

88896206

RTMA4240A

240Vac

88896207

Socket for above timers Part number = SD14, clip for sockets = RR - CLIP

0116 284 9900

TIMERS

| 369


Timers

Function diagram for timers U : Supply R : Output or load relay T: Timing

C (Y1) : Control contact â&#x2C6;&#x17E; : infinite

Function A

Delay on energisation Single timing cycle which begins on energisation.

1 relay

2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous Timing after closing and opening of control contact After energisation, closure of the control contact causes the timing period T to commence and output relay R (or the load) changes state at the end of this interval. When contact C (Y1) opens, relay R resets after a second timing period T.

1 relay

Timing after closing of control contact

On short cycle after closing of control contact

Timing on energisation with memory

1 relay

Function D or Di

Symmetrical recycling

1 relay

1 relay

Repetitive cycle which switches the output alternately between the rest and operating position for equal time bases. T1 + T2 = T total D = Pause Start Di = Pulse Start

Function H

Timing on energisation Interval timer - one shot

1 relay

On energisation, the output changes state, remains in that state for the duration of timing and resets at the end of the single cycle. 1 relay

N.B. This is complementary to function A. 2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

Provides a cumulative time for contact opening. The output changes states at the end of the set time.

Function Ht

Delay on energisation with memory

1 relay

Provides a cumulative time for contact opening. On energisation, the output changes state, remains in that state for the duration of timing and resets at the end of the single cycle.

2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

Function B

Timing on impulse one shot On pulse (with constant supply)

1 relay

2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

After energisation, closure of the control contact causes the timing period T to commence and output relay R changes state at the end of this period. After a further period of time: T the relay returns to its original state.

Function At

Timing after impulse Delay OFF (with constant supply)

Relay R returns to its initial position at the end of the timing period.

After energisation, closure of the control contact causes the timing period T to commence and output relay R changes state at the end of this interval.

Function Ah

Function C

After energisation, once the control contact is closed the output state changes. Timing will only begin on the re-opening of this control contact (one shot).

2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

Function Ad

Pulse output (adjustable) Output relay R (or the load) changes state, and remains in the changed-over state for the timing period, both when control contact C (Y1) closes and when it opens. 2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

The output changes state after timing.

Function Ac

1 relay

Function Bw

1 relay

2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

After energisation; a pulse (â&#x2030;Ľ 50 ms) or a maintained control contact will cause the output to change state which reverts to the rest position at the end of timing. N.B. : this process enables shortening or lengthening of a signal. 2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

370 | TIMERS

www.oem.co.uk


Timers

Function diagram for timers Function K

Function Pt

Delayed fixed length pulse (with memory) As function P but with memory

1 relay

Delay on de-energisation - true delay OFF On energisation, the output changes state. On de–energisation timing commences and the output only returns to the reset condition after timing. 2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

Function Q Star-delta

Function L

At the end of timing, the output is not energised. It remains "open" (not conducting) and will only change state after the fixed time of Ti has elapsed. Dwell time selectable

1 relay Cyclic timing - Asymmetrical recycler Repetitive cycle comprising 2 independent adjustable time bases. Each time base corresponds alternately to a different output state. N.B. : The cycle starts with the output in the rest position.

1 relay

U C

R 2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

T

Function Li Cyclic timing - Asymmetrical recycler 1 relay Repetitive cycle comprising 2 independent adjustable time bases. Each time base corresponds alternately to a different output state. N.B. : The cycle starts with the output in the operating position. 2 relays timed or 1 relay timed and 1 instantaneous

Function T Timing on energisation with memory a - energisation by control signal The timer sums the times for which the control contact is closed (C1). Reset is by the reset signal (C2) only.

b - energisation by supply voltage The timer sums the times for which the supply voltage (U) is on. Reset is by the reset signal (C2) only.

Function N

"Safe-guard"

At the first control pulse the output is energised. To complete the timing the interval between the two control pulses must be greater than the timing set.

Function O

"Delayed safe-guard" On energisation, a first timing sequence occurs and the output changes state. With the closing of the control contact, the output resets and the timing starts, with the output being activated after timing. For the timing to be completed, the interval between the closing of two control contacts must be greater than the timing set.

Function TL

1 relay

Latching relay by control contact (flip flop) After energisation, closure of the control contact causes output relay R to energise. A second closure of control contact de–energises the relay.

Function Tt

Timed latching relay by control contact

1 relay

As function TL but if second closure of control contact does not occur before end of time period, the relay will de–energise at the end of the time period.

Function W Function P

Delayed fixed-length pulse Timing begins on energisation. At the end of the timing period output relay R (or the load) changes state for a period of approx. 500 milliseconds.

Timing after pulse on control contact After energisation, if the control contact opens it causes output relay R (or the load) to change state and timing to start. At the end of the timing period, relay R resets to its original state.

U C R

T

Standards and approvals Our timers are designed according to international recommendations (IEC), American (UL), Canadian (CSA) and German (VDE) standards, European standards (EN), etc. Proof of compliance with these standards and recommendations is demonstrated by approval (a symbol or certificate of conformity granted by an accredited body) or by the manufacturer's declaration of conformity (drafted in accordance with ISO/IEC 22 guidelines). We have indicated the principal approvals so far obtained in the table below. Conformity to standards is indicated in the "technical characteristics". Machine safety Our products are compatible with standard EN 60204-1 (IEC 201-1) concerning the safety of electrical equipment for machinery. 0116 284 9900

TIMERS

| 371


Timers

Function diagram for dedicated 815E Function A2

Delay on energisation

Function AM

Delay on energisation

Function B

Timing on impulse (one shot)

Function C

Function A2c

Delay on energisation

Function AMt

Delay on energisation

Function B with latching

Timing on impulse (one shot)

Function B with latching

Timing after impulse

Timing after impulse

Function D

Function Di

Flip-flop

Function Di with latching

Flip-flop

Function D pause

Flip-flop

Flip-flop

Function H

Function H with latching

Function T

Function T with latching

Timing on energisation

Timing on energisation

Function W Off-delay

372 | TIMERS

Timing on energisation

Timing on energisation

Function W with latching

Off-delay timer

www.oem.co.uk


Timers

TMR48 dedicated functions

0116 284 9900

TIMERS

| 373


TRANSDUCERS

w w w. o e m . c o . u k


P17/P17G loop powered transducer and separator

376

P20/P20G programmable transducer and separator

377

P21Z/P20H programmable transducer for AC and high DC signals

378

P18/P19 surface mount temperature and humidity transducer

379

P30U temperature and standard signals transducer

380

P30O pulse and frequency transducer

380

P12H programmable transducer for high DC signals

381

P12P transducer of single phase network parameters

381

P41 1-phase network transducer

382

P43 programmable transducer for 3-phase power networks

382


Transducers

P17 loop powered separator

Technical data

• Input options for voltage, temperature (thermocouples and PT100) and resistance • Supplied by current loop • Only 6.2mm wide

Part number key

Inputs fixed: Temperature: Pt100, J, K, N, E type Voltage: 0…10V, 0…60mV d.c Resistance: 0…150, 0…250Ω Outputs fixed: 4…20mA Dimensions: 6.2 x 77.5 x 100mm Protection level: IP50 front Supply voltage: 9…30V d.c from Loop

P17 Input type and range: voltage thermocouple J (Fe-CuNi) thermocouple K (NiCr-NiAl) thermocouple N (NiCrSi-NiSi) thermocouple E (NiCr-CuNi) resistance thermometer Pt100 resistance thermometer Pt100 voltage

(0 … 10) V (-100 … 1200)ºC (-100 … 1370)ºC (-100 … 1300)ºC (-100 … 900)ºC (-50 … 100)ºC (-50 … 400)ºC (0 … 60) mV

XX

00

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 09

P17G loop powered passive separator

• Passive separator for 0-20mA signals • Supplied by current loop, no AUX supply required • Only 6.2mm wide

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs: Current: Outputs: Current: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

376 | PANEL TRANSDUCERS

8

P17G

00

8

0…20mA, 4…20mA d.c 0…20mA, 4…20mA d.c 6.2 x 77.5 x 100mm IP50 front Loop powered

www.oem.co.uk


Transducers

P20 programmable transducer

Technical data Inputs fixed: Temperature: Current: Voltage: Resistance: Outputs fixed: Current: Voltage: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

Part number key P20 Pt100, Pt250, Pt500, Pt1000 J, K, N, S Type 0…20mA, 4…20mA, 0…5mA d.c ±20mA d.c 0…10V, 0…5V, 0…60mV, 0…150mV d.c ±10V, ±5V, ±60mV, ±150mV d.c 0…400, 0…4000Ω 0…20mA, 4…20mA 0-10V d.c 22.5 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…65V a.c, 20…85V d.c

P20G programmable separator

Technical data Inputs programmable: Current: Voltage: Outputs programmable: Current: Voltage: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

0116 284 9900

• Programmable inputs for dc current, voltage, resistance and temperature (PT100 and thermocouples) • Analogue output 0-10V or 0/4-20mA • Scaleable individual characteristics

Analog output: current 0…20 mA current 4…20 mA voltage 0…10 V Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…85 V d.c., 20…65 V a.c. Kind of input: from table 1 see page 383

X

X

XX

00

8

1 2 3 1 2 XX

• Galvanic separation of analogue current and voltage signals • Linear conversion of input to output signal • Scaleable individual characteristics

Part number key P20G 0…20mA, 0…5mA, 4…20mA d.c ±20mA, ±5mA d.c 0…10V, 0…5V, 0…1V d.c ±10V, ±5V, ±1 d.c 0…20mA, 0…5mA, 4…20mA d.c ±20mA, ±5mA d.c 0…10V, 0…5V, 0…1V d.c ±10V, ±5V, ±1 d.c 22.5 x 120 x 100mm IP50 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…65V a.c, 20…85V d.c

Input: from table 2 see page 383 Output: from table 2 see page 383 Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…85 V d.c., 20…65 V a.c.

XX

XX

X

00

E

0

XX XX 1 2

PANEL TRANSDUCERS

| 377


Transducers

P21Z transducer for AC signals

• Inputs for AC current, voltage or frequency • Analogue output 0-10V, 0/4-20mA or RS-485 • 0.2 accuracy class

Part number key

Technical data Inputs fixed: Current: 1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) Voltage: 100, 130, 250, 325, 400, 600V a.c Frequency: 20…500Hz Outputs fixed: Current: 0…20mA, 0…5mA, 4…20mA d.c Voltage: 0…10V d.c Digital output: RS-485: Modbus RTU - optional Dimensions: 22.5 x 120 x 100mm Protection level: IP50 front Supply voltage: 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…40V a.c,/d.c

P21Z Input range: 100 V a.c. 250 V a.c. 400 V a.c. 1 A a.c. 5 A a.c. frequency 20...500 Hz Output range: 0…20 mA 4…20 mA 0…10 V RS-485 Supply: 85…253 V a.c. 40…400 Hz; 90…300 V d.c. 20…40 V a.c. 40…400 Hz; 20…60 V d.c.

X

Part number key

378 | PANEL TRANSDUCERS

0…20mA, 4…20mA 0-10V d.c MODBUS RTU – optional 22.5 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…40V a.c/d.c

P20H

E

0

00

E

0

1 2

Technical data

Input signal: +/- 100 V +/- 250 V +/- 400 V +/- 1 A +/- 5 A 0…100 V 0…250 V 0…400 V Output: 0…20 mA 4…20 mA 0…10 V RS-485 Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…40 V a.c./d.c.

00

1 2 3 4

• Inputs for high DC current or voltage • Analogue output 0-10V or 0/4-20mA • 0.2 accuracy class

±1A, ±5A 100V d.c, 250V d.c, 400V d.c ±100V d.c, ±250V d.c, ±400V d.c

X

1 2 3 4 5 6

P20H programmable transducer for high DC signals

Inputs fixed: Current: Voltage: Outputs fixed: Current: Voltage: Digital output: RS-485: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

X

X

X

X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2

www.oem.co.uk


Transducers

P18, P18D, P18L temperature and humidity transducer

• Converts ambient temperature and humidity to a digital/analogue output • Option of 0-10V or 4-20mA output on P18 • Analogue loop powered 4-20mA pn P18L • Optional sensor protection shields - see page XX

Technical data

Part number keys

Inputs: Outputs: Current: Voltage: Digital interface: RS-485: Display: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

Temperature -30…85°C Humidity 0…100%

P18

2 x 4…20mA - optional 1 x 4…20mA (P18L only) 2 x 0…10V - optional

Analog outputs: without analog outputs current output 4…20 mA voltage output 0…10 V

MODBUS RTU (P18/P18D only) LCD 8 x 2 with backlight (P18D only) 35 x 58 x 118mm (inc sensor) IP65 9…24V d.c (P18/P18D) 19…30V d.c from loop (P18L)

Analog outputs: without outputs current 4…20 mA voltage 0…10 V

X

P18D

X

00

E

0

0 1 2

P19 wall mount temperature and humidity transducer

• Converts ambient temperature and humidity to a digital output • Built in sensor • Interface RS-485 MODBUS

Technical data

Part number keys

0116 284 9900

8

0 1 2

P18L

Inputs: Temperature -30…85°C Humidity 0…100% Digital output: RS-485: MODBUS RTU 120 x 80 x 25mm (wall mount) Dimensions: Protection level: IP65 Supply voltage: 9…24V d.c

00

P19

00

00

E

PANEL TRANSDUCERS

8

0

| 379


Transducers

P30U temperature and standard signals transducer

• • • •

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs programmable: Temperature: Pt100, Pt250, Pt500, Pt1000, Cu100, Ni100, Ni1000, J, K, N,E ,R, S, T, B Type Current: 0…4/20mA, ±20mA d.c Voltage: -5…20mV, ±75mV, ±200mV d.c, ±10V, ±24V d.c Resistance: 400, 2000, 5500Ω Outputs fixed: Relay output: 1 x relay, NO contacts 1 x relay, NO contacts - optional Current: 0/4…20mA 0-10V d.c Voltage: Auxiliary supply: 24V d.c/30mA - optional Data storage: Slot for SD/SDHC card - optional Digital interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU master/slave Dimensions: 45 x 120 x 100mm Protection level: IP40 front Supply voltage: 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…40V a.c, 20…50V d.c

Universal input Interface RS485 Modbus RTU slave Analogue and 1 or 2 alarm outputs Data recording in internal memory up to 4MB or 4GB in SD/SDHC card

P30U Analog output: current (range 0…4…20 mA) voltage (0…10 V) SD/SDHC card: without slot for SC card with slot for SD card Addition output: NO relay, 5 A 30 V d.c., 250 V a.c. supply 24 V d.c./30 mA Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…40 V a.c., 20…60 d.c.

X

XX

X

X

00

E

1 2 0 1 1 2 1 2

P30O pulse and frequency transducer

• 2 universal pulse inputs • Interface RS-485 Modbus/TCP and www server • Data recording in internal memory up to 4MB or 8GB on SD/SDHC card

Technical data

Part number keys

Inputs programmable: Main input 1: Number of pulses - ( -99999…99999) Frequncy < 10kHz - (0.05…10000Hz) Rotational speed - (0…60000/min Period t <20sec - (0.0001…20 sec) Period t <1.5h - (0.001…5400 sec) Frequncy <1MHz - (0.1…1000kHz) Operating time - (0…99999 h) Current time - (00:00…23:59) Counter INP1-INP 2 - (-99999…99999) Encoder (-99999…99999) - input 1 only Auxillary input 2: As main input Setting value - (-99999…99999) - input 2 only Outputs fixed: Relay output: 1 x relay, NO contacts 1 x relay, NO contacts - optional Current: 0/4…20mA Voltage: 0-10V d.c Auxiliary supply: 24V d.c/30mA - optional Data storage: Slot for SD/SDHC card - optional Digital interface: RS-485: MODBUS RTU master/slave Ethernet 10/100 Base-T: MODBUS TCP, HTTP, FTP - optional Dimensions: 45 x 120 x 100mm Protection level: IP40 front Supply voltage: 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…40V a.c, 20…50V d.c

380 | PANEL TRANSDUCERS

0

P30o

X

Analog output: 1 current (range 0/4…20 mA) 2 voltage (0…10 V) Additional equipment: without with external SD/SDHC slot with Ethernet interface and internal file system memory Additional output: relay (NO), 5 A 30 V d.c., 250 V a.c. supply 24 V d.c./30 mA Supply: 85…253 V a.c./d.c. 20…40 V a.c., 20…60 d.c.

XX

X

X

00

E

0

0 1 2 1 2 1 2

www.oem.co.uk


Transducers

P12H programmable transducer for high DC signals

• Universal programmable input • Interface RS-485 Modbus • Analogue and 2 relay alarm outputs

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs programmable: Voltage: Current: Outputs fixed: Relay output: Analog output: Current: Voltage: Digital interface: RS-485: Transducer memory: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

±100V d.c, ±600V d.c ±1A, ±5A 2 x relay, voltageless, NO contacts 0/4…20mA, 0…5mA 0-10V d.c MODBUS RTU 750 samples 45 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/d.c

P12H

X

XX

Kind of transducer: without display 1 with display 2 Input signal1): voltage -100 … 100 V 00 voltage -600 … 600 V 01 current -1 … 1 A 02 current -5 … 5 A 03 Output signal: voltage 0…10V current 0…20mA current 4…20mA current 0…5 mA Supply: 85…253 V d.c./a.c. 20…50 V d.c./a.c. 1) The transducer has an universal input. One must give the input signal which has to be programmed.

X

X

0

00

8

1 2 3 4 1 2 in the order, the code of

P12P transducer of single phase network parameters

• Measurement and conversion of single phase network parameters • Interface RS-485 Modbus • Analogue and 2 relay alarm outputs

Technical data

Part number keys

Inputs fixed: Measuring parameters:

Outputs fixed: Relay output: Current: Voltage: Digital interface: RS-485: Transducer memory: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

100V/1A, 100V/5A, 400V/1A, 400V/5A RMS voltage, RMS current, frequency, active power, reactive power, apparent power, 3-Ph active power, 3 -Ph reactive power, 3-Ph apparent power, cos φ. Tg φ, φ, active energy, reactive energy, 3-Ph active energy, 3-Ph reactive energy, 3-Ph apparent energy 2 x relay, NO contacts 0/4…20mA, 0…5mA 0-10V d.c MODBUS RTU 750 samples 45 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c/d.c, 20…50V a.c/d.c

P12P

X

Kind of transducer: 1 without display 2 with display Input range: 100 V, 1 A 100 V, 5 A 400 V, 1 A 400 V, 5 A Programmed converted parameter1): from table 3 see page 383 Output signal: voltage: 0…10 V current: 0…20 mA current: 4…20 mA current: 0…5 mA Supply: 85…253 V d.c./a.c. 20…50 V d.c./a.c.

X

XX

X

X

0

00

8

1 2 3 4 XX 1 2 3 4 1 2

1) The change of the converted parameters is possible from the keyboard (P12P-2) through PD14 or RS-485. One must give in the order, the code of converted parameter which has to be programmed.

0116 284 9900

PANEL TRANSDUCERS

| 381


Transducers

P41 1-phase network transducer

• • • •

Technical data

Part number key

Inputs: Current: Voltage: Measurement: Outputs: Current: Digital interface: RS-485: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) 100, 400V a.c Current, voltage L-N, freq, active power, reactive power, power factor tangens φ, φ, active energy, reactive energy

Interface RS-485 Modbus RTU slave Programmable analogue output -20mA to +20mA Programmable current and voltage transformer ratios Logging of a selected value (9000 samples)

P41 Supply: 85…253 V a.c. 40…400 Hz; / 90…300 V d.c. 20…40 V a.c. 40…400 Hz; / 20…60 V d.c.

X

00

E

0

1 2

±20mA MODBUS RTU 45 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c, 40…400Hz, 90…300V d.c 20…40V a.c, 40…400Hz, 20…60V d.c

P43 programmable transducer for 3-phase power networks

• Measurement and conversion of power network parameter in 4 -wire balanced or unbalanced system • Programmable current and voltage transformer ratios • Interface RS-485 Modbus • 4 programmable analogue outputs

Technical data

Part number keys

Inputs: Current: Voltage: Measurement:

Outputs: Relay outputs: Current: Impulse energy output: Digital interface: RS-485: USB1.1/2.0: Dimensions: Protection level: Supply voltage:

382 | PANEL TRANSDUCERS

1A (x/1A a.c), 5A (x/5A a.c) 3 x 57.7/100V, 3 x 230/400V Current L1…L3, voltage L-N, voltage L-L, freq, active power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor tangens φ, input active energy, output active energy, inductive reactive energy, capacitive reactive energy, THD 0, 2 or 4 - relay, NO contacts 0, 2 or 4 - ±20mA OC passive, impulse 5000…20000 imp/kWh MODBUS RTU

P43 Current input in: 1 A (x/1) 5 A (x/5) Voltage input (phase/phase-to-phase) Un: 3 x 57.7/100 V 3 x 230/400 V Supply voltage: 85…253 V a.c., 90…320 V d.c. 20…40 V a.c., 20…60 V d.c. Output type: without analog outputs, 4 relays 2 analog outputs, 2 relays 4 analog outputs, without relays

X

X

X

X

00

E

0

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3

96 x 120 x 100mm IP40 front 85…253V a.c, 40…400Hz, 90…300V d.c 20…40V a.c, 40…400Hz, 20…60V d.c

www.oem.co.uk


Transducers

Table 1. input signals P20 Type of sensor/input [Unit]

Pt100 [°C]

Pt250 [°C]

Pt500 [°C]

Pt1000 [°C]

TC of J type [°C]

Range

-200…850 0…850 0…600 0…400 0…200 -200…200 -100…1001 -200…850 0…850 0…600 0…400 0…200 -200…200 -100…100 -200…850 0…850 0…600 0…400 0…200 -200…200 -100…100 -200…850 0…850 0…600 0…400 0…200 -200…200 -100…100 -200…1200 0…1200 0…1000 0…800 0…600 0…4001 -200…2001

Table 3. P12P transducer of single phase network parameters Code Type of sensor/input [Unit] 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

TC of K type [°C]

TC of S type [°C]

TC of N type [°C]

Voltage d.c. [V]

Voltage d.c. [mV]

Current d.c. [mA] Resistance [Ω] Custom-made

Range

Code

-200…1370 0…1200 0…1000 0…800 0…600 0…4001 -200…2001 0…1760 0…1600 0…14001 0…12001 0…10001 -200…1200 0…1200 0…1000 0…800 0…6001 0…4001 -200…2001 0…10 0…5 -10…10 -5…5 0…60 -60…60 0…150 -150…150 0…20 4…20 0…5 -20…20 0…400 0…4000

36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 XX

Programmed converted parameter: voltage current frequency active power reactive power apparent power 3-phase active power 3-phase reactive power 3-phase apparent power cos ϕ tg ϕ ϕ active energy reactive energy apparent energy 3-phase active energy 3-phase reactive energy 3-phase apparent energy as per order2)

Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 XX

Table 2. Coding of the P20G separator kind of input and output Range 0…1 V 0…5 V 0…10 V ±1 V ±5 V ±10 V 0…5 mA 0…20 mA ±5 mA ±20 mA 4…20 mA Custom-made version*

Input code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 XX

Output code 01** 02 03 04** 05 06 07** 08 09** 10 11 XX

* after agreeing with the manufacturer

P18, P18D, P18L temperature and humidity transducer shields Part number

0116 284 9900

Description

Construction

Features

Typical application

0874-490-016

Membrane filter

Casing made of PC membrane of teflon laminated by a film. Pore size:1 μm

Mean filtration effect. Maximal temp.: up to 80ºC Response time t10/90: 15 s

Building automation. For application in rooms with low pollution.

0874-490-015

Filter made in teflon

Sintered teflon Pore size 50 μm

High chemical resistance Maximal temp.: up to 180ºC Response time t10/90: 14 s

Drying process in chemical applications.

0874-490-014

Filter made of sintered bronze

Sintered bronze Pore size: 60 μm

High mechanical resistance. To co-operate with high pollution. Applied at small air humidity. Response time t10/90: 10 s

Agricultural applications

PANEL TRANSDUCERS

| 383


Notes

384 | NOTES


OEM-AUTOMATIC LIMITED (“OEM”) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF SALE (“the Conditions”) 1. DEFINITIONS In these Conditions: ”Buyer” means the party with whom OEM contracts; ”Contract” means the contract made between OEM and the Buyer for supply of the Goods which are subject to these Conditions; ”Goods” means all or any of the goods works and materials to be supplied by OEM; ”Act of Insolvency” means any one or more of the following namely the passing of a resolution or the presentation of a petition for winding-up, bankruptcy or for the appointment of an administrator, the appointment of a receiver and/or manager or administrative receiver over the whole or any part of the Buyer’s undertaking and assets, the making of a proposal for a voluntary arrangement within the Insolvency Act 1986 or of a proposal for any other composition scheme or arrangement with or the calling by the Buyer of any meeting of its creditors generally, the levying of execution or distress or diligence on any of its assets, the failure to pay its proper debts as and when due and anything analogous to any of the foregoing under the law of the jurisdiction where the Buyer is established. 2. CONSTRUCTION OF CONTRACT (1) These Conditions shall apply to all contracts of sale between OEM and the Buyer. (2) The terms of the Contract shall consist of the particulars set out in OEM’s Order Acknowledgement and these Conditions. Any term in OEM’s Order Acknowledgement which is at variance with these Conditions shall prevail over these Conditions, which shall be construed accordingly, except with regard to price in respect of which condition 5 (2) shall prevail. (3) No other terms (whether contained in any document issued by the Buyer or in any written or oral communication between the parties) shall apply to the Contract nor shall these Conditions or the particulars contained in OEM’s Order Acknowledgement be modified without OEM’s written agreement. OEM shall be entitled to amend technical specifications of the Goods without notice. (4) In order that these Conditions and the particulars in OEM’s Order Acknowledgement shall be a complete record of the agreement between the parties with regard to the sale of the Goods, the Buyer must ensure that any pre-contractual representation on which the Buyer wishes to rely has been specified in those particulars. In entering into the Contract, the Buyer does not rely upon any such representation made by or on behalf of OEM which has not been so specified. 3. OUOTATIONS AND ORDERS (1) Unless accepted before lapse or withdrawal, or renewed in writing by OEM, quotations shall lapse automatically after 30 days, but maybe withdrawn earlier. (2) Quotations are information only and are not firm offers. There shall be no binding contract until OEM has accepted the Buyer’s order by despatching OEM’s official Acknowledgement of Order or invoice 4. DELIVERY (1) Although OEM wiII endeavour to deliver Goods within any delivery time specified in OEM’s Acknowledgement of Order, that time is an estimate only and not a term of the Contract and as such, time shall not be of the essence. OEM shall not be liable for any failure to meet any such estimate, nor for any loss, of whatsoever nature resulting directly or indirectly therefrom. (2) Any such time specified shall be extended by any period during which the manufacture or delivery of the Goods or other work by OEM in connection with the Contract is delayed due to fire, explosion, flood, storm, tempest, sabotage, strikes (official and unofficial), riot, invasion, acts of war, shortage of labour, power or materials, civil commotion, accidents, plant breakdowns, compliance with an order of an apparently competent authority, and any other event beyond OEM’s control. (3) If any such delivery time is so extended by more than 90 days the Buyer shall be entitled to give written notice to OEM requiring the Goods to be delivered within 30 days of the date of such notice failing which the Buyer shall have the right to give further written notice terminating the contract forthwith. (4) OEM shall be entitled to deliver the Goods by instalments and/or in advance of the estimated date. Each delivery shall constitute a separate contract to which these Conditions shall apply. Failure by OEM to deliver any one or more of the instalments or any claim by the Buyer in respect of any one or more instalments shall not entitle the Buyer to treat the Contract as a whole as repudiated. (5) In the case of United Kingdom and Overseas customers, unless otherwise stated, OEM will deliver to the Buyer’s premises and will charge separately for packing, carriage and handling. (6) The delivery by OEM of a greater or lesser quantity provided for in the Contract, the delivery of other goods not provided for in the Contract, or the delivery of Goods only some of which are defective, shall not entitle the Buyer to reject all of the Goods delivered. In order that OEM can comply with its carrier’s conditions, a claim in respect of error in quantity or type of Goods in respect of the condition of the Goods delivered must be made in writing to OEM within 3 days or to the carrier and OEM within 5 days of receipt. Failure to make such claim shall constitute unqualified acceptance of the Goods and waiver by the Buyer of all claims relating to error in quantity or type of Goods delivered or relating to the condition of Goods delivered. Similarly, if any Goods invoiced by OEM are not received by the Buyer, the Buyer must notify OEM within 25 days or the carrier and OEM within 28 days of the date of invoice, failing which the Buyer will be liable to pay for the Goods in full. (7) OEM shall at its option make good any non-delivery short delivery or damage of Goods notified in accordance with Condition 4(6) by repair or replacement of such Goods and save as provided in this Condition shall not be liable for any such non-delivery short delivery or damage in transit nor for any loss, financial or otherwise resulting directly or indirectly therefrom. In no event shall OEM be liable to the Buyer in connection with any damage or loss in transit where delivery takes place at OEM’s premises. (8) If the Buyer fails to take delivery of or collect the Goods or fails to give OEM adequate delivery instructions after notification by OEM that the Goods are ready OEM may (without prejudice to its other rights and remedies): store the Goods (on its own or any third party’s premises) and charge the Buyer for its reasonable costs (including without limitation VAT costs of storage, carriage and insurance); and/or sell the Goods at any time and after deducting all costs and expenses account to the Buyer for any excess over the price already paid under the Contract or charge the Buyer for any shortfall between the Contract price and such costs and expenses. (9) All returnable containers and packing materials will be charged for, but credit will be given if these are returned in condition satisfactory to OEM, to OEM’s works carriage paid within thirty days following delivery of the relevant Goods. 5. PROPERTY AND RISK (1) The risk in the Goods shall pass to the Buyer upon despatch of the Goods from OEM’s warehouse. (2) Notwithstanding delivery and the passing of risk, property in and title to the Goods shall remain in OEM until OEM has received payment of all sums owing to OEM under the Contract and any other contract with the Buyer whatsoever. (3) Until property in and title to the Goods passes to the Buyer: the Buyer shall keep the Goods properly stored, protected and insured and separate from all or any other goods whether belonging to OEM, the Buyer, or any third party; OEM shall be entitled at any time forthwith to revoke the Buyer’s power to deal with the Goods; and it shall automatically cease if the Buyer shall commit or be subject to any Act of Insolvency; and the Buyer shall not make any modification to the Goods or their packaging or alter remove or tamper with any marks, numbers or other means of identification used on or in relation to the Goods. Upon termination of the Buyer’s power to deal with the Goods, the Buyer shall place the Goods at the disposal of OEM and OEM and its servants and agents are hereby irrevocably authorised without the need for consent of any third party but using only such force as may be necessary, to enter upon any premises of the Buyer or any third party for the purpose of removing the Goods. (4) If any of the foregoing provisions of this Condition shall be invalid or unenforceable such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the remaining provisions. 6. PRICES (1) Unless otherwise stated in OEM’s Order Acknowledgement, prices for the Goods shall be ex-works, and shall be exclusive of VAT, packing, carriage, insurance, and any other costs, all of which shall be the subject of additional charges. VAT shall be charged where appropriate at the rate prevailing at the relevant tax point. (2) Any price quoted by the Company is based upon costs current as the date of quotation. The price charged to the Customer under the Contract may be changed to take account of costs current at the date of invoice. Such changes may include, but are not limited to, fluctuations in rates of currency where the Goods or any part thereof, are sourced from third countries. 7. PAYMENT (1) Subject to prior written agreement to the contrary, OEM shall be entitled to invoice the Buyer for the price of the Goods on or at any time after OEM has notified the Buyer that the Goods are ready for collection or OEM has tendered delivery of the Goods. (2) If OEM has granted the Buyer monthly account credit facilities, then payment of the price must be made within 30 days of the date of Invoice. Otherwise payment must be in cash prior to delivery.

Payment shall be made direct to OEM in the currency invoiced. The Buyer shall not be entitled to exercise any right of set-off against payment due to OEM. (3) OEM shall be entitled to charge daily interest on any overdue sum at the rate of 5 per cent annum above the base lending rate for the time being of Lloyds TSB Bank plc from the due date for payment to the actual date of payment (both before and after judgment). (4) Where payment is agreed to be made by instalments, any delay or default by the Buyer in making payment in respect of any one instalment shall render all the remaining instalments due forthwith, and interest will be charged in accordance with condition 7(3) with immediate effect until the date of actual payment. (5) OEM may appropriate any payment made by the Buyer to such of the Goods (or the goods supplied under any other contract between OEM and the Buyer) as OEM may think fit (notwithstanding any purported appropriation by the Buyer). 8 WARRANTIES AND EXEMPTIONS (1) If under proper use the goods develop any defect during the warranty period due to defective articles or materials supplied OEM shall at its own expense and option replace or repair such goods as are defective so as to remedy the defects except where such defects are attributable to accident, fair wear and tear, or any act omission or neglect of the buyer or of its agents. The Buyer must give OEM notice of any alleged defects as soon as it becomes apparent, and shall (unless otherwise instructed by OEM) retain the goods at the Buyer’s premises for inspection by OEM and give OEM adequate facilities to investigate the complaint at the Buyer’s premises. The “warranty period” shall mean the period specified in OEM’S order acknowledgement as the warranty period and if no such period is specified, then a period of 12 months from the date of delivery of the goods. (2) Except as expressly stated above there shall be excluded from the contract any warranty, condition or statement, express or implied, statutory or otherwise, as to satisfactory quality, and/or fitness of the goods for any particular purpose. (3) OEM shall not be liable to the Buyer in contract tort (including without limitation negligence) and/ or breach of statutory duty for any loss or damage which the Buyer may suffer by reason of any act, omission, neglect or default (including negligence) in the performance of the Contract by OEM its servants or agents, [in a sum which is greater than the Contract price]. (4) OEM shall not be liable to the Buyer in contract tort (including without limitation negligence) and/ or breach of statutory duty for any loss of profits loss of goodwill loss of contracts and/or any indirect or consequential (including economic) loss of any kind including loss of profits and/or loss of production which the Buyer may suffer by reason of any act, omission, neglect or default (including negligence) in the performance of the Contract by OEM, its servants or agents. (5) Provided that nothing in this Condition shall operate so as to exclude OEM’s non-excludable liability in respect of death or personal injury caused by the negligence of OEM its servants or agents; to affect the statutory rights of the Buyer where Goods are sold to a Buyer dealing as a consumer within the meaning of Unfair Contract Terms Act; or to exclude the application of Section 12 of the Sale of Goods Act 1979 or to exclude liability for fraudulent misrepresentation. (6) OEM reserves the right not to accept goods for credit or replacement from the Buyer that are not accompanied and clearly marked with a returned materials authorisation (rma) number that has been previously agreed with and issued by OEM. An RMA number shall remain open and valid for 30 days from date of issue by OEM. If OEM have failed to receive the goods to which the rma number relate within this period then OEM reserve the right to cancel the rma. The risk and the property in the goods remains with the Buyer unless otherwise notified by OEM. OEM will not accept returned goods that clearly show signs of physical damage to external packaging where it is possible that damage to the goods may have occurred as a result. The Buyer shall be responsible for the carriage costs of the returned goods unless otherwise agreed in writing by OEM. 9. INSOLVENCY AND DEFAULT (1) Without prejudice to any rights and remedies available to it, OEM shall be entitled, forthwith on written notice to the Buyer either to terminate the Contract in whole or in part and/or any other contract with the Buyer or to withhold performance of all or any of its obligations under the Contract and/or any other contract with the Buyer (and on the giving of such notice all monies outstanding from the Buyer to OEM shall become immediately due and payable) if:- (i) any sum owing to OEM from the Buyer on any account whatsoever shall be unpaid after the due date for payment (in which event OEM shall have a general lien for any such sum on all and any property of the Buyer in its possession); or (ii) the Buyer shall commit or be subject to any Act of Insolvency; or (iii) the Buyer shall commit any breach of any contract (including without limitation the Contract) with OEM. (2) In the event of a suspension of performance OEM shall be entitled, as a condition of resuming performance, to require pre-payment, or such security as it may require. 10. EXPORT TERMS (1) Any term or expression which is defined in the provisions of Incoterms 2000 (or any subsequent revision thereof) shall import the respective obligations of Buyer and Seller into these Conditions, but in the event of conflict these Conditions shall prevail. (2) Where the Goods are supplied for export from the United Kingdom, the provisions of this clause 10 shall (subject to any special terms agreed in writing between OEM and the Buyer) apply not withstanding any other provision of these Conditions. (3) Unless otherwise agreed in writing between OEM and the Buyer, the Goods shall be delivered Ex-Works and OEM shall be under no obligation to give notice under section 32(3) of the Sale of Goods Act 1979. (4) The Buyer shall be responsible for arranging for testing and inspection of the Goods at OEM’s premises before shipment. OEM shall have no liability for any claim in respect of any defect in the Goods which would be apparent on testing or inspection and which is made after shipment, or in respect of any damage during transit. 11. CANCELLATION The Contract may be cancelled in whole or in part by the Buyer only with OEM’s written consent and upon the condition that the Buyer shall indemnify OEM in full against all loss, damages, costs expenses and other liabilities awarded against or incurred by OEM as a result of or in connection with the cancellation. 12. GENERAL (1) It shall be the responsibility of the Buyer to ensure that all requirements applicable to the Contract, whether statutory, regulatory, municipal and/or otherwise howsoever, (including without limitation any relating to the importation or use of the Goods in the country of destination and for the payment of duties thereon) are duly complied with. It shall be a condition precedent to the performance by OEM of its obligations under the Contract that all necessary licences, permits and consents shall have been obtained by the Buyer. (2) Neither party shall have any liability for any failure to perform or for any delay in the performance (other than as to payment) of any of its obligations under the Contract caused by any factor beyond its reasonable control. (3) No failure or delay on the part of OEM to exercise any of its rights under the Contract shall operate as a waiver of nor shall any waiver by OEM of any breach by the Buyer of any of its obligations under the Contract affect the rights of OEM in the event of any further or continuing breach. (4) The Contract is personal to the Buyer, who shall not assign or in any way part with the benefit without OEM’s prior written consent. (5) Each and every obligation contained in these Conditions shall be treated as a separate obligation and shall be severally enforceable as such notwithstanding the non- enforceability of any other such obligation. (6) The Conditions and the Contract shall not create or evidence, or be deemed to create or evidence, any agency or partnership between OEM on the one hand and the Buyer or any third party on the other. (7) Any notice required to be given in writing under the Contract shall be given, where possible, by facsimile transmission and otherwise by first class post addressed to the registered office of the party for which it is intended, or to such other address as may be notified in writing in accordance herewith for the purpose, and shall be deemed to have been received, in the case of a facsimile transmission, upon transmission and, in the case of a letter, forty-eight hours after posting. In proving service by letter, it shall be sufficient to show that the envelope containing the notice was properly addressed and stamped and duly posted. (8) The Contract shall be governed by English Law. (9) The parties irrevocably submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English Courts, save in the case of a Buyer who has no assets within the jurisdiction of the English Courts and who is established in a country which will not enforce the judgement of the English Courts. In those circumstances OEM may if it chooses refer any disputes arising out of the Contract to arbitration under the Rules of Conciliation and Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce, such arbitration to take place in London. CARRIAGE AND HANDLING CHARGES Please enquire.


Whiteacres Cambridge Road Whetstone Leicester LE8 6ZG Tel +44 (0) 116 284 9900 Fax +44 (0) 116 284 1721 information@uk.oem.se www.oem.co.uk

Panel Components catalogue  
Read more
Read more
Similar to
Popular now
Just for you